Lewis diagram of co(h2o)6 2

H2Oi

2018.10.10 01:37 Guyon H2Oi

/H2Oi has gone private due to Reddit's decision to effectively kill 3rd party applications with their API costs. Read more: https://redd.it/142kct8 https://redd.it/145l7wp
[link]


2023.12.29 04:55 SpecialistPossible44 h2o

Dihydrogen Monoxide
[link]


2009.08.19 01:37 miserlou /r/onions: Things That Make You Cry Tor Onion Routing Hidden Services

The Best Parts of the Anonymous Internet Tor Onion Routing Hidden Services .onions
[link]


2024.02.10 20:34 TwisterPegqsus101 How can I find pressure and specific volume when only given temperature and quality

How can I find pressure and specific volume when only given temperature and quality
I've been looking at this question for like an hour and I don't even know which tables I should use
submitted by TwisterPegqsus101 to thermodynamics [link] [comments]


2023.10.12 19:55 kuroos-sidehoe Rate my short notes (incomplete)

Rate my short notes (incomplete) submitted by kuroos-sidehoe to MEDICOreTARDS [link] [comments]


2023.04.10 13:34 Acceptable-Friend-92 JEE Main 10 April 2023 Shift 1 Memory-Based Questions. How many can you solve?

JEE Main 10 April 2023 Shift 1 Memory-Based Questions

PHYSICS

  1. A conducting rod of length 1 m is moved across a magnetic field of 0.15 T, with a constant speed of 4 m/s. Find the force (in N) on the rod.
  2. A monoatomic gas, initially at pressure P and volume V, is compressed to 1/8th of its volume adiabatically. What will be the final pressure of the gas?
  3. A particle of mass m moving with a velocity v collides with a particle of mass 2m at rest and sticks to it. Find out the velocity of the combined mass.
  4. A particle, when projected at 15° with the horizontal, has a range of 50 m. Find the range when it is projected at 45° with the horizontal.
  5. A point-sized object is placed 4 cm from the double convex lens of a focal length of 8 cm. Find the change in the position of the image when the object is moved 2 cm towards the lens.📷
  6. A radioactive nuclei x decays simultaneously into two nuclei: y and z. If the time taken for x decaying to given y is t1/2 = 12 minutes and that of x decaying into z is t'1/2
= 3 minutes, then find the time in which nuclei x decays 50%.
  1. A solenoid having 60 turns and a length of 15 cm produces a magnetic field of 2.4 x 10-3 T, find the current in the solenoid.
  2. An object is placed in front of a plane mirror 12 cm away from it. If the object is kept fixed while the plane mirror is shifted towards the object by a distance of 4 cm, then what will be the length of the shift in the position of the image in cm?
  3. Decay constant for a radioactive nuclide is given to be 2 x 103. If the molar mass of the sample is 60 gm, then find the activity of the 0.3µg sample in disintegration/seconds.
  4. Find the equivalent capacitance across points A and B in the given electrical circuit. (diagram given)
  5. For a given circuit (triangular in shape with 4 Ω resistances on its 2 sides and all 3 medians; the remaining side has a 16 Ω resistance), find the equivalent resistance across its ends. (diagram given)
  6. For a particle performing linear SHM, its position (x) as a function of time (t) is given by x = A sin(ωt + δ). Given that, at t = 0, the particle is at at + A/2 and is moving towards x = +A. Find δ.
  7. For an object radiating heat at 300K, the wavelength corresponding to the maximum intensity is λ. If the temperature of the body is further increased by 300K, what will be the new wavelength corresponding to the maximum intensity?
  8. If 10 resistors, each of 10 resistance, when connected together in all possible combinations give minimum equivalent resistance R1 and maximum equivalent resistance R2, then find R2/R1.
  9. If an object weighs 200 N at the surface of the earth, what will be its weight at a depth of 2 where R is the radius of the earth?
  10. If the earth shrinks to 1/64 times its initial volume, the time period of the rotation of the earth is found to be 24/x hrs. Find the value of x.
  11. In an AM wave, the amplitude of modulating wave = 3 units and the amplitude of the carrier wave = 15 units. Find the ratio of maximum to minimum intensity i.e., Imax/Imin.
  12. State, whether the following statement(s) is/, are correct/incorrect.
Statement I: An LCR circuit connected to an AC source has the maximum average power at resonance.
Statement II: A resistor-only circuit with zero phase difference has the maximum average power.📷
  1. The angular momentum of an e- in the first Bohr's orbit is L. What will be the change in angular momentum if it jumps into the second orbit?
  2. The equation of progressive wave is y = 5 sin(6t + 0.03x). Find the speed of the wave.
  3. The equivalent resistance for a given circuit is x/7. Find x. (diagram given).
  4. Three concentric shells A, B and C have surface charge density σ, - σ and a respectively. The radius of A and B is 2 cm and 3 cm respectively. The electric potential at surface A is VA and at C is Vc. If VA = VC, then find the radius of C in cm.
  5. Two blocks of mass 2 kg and 1.14 kg are hung by steel and brass wires respectively as shown in the figure (diagram given). Find the change in the length of the steel wire if Ysteel = 2 x 1011 N/m2 and Ybrass = 1 x 1010 N/m2.
  6. What is the maximum percentage error in the measurement of quantity l, if it is given by l = (a2b3)/(c√d)? Consider the percentage error in the calculation of a, b, c and d as 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% respectively.

JEE Main 10 April 2023 Shift 1 Memory-Based Questions

CHEMISTRY

  1. 2CO (g) + O2 (g) → 2CO2 (g) ; ΔH = -x kJ/mol
C (graphite) + O2 (g) → CO2 (g) ; ΔH = -y kJ/mol Find ΔH for C (graphite) + 1/2O2 (g) → CO (g).
  1. A radioactive element C decays into A at t1/2 = 30 minutes and into B at t1/2 = 60 minutes. Calculate the overall half-life of C in minutes.
  2. At STP conditions, find out the number of molecules and moles in 2.8375 litres of O2.
  3. Enthalpy of adsorption and enthalpy of formation of micelle are respectively...
    1. Positive, Positive
    2. Positive, Negative
    3. Negative, Positive📷
    4. Negative, Negative
  4. FeO42- → (at E10 = +2.20 V) → Fe3+ → (at E20 = +0.77 V) → Fe2+ → (at E30 = -0.44 V)
→ Fe
Calculate E40 if it corresponds to the transition between FeO42- and Fe.
  1. Find out I T1 - T2 l for a solution of 0.1 molal weak acid HA, if Kf of water = 1.86 K kg mol-1
T1 = Freezing point of solution assuming no dissociation of acid
T2 = Freezing point of solution assuming the degree of dissociation (α) = 0.3.
  1. How many compounds can be easily prepared by Gabriel phthalimide synthesis, which on reaction with Hinsberg reagent produces a compound which is soluble in KOH?
  2. Match the following.
Column 1:
A. Cotton mills, B. Paper mills, C. Fertilizer, D. Thermal power plant Column 2:
  1. Biodegradable waste, ii. Gypsum, iii. Non-biodegradable waste, iv. Fly ash
  2. Match the following.
Column 1:
A. Dacron, B. Urea formaldehyde resin, C. Nylon-2, Nylon-6, D. Nylon-6,6 Column 2:
  1. Thermosetting, ii. Biodegradable, iii. Polyester, iv. Used for making bristles of brushes
  2. Mixture of A and B is added to a column containing an adsorbent for separation using a solvent. A is eluted first and B is eluted last. Then B has:
    1. High R, less adsorption
    2. Low R, strongly adsorbed
    3. High R, strong adsorption
    4. Low R, weakly adsorbed
  3. State whether the following statement(s) is/are correct/incorrect. Statement I: Potassium dichromate is used in volumetric analysis. Statement II: K2Cr2O, is more soluble in water than Na2Cr2O.
  4. State whether the following statement(s) is/are correct/incorrect. Statement I: Reduction potential M3+/M2+ is more for Fe than Mn. Statement II: V2+ has a magnetic moment between 4.4 - 5.2 BM.
  5. The degree of dissociation of monobasic acid is 0.3. By what per cent will the observed depression in the freezing point be greater than the calculated depression in the freezing point?
  6. The pair of compounds from the following pairs having both the compounds with net zero dipole moment is:
    1. CH2Cl2: CHCI,
    2. 1,4-dichlorobenzene; 1,3,5-trichlorobenzene📷
    3. Benzene; P-Anisidine
    4. Cis-dichloroethene; Trans-dichloroethene
  7. The pressure value of a given gas is 930.2 mm Hg. Its volume is then reduced to 40% of its initial value at a constant temperature. Find out its final pressure (in mm Hg).
  8. What will be the sum of number of lone pairs in the central atom in IF5 and IF7.
  9. Which of the following compounds do not exist?
    1. BeCl2, ii. NaO2, iii. PbEt4, iv. (NH4)2B
  10. Which of the following compounds is diamagnetic with low spin?
    1. [Co(NH3)6]3+, ii. [CoCl6]3-, iii. [CoF6]3-, iv. [Fe(H2O)6]3+
  11. Which of the following does not stabilize the secondary and tertiary proteins?
    1. H-H linkage
    2. S-S linkage
    3. Vander Waal’s forces
    4. Hydrogen bonding
  12. Which of the following molecules are bent in shape?
    1. SO2, ii. O3, iii. I3-, iv. N3-
  13. Which stabilizer is used for concentrating sulphuric ore?
  14. Why is the prolongated heating of ferrous ammonium sulphate avoided?

JEE Main 10 April 2023 Shift 1 Memory-Based Questions

MATHEMATICS

  1. 96 cos(π/33) cos(2π/33) cos(4π/33) ... cos(16π/33) = ?
  2. An AP series is given as 3, 8, 13, ..., 373. What will be the sum of terms which are not divisible by 3?
  3. Find the number of points of non-differentiability for:
𝑥𝑥; −2 < 𝑥 ≤ 0
𝑓(𝑥) = { 𝑥 − 3 + 𝑥 + 1 − 2𝑥 − 2; 0 < 𝑥 ≤ 2
𝑥(𝑥2 − 𝑥); 2 < 𝑥 ≤ 3
  1. Find the shortest distance between the lines:
25(x + 1)/7 = (y + 1)/-6 = (z + 1)/1 and (x - 3)/1 = (y - 1)/-2 = (z - 7)/1
  1. Find the coefficient of x7 in (1 - 2x + x3)10.📷
  2. Find the number of integral values of x which satisfy the inequality x2 - 10x + 19 < 6.
  3. From a square of side 30cm, the squares of side x cm are cut off to make a cuboid of maximum volume. What will be the surface area of the cuboid with an open top?
  4. Identify the negation of the statement (p V q) A ~ r.
  5. If a2 + (ar)2 + (ar2)2 = 33033, (a,r E N), then find the value of a + ar + ar2.
  6. If the coefficient of x7 in the expansion of (ax - 1/bx2)13 is equal to the coefficient of x- 5 in the expansion of (ax + 1/bx2)13, then find a4b4.
  7. If the number of ways in which a mixed double badminton can be played such that no couples played into a same game is 840. Then find the number of players.
  8. If the order of matrix A is 3 x 3 and A = 2, then 3 adj ( 3A A2) = ?
  9. If the slope of the tangent to a curve at a variable point is (x2 + y2)/2xy and y(2) = 0, then find y(8).
  10. Let f be a differentiable function such that x2 f(x) - x = 4 ∫0x t f(t) dt. If f(1) = 2/3 then find 18 f(3).
  11. The mean of the following data is 26. Find the variance of the data.
  12. Two dice are rolled and the sum of the numbers of two dice is N then the probability that 2N < N! is m/n, where m and n are coprime, then find 11m – 3n.
  13. Using the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 6 and 7, find the total numbers of 7-digit numbers which do not contain a string of 154 or 2367. Repetition is not allowed.
submitted by Acceptable-Friend-92 to JEENEETards [link] [comments]


2023.01.31 06:07 rajusingh79 Chap-05 -Organic compounds containing oxygen

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1q3fojxt_oG7HJNBigiFXM4ZXnFv3LBIi/edit?usp=share_link&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
Organic Compounds Containing Oxygen
General methods of preparation, properties, reactions and uses. ALCOHOLS, PHENOLS AND ETHERS Alcohols : Identification of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols; mechanism of dehydration. Phenols : Acidic nature, electrophilic substitution reactions : halogenation, nitration and sulphonation, Reimer - Tiemann reaction. Ethers : Structure. A ldehyde and Ketones : Nature of carbonyl group; Nucleophilic addition to >C=O group, relative reactivities of aldehydes and ketones; Important reactions such as - Nucleophilic addition reactions (addition of HCN, NH3 and its derivatives), Grignard reagent; oxidation; reduction (Wolff Kishner and Clemmensen); acidity of α - hydrogen, aldol condensation, Cannizzaro reaction, Haloform reaction; Chemical tests
to distinguish between aldehydes and Ketones. CARBOXYLIC ACIDS Acidic
strength and factors affecting it.

ALCOHOLS

Molecules containing –OH group are termed as alcohols. Classification of alcohols they are classified as primary, secondary or tertiary alcohol according to the carbon that is bonded with –OH.
Again when any molecule contain 1, 2 or 3 –OH groups then it is called mono, di or tri hydric alcohols respectively. (as in case of alkyl halides)
C H A P T E R
THIS CHAPTER INCLUDES
OH OH OH
OH OH
CH3 – CH2OH
Ethyl alcohol (monohydric)
CH2 – CH2
Ethylene glycol (dihydric)
CH2 – CH – CH2
Glycerol (trihydric)
compounds

GENERAL METHODS OF PREPARATION

  1. From Alkenes :
    1. By direct hydrolysis :
OH
CH – CH = CH + H O H2SO4 CH – CH – CH
  1. Oxymercuration demercuration :
CH – CH = CH + H O Hg (OAc)2
3 2 2
THF
OH
CH – CH – CH
NaBH OH
CH – CH – CH
2 2 OH– 3 3
  1. Hydroboration oxidation :
Hg(OAc)
6CH – CH = CH B2H6
2(CH – CH – CH –) B H2O2/OH
OH
6CH3 – CH2 – CH2 + 2H3BO3
Overall result of above reaction is anti Markwonikoff addition of water and with no rearrangement.
  1. Oxo process followed by hydrogenation :
O
CH3 – CH = CH2 + CO + H2
[Co(CO)4]2
high temperature and high pressure
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – C – H
H2/Pd
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH
Product has one more carbon.
  1. From Alkyl Halides :
When alkyl halides are treated with aq. KOH or aq. NaOH or moist Ag2O, alcohols are formed.

R − X + OH
⎯⎯→R − OH + X–
  1. Reduction of Carbonyl Compounds, Carboxylic Acids and their Derivatives :
O
R – C – H red. agent R – CH OH
O
R – C – R′ red. agent
O
R – C – OR′ red. agent
O
OH
📷📷
R – CH2OH + R′ – OH
R – C – X O
red. agent
O📷
R – CH2OH
R – C – O – C – R
red. agent
2R – CH2OH

Table : Reducing nature of different reagents

Group
Product
LiAlH4/H2O
NaBH4/C2H5OH
B2H6/THF
H2/Pt
O
– C – H
– CH2 – OH
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
> C = O
> CH – OH
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
– COOH
– CH2OH
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
O
– C – Cl
– CH2OH
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
O
(R – C – O)2O
R – CH2OH
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
O
– C – OR

– CH2OH + R – OH

Yes

No

Yes

Yes
> C = C <
> CH – CH <
No
No
Yes
Yes
(LiAIH4 reduces)
C = C only
when it is
conjugated with
Phenylic system
Meerwein-Ponndorf-Verley Reduction (MPV Reduction) : Its a name reaction of reduction of
O → alcohol📷
Ketones can be reduced to secondary alcohols with aluminium isopropoxide in 2-propanol solution.
OH
R
C = O + CH3 – CH – CH3
[(CH3)2CHO]3Al R
R′
CH – OH + (CH3)2C = O
  1. Using Grignard Reagent :
    1. From aldehydes or ketones :
OMgX OH📷📷
H O/H+ OH
– C – + R – MgX – C – R 2
– C – R + Mg
X
In this reaction
Formaldehyde gives 1°-alcohol Other aldehyde gives 2°-alcohol Ketones give 3°-alcohol
  1. From carboxylic acid and their derivatives :
O Z📷
R – C – R′ + Mg
X
CH3 – CH — CH + R – MgX📷
OMgX CH3 – CH – CH2
R
H O/H+
OH OH
CH3 – CH – CH2 + Mg
R X
  1. Hydrolysis of Ether :
Ether undergo acid hydrolysis with dilute H2SO4 under pressure to give corresponding alcohols.
R − O − R′ + H2O ⎯⎯dil.
2S⎯O⎯4 →R − OH + R′ − OH

Physical Properties

  1. Physical state : At ordinary temperature, lower members are colourless liquids with burning taste and a pleasant smell.
  2. Boiling Point :
The boiling point of alcohols rise regularly with the rise in the molecular mass. Amongst isomeric alcohols, the boiling point decrease in the order.
1° > 2° > 3°
  1. Solubility : The extent of solubility of any alcohol in water depends upon the capability of its molecules to form hydrogen bonds with water molecule.
  2. Alcohols are lighter than water however, the density increases with the increase in molecular mass.

Chemical Properties

  1. Reactions involving cleavage of O – H Bond
Alcohols are acidic in nature but they are less acidic than water hence they do not give H+ in aqueous solution. They do not change the colour of litmus paper.
Their acidic strength increases by increasing–I strength of the groups attached and decreases by increasing
+I strength of the groups.
  1. Alcohols do not react with aqueous alkali, as it does not give H+ in aqueous solution.
  2. Action of active metal : When alcohols are treated with active metal they form alkoxides with the liberation of H2 gas.
− +
2ROH + 2Na ⎯⎯→2R − ONa + H2 ↑
  1. Esterification : When carboxylic acid is treated with alcohols in the presence of acid as catalyst, esters are formed.
O
R – C – OH + H – O – R′ H
O
R – C – OR′ + HOH
  1. Reaction with Grignard Reagent : When Grignard reagents are treated with alcohol (or any proton donor) they form alkanes.📷
R – MgX + H – OR′ R – H + R′ – OMgX
Other proton donors can be carboxylic acids, phenols, alkynes, H2O, Amines, NH3 etc.
  1. Reactions Involving Cleavage of C– O Bond
    1. Reaction with HX : Most alcohols undergo SN1.
(a) R − OH + HCl(g) ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯2 →R − Cl + H2O
(b)
R − OH + HBr
H+ / H2SO4
conc.
R − Br + H2O
(c)
R − OH + HI
H+ / H2SO4
conc.
R − I + H2O
Reactivity order of HX is HI > HBr > HCl
  1. Dehydration : Alkyl chlorides can also be prepared by following methods : R – OH + PCl5 R – Cl + POCl3 + HCl
3R – OH + PCl3 3R – Cl + H3PO3
R – OH + SOCl2 R – Cl + SO2 + HCl (Darzen's process) Darzen’s process is the best method as the other products are gases.
  1. Reduction :
Alcohols are reduced to alkanes when they are treated with Zn-dust or red P + HI.
R − OH ⎯⎯Zn d⎯u⎯st →R − H + ZnO
  1. Oxidation :
O O
CH3OH
[O]
H – C – H
[O]
[O]
H – C – OH
CO2
3°-alcohols can’t be oxidised.
  1. Strong oxidising agent like KMnO4 or K2Cr2O7 cause maximum oxidation as above.
  2. If 1°-alcohol has to be converted into aldehyde PCC + CH2Cl2 or CrO3 should be used among which PCC + CH2Cl2 is the best.
  3. 2°-alcohol can converted to ketone best by PCC + CH2Cl2 or CrO3 or H2CrO4 in aq. acetone (Jones reagent).
  4. MnO2 selectively oxidises the –OH group of allylic and benzylic 1° and 2° alcohols to aldehydes and ketones respectively.
  5. Action of Heated Copper :
(i)
(ii)
CH3 – CH2 – OH
OH
CH3 – CH – CH3
Cu 573K
Cu 573K
O
CH3 – C – H + H2 (Dehydrogenation)
O
CH3 – C – CH3 + H2 (Dehydrogenation)
(iii) Tertiary alcohols undergo dehydration to give alkene under similar condition.
CH3
CH – C – OH Cu
CH2
CH – C + H O
3
CH3
573 K
3 2
CH3

Distinction Between 1°, 2° and 3° Alcohols📷

  1. Lucas Test :
Any alcohol is treated with Lucas reagent (HCl + an hyd. ZnCl2) at room temperature if
  1. Solution becomes cloudy immediately, alcohol is 3°.
  2. Solution becomes cloudy after 5-min, alcohol is 2°.
  3. In solution cloud does not form at room temperature, alcohol is 1°.
  4. Victor Meyer’s Method :
R – CH2OH
(1°-alcohol)
P + I2 R – CH I
AgNO2 R – CH – NO + HNO
–H2O
R – C – NO2
N
OH
(Nitrolic acid)
NaOH
blood red colour
R2CH – OH
(2°-alcohol)
P + I2 R – CH – I
AgNO2 R CH – NO + HNO
–H2O
R2C – NO2 NO
R – C – OH P + I2 R C – I
(3°-alcohol)
Pseudonitrol
NaOH
blue colour
AgNO2 R C – NO HNO2 No reaction NaOH Colourless

PHENOLS

OH📷
and their derivatives are called phenols. In phenol R– of alcohol is replaced by aryl ring.

Comparison of bond Angles in Phenols, Alcohols and Ethers :📷

H H–C
H
..
O📷
H
108.5°
109° H
H H–C
H
..
H
C
111.7° H H
Bond angle increases with the increase in hindrance.

Method of Preparation

1. From Aryl Sulphonic Acids :
When aryl sulphonic acids are fused with NaOH at 570 – 620 K followed by hydrolysis phenols are formed.
SO3H📷📷
SO3Na
Δ 📷
ONa OH
H+/H O📷📷
Cl📷
(aq.) 623 K
320 atm
+
ONa OH📷📷
  1. From Benzene Diazonium Salts :
NH2📷📷
+ N2 Cl
OH
+ N2 + H–Cl📷📷📷
📷📷
  1. Cumene Process :
H
H PO
CH3
CH3
C H📷
light
CH3
CH3
C–O–O–H OH O📷📷
+CH – C = CH 3 4
+ O2
+ CH C—CH
3 2
Propene
Benzene
3 3
Cumene Cumene hydroperoxide
  1. Grignard's Synthesis :
1
H2O / H+ OH
C6H5MgBr + 2 O2
⎯⎯→ C6H5OMgBr ⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C6H5OH + Mg
Br
  1. From Salicylic Acid :
OH OH📷📷
COOH
+ NaOH

Chemical Properties

  1. Acidic Nature :
COONa
+ NaOH
OH
CaO, Δ 📷
–Na2CO3
  1. Phenol behave as a weak acid forming phenoxide ion with strong alkalies.
C6H5OH
Phenol
+ NaOH →
C6H5ONa
Sodiumphenoxide
+ H2O
  1. It also reacts with sodium metal to form sodium phenoxide and hydrogen is evolved
C H OH
+ Na →
+ + 1 H
6 5 C6H5 ONa 2 2📷
Phenol
  1. Effect of substituents on the acidity of phenols : It should be noted that the presence of electron withdrawing groups like –NO2, – CN, –CHO,–X, –COOH, etc. increases the acidic strength (because of the greater polarity of O–H bond the greater stability of the phenoxide ion by the dispersal of –ve charge, by –R effect). On the other hand, electron-releasing groups like –CH3, –NH2, –OH, etc., tend to destabilize the phenoxide ion by intensifying its –ve charge by +R effect and hence decreases the acidic strength.
o - chlorophenol > m - chlorophenol > p - chlorophenol
Ka = 7.7 × 10–9 1.6 × 10–9 6.3 × 10–10
In case of haloarenes –I effect of halogens dominates over it's +M effect. (except for fluorine) p-nitrophenol > o-nitrophenol > m - nitrophenol > phenol
  1. Steric Effect : 3, 5 -dimethyl-4-nitrophenol is weaker acid than the isomeric 2, 6-dimethyl - 4 - nitrophenol.
  2. Alkylation or Etherification : When sodium phenoxide is treated with alkyl halides (but not with aryl halides as they are inert) form phenolic ethers.
C6H5OH ⎯⎯NaO⎯H →C6H5ONa ⎯⎯CH⎯3I →
C6H5OCH3
Phenol
−H2O
Sodium phenoxide
Methyl phenylether (Anisole)
C6H5OH ⎯⎯NaO⎯H →C6H5ONa ⎯⎯C2H⎯5B⎯r →C6H5OC2H5 + NaI
Phenol
Sodium phenoxide
Ethyl phenyl ether (Phenetole)
  1. Claisen rearrangement :
C6H5ONa + BrCH2 – CH = CH2 → C6H5 − O − CH2CH = CH2 + NaBr
Allyl phenyl ether
When aryl allyl ether is heated to 475 K, the allyl group of the ether migrates from ethereal oxygen to the ring carbon at ortho position.
O–C* H2–CH = CH2📷
⎯⎯475⎯K →
OH
CH –CH = C* H📷
o-Allyl phenol
  1. Acylation and benzoylation :
O O
C6H5
+ CH3 – C – Cl ⎯⎯Pyr⎯idin⎯e →
Acetyl chloride
C6H5 – O – C – CH3
Phenol
Phenyl acetate
  1. Fries Rearrangement : When heated with anhydrous aluminium chloride, phenyl esters undergo Fries rearrangement forming a mixture of o- and p-hydroxy ketones.
O
O – C – CH3📷
⎯⎯He⎯at →
AlCl3
OH O OH
C – CH3 +📷📷
Phenyl acetate📷
o-hydroxyacetophenone
O = C – CH3
p-Hydroxyacetophenone
The para isomer is formed predominantly at low temperature while at higher temperatures o - isomer is predominant.
  1. Reactions due to C–O Bond :
    1. Reaction with PCl5 :
C6H5OH + PCl5 → C6H5Cl + POCl3 + HCl
3C6H5OH + PCl3 → P(OC6H5 )3 + 3HCl
Triphenyl phosphate
The yields of C6H5Cl is very poor due to the formation of triaryl phosphate.
  1. Reaction with Ammonia :
C6H5OH+ NH3 ⎯⎯ZnC⎯l2 →C6H5NH2 + H2O
Phenol
573 K
Aniline
  1. Reaction with Zinc Dust :
C6H5OH+ Zn ⎯⎯Δ → C6H6 + ZnO
Phenol Benzene
  1. Reaction with Neutral FeCl3: ( Test for phenol)
3C6H5OH + FeCl3
⎯⎯→
(C6H5O)3 Fe + 3HCl
Ferric phenoxide (Violet)
  1. Electrophilic Substitution Reaction on the Benzene Ring :
From the contributing structure of phenol, it is clear that ortho- and para-position on it become rich in
electron density. Thus the electrophilic attack at these positions is facilitated. Again benzene ring is the very powerful ring activator towards electrophilic aromatic substitution.📷
present on the
  1. Bromination :
OH📷
+ 3Br2
⎯⎯H2⎯O →
OH
Br Br📷
+ 3HBr
Phenol
Br
2,4, 6-Tribromophenol (yellow ppt.)
OH
📷
SO3H
p-Phenolsulphonic acid
+ 3Br2 (aq.) →
OH
Br Br📷
Br
2,4, 6-Tribromophenol (yellow ppt.)
+ 3HBr + H2SO4
  1. Nitration :
OH📷
(a)
Phenol
+ dil HNO3
⎯⎯293⎯K →
OH
OH📷📷
NO2 +
NO
o-Nitrophenol (40% yield)📷
2
p-Nitrophenol (13% yield)
(b) With concentrated nitric acid and sulphuric acid, it forms 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol (Picric acid).
OH📷
+ 3HNO3 ⎯⎯H2S⎯O4⎯co⎯n⎯c. →
(conc.)
O2N
OH
NO2📷
NO2
2,4, 6-trinitrophenol (Picric acid)
  1. Sulphonation : When heated with conc. sulphuric acid, phenol forms hydroxy benzene sulphonic acid.
OH📷📷📷
H
H2SO4, 298 K 3📷
–H2O
OH📷📷
–H2O
SO3H
p-Hydroxy benzene sulphonic acid
  1. Friedel-Crafts Alkylation and Acylation : Phenol undergo both these reaction to form mainly p-isomer.
OH📷
+ CH3Cl
OH OH
+📷📷
CH3
Phenol
CH3
(Major product) p–Cresol
o-Cresol
OH📷
+ CH3COCl
OH
COCH3 +📷
OH
COCH3📷
o- p-
Hydroxy acetophenone
  1. Kolbe’s reaction📷📷
📷📷
  1. Riemer Tiemann Reaction :
  2. On heating with chloroform and alkali phenols are converted to phenolic aldehydes📷
OH
+ CHCl3
+ 3NaOH
⎯⎯333⎯−34⎯3 →
(aq.) H+
OH
CHO
+ 3NaCl + 2H2O
In this reaction dichloro carbene is formed as intermediate which attack on benzene ring as electrophile.
  1. If instead of chloroform, carbon tetrachloride is used, salicylic acid is formed. Some para isomers is also formed.📷
OH📷
+ CCl4
⎯N⎯aO⎯H →
340 K
ONa
CCl3
⎯3⎯Na⎯OH(⎯a⎯q.)→
–3NaCl
ONa
COONa
⎯⎯Dil. ⎯H 2S⎯O 4 →
OH
COOH📷
In this reaction ⊕ CCl3 is formed as intermediate which attack on benzene ring as electrophile.📷
  1. Coupling with Diazonium Salts :
C H N Cl + C H OH
⎯⎯0−5⎯°⎯C →
N = N OH
6 5 2
6 5 pH 9−10
p-Hydroxy azobenzene (An orange dye)
  1. Test for phenol
    1. Neutral FeCl3 test → Aqueous solution of phenol gives a violet colouration with FeCl3.
    2. Br2 water test → Aqueous solution of phenol gives a yellow precipitate of 2, 4, 6-tribromophenol with bromine water.
    3. Phenol gives Liebermann's nitroso reaction.
Phenol
⎯⎯NaN⎯O⎯2
→ Red colour ⎯⎯NaO⎯H →blue colour
(in conc. H SO ) excess of water
excess
2 4

ETHERS📷

Ethers are those organic compounds which contain two alkyl groups attached to an oxygen atom, i.e., R–O–R. They are regarded as dialkyl derivatives of water or anhydrides of alcohols.
H – O – H ⎯⎯–2⎯H → R – O – R ←⎯⎯⎯ R – OH + HO – R
Water
Ether
−H2O
Alcohol (2 moles)
Ethers may be of two types : (i) Symmetrical or simple ether are those in which both the alkyl groups are identical and (ii) unsymmetrical or mixed ethers are those in which the two alkyl groups are different.
CH3–O–CH3; C6H5–O–C6H5 CH3–O–C2H5; CH3–O–C6H5
Symmetrical (simple) ethers Unsymmetrical (mixed)ethers
Like water, ether has two unshared pair of electrons on oxygen atom, yet its angle is greater than normal tetrahedral (109°28´) and different from that in water (105°). This is because of the fact that in ethers the repulsion between lone pairs of electrons is overcome by the repulsion between the bulky alkyl groups.

Preparation of Ethers :

  1. By dehydrating excess of alcohols : Simple ethers can be prepared by heating an excess of primary alcohols with conc. H2SO4 at 413K. Alcohol should be taken in excess so as to avoid its dehydration to alkenes.
C2H5 – OH + HO – C2H5 ⎯⎯Con⎯c. ⎯H2S⎯O⎯4 → C2H5 – O – C2H5 + H2O
Ethanol (2 molecules)
413 K
Diethyl ether
Dehydration may also be done by passing alcohol vapours over heated catalyst like alumina under high pressure and temperature of 200 – 250°C.
  1. By heating alkyl halide with dry silver oxide (only for simple ethers) :
C2H5I + Ag2O + IC2H5 → C2H5OC2H5 + 2AgI
Dry
Remember that reaction of alkyl halides with moist silver oxide (Ag2O + 2H2O = 2AgOH) gives alcohols C2H5I + Ag2O (moist) → C2H5OH + AgI
  1. By heating alkyl halide with sod. or pot. alkoxides (Williamson synthesis): C2H5ONa + ICH3 → C2H5OCH3 + NaI
ONa + BrCH3 OCH3 + NaBr📷📷
Sod. phenoxide Methoxybenzene (Anisole)
However
CH3
+
CH3
CH3–Cl + NaO–C–CH3
CH3
CH3–O–C–CH3 + NaCl
CH3
If alkyl halide is other than methyl halide and it is treated with tertiary alkoxide ion, Hoffmann elimination takes place instead of Williamson's ether synthesis.
📷
CH3–CH2–CH=CH2 + HCl
(Major)
  1. Methyl ethers can be prepared by treating primary or secondary alcohol or phenol with diazomethane in presence of BF3.
C2H5OH + CH2N2 ⎯⎯B⎯F3 →

Chemical Properties :

C2H5OCH3
Ethylmethyl ether
  1. Properties due to Alkyl Groups :
    1. Halogenation : When ethers are treated with chlorine or bromine in the dark, substitution occurs at the α-carbon atom. The extent of substitution depends upon the reaction conditions.
β α α´ β´
dark
CH3 – CH2 – O – CH2 – CH3 + Cl2
⎯⎯⎯→ CH3 .CHCl – O – CH2.CH3
α– Chlorodiethyl ether
↓ Cl2
CH2Cl.CHCl – O – CH2 .CH3 + CH3CHCl – O – CHCl.CH3
α, β–Dichlorodiethyl ether α, α´–Dichlorodiethyl ether
CH3CH2 – O – CH2 .CH3 + 10Cl2
⎯⎯lig⎯ht → CCl3 .CCl2 – O – CCl2 .CCl3
Perchlorodiethyl ether
  1. Combustion :
C2H5.O.C2H5 + 6O2 4CO2 + 5H2O📷
  1. Properties due to Ethereal Oxygen :
    1. Chemical inertness : Since ethers do not have an active group, in their molecules, these do not react with active metals like Na, strong bases like NaOH, reducing or oxidising agents.
    2. Formation of peroxide (Autoxidation) : On standing in contact with air and light ethers are converted
into unstable peroxides (R2O O) which are highly explosive even in low concentrations.📷
  1. Basic nature : Owing to the presence of unshared electron pairs on oxygen, ether behave as Lewis bases. Hence they dissolve in strong acids (e.g. conc. HCl, conc. H2SO4) at low temperature to form oxonium salts.
(C2H5 )2 O + H2SO4 →
Diethyl ether
[(C2H5 )2 OH]+HSO–
Diethyloxonium hydrogen sulphate
On account of this property, ether is removed from ethyl bromide by shaking with conc. H2SO4.
Being Lewis bases, ethers also form coordination complexes with Lewis acids like BF3, AlCl3, RMgX, etc.
R2O + BF3 R2O BF3
2R2O + RMgX📷
R2O R
Mg📷📷
R2O X
It is for this reason that ethers are used as solvent for Grignard reagents.
  1. Properties due to carbon-oxygen bond :📷
  2. Hydrolysis :
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + H2O ⎯⎯H2S⎯O⎯4 → 2C2H5OH
Ethyl alcohol
The hydrolysis may also be effected by boiling the ether with water or by treating it with steam.
  1. Action of conc. sulphuric acid :
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + H2SO4 (conc.) → C2H5OH +
Ethyl alcohol
C2H5HSO4
Ethyl hydrogen sulphate
C2H5OH + H2SO4 (conc.) → C2H5HSO4 + H2O
  1. Action of hydroiodic or hydrobromic acid :
In cold, ether react with HI or HBr to give the corresponding alkyl halide and alcohol. In case of mixed ethers, the halogen atom attaches itself to the smaller alkyl group.
C2H5 – O – C2H5 + HI →
Ethyl ether
C2H5I
Ethyl iodide
Ethyl alcohol
The order of reactivity of halogen acids is : HI > HBr > HCl
If one of the the group around oxygen is aryl group then I– will always attack on the group other than aryl group.
O–CH3 + HI OH + CH I📷📷
CH3 CH
3📷
O–C–CH3 + HI OH + I–C–CH📷
CH3
  1. Properties Due to Benzene Nucleus :
3
CH3
Alkoxy group, being o-, p- directing, anisole undergoes substitution in o- and p- positions. However,
–OR group is less activating than the phenolic group.
  1. Nitration :
OCH3 OCH3📷📷📷📷
conc. HNO3 conc. H2SO4
NO2
+
OCH3
Methylphenyl ether (Anisole)📷📷📷
  1. Bromination :
Methyl 2-nitrophenyl ether or o-Nitroanisole📷📷
NO2
Methyl 4-nitrophenyl ether or p-Nitroanisole
OCH3
Br
Br2/Fe
OCH3
Br
Br
Anisole 2, 4, 6, Tribromoanisole📷
OCH3📷
+ Br2
CS2
OCH3
Br📷
+
OCH3
Br
Anisole 2-Bromoanisole 4-Bromoanisole
  1. Sulphonation :
OCH3 OCH3 OCH3
H2SO4 SO3📷📷
SO3H
SO3H
Anisole p-Methoxybenzene sulphonic acid
o-Methoxybenzene sulphonic acid

CARBONYL COMPOUNDS (ALDEHYDES AND KETONES)

Aldehydes and ketones are the compounds containing carbonyl group (>C=O).
O
– C –
Carbonyl group
O
R – C – H
An aldehyde
O
R – C – R
Ketone
Structure of the carbonyl group: Like the carbon-carbon double bond of alkenes, the carbon-oxygen double bond of the carbonyl group is composed of one σ and one π bond.
In the carbonyl group, carbon atom is in state of sp2 hybridisation. The C–O σ bond is produced by overlap of an sp2 orbital of carbon with a p-orbital of oxygen. On the other hand, the C–O π bond is formed by the sideways overlap of p orbitals of carbon and that of p orbital of oxygen. The remaining two sp2 orbitals of carbon form σ bonds with the s orbital of hydrogen or sp3 orbital of carbon of the alkyl group.
p p
X X📷📷📷📷
O O
Y Y
(a)
(b)
The polar nature of the carbonyl group causes intermolecular attraction (dipole-dipole attraction) in aldehydes and ketones and hence accounts their higher boiling points than that of hydrocarbons and ethers of comparable mol. wt. However, the high values of dipole moments (2.3 - 2.8 D) of aldehydes and ketones can’t be accounted for, only by inductive effect; this can be accounted for if carbonyl group is a resonance hybrid of the following two structures.📷
+ −
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.31 00:22 demi_fireheart molecules acidity/basicity- please help!

I know the defn's of arrhenius, bronsted lowry, lewis acids and bases, but i still don't find i can answer these questions confidently even when using all those criteria and drawing lewis dot diagrams. I basically just asked myself 6 questions for each compound (or at least checking if one of the base definitions or acid definitions was applicable) 1. does this fit the description of an arrhenius acid (AA) 2. does this fit the description of an arrhenius base (AB) 3. does this fit the description of a bronsted lowry acid (BLA) 4. does this fit the description of a bronsted lowry base (BLB) 5. does this fit the description of a lewis acid (LA) 6. does this fit the description of a lewis base (LB)
HNO3 - could this be a BLA? well the protonated O could lose it's H, so yes - could this be a BLB? the -1 charge on the single bonded O with no H seems like it would accept an H+, so yes but it's not amphoteric, it's an acid... so the proposition of it being a BLB must be wrong. how? why could it not become H2NO3+ ? is it just because that's unlikely to occur? that hardly seems like a reason to conclude it can never become that. after all the defn of a BLB is that it can operate as a H+ acceptor
H2O is amphoteric i just know this is amphoteric from memory
HCO3- - could this be a BLA? the protonated O could lose it's H, so yes - could this be a BLB? the -1 charge on the single bonded H with no H seems like it would accept an H+, so yes it's amphoteric
CH3NH2 - could this be a BLA? well why couldn't it donate an H+ from N or C? apparently I'm meant to say no here because i know the answer says this molecule is a base. but why?
i don't understand what procedural method i can go through to answer these questions that results in a correct answer
https://lens.google.com/search?p=AfVzNa85uCNhn1U6V0fa-1An3SXylloMLTcDaaZiSaAGj-W6vtIBWd2buX1TWq9fvSikM1rH0-Nrcq_MaOcDxXBCg4nVnNtR0jB0eIv5e580Uv66Vu8bjlxqnk_Bu0Rde5kWPF_dkkPQaLqgm3c5shH6eqfUbOzf3EqbUSVUqE_LlJAfweX64WeLS2MCQdtPzxqHm-v3iorQ0mhm9CwiFtOlkEhWIyQYG7AGNFlX_TaM6BkTdb_goVZnCA%3D%3D#lns=W251bGwsbnVsbCxudWxsLG51bGwsbnVsbCxudWxsLG51bGwsIkVrY0tKRE5sWTJJd01tTTJMVGRpTkRrdE5HWXdZeTFpTldZMkxUTmxaak13TmpabVlUaGlZeElmUVROT1kyNWFRVXR2V2xGVldVeHVaVFo2U1ROWFNFOUdZa2s1VUZsQ1p3PT0iXQ==
Here is the list of compounds I was asked about
submitted by demi_fireheart to chemhelp [link] [comments]


2023.01.30 12:49 rajusingh79 Chap -02- Hydrocarbons

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1ts2KjX27bln5tXUumLsIuSnDQU-P0bfN/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
preparation, properties and reactions. Alkanes - Conformations : Sawhorse and Newman projections (of ethane); Mechanism of halogenation of alkanes. Alkenes - Geometrical isomerism; Mechanism of electrophilic addition: addition of hydrogen, halogens, water, hydrogen halides (Markownikoff’ s and peroxide effect); O zonolysis, oxidation, a nd polymerization. Alkynes - Acidic character; Addition of hydrogen, ha logens, water a nd hydrogen halides; Polymerization. Aromatic hydrocarbons - Nomenclature, benzene - structure and aromaticity; Mechanism of electrophilic substitution: halogenation, nitration, Friedel – Craft’s alkylation and acylation, directive influence of functional group in
mono-substituted benzene.

HYDROCARBONS AND THEIR CLASSIFICATIONS

Compounds of only Carbon and Hydrogen are called hydrocarbons. They are parent organic compounds and all other organic compounds have been derived by replacing one or more H atoms from hydrocarbon.
Hydrocarbons📷📷
CHAPTER INCLUDES
Acyclic
(open chain hydrocarbon)
📷📷
Alicyclic📷📷
Cyclic
Aromatic
CH3

hydrocarbons

Saturated hydrocarbon/
Alkanes/Paraffins
Unsaturated
hydrocarbons (having= and ≡)
(cycloalkanes)
i.e., 📷 ,
etc. i.e.,
,
Toluene

ALKANES

Methods of Preparation :

  1. Reactions where number of carbon atoms are increased
    1. Wurtz Reaction
2R − X + 2Na ⎯⎯dry⎯eth⎯er →R − R + NaX
Here other metals in the finely divided state may also be used such as Cu, Ag etc.
  1. Methane cannot be prepared by this method.
  2. Only symmetrical alkane can be prepared by this method in good yield.
TEACHING CARE Online Live Classes https://www.teachingcare.com/ +91-9811000616
  1. Corey-House Synthesis:
R - X + Li ⎯⎯→RLi + LiX
RLi + CuI ⎯⎯→R2LiCu
(a)
(b)
R2LiCu + 2R − X ⎯⎯→ 2R − R + LiX + CuX R2LiCu + 2R′ − X ⎯⎯→ 2R − R′ + LiX + CuX
etc.
It can be used for preparing both symmetrical and unsymmetrical alkanes.
  1. Kolbe’s Electrolytic Decarboxylation
2RCOONa (aq) ⎯⎯ele⎯ct⎯rol⎯yti⎯c →R - R + 2NaOH + 2CO2 + H2

Mechanism:

RCOONa RCOO– + Na+ 2H O 2H+ + 2OH–

Anodic Reaction

2RCOO 2RCOO• + 2e–
2RCOO R - R + 2CO

Cathodic Reaction📷

2H+ + 2e– H
  1. Methane cannot be prepared by this method
  2. Unsymmetrical hydrocarbon (alkane) cannot be prepared
  3. Reactions where number of carbon atoms are retained
    1. Sabatier - Sanderen’s Reduction
H H
C = C📷📷
+ H2
Raney Ni
200 - 300°C
📷C – C
📷
H H
– C ≡ C – + 2H
Raney Ni
200 - 300°C

— C — C —

H H
  1. Reduction of Alkyl Halides
  2. R − X + Zn ⎯⎯H⎯Cl →R − H+ HX
Zn – Cu and C2H5OH or Na and alcohol can also be used
  1. 4R–X + LiAlH4 ⎯⎯→ 4RH + LiX+AlX
This is a nucleophilic substitution reaction with the nucleophilic H coming from LiAlH .
  1. R – X + (n – C4 H9)3SnH R – H + (n –C4H9)3SnX.📷
  2. Reduction of Alcohols, Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids with HI/Red P.
  3. ROH + 2HI
R
⎯⎯Re d⎯⎯P →R − H + I2 + H2O
150°C
(b)
H
R1
C = O + 4HI
2H 2H
Red P 150°C
R–CH3 + H2O + 2I2

C = O

R2
+ 4HI
⎯⎯Re d⎯P →
150°C
R1 – CH2
+ H2O + 2I2
2H
  1. R — C
2H O
+ 6HI ⎯⎯Red⎯P →R − CH3 + 2H2O + 3I2
150°C
OH H
  1. Clemmensen’s Reduction
CH 3 − C − H + 4H ⎯ ⎯Zn−⎯Hg⎯/ H⎯Cl → CH 3 − CH 3 + H 2 O
Δ
O
R1 − C− R2 + 4H ⎯⎯Zn−⎯Hg⎯/ H⎯Cl →H2O + R1 − CH2 − R2

O
Clemmensen’s reduction should not be used when the carbonyl compound has a basic end in it.
  1. Wolf-Kishner’s Reduction:
R1 – C– H + NH2

→ R – C = N − NH2
KOH+Glycol 453 k − 473 k
R – CH3 + N2
O
CH3 – C– C2H5 + NH2 – NH2

O
H
CH3 C H
Hydrazone
C=N–NH2 +H📷📷
O ⎯⎯KO⎯H⎯+ ⎯Gl⎯yc⎯o⎯l → CH3CH2C2H5 + N2
2 453 K –473 K
2 5 Hydrazone
This reaction should not be used when the carbonyl compound has an acidic end in it.
  1. (a) Using Grignard’s Reagent
R - X + Mg
⎯⎯eth⎯er → RMgX
RMgX + H – OH R – H + MgX(OH)📷
+ H – NH2 R – H + MgX(NH2)📷
+ H – OR1 R – H + MgX(OR1)📷
+H–O–C–R′

O
R–H + MgX (O–C–R′)

O

(b) Using Alkyl lithium compound

R1 NH + R–Li (R1NH) Li + R – H.📷
  1. Reaction where number of carbon atom are decreased Sodalime Decarboxylation
RCOONa + NaOH
CaO
630 k
R – H + Na2CO3
CH3📷
CaO
CH—CH —COONa + NaOH
CH3
CH—CH + Na CO📷
2
CH3
630 k
CH3
3 2 3
  1. Some other methods of preparation
  2. Preparation of Methane from carbides
(a) Al4C3 + 12H2O 4Al(OH)3 + 3CH4
  1. Be2C + 4H2O 2Be(OH)2 + CH4
  2. Methane from carbon monoxide
CO + 3H2
⎯⎯Ni +⎯C →
250°C
CH4
+ H2O
This is also called Sabatier Sanderen’s reduction

Physical Properties Boiling Point (B.P.)

B.P. increases with the increase of molecular mass. Among the isomers, straight chain alkane have higher
b.p. than branched chain alkane.

Melting Point (M.P.)

The melting points do not show regular variation with increase in molecular size. The even number members have higher m.p. as compared to next alkanes with odd number of carbon atoms (ALTERATION EFFECT).

Solubility

They are soluble in non polar solvents but insoluble in polar solvents such as water.

Chemical Properties📷

Alkanes are generally inert towards acids, bases, oxidising and reducing agents but they give following reactions:
  1. Halogenation. Alkanes undergoes substitution reaction with halogen. Cl2 and Br2 only in presence of ultra violet light or high temperature (573 – 773K). But in presence of direct sunlight reaction is as
CH + 2Cl ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→ C + 4HCl
direct sunlight
CH4 + Cl2 ⎯⎯h⎯ν → CH3Cl + HCl CH3Cl + Cl2 ⎯⎯h⎯ν → CH2Cl2 + HCl CH2Cl2 + Cl2 ⎯⎯h⎯ν → CHCl3 + HCl CHCl3 + Cl2 ⎯⎯h⎯ν → CCl4 + HCl
Decreasing order of reactivity of halogens towards alkanes. F2 > Cl2 > Br2 > I2
CH – CH – CH + Cl
298 K
CH CH – CH + CH CH CH –Cl
3 2 3
CH3
2 Light 3
Cl
3 3 2 2
CH – C – H + Cl
298 K
(CH ) C – Cl + (CH ) CHCH Cl
3
CH3
2 Light
3 3 3 2 2
Similarly
CH3
CH – C – H + Br
298 K
(CH ) C – Br + (CH ) CH–CH Br
3
CH3
2 Light
3 3 3 2 2
99% 1%
  1. General mechanism : Halogenation of alkanes takes place in 3 steps :📷📷
  2. Chain initiation steps : X + X
sunlight
  1. Propagation :
  2. Termination
R − H + X∙ ⎯⎯→R∙ + HX R∙ + X − X ⎯⎯→RX + X∙
X∙ + X∙ ⎯⎯→ X − X
R∙ + R∙ ⎯⎯→R − R📷
R∙ + X∙ ⎯⎯→R − X
Among these three steps, propagation step is rate determing step.
The relative rates of abstraction of various types of hydrogen follow the order : 3ºC : 2ºC : 1ºC
Chlorination → 5 : 3.8 : 1
Bromination → 1600 : 82 : 1
Liquid phase For higher alkanes – Fuming HNO3, at 413 K
  1. Nitration :
e.g., :
C6H13 – H + HONO2
C6H13NO2 + H2O
Vapour phase For lower alkanes – conc. HNO3, at 670-750 K
e.g., :
CH3 −
NO2 ⎯⎯→CH3NO2 + H2O
  1. Oxidation : Alkanes undergo oxidation under special conditions to yield a variety of products.
(a)
(b)
2CH + O ⎯⎯⎯C⎯u ⎯⎯→ 2CH OH
573 / 1100 atm
CH + O ⎯⎯⎯⎯→HCHO + H O
Mo2O3
  1. 2R – CH + 3O
Manganese acetate
O
2R – C – OH + 2H O
3 2 373-430 K 2
or Ag2O
  1. Isomerization : In presence of Anhy. AlCl3 + HCl or AlBr3 + HBr, straight chain alkanes, get converted in branched alkane.
CH – CH
CH3
CH – CH – CH
3 3 3 3
200ºC, 35 atm 3 3
CH (CH ) – CH AlCl3 + HCl
CH3 – CH – CH2 – CH2 – CH3 + CH3
CH3 – CH2 – CH– CH2 – CH3 CH3
2-methyl pentane 3-methyl pentane
  1. Aromatization : Alkanes having minimum 6 or more carbons when heated at 773 K under high pressure (10-20 atm) in presence of Cr2O3, V2O3, Mo2O3 supported on Alumina gets converted into aromatic hydrocarbon.
CH ( CH ) CH Cr2O3
+ 4H ↑
3 2 4 3
773K, 10-20 atm
2
Benzene
n-heptane Cr2O3 773K, 10-20 atm
  1. Reaction with steam :
CH4 + H2O ⎯⎯Ni → CO + 3H2📷

Conformations of Alkanes

CH3
Toluene
+ 4H2↑
Conformations isomers/conformers are compounds which arises due to rotation around C–C. In fact C–C rotation is hindered by an energy barrier of 1 to 20 kJ × mol–1. There are infinite number of conformers possible. Out of infinite number of conformers extremes can be discussed as

Conformers of ethane :

H H H H H📷📷
H H📷📷
H
H H H H H H
H H H H
Eclipsed
Staggered
Eclipsed Staggered
Sawhorse projection Newmann projection
  1. It may be noted that one extreme conformation of ethane can be converted into other extreme conformer by rotation of 60º about C–C bond.
  2. Conformers lying between two extreme are called skew conformations.
📷📷
0 60º 120º 180º
dihedral angle
Staggered> Eclipsed Decreasingorder of stability📷

Conformers of propane :

CH3📷📷📷
H H
CH3
H📷📷
H
H H H H H H
Eclipsed Staggered

Conformers of Butane :

CH3
CH3
CH3
CH CH3
H H H📷📷
CH3 H 3
60º
60º
H
60º
H
H H
CH3
(I)
H CH3
H
(II)
H H
H
(III)
H H H
(IV)
Staggered📷📷
Partially eclipsed
Gauche
(V)📷
Gauche
CH3
H
60º
Fully eclipsed
CH3 H📷📷
CH3
H H H
(VI)
Partially eclipsed
Stability order : I > III ≈ V > II ≈ VI > IV

ALKENES

Alkene have the structural unit
〉C = C〈 . The carbon atoms carrying the unsaturation are sp2 hybridized
with the p orbital laterally overlaping to form π-bonds. They have the general formula CnH2n. They are isomeric with cycloalkanes e.g. – C4H8
CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2
Butene

Nomenclature :

CH2 CH2
CH2 CH2
Cyclobutane
The IUPAC rules for naming alkenes are similar in many respects to those for naming alkanes. Hence few solved examples are taken.
1 2 3 4 5
(i)
CH3 – CH = CH– CH2 – CH3
2 - pentene
CH3
C2H5
  1. CH3– C = CH– CH2 – CH – CH2–CH2–CH3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5-Ethyl–2–methyl–2–octene
  1. Alkene – H = Alkenyl
e.g., CH2 = CH– ethenyl (Vinyl group); CH2 = CH – CH2 – propenyl (Allyl group)
e.g., CH2 = CH – Cl - Vinyl chloride; CH2 = CH–CH2–OH Allyl alcohol

Preparations of Alkenes

From Alcohols

By heating alcohol with H2SO4 or H3PO4 at 170°C.
CH – CH
95% H2SO4 CH
= CH
3 2

Mechanism :

170°C 2 2
1st step : H2SO4
⎯⎯→
H+ + HSO –
2nd step : CH – CH – OH + H+ +
3 2
3rd step : CH – CH ⊕ H📷📷
CH3 – CH2 – OH2

CH3 – CH2 + H2O
4th step :
+ CH2 – CH2
H📷

CH2 = CH2 +H2SO4
HSO4
Here the 3rd step i.e. formation of carbocation is rate determining step.
The ease of dehydration of alcohols depends on the stability of carbocations formed. Hence the order of reactivity of alcohols is ter–> sec–> pri–> CH3 – OH because the incipient carbonium ion stability is ter–> sec–> pri–> CH +.

Hydride shift or

Example (Hydride shift)
CH3 – CH – CH – CH3 CH3 OH

Mechanism :

H2SO4
170°c📷
+
CH3 – C = CH2 – CH3 +
CH3
(Major)
CH2 = C – CH2 – CH3
CH3
(Minor)
CH3 – CH – CH – CH3 + H CH3 O.. H
H
CH3– C – CH – CH3📷
CH3 – CH – CH – CH2 CH3 OH2
+ +
CH3 – C – CH – CH3 CH3 – C – CH2 – CH3
CH3 CH3
sec-carbocation ter-carbocation
(Less stable) (More stable)
H (a) CH – C = CH – CH
(A)
H – CH2 – C – CH – CH3 CH3
CH3
CH2 = C – CH2 – CH3 CH3
(B)
  1. Dehydration of alcohols follow Saytzeff’s rule.
Hence (B) product is maximum.
Saytzeff’s Rule: It states that “During dehydration of alcohols and dehydrohalogenation of alkyl halides the product formed is preferentially the one in which maximum number of alkyl groups are attached to the doubly bonded carbon atoms.
  1. Dehydration by passing over alumina (Lewis Acid)
CH – CH
3 2
CH3📷
350°C 2 2 2
Al O
CH3
2 3
250°C
CH3 – CH = CH2
(CH ) C – OH Al2O3 CH – C = CH📷
3 3 250°C 3 2
The experimental conditions change with the structure of alcohols
pri - alcohols
⎯⎯con⎯c. H⎯2S⎯O⎯4 → alkene
180 C
sec - alcohols
⎯⎯85%⎯H⎯3PO⎯3 →
170°C
alkene
OH ⎯8⎯5%⎯H3⎯P⎯O3→📷📷
170°C
ter - alcohols
CH2 – OH📷
⎯2⎯0%⎯H2⎯S⎯O4→
85°C
H+ / heat
alkene
  1. Dehydrohalogenation of alkyl halides
β α
  1. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – Br
    alc KOH
Δ
CH3
– CH2
– CH = CH2
β α β
CH – CH – CH – CH
alc KOH
CH – CH = CH – CH + CH – CH – CH = CH
  1. 3 2
3 Δ 3 3
3 2 2
Br (Major) (Minor)
CH3 CH3
CH2

CH – CH – C – CH
alc KOH
CH3 – C – CH – CH3 + (CH3)2 C = C(CH3)2
  1. 3
3 Δ
Br
(Minor)
CH3 (Major)
  1. The base used may be strongly basic anions like OH–, RO–, C2H5O (CH3)3CO etc.)
  2. The group leaving (i.e., halogen) is a good leaving group if it is the conjugate base of a strong acid. (i.e., weakly basic halide ion).
  3. One may also use sulphonates.
  4. Dehydrohalogenation of 2° and 3° alkyl halides follow Saytzeff’s Rule.
  5. Exception to Saytzeff’s Rule (Hofmann Rule)
When dehydrohalogenation is carried out with potassium, tertiary butoxide there is formation of less substituted alkene.
CH3
(CH ) COH
CH3
CH – CH – C = CH
(CH ) CO– + CH CH C – Br 3 3
CH – CH = C
3 2 2
3 3 3 2
CH3
75°C
3
(Minor)
CH3
CH3 (Major)
  1. Dehalogenation Reactions
alc
– C – C –

Br Br
+ Zn
KOH
– C = C – + ZnBr2
VICINAL
2 R – CH
Br alc
+ Zn KOH📷
Br
R – CH = CH – R + 2ZnBr2
GEMINAL
  1. By controlled hydrogenation of alkynes
(i)
CH3 – C ≡ C – CH3 + H2
Pd/BaSO4 LINDLAR’S CATALYST
CH3 C = C CH3 Cis - 2 - Butene H H
Here we may use small amounts of sulphur or quinoline also.
CH – C ≡ C – CH
Na/LiqNH3
CH3
H
C = C
3 3 Δ H
CH3
trans-2-Butene
  1. By heating Quaternary Ammonium hydroxide
(C2H5)NOH Δ
CH2 = CH2 + (C2H5)3N + H2O
  1. Kolbe’s Electrolysis
CH2COONa
CH2COONa
+ 2H2O
electrolysis
CH2 = CH2 + 2CO2 + 2NaOH + H2
Sodium succinate
Mechanism is similar to preparation of alkanes.
  1. Pyrolysis
CH CH CH CH ⎯⎯Δ → CH –CH=CH + CH
3 2 2 3 770 K 3 2 4
CH CH CH CH CH CH ⎯⎯Δ → CH CH=CH
+ CH CH CH
3 2 2 2 2 3 770 K 3
2 3 2 3
  1. By heating saturated hydrocarbon with SiO2
C H – CH
6 5 2
2 6 5 Δ 6 5
6 5 2

Physical Properties

Solubility

They are insoluble in water but soluble in organic solvents.

Boiling point

The boiling point of cis–alkenes is usually higher than corresponding trans–alkenes (More polarity).

Melting point

The melting point of trans-alkenes is usually greater than cis-alkene. (trans form is more symmetrical).📷

Chemical Properties

In alkenes C = C bond is made of stable σ-bond and reactive π-bond. As π-bond can easily be broken, alkenes undergo addition reactions.📷📷📷📷
C = C
+ XY
C –
C
X
Y
Being electron rich species they react with electrophiles in three ways.
  1. Ionic Mechanism
C = C E – Nu C – C📷📷📷📷
+

+ Nu
E
  1. Free Radical Mechanism
📷 C = C📷 E – E C – C + E📷📷
E
  1. Transition State
📷 C = C📷+ E – Nu C – C📷📷
E Nu

Reactions :

  1. Hydrogenation :
C = C + H2📷📷
Pd or Pd or Ni Δ
C – C
H H📷📷📷
The relative rates of hydrogenation is CH2 = CH2 > RCH = CH2 > R2 C = CH2 > RCH = CHR > R2 C
= CR2. This is due to the fact that as number of alkyl groups increase the steric hindrance increases and there by rate decreases.
  1. Halogenation :
X
CH = CH + X ⎯⎯⎯C⎯C⎯l4 ⎯⎯→
2 2 2 Or
inert solvent
CH2 – CH2
X
CH = CH
Cl
⎯⎯⎯C⎯C⎯l4 ⎯⎯→ 📷
2 2 2
Or inert solvent
CH2 – CH2
Cl
The addition always leads to the formation of trans addition product.

Mechanism :

δ– X
δ+ X
📷 C = C📷 + X2 C …— C📷📷
Transition State (T.S.)
δ–
X
📷 C – C📷 📷 C – C + X📷
X📷📷
📷 📷 C — C📷
X
X
e.g., CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 + Cl2
– 9°C
CH3– CH – CH – CH3

Cl Cl
  1. Addition of Halogen Acid
C = C + HX📷📷
C — C
H X📷📷
The reactivity order of halogen acid is HI > HBr > HCl

Mechanism :

R–CH=CH2 + HX
b R–CH–CH2
T.S.
(a)
– R–CH–CH3 + X
📷
(b) R– CH2–CH2 + X
Here the transition state cleaves to from the most stable carbocation hence (a) cleavage takes place
and hence, + – are formed
R – CH2 – CH3+ X
i.e., R – CH – CH3+ X
R – CH – CH3
X📷
Markownikoff’s Rule may therefore be applied. It states that, “During the addition of unsymmetrical reagents to unsymmetrical alkenes, the negative part of the addendum goes to carbon of double bond with least number of atoms”.

Example :

δ—
X
H b
CH3–CH=CH2 + HX
(a)
CH3– CH – CH2
CH3–CH–CH3 + X A
CH3–CH2–CH2 + X
B
Since A is more stable than B. Hence A is formed and we get
+
CH3 – CH – CH3 X
CH3 – CH – CH3
X
CH3 – CH = CH2 + HBr
CH3– CH– CH3
Br

Kharasch - Mayo Effect

If the above reaction is carried out in the presence of some peroxide then addition takes place contrary to Markownikoff’s Rule
CH3 – CH = CH2+ HBr
⎯P⎯ero⎯x⎯ide→ CH3– CH2 – CH2 – Br

Explanation

This can be explained on the basis of free radical formation

Step 1 : R – O – O – R 2R – O
• •
Step 2 : R – O + HBr ROH + Br
CH – CH – CH • (A)
Step 3 : CH3 – CH = CH2 + Br
Br 1° Carbon free radical

CH3 – CH – CH2 – Br (B)
(B) is more stable than (A). 2° Carbon free radical
📷
  1. Addition of Hypohalous Acid
📷 C = C📷+ HOX
CH2 = CH2 + HOCl
CH2 – CH = CH2 + HOBr
  1. Addition of Water
C — C OH X
CH2 — CH2📷📷
OH Cl
CH2 – CH – CH2
OH Br
This reaction also takes place via carbocation mechanism (Rearrangement possible).
CH3
(CH3)2 C = CH2 + H2O
H+ 10% H2SO4
CH3 – C – OH
CH3
  1. Addition of cold and conc. H2SO4
Carbocation Mechanism Followed, (Rearrangement Possible)
R – CH = CH2 + H2SO4
R – CH – CH3
H2O
Heat
R – CH – CH3
HSO4 OH
  1. Oxy-Mercuration - Demercuration
Synthesis of alcohols from alkenes is in accordance with Markownikoff’s Rule (No carbocation formed)
R – CH = CH
  1. Hg(OAc)2/THF,H2O
R – CH – CH
2 ii) NaBH /OH– 3
OH
  1. Addition of Oxygen:
Ag CH2 CH2
CH2 = CH2 + ½ O2 570 K
O
  1. Ozonolysis:
C = C + O3📷📷
O
CCl4 C📷📷
Zn/H2O
–H2O2📷
2 C = O
O— O📷

Example :

CH3CH = CH2 + O3
CCl4
O
CH — CH CH Zn/H2O 📷
–H2O2
CH3 – CHO + HCHO
O — O
CH3
+
O
📷
  1. O3/CCl4
  2. Zn/H2O (–H2O2)
CH3
Ozonalysis helps to locate the positions of double bonds in alkene.
  1. Hydroboration Oxidation
R – CH = CH2 + B2H6
0°C
ether
(R – CH2 – CH2)3 – B
H2O2 OH–
R – CH2 – CH2 – OH + H3BO3
(Product is Antimarkownikov product.)
  1. Oxidation Reactions
    1. Reaction with Baeyer’s Reagent (Cold dilute Alkaline KMnO4, Hydroxylation)
C = C + alk KMnO C – C📷📷📷📷

OH OH
The addition is a syn addition to form vicinal dihydroxy compounds.
  1. With hot KMnO4 or acidic KMnO4
CH2 = CH2
⎯⎯[O⎯] →
Hot KMnO 4
2HCOOH ⎯⎯→ 2CO2 + 2H2O
CH3 − CH = CH2 ⎯⎯KM⎯nO⎯4 →CH3COOH + CO2 + H2O
H
(CH ) C = C(CH ) ⎯⎯Ho⎯t → 2 CH3
3 2 3 2 KMnO4
CH3
C = O
  1. Substitution Reaction
CH3–CH = CH2 + Cl2 ⎯⎯500⎯−60⎯0⎯°C →
Cl–CH2–CH=CH2 + HCl–
This type of reaction takes place at a carbon atom attached to double bond carbon. This is called allylic substitution.

Mechanism

Step - 1 : Cl – Cl
⎯5⎯00 ⎯−60⎯0⎯°C→ 2Cl•
Step - 2 : CH =CH–CH
+Cl•
HCl + CH
= CH–
CH•
2 3 ⎯⎯→ 2 2

Step - 3 : CH2

= CH -
CH• +Cl2
⎯⎯→
CH2
= CH – CH2
  1. Wohl Zeigler Reaction
CH3 – CH = CH2 + Br2
⎯L⎯ow ⎯con⎯c. o⎯f B⎯r2→
CH2 = CH–CH2–Br
The low concentration of Br2 is obtained from NBS📷
O
CH3 – CH = CH2 +CH2 — C
CH2 — C
O
N – Br
CH2 = CH – CH2Br +
O

CH2 — C
CH2 — C

O
N – H
  1. Addition of Carbenes
(i)
CH2 – N ≡ N
..
CH2 + N2
(ii) CH3 – CH = CH2 +
  1. Isomerization :
C&H2 ⎯⎯h⎯ν → CH3 – CH – CH2
CH2
CH – CH – CH – CH = CH
700 - 970 atm
CH – CH – CH = CH – CH
2 2 2
  1. Polymerization :
2 or Al2 (SO4)3; 470 K
3 2 3
CH = CH Pressure
O2
( CH2 – CH2)n
CF2 = CF2
Trans O2
( F2C – CF2)n

ALKYNES

Compounds containing the structural unit – C≡C– are called Alkynes. Like the double bond it is unsaturated and highly reactive towards the reagent that double bonds react with and also towards others. The simplest member of the alkyne family is acetylene, C2H2.Each of the carbon atoms carrying the triple bond are sp hybridized.
1s 2s 3p📷
C📷
sp
C📷
sp
Alkynes the compounds having general formula CnH2n – 2 where n ≥ 2 it can be categorize by two ways.
  1. Terminal alkynes : Alkynes having triple bond at one end of the carbon attached to H
e.g. CH3–C ≡ C–H, CH3 CH2–C≡CH. Terminal hydrogen is acidic in nature.
  1. Non-terminal alkynes : Alkynes in which both triple bonded carbons are attached to alkyl group.

Preparation of Alkynes

  1. From Dehydrohalogenation of vicinal or geminal dihalides
CH2
CH2
alc. KOH
Δ
CH ≡ CH + 2H2O + KBr
Br Br
R– CH – CH alc. KOH
R C ≡ CH + 2H O + KBr
2 Δ 2
Br Br
  1. Dehalogenation Reaction📷
(a)
X X

– C – C –

X X
Zn dust
Δ
– C ≡ C + 2ZnX2
X📷
  1. 2R – C X
X
Zn dust
Δ
R – C ≡ C – R + 3ZnX2
  1. Kolbe’s Electrolytic Decarboxylation
R COOK
C
C
R COOK
+ 2H O Electrolysis
R – C ≡ C – R + 2KOH + CO2 + H2
cis or trans
  1. Formation of Higher alkyne
    1. CH ≡ CH NaNH2
CH ≡ C Na
📷📷
CH ≡ C Na + CH3Cl CH ≡ C – CH3 + NaCl
  1. R–C ≡ CH + NaNH2 RC ≡ CNa + NH3
R–C ≡ C Na + R′ X R–C ≡ C–R′ + NaX

Chemical Properties

Alkynes undergo electrophilic addition generally but in the presence of salt of heavy metals which forms complexes with multiple bonds it undergo nucleophilic addition reaction.
  1. Addition Reaction
    1. Electrophilic addition reaction :
      1. Addition of halogen
CH
+ Cl2
CH
CHCl = CHCl Cl2
acetylene dichloride
CHCl2
CHCl2
acetylene tetrachloride (westron)
CH3 – C ≡ CH
Br2/CCl4

CH3 – C = C

Br
Br Br2/CCl4

H

Br Br CH3 – C – C – H

Br Br

Trans-1, 2-dibromopropene
1, 1, 2, 2-tetra bromo propane
  1. Addition of halogen acids
HC ≡ CH HCl CH = CHCl📷
HCl CH CHCl
CH3COOH
2
Vinyl chloride
CH3COOH
2 2
Ethylidene chloride
CH ≡ CH
Cl2/H2O
or
CH = CHOH
OH
HOCl CHCl – CH – OH
–H2O
HCCl2 – CHO
HOCl Cl
Dichloro acetaldehyde
  1. Nucleophilic addition reaction :
Because of greater electronegativity of sp hybridized C as compared to sp2 hybridized carbons, Alkynes are more susceptible to nucleophilic addition reactions than alkenes. It is due to formation of some📷📷
sort of complex of heavy metal ion with π electrons like
Hg2+
and this results decrease in
electron density around triply bonded carbon atoms and this can be attacked by nucleophiles.
  1. Addition of H2O or hydration of alkyne or Kucherov reaction
+ 2+
H , Hg
H OH O
tautomerise
+ H2O
CH
333 K
H – C = C – H
Vinyl alcohol
CH3 – C – H
Acetaldehyde
R – C ≡ C – H + H2O
  1. Addition of HCN
+ 2+
H , Hg
OH
R – C = CH2
tautomerise
O
R – C – CH3
Ketone
CH + HCN Ba(CN)2
CH
CH2
CHCN
Vinyl cyanide
Similarly alkynes adds acids in presence of lewis acid catalyst or Hg2+ give vinyl ester.

O

HC≡C – H + H3CCOOH
Hg2+/353 H

CH3 – C – O – CH = CH2

Vinyl ethanoate

O O R

R – C
≡ CH + CH – C – OH BF3 CH – C – O – C = CH
a-alkyl vinyl ethanoate
  1. Reaction of Acidic H Atom
  2. Alkynes having acidic H atom reacts with metals like Na, K, evolves H2 gas.
CH
+ Na
CH (1 mol)
C – Na
C – H
+ 1/2 H2
CNa C – H
+ Na
Monosodium acetylide
C – Na
+ 1/2 H2
C – Na
Disodium acetylide
HC ≡ C − H + NaNH2 → HC ≡ C − Na + NH3 ↑ ⎯⎯NaN⎯H⎯2 →NaC ≡ C − Na + NH3 ↑📷
  1. Reaction with Tollens reagent : When alkyne reacts with tollens reagent (Ammonical AgNO3 solution) at forms white precipitate of silver acetylide.
C – H
C – H
+ 2AgNO3 + 2NH4OH
(Tollens reagent)
C – Ag C – Ag
¯ + 2NH4Cl + 2H2O
(White precipitate)
These acetylide are not decomposed by H2O like acetylide of Na but by mineral acids like dil HNO3.
C – Ag C – Ag
+ 2HNO3
CH
2AgNO3 +
CH
R − C ≡ CH + Ag+ → R − C ≡ C − Ag + H⊕
  1. Reaction with Ammonical Cuprous Chloride :
HC
+ Cu2Cl2 + 2NH4OH
HC
CCu
CCu
(red ppt)
↓+ 2NH4Cl + 2H2O
copper acetylide
These reactions are used to distinguish terminal alkynes from other alkynes.
  1. Polymerization Reaction
  2. When acetylene is passed in red hot cutube or retube. It converted into benzene.
CH 773K
3
CH
C6H6
CH3📷
Similarly CH3 – C ≡ CH
red hot Cu or Fe tube
H3C
CH3
(Mesitylene)
CH
  1. 2
CuCl/NH4Cl
CH = CH – C ≡ CH
HCl
Cl
CH = CH – C = CH
CH Cu2Cl2/NH4Cl
2
Vinyl acetylene
2 2
Chloroprene
Chloroprene on polymerization gives polymer called neoprene; used as artificial rubber.
  1. Under high pressure and in presence Ni(CN)2 acetylene tetramerises.
4 CH ≡ CH
Ni(CN)2
Cycloocta tetraene
  1. Reaction with S8, N2, NH3 and HCN
Acetylene reacts with S8, N2, NH3 and HCN to form different heterocyclic compounds.
  1. CH
CH
CH
+
+ CH
300°C
S
  1. CH
CH
+ N2
Electric spark
2HCN
1 S
(Thiophene)
8 8
  1. CH CH Δ
+
CH + CH N
  1. (iv)
2 CH + HCN red hot tube
CH📷
N
(Pyridine)
NH3
H
(Pyrole)

AROMATIC HYDROCARBONS

Hydrocarbons which follow Huckel rule are termed as Aromatic hydrocarbons.

Huckel's rule :

A planar molecule having complete delocalisation of (4n + 2) π electrons is termed as aromatic hydrocarbon (where n is any integer)
📷
e.g., 4n + 2 = 6
n = 1

4n + 2 = 2
n = 0
📷
4n + 2 = 6
n = 1
CH3
4n + 2 = 6📷
n = 1
4n + 2 = 6
n = 1📷📷

Homologues of Benzene

They are all aromatic hydrocarbons. Aromaticity is present due to benzene ring.
CH3 C2H5📷📷
etc.📷
  1. Electrophilic Aromatic substitution reactions in Benzene : (EAS)
Benzene and its homologues readily undergo EAS. As a consequence of complete delocalization of π
electrons in benzene, it has π electron cloud over benzene ring which makes electrophile attack over it.

General Mechanism :

+ E+ 📷📷
H
+📷📷
E E + H+
  1. Halogenation
+ Cl📷
(resonance stabilised intermediate)
Cl📷
⎯⎯FeC⎯l3 →
+ HCl
Benzene
2 dark
Reaction with I2 is reversible.
I📷📷
+ I2
+ HI
Hence it is carried out in the presence of conc. nitric acid to oxidise the Hydrogen Iodide formed.
  1. Nitration📷📷📷
+ HNO3📷
⎯⎯H2S⎯O4⎯co⎯n⎯c. →
NO2
⎯⎯H2S⎯O4⎯co⎯n⎯c. →
+HNO3 363−373K
NO2
NO2
  1. Sulphonation
Nitro benzene
SO3H📷📷
SO3H📷
+ H2SO4 + SO3📷
⎯⎯He⎯at →
+ H2O or + ClSO3H
⎯⎯He⎯at →
  1. Friedel Crafts Reaction
Chloro Sulphuric Acid Benzene sulphonic acid
Alkylation : Reactive intermediate is carbocation which can undergo rearrangement.
CH3📷📷
+ CH3 – Cl
⎯⎯Anh⎯ydr⎯ous⎯Al⎯C⎯l3 →
+ HCl
+ CH3CH2CH2Cl📷
⎯⎯Anh⎯ydr⎯ous⎯Al⎯C⎯l3 →
+ HCl
⎛ O:📷📷

Acylation : Reactive intermediate is acylium ion ⎝R–C+
COCH3📷📷
which cannot undergo rearrangement.
+ CH3 – COCl
⎯⎯Anh⎯ydr⎯ous⎯Al⎯C⎯l3 →
+ HCl
Acetyl chloride Acetophenone
Ortho and para substitution : Electron releasing groups like - R (alkyl) — O.. H, — O.. R, — NHR,
— NHCOR are activating groups i.e., they increase electron density at ortho and para position,
therefore, are ortho and para directing towards electrophilic substitution reactions.
Meta substitution : Electron withdrawing groups such as – NO2, – CHO, – COOH, – COCH3, – CN,
– SO3H, – COOR are called deactivating groups. They decrease electron density at ortho and para- position, therefore, electrophillic substitution takes place at meta-position.
  1. Halogenation of side chain :
CH3📷
Toluene
or Methyl Benzene
+ Cl
⎯⎯su⎯n →
2 light
CH2Cl
Benzyl chloride📷
or chlorophenyl methane
+ Cl2
⎯⎯hv →
CHCl2
Benzal chloride📷
or dichlorophenyl methane
⎯⎯C⎯l2 →
CCl3📷
+ HCl
Benzotrichloride
  1. Oxidation :
or trichlorophenyl methane
O O
📷
Benzene
+ 5O2
+ H2O
2-Butene-1,4-dioic acid
❑ ❑ ❑
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 08:25 rajusingh79 Work Book (Phase - VIII)

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1pSOMGU_vHBOXeDrlD8MvMNsEO8Kyqye5/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
Work Book (Phase - VIII)
Subjective:
Board Type Questions
  1. What will be the sequence of bases on mRNA molecule synthesized on the following strand of DNA?
  2. Aspartame, an artificial sweetener, is a peptide and has the following structure:
📷
(i) Identify the four functional groups.
(ii) Write the Zwitterionic structure.
(iii) Write the structure of amino acids obtained from the hydrolysis of aspartame.
(iv) Which of the two amino acids is more hydrophobic?
  1. Could a copolymer be formed in both condensation or not? Explain with example.
  2. What are biodegradable polymers write structure of PHBV?
  3. What is Nylon? Write an equation for the chemistry involved when a drop of hydrochlorine acid makes a hole in a nylon stocking.
  4. (i) Give the Fischer projection of L-glucose.
(ii) Give the products of reaction of L-glucose with Tollen’s reagent.
  1. Differentiate between
(a) Nucleotide and Nucleoside
(b) Vitamins and Hormones
(c) DNA and RNA
  1. Give the IUAPC names of the following compounds:
(a) 📷
(b) Cr(CO)6
(c) K3[Al(C2O4)3]
  1. Combination of Pt(IV), NH3, Cl− and K+ results in the formation of seven complexes and one such complex is 📷. Write the formulae of the other six members of the series.
  2. What is the number of ionizable chlorine atoms in the complex 📷?
  3. Complete and balance:
📷
  1. Compete the following
📷
  1. Explain why:
Ferrous salt turns brown in air.
  1. Which one of Fe2+ and Fe3+ ions is more paramagnetic and why?
  2. Which of the following is formed when K2Cr2O7, CaCl2 and conc. H2SO4 is heated?
📷
  1. Though copper, silver and gold have completely filled sets of d-orbitals yet they are considered as transition metals. Why?
  2. Why does Mn(II) show maximum paramagnetic character amongst the bivalent ions of the first transition series?
  3. Why Zn2+ salts are white while Ni2+ salts are blue?
  4. Why Zn2+ salts are white while Cu2+ salts are blue?
  5. [Ti(H2O)6]3+ is coloured while [Sc(H2O)6]3+ is colourless. Explain.
  6. A co-ordination compound has the formula CoCl3.4NH3. It does not liberate ammonia but precipitates chloride ions as silver chloride. Give the IUPAC name of the complex and write its structural formula.
  7. Arrange the following complexes in order of increasing electrical conductivity:
[CoCl3(NH3)3], [CoCl(NH3)5]Cl2, [Co(NH3)6]Cl3, [CoCl2(NH3)4]Cl
  1. Which of the two compounds is more stable and why?
[K4[Fe(CN)6], K3[Fe(CN)6]
  1. [NiCl4]2− is paramagnetic while [Ni(CO)4] is diamagnetic though both are tetrahedral. Why?
  2. Name one polymer formed by step growth polymerization. Give names of its monomers.
  3. Arrange the following polymers in increasing order of their intermolecular forces. Also classify them as addition and condensation polymers:
Nylon-66, Buna-S, Nylon – 66
  1. Given reason of the following
(i) Aniline does not undergo Friedel-Craft reaction.
(ii) Diazonium salts of aromatic amines are more stable than those of aliphatic amines
  1. Given account of the following
(i) Gabriel phthalamide synthesis is preferred for synthesing primary amines.
(ii) Ethylamine is soluble in water whereas aniline is not.
  1. Given reason of the following
(i) Methylamine in water reacts with FeCl3 to precipitate hydrated ferric oxide.
(ii) pKb of aniline is more than that of methylamine.
  1. Discuss the nature of bonding in the following co-ordinate compound on the basis of valence bond theory.
(i) 📷 (ii) 📷 (iii) 📷 (iv) 📷
  1. (i) Draw figure to show splitting of degenerate d-orbital in an octahedral crystal field?
(ii) What is the significance of Δ0 (stabilization energy).
  1. (i) Explain inner and outer orbital complexes with suitable example.
(ii) Draw the figure to show splitting of degenerate d-orbitals in an octahedral crystal field?
  1. What are class-b-acceptors? What which type of ligands they form stable complexes?
  2. (i) Classify the following into monosaccharides and disachharides.
Ribose, 2-deoxyribose, maltose, galactose, fructose and lactose.
(ii) What do you understand by the term glycosidic linkage?
(iii) What is glycogen? How is it different from starch?
  1. (i) What is the basic structural difference between starch and cellulose?
(ii) What happens when D-glucose is treated with the following reagents?
(a) HI (b) Br2 – water (c) HNO3
  1. (i) Write the monomers used for getting the following polymers
(a) Polyvinyl chloride (b) Teflon (c) Bakelite
(ii) How can you differentiate between addition and condensation polymerization.
  1. (i) How is Dacron obtained from ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid?
(ii) What is a bidegreadable polymer? Give an example of a biodegradable aliphatic polyester.
  1. (a) What are the monomeric repeating units of Nylon-6 and Nylon -66?
(b) Write the names and structure of the monomers of the following polymers.
(i) Buna-S (ii) Buna-N (iii) Dacron (iv) Neoprene
  1. Indicate the steps in the preparation of
(i) K2Cr2O7 from chromite ore.
(ii) KMnO4 from pyrolusite ore.
  1. Describing the oxidizing action of K2Cr2O7 and write the ionic equation for its reaction with
(i) Iodine (ii) Iron (II) solution (iii) H2S
IIT Level Questions
  1. How will you carry out the following conversions?
(i) Methylamine to ethylamine
(ii) Ethylamine to methylamine
(iii) Aniline to benzoic acid
(iv) Nitrobenzene to 2, 4, 6-tribromoaniline
(v) Nitrobenzene to benzamide
  1. For M2+/M and M3+/M2+ systems the E0 values for same metals are as follows:
📷
📷
📷
📷
Use the above data to comment upon
(i) the stability of Fe3+ in acid solution as compound to that of Cr3+ or Mn2+ and
(ii) the case with which iron can be oxidized as compared to a similar process for either chromium or manganese metal.
  1. Arrange the following:
(i) C2H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, (C2H5)3N and NH3................increasing basic strength in gaseous.
(ii) C2H5NH2, (C2H5)2NH, (C2H5)3N and NH3..................increasing basic strength in water.
  1. How will you convert?
(i) Aniline to p-bromoaniline
(ii) Benzyl chloride to 2-phenyl ethanamine
(iii) Aniline to 2, 4, 6-tribromoflurobenzene
  1. Complete the following reaction:
(i) 📷
(ii) 📷
(iii) 📷
  1. Identification of A, B and C in the following reactions:
(i) 📷
(ii) 📷
(iii) 📷
  1. Write the correct formulae for the following co-ordination compounds
(i) CrCl3.6H2O (violet with 3Cl− ions /unit formula)
(ii) CrCl3.6H2O (light green colour, with 2Cl− ions/unit formula)
(iii) CrCl3.6H2O (dark green colour with Cl− ion/unit formula)
  1. (i) Briefly outline the drawback of V.B.T.
(ii) Explain the hybridization and magnetic behaviour.
(a) 📷 (b) 📷
  1. (a) Explain with example cis-trans geometrical isomerism.
(b) Explain the facial and meridional isomerism.’
  1. (i) Define the following as related to proteins.
    (a) Peptide linage (b) Primary structure (iii) Denaturation
(ii) What is the difference between a nucleoside and a nucleotide.
Objective:
Multiple choice questions with single correct options
  1. Correct order of basicities of the following compounds is
📷
(A) 2 > 1 > 3 > 4 (B) 1 > 3 > 2 > 4
(C) 3 > 1 > 2 > 4 (D) 1 > 2 > 3 > 4
  1. The compound that will react most readily with NaOH to form methanol is
(A) 📷 (B) CH3OCH3
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. Which of the following is the strongest base?
(A) C6H5NH2 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. In 📷 the order of proton accepting tendency will be
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. Ions of the two most common isotopes of the transition metal nickel are shown below:
📷
Which one of the following statements is true?
(A) The electron arrangement of both these Ni2+ ions is 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 3d6, 4s2.
(B) The 📷 ion will have more protons in its nucleus than the 📷 ion.
(C) In the same strength magnetic field, the 📷 ion will be deflected more than the 📷 ion.
(D) Both 📷ions have the same number of electrons but a different number of neutrons.
  1. Which equation does not involve the reduction of a transition metal compound?
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. Ag+ forms many complexes, some of these are [Ag(NH3)2]+, [Ag(CN)2]–, [Ag(S2O3)2]3–.
Which of the following statements is true?
(A) In these complexes, Ag+ is a Lewis base.
(B) The hybridization of Ag+ is sp2.
(C) The Ag+ complexes are good reducing agents.
(D) These complexes are all linear.
  1. The magnetic moment of an iron compound is 5.918 BM, then the oxidation state of iron in this compound will be
(A) 0 (B) 1
(C) 2 (D) 3
  1. Which pair of elements can form an alloy?
(A) Zn + Pb (B) Fe + Hg
(C) Fe + C (D) C + Pt
  1. Identify the product P in the following reaction.
📷
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
📷
  1. The product(s) of the Hofmann exhaustive methylation of the following compound is
📷
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
All of the above
  1. When aniline is heated with benzene diazonium chloride at low temperature in weakly acidic medium, the final product obtained is
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
📷
13.
The major product formed in the elimination reaction of
📷
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
📷
14.
📷
Hydrocarbon ‘B’ is,
(A) CH4 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. In which of the following compounds chromium shows maximum ionic radius?
(A) K2Cr2O7 (B) CrO2Cl2
(C) Cr2(SO4)3 (D) CrCl2
  1. Zinc tarnishes in moist air due to
(A) ZnCO3.3Zn(OH)2 (B) Zn(OH)2
(C) ZnCO3.ZnCl2 (D) None of the above
  1. Which compound does not dissolve in hot dilute 📷
(A) HgS (B) PbS
(C) CuS (D) CdS
  1. A compound of mercury which is a strong poison and its antidote being the white of an egg, which eliminates it from the system in the form of a coagulated mass, is
(A) Hg2Cl2 (B) HgCl2
(C) HgI2.HgO (D) K2HgI4
  1. The product of reaction of an aqueous solution of Bi3+ salt with sodium thiosulphate gives
(A) Bi2S3 (B) Na3[Bi(S2O3)3]
(C) Na[Bi(S2O3)2] (D) [Bi2(S2O3)2]Cl2
  1. An aqueous solution of FeSO4.Al2(SO4)3 and chrome alum is heated with excess of X and filtered, a yellow filtrate and a brown residue is obtained. X is
(A) Na2O2 (B) Na2ZnO2
(C) NaCl (D) KCl
  1. When H2O2 in ether reacts with acidified K2Cr2O7 solution blue coloured perchromic anhydride is obtained in etheral solution. It is due to:
(A) CrO3 (B) H2CrO4
(C) CrO5 (D) H2CrO7
  1. The atomic radius of Cu is greater than that of Cr but ionic radius of Cr2+ is greater than Cu2+:
(A) because Cr+2 has no stable oxidation state of Cr
(B) because (d – d) transition is not easily available in Cr.
(C) because in Cu, (d – d) electron repulsion is larger due to pairing of electron
(D) because of Cu has larger no of protons in nucleus w.r.t. Cr
  1. Dicyclopentadienyliron [(C5H5)-]2 Fe2+ is stable molecule because of
(A) resonance (B) not stable
(C) five member ring (D) none
  1. Which one of the following would not react with aqueous silver nitrate to produce a precipitate that is soluble in concentrated aqueous ammonia?
(A) CaBr2 (B) [CoCl4]2–
(C) (CH3)4N+I– (D) CH3COCl
  1. From the stability constant which one is strongest ligand?
(A) 📷
(B) 📷
(C) 📷
(D) 📷
  1. The crystal field splitting energy for Cr3+ ion in an octahedral field increases for the ligands I–, H2O, NH3, CN– and the order is
(A) CN– < I– < H2O < NH3 (B) I– < H2O < NH3 < CN–
(C) CN– < NH3 < H2O < I– (D) NH3 < H2O < I– < CN–
  1. Which of the following complex ion is paramagnetic?
(A) [Fe(CN)6]4– (B) [Fe(CN)6]3–
(C) [Fe(CN)5NO]2– (D) [Co(NO2)6]3–
  1. IUPAC nomenclature of the complex compound Na3[Cr(O)2(O2)(O2)2(NH3)] where half of the coordination number are occupied by neutral ligands with magnetic moment 📷 must be
(A) Sodium amminedioxodioxygensuperoxochromate (III)
(B) Sodium amminedioxygendioxodisuperoxochromate (III)
(C) Sodium amminebisdioxygendioxoperoxochromate (III)
(D) Sodium amminebisdioxygendioxoperochromium (III)
  1. Polymer used in bullet proof glass is
(A) PMMA (B) Lexame
(C) Nomex (D) Kelvar
  1. On hydrolysis which of the following carbohydrates gives only glucose?
(A) Sucrose (B) Lactose
(C) Maltose (D) Galactose
  1. Grape sugar is
(A) Glucose (B) Fructose
(C) Maltose (D) Lactose
  1. Which of the following is fruit sugar?
(A) Sucrose (B) Fructose
(C) Glucose (D) All of these
  1. The urine sample of diabetic patients contains
(A) Sucrose (B) fructose
(C) Cane sugar (D) Starch
  1. The fibre obtained by the condensation of hexamethylene diamine and adipic acid is
(A) Dacron (B) Nylon 66
(C) Rayon (D) Teflon
  1. Natural silk is
(A) Polyester (B) Polyamide
(C) Epoxide (D) Polyurethane
  1. Natural rubber is obtained from Latex which is a
(A) mixture of wood, plants and gums
(B) Colloidal dispersion of rubber in water
(C) mixture of chloroprene and carbohydrate
(D) none of these
  1. A raw material used in making Nylon is
(A) adipic acid (B) 1, 3-butadiene
(C) ethyne (D) cyclohexanone
  1. Which of the following is not a natural polymer?
(A) Wool (B) Silk
(C) Cotton (D) Teflon
  1. In the dichromate dianion
(A) 4Cr – O bonds are equivalent
(B) 6-Cr – O bonds are equivalent
(C) All Cr – O bonds are equivalent
(D) All Cr – O bonds are non – equivalent
  1. In the standardization of Na2S2O3 using K2Cr2O7 by iodomaety, the equivalent weight of K2Cr2O7 is
(A) Molecular weight/2 (B) Molecular weight/6
(C) Molecular weight/3 (D) Same as molecular weight
  1. The chemical composition of ‘slag’ formed during smelting process in the extraction of copper in
(A) Cu2O + FeS (B) FeSiO3
(C) CuFeS2 (D) Cu2S + FeO
  1. Amongst the following, identify the species with an atom in +6 oxidation state
(A) MnO4− (B) Cr(CN)6−3
(C) NiF6−2 (D) CrO2Cl2
  1. Ammonium dichromate is used in same fire works. The green coloured powder blown in the air is
(A) CrO3 (B) Cr2O3
(C) Cr (D) CrO(O2)
  1. Isoprene on polymerization produces
(A) Synthetic rubber (B) Neoprene
(C) Gutta-Percha (D) Cis-poly(2-Methyl-1, 3-butadiene)
  1. Example of thermosetting plastic is/are
(A) bakelite (B) PVC
(C) Polyurethane (D) Nylon
  1. The repeating units of PTFE are
(A) CH ≡ CH (B) CF3 – CF3
(C) CH2 = CHCN (D) CF2 = CF2
  1. Terylene is a condensation polymer of ethylene glycol and
(A) Benzoic acid (B) acetic acid
(C) terephthalic acid (D) salicylic acid
  1. Which of the following is used as rocket fuel?
(A) cyanogens + O3 (B) Cyanogen + O2
(C) water gas + O3 (D) Nitrolium + O3
  1. The expected spin only magnetic moment for 📷respectively are
(A) 1.73 and 4.82 (B) 5.92 and 4.82 (C) 1.73 and 3.87 (D) 0.00 and 1.73
Multiple choice questions with more than one option correct
  1. Aniline and diethylamine can be distinguished by
(A) coupling reaction (B) carbylamine reaction
(C) reaction with HONO (D) Hoffmann bromamide reaction
  1. Cyclobutyl amine is treated with nitrous acid. The products may be
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
📷
  1. Consider the reaction
📷
Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(A) Product B is an orange coloured compound
(B) Product A contain azo linkage
(C) Product B contain azo linkage
(D) Product A is used as dye
  1. The low spin complexes are
(A) K3[Fe(CN)6] (B) [Ni(CO)4]
(C) K3[CoF6] (D) Na2[Ni(CN)4]
  1. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
(A) Oxidation number of Fe in Na2[Fe(CN)5(NO)] is +2.
(B) [Ag(NH3)2]+ is linear in shape.
(C) In [Fe(H2O)6]3+, Fe is d2sp3 hybridized.
(D) In [Ni(CO)4], oxidation number of Ni is zero.
  1. When MnO2 is fused with KOH, a coloured compound is formed then the compound will be
(A) K2MnO4 (B) Mn3O4
(C) purple in colour (D) brown in colour
  1. Which of the following statements is/are correct when a mixture of NaCl and K2Cr2O7 is gently warmed with conc. H2SO4?
(A) A deep red vapour is evolved.
(B) The vapour when passed into NaOH solution gives a yellow solution of Na2CrO4.
(C) Chlorine gas is evolved.
(D) Chlomyl chloride is formed.
  1. Which of the following gives an optically active compound when reacted with sodium borohydride, NaBH4?
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
📷
59.
📷
For the above reaction,
(A)
📷
(B)
📷
(C)
📷
(D)
📷
  1. Consider the following three bases of DNA and RNA.
📷
Order of acidic strength on different sites will be
(A) (2) > (1) (B) (3) > (4)
(C) (7) > (6) (D) (6) > (5)
  1. Which of the following statement(s) about D(+) glucose is/are true?
(A) Naturally occurring glucose is dextrorotatory
(B) It reduces ammoniacal AgNO3 solution
(C) On polymerisation it forms galactose
(D) It forms cyanohydrin on reaction with HCN
COMPREHENSION - I
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below:
The variety of colours among transition metal complexes has always fascinated the observers. For example, aqueous solutions of octahedral [Co(H2O)6]2+ are pink in colour but those of tetrahedral [CoCl4]2– are blue. The green colour of aqueous [Ni(H2O)6]2+ turns blue when ammonia is added to the solution to give [Ni(NH3)6]2+. The reduction of violet [Cr(H2O)6]3+ gives bright blue [Cr(H2O)6]2+. As with all colours, these arise from electronic transitions between levels whose spacing correspond to the wavelength available in visible light. The magnitude of spacing depends upon the factors such as the geometry of the complex, the nature of the ligands present, and the oxidation state of central atom.
  1. Identify the complexes which is/are expected to be coloured?
(A) [Ti(NO3)4] (B) [Cu(NCCH3)4]+📷
(C) [Cr(NH3)6]3+3Cl– (D) [Zn(H2O)6]2+
  1. Which of the following is π-acid ligand?
(A) NH3 (B) CO
(C) F– (D) Ethylene diamine
  1. The complex which has no ‘d’ electrons in the central metal atom is
(A) [MnO4]– (B) [Fe(CN)6]3–
(C) [Co(NH3)6]3+ (D) [Cr(H2O)6]3+
  1. Among 📷(atomic numbers of Ti = 22, Co = 27, Cu = 29, Ni = 28), the colourless species are
(A) 📷and 📷 (B) 📷
(C) Cu2Cl2 and 📷 (D) 📷
  1. The ferric ion is detected by the formation of a prussian blue precipitate on addition of potassium ferrocyanide solution. The formula of the prussian blue precipitate is
(A) Fe4[Fe(CN)6]3 (B) Fe3[Fe(CN)6]4
(C) KFe[Fe(CN)6] (D) None of the above
COMPREHENSION - II
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below:
Molecules of the amino acids that comprise our proteins have the property of being non-super imposable on their mirror images because, they are said to be chiral or possess ‘handedness’. Most of the amino acids are of left handed form, but with no reasons available. Even more interesting, recent experiments have shown that a 7–9% excess of four amino acids is present in Murchison meteorite discovered in 1970. This analysis shows life could arise outside the confines of earth. The origin of unequal distribution is probably because of electromagnetic radiations emitted in a corkscrew fashion from the poles of spinning neutron stars could lead to a bias of one mirror image isomer over another when molecules form in interstellar space.
A stereogenic carbon can be defined as a carbon atom bearing groups of such nature that an interchange of any two groups will produce a stereoisomer. The device that is used for measuring the effect of optically active compounds on plane polarized light is a polarimeter. The analyser in the polarimeter decides the activity of compound present. This is being decided on the basis of angle by which axis of analyser has to be rotated for complete brightness. Left, right or no adjustment decides 📷activity or optical inactivity respectively.
  1. For existence of life, amino acids as ingredient of protein exist mainly in
(A) 📷form (B) d–form
(C) Both (D) None of the above
  1. EMR emitted in corkscrew fashion from poles of spinning neutrons are biased to
(A) 📷amino acids (B) d–amino acids
(C) Both (D) None of the above
  1. Stereogenic carbons can bring
(A) optical activity (B) optical inactivity
(C) Both (D) None of the above
  1. Optically inactive isomer possessing chiral centres are categorized as
(A) optical isomers (B) non-optical isomers
(C) mesomers (D) diastereoisomers
  1. In one of the experiment performed by two students “Abraham” and “Fienkelstein” for measurement of optical activity of a substance. Result given by “Abraham” was: It is d–form with +30o rotation and by “Fienkelstein”, it was: It is 📷form with –150o rotation. One of them can be correct only as solution can either be d form or, 📷form.
Which of the following is correct measure to come out of this dispute?
(A) Result with acute angle is correct.
(B) Result with obtuse angle is correct.
(C) Students should perform another experiment by varying the concentrations or length of polarimeter tube to which angle of rotation is directly proportional.
(D) Students should perform the experiment again with precaution. They will come on same conclusion as one of them must be committing observational mistake.
COMPREHENSION - III
Formation of amine salts can be used to isolate and characterize amines. Most amines containing more than six carbon atoms are relatively insoluble in water. In dilute aqueous acids, these amines form their corresponding ammonium salts and they dissolve. Formation of soluble salt is one of the characteristic functional group test for amines.
The formation of amine salts is also used to separate amines from less basic compounds. When the solution is made alkaline (by
addition of NaOH) the free amine is regenerated. The purified free amine either separates out of the aqueous solution or is extracted into an organic solvent. Many drugs and other biologically important amines are commonly stored and used as their salts. Amine salts are less prone to decomposition by oxidation and other reactions and they have virtually no fishy odor. The salts are soluble in water and they are easily converted to solution for syrup and injections.
  1. Amine form salt with which of the following reagents
(A) NaOH (B) KOH
(C) HBr (D) All of these
  1. In the presence of NaOH amines separate out because
(A) amines react with NaOH (B) amines are less basic than NaOH
(C) amines form slat with NaOH (D) None of these
  1. Amines are soluble in solution of many transition metal salts because
(A) Amines act as base with transition metal salt
(B) Amines act as ligand with transition metal salts
(C) Amines do not react with transition metal salt
(D) None of these
  1. The hybridisation of N-atom in amine salts is
(A) sp2 (B) dsp2
(C) sp (D) sp3
  1. Which of the following reaction involves amine salt?
(A) Hoffmann bromamide reaction (B) Hoffmann elimination
(C) Hoffmann rearrangement (D) None of these
COMPREHENSION - IV
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below:
Triglycerides are the oils of plants and the fats of animal origin. They include such common substances as peanut oil, soya bean oil, corn oil, butter etc. Triglycerides that are liquid at room temperature are generally called oils; those that are solids are called fats. In simple triglycerides all three acyl groups are same and in mixed triglycerides acyl groups are different. Hydrolysis of oils and fats produces a mixture of fatty acids.
Most natural fatty acids have unbranched chains and because they are synthesized from two carbon units, they have an even number of carbon atoms. In most unsaturated fatty acids double bonds are in cis configuration. Many naturally occurring fatty acids contain two or three double bonds. The fats or oils that these come from are called polyunsaturated fats or oils.
The carbon chain of saturated fatty acids can adopt many conformations but tend to be fully extended because this minimizes steric repulsions between neighbouring methylene groups. Saturated fatty acids pack efficiently into crystals because of larger van der Waals’ forces these have high melting points. The cis configuration of the double bond of an unsaturated fatty acid puts a rigid bend in the carbon chain that interferes with crystal packing causing reduced van der Waals’ attraction between molecules.
  1. The hydrolysis of fats or oils with NaOH is called
(A) esterification (B) trans esterification
(C) glycolysis (D) saponification
  1. Consider the reaction,
📷
The product A on oxidation with HIO4 gives
(A) only formaldehyde (B) only formic acid
(C) both formaldehyde and formic acid (D) None of the above
  1. Unsaturated fatty acids having trans configuration have
(A) higher boiling points than cis isomer
(B) higher melting points than cis isomer
(C) higher molecular mass than cis isomer
(D) All of the above
  1. Aliphatic unsaturated fatty acids can be reduced to corresponding unsaturated alcohol by
(A) NaBH4 (B) LiAlH4
(C) H2/Pt (D) All of the above
  1. The boiling points of branched chain fatty acids are less than straight chain isomers due to
(A) less steric hindrance (B) less van der Waals’ forces
(C) more van der Waals’ forces (D) None of the above
Match The Following
  1. List – 1 (complex ion) List – 2 (number of unpaired electrons)
(A) [CrF6]-4 (1) one
(B) [MnF6]-4 (2) two
(C) [Cr(CN)6]-4 (3) three
(D) [Mn(CN)6]-4 (4) four
(5) five
  1. Match List I with List − II
List − I
List − II
(A)
Amino acid
(p)
Secondary structure
(B)
α-amino acid
(q)
Neutral
(C)
Albumin
(r)
Simple protein
(D)
α-helix structure
(s)
Ninhydrin
  1. Match List I with List − II
List − I
List − II
(A)
Epimers
(p)
Reserve food for animals
(B)
Sorbitol
(q)
Hetrogenous polysaccharides
(C)
Glycogen
(r)
By the reduction of glucose
(D)
Starch
(s)
Glucose and mannose
  1. Match the compounds in List-I with their properties in List-II:
List-I List-II
(A) K2MnO4 (P) Transition element in +6 state
(B) KMnO4 (Q) Oxidising agent in acid medium
(C) K2Cr2O7 (R) Manufactured from pyrolusite ore
(D) K2CrO4 (S) Manufactured from chromite ore
  1. Match the complexes in List-I with their information in List-II:
List-I List-II
(A) [Cu(NH3)2]SO4 (P) dsp2
(B) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2] (Q) Octahedral
(C) K4[Fe(CN)6] (R) sp3d2
(D) [Fe(H2O)6]Cl3 (S) Square planar
ANSWERS TO WORK BOOK
Objective:
Single Correct Questions
  1. B 2. A 3. D 4. C
  2. D 6. B 7. D 8. D
  3. C 10. A 11. B 12. C
  4. D 14. B 15. D 16. A
  5. A 18. B 19. A 20. A
  6. C 22. C 23. A 24. C
  7. B 26. B 27. B 28. B
  8. C 30. B 31. C 32. A
  9. B 34. C 35. B 36. B
  10. B 38. A 39. D 40. B
  11. B 42. B 43. D 44. B
  12. A 46. A 47. D 48. C
  13. A 50. C
Multiple Correct Questions
  1. A, B, C 52. A, B, C 53. A, C 54. A, B, D
  2. A, B, D 56. A, C 57. A, B, D 58. B, C, D
  3. C, D 60. A, B, D 61. A, B, D
Comprehension
  1. C 63. B 64. A 65. D
  2. C 67. A 68. A 69. C
  3. A 71. C 72. C 73. B
  4. B 75. D 76. B 77. D
  5. C 79. B 80. B 81. B
Match The Following
  1. (A) – (4), (B) – (5), (C) – (2), (D) – (1)
  2. (A) –(q), (B) – (s), (C) – (r), (D) – (p)
  3. (A) –(s), (B) – (r), (C) – (p), (D) – (q)
  4. (A-P, R) (B-Q,R) (C-P, Q,S) (D-P,S)
  5. (A-P,S) (B-P,S) (C-Q) (D-Q,R)
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 08:23 rajusingh79 Work Book (Phase - VII)

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1IEwSIKqd51VapPCH8DekF0I25ZWeml_4/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
Work Book (Phase - VII)
Subjective:
Board Type Questions
  1. A sample of lead weighing 1.05 g was dissolved in a small quantity of nitric acid to produce aqueous solution of Pb2+ and Ag+ (which is present as impurity). The volume of the solution was increased to 300 ml by adding water, a pure silver electrode was immersed in the solution and the potential difference between this electrode and a standard hydrogen electrode was found to be 0.503 V at 25°C. What was the % of Ag in the lead metal? Given 📷=0.799 V. Neglect amount of Ag+ converted to Ag.
  2. Specific conductance of a decinormal solution of KCl is 0.0224 📷. The resistance of a cell containing the solution was found to be 64. What is the cell constant?
  3. Calculate the electrode potential of a copper electrode dipped in a 0.1 M solution of copper sulphate at 📷 the standard electrode potential of 📷 system is 0.34 volts at 298 K.
  4. Given:
I. 📷
II. 📷
Find E0 for the half reaction:
📷
  1. NaOH prepared by the electrolysis of NaCl(aq). If current efficiency is 80% then determine the quantity of electricity required to convert 20g NaCl in NaOH
  2. Iron is corroded by atmospheric oxygen under acidic condition to product Fe2+ (aq) ions initially. The standard reduction potential
E0Fe2+/Fe = −0.44 V and for the reaction H2O (📷) ⎯→ 2H+ (g) + 📷
E0 = −1.23 V
Find whether the formation of Fe2+ (aq) is thermodynamically favorable or not.
  1. The emf of the cell reaction,
📷
Calculate the entropy change. Given that enthalpy of the reaction is − 216.7 KJ mol−1
And 📷 and 📷 = + 0.34V.
  1. Arrange HCl, LiCl, NaCl, KCl and RbCl in order of increasing 📷value in aqueous solution.
  2. (a) AlCl3 is covalent but AlCl3⋅6H2O is ionic. Why?
(b) Explain why BaSO4 is insoluble in water through it is basic.
  1. What happens when aluminium forms [AlF6]3– but boron does not form [BF6]3–.
  2. What happens when?
Methyl chloride is passed over silicon in the presence of copper catalyst at 275 − 375°C.
  1. Why ‘Al’ extraction from Bauxite is not possible by carbon reduction method?
  2. Identify (A) based on following facts:
(i) (A) reduces HgCl2 solution to white ppt. changing to grey.
(ii) (A) turns FeCl3 yellow colour solution to green.
(iii) (A) give white ppt. with NaOH soluble in excess of NH4OH
(iv) (A) gives yellow dirty ppt. on passing H2S gas soluble in yellow ammonium sulphide.
(v) A gives chromyl chloride test.
  1. Give reason why the hydroxides of aluminium and iron are insoluble in water. However, NaOH is used to separate one from the other?
  2. In the reaction H2+I2 ⎯→ 2HI the rate of disappearance of I2 is found to be 10-6 mole per litre per second. What would be the corresponding rate of appearance of HI?
  3. Rate of reaction A + B ⎯→ product is given as a function of different initial concentration of A and B Determine the order of reaction with respect to A and with respect to B. What is the value of rate constant?
A
(mole L-1)
(B)
(mole L-1)
Initial rate
(mole L-1 min-1)
0.01
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.005
0.010
0.005
  1. For the formation of phosgene from CO(g) and CO(g) + Cl2(g) ⎯→ COCl2(g),
The experimentally determined rate law is, 📷 K′[CO] [Cl2]3/2, is the following mechanism consistent with the equation?
(i) Cl2 📷 2Cl (fast)
(ii) Cl + CO 📷 COCl (fast)
(iii) COCl + Cl2 📷 COCl2 +Cl(slow)
  1. A first order reaction have rate constant of 1.5×10-4 sec-1. How long will 5.0 gm of this reactant take to reduce to 3.0 gm?
  2. In the Arrhenius’ equation for a certain reaction, the value of A and Ea are 4×1013 sec-1 and 98.6 KJ mol-1 respectively. If the reaction is of first order at what temperature will its half life period be ten minutes?
  3. The gas phase decomposition 2N2O5 ⎯→ 4NO2+O2 follows the first orde rate law. At given temperature rate constant of the reaction is 7.5×10-3 sec-1. The initial pressure of N2O5 is 0.1mol-1. Calculate the time of decomposition of N2O5 so that the total pressure becomes 0.15 atm
  4. Calculate the number of α and β particles emitted when 92U238 changes into radioactive 82Pb206
  5. A radioisotope has t1/2 = 5 years. After a given amount of decays for 15 years, what fraction of the original isotope remains?
  6. The half life period of 📷 is 140 days. In how many days 1 gm of this isotope is reduced to 0.25 gm?
  7. From the following data for the reaction between A and B
Expt. (A) (B) Initial rate at
(mol L-1) (mol L-1) 300 K
(i) 2.5×10-4 3.0×10-5 5.0×10-4
(ii) 5.0×10-4 6.0×10-5 4.0×10-3
(iii) 1.0×10-3 6.0×10-3 1.6×10-2
(i) Calculate the order of the reaction with respect to A and B
(ii) Rate constant of the reaction at 300 K
  1. A substance reacts according to I order Kinetics and rate constant for the reaction is 1×10-2 sec-1. If its initial concentration is 1 M
(a) What is initial rate?
(b) What is rate after 1 minute?
  1. The beta activity of 1 gm of carbon made from green wood is 15.3 counts per minutes. If the activity of 1 gm of carbon derived form the wood of an Egyptian mummy ease in 9.4 counts per minutes under the same conditions, how old is the wood of the mummy case (t1/2 of C14 = 5770 gm)
  2. Differentiate between:
(a) Artificial transmutation and nuclear fission.
(b) Nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
(c) Chemical reaction and nuclear reaction.
  1. Define rate of a reaction.
  2. For the hypothetical reaction:
📷write the rate equation in term of the disappearance of B2 and formation of AB2.
  1. In the reaction
📷
Express the rate of disappearance of Br− in terms of formation of Br2.
  1. Define specific rate constant.
  2. For the reaction 📷, the rate constant is 1.26 × 10−3 L mol−1s−1. What is the order of the reaction?
  3. The gas – phase decomposition of acetaldehyde.
📷 follows the rate law 📷
If pressure is in atmosphere and the time is in minutes. Find the units for (i) rate of reaction (ii) rate constant.
  1. The rate law for the reaction
📷
📷
Which is the order of a reaction in the absence of HBr?
  1. Give any one example of
(i) zero order reaction
(ii) first order reaction
  1. Write the integrated rate equation for a zero order reaction.
  2. For the decomposition of NH3 on a finely divided Pt surface is represented as 📷 with the rate equation
📷
Write the rate equation and order of a reaction when
(i) [NH3] is very slow.
(ii) [NH3] concentration is very high.
  1. The following graph is a plot of the rate of reaction versus concentration of the reactant. What is the order of the reaction?
📷
  1. Define half-life of a reaction.
  2. The following graph is a plot of t1/2 and concentration. What is the order of the reaction?
📷
IIT Level Questions
  1. A hydrogenation reaction is carried at 500 K. If the same reaction is carried in presence of catalyst at the same rate the temperature required is 400 K. Calculate the activation energy of the reaction if the catalyst lowers the activation energy by 20 KJ mol-1
  2. A radioisotope = Am(t1/2=10days) decays to give Bm-12 (stable atom) along with α - particles. If m gm of A are taken and kept in a sealed tube how much ‘He’ will accumulate in 20 days at STP?
  3. A small amount of solution containing Na24 radionuclide with activity A = 2×103 dps was administered into blood of a patient in hospital, after five hour sample of blood drown from the patient showed activity of 16 dpm per cc. Find the volume of the blood in the patient . (t1/2Na24), 15 hr
  4. The EMF of the cell Pt H2 (1 atm), HA (0.1 M, 30 ml) Ag+ (0.8 M) Ag is 0.9V. Calculate the EMF when 0.05 M NaOH (40 ml) is added.(📷,antilog of −2.2 = 6.3×10-3, log 2 = 0.3010, log 2.5 = 0.3979, log 1.56 = 0.194) [6]
  5. Find the solubility product of a saturated solution of Ag2CrO4 in water at 298K if the emf of the cell: Ag Ag+ (sat Ag2CrO4 solution) Ag+ (0.1 M) Ag is 0.164 at 298K
  6. An inorganic compound (A) shows the following reaction.
(i) It is white solid and exists as dimer; gives fumes of (B) with wet air.
(ii) It sublimes in 180°C and form monomer if heated to 400°C.
(iii) Its aqueous solution turns blue litmus to red.
(iv) Addition of NH4OH and NaOH separately to a solution of (A) gives white ppt. which is however soluble in excess of NaOH.
  1. Why we prefer instantaneous rate of reaction over average rate of reaction?
  2. Differentiate between the rate of reaction and the rate constant.
  3. Define order of a reaction. Can it be a fractional value? If yes then give an example of a fractional order reaction.
  4. A first order reaction is 60 percent complete in 100 minutes. Find the time when 90 percent of the reaction will be completed.
Objective:
Multiple choice questions with single correct options
  1. If in the fermentation of sugar in an enzymatic solution that is 0.12 M, the concentration of the sugar is reduced to 0.06 M in 10 h and to 0.03 M in 20 h, what is the order of the reaction
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 0
  1. For gaseous reactions, the rate is often expressed in terms of dP/dt instead of dC/dt or dn/dt (where C is concentration and n the number of mol). What is relation among these three expressions?
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) None is correct
  1. Milk turns sour at 40oC three times as faster at as 0oC. Hence Eα in cal (activation energy) of turning of milk sour is:
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. For the reaction
📷
net rate is
📷
📷
ratio of rate constants of the forward and backward reactions is
(A) 0.66 × 10−9 mol L−1 (B) 1.5 × 10−9 mol L−1
(C) 2.0 × 10−4 s−1 (D) 3.0 × 105 L mol−1 s−1
  1. A G.M. counter is used to study the radioactive process. In the absence of radioactive substance A, it counts 3 disintegration per second (dps). At the start in the presence of A, it records 23 dps; and after 10 minutes 13 dps,
(1) What does it count after 20 minutes?
(2) What is half-life of A?
(a) 8 dps, 10 min (B) 5 dps, 10 min
(C) 5 dps, 20 min (D) 5 dps, 5 min
  1. Rate of formation of SO3 in the following reaction
📷
is 100 kg min−1. Hence rate of disappearance of SO2 will be
(A) 100 kg min−1 (B) 80 kg min−1
(C) 64 kg min−1 (D) 32 kg min−1
  1. Following is the graph between (a − x)−1 and time t for second order reaction θ = tan−1(0.5) OA = 2 L mol−1
📷
hence rate at the start of the reaction is
(A) 1.25 L mol−1min−1 (B) 0.5 mol L−1 min−1
(C) 0.125 L mol−1 min−1 (D) 1.25 L mol−1 min−1
  1. 📷
📷
Temperature T/K at which (kA = kC) is
(A) 1000 K (B) 2000 K
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
9.
📷
Reaction kinetics can be studied by
(A) measurement of pH (B) titration with hypo after adding KI
(C) both correct (D) none is correct
  1. The rate of a chemical reaction generally increases rapidly even for small temperature increase because of a rapid increase in the
(A) collision frequency
(B) fraction of molecules with energies in excess of the activation energy
(C) activation energy
(D) average kinetic energy of molecules
  1. During the electrolysis of aqueous zinc nitrate
(A) Zinc plates out at the cathode
(B) Zinc plates out at the anode
(C) Hydrogen gas, H2 is evolved at the anode
(D) Oxygen gas, O2 is evolved at the anode
  1. If 📷 is x2 then 📷will be
(A) 3x2 – 2x1 (B) x2 – x1
(C) x2 + x1 (D) 2x1 + 3x2
  1. 📷 Reaction quotient is
📷 Variation of Ecell with log Q is of the type with OA = 1.10 V Ecell will be 1.1591 V when
📷
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. For the half cell
📷
At pH = 2, electrode potential is
(A) 1.36 V (B) 1.30 V
(C) 1.42 V (D) 1.20 V
  1. Given 📷
Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(A) AgNO3 can be stored in copper vessel
(B) Cu(NO3)2 can be stored in magnesium vessel
(C) CuCl2 can be stored in silver steel
(D) HgCl2 can be stored in copper vessel
  1. The cell EMF is independent of concentration of the species of the cell in
(A)
📷
(B) Pt⎪(H2)⎪HCl⎪Pt(Cl2)
(C) Zn⎪Zn2+⎪⎪Cu2+⎪Cu
(D) Hg, Hg2Cl2⎪KCl⎪⎪AgNO3⎪Ag
  1. Number of electrons lost during electrolysis of 0.355 g of Cl− is
(A) 0.01 (B) 0.01No
(C) 0.02 No (D) 📷
  1. During electrolysis of acidified water, O2 gas is formed at the anode. To produce O2 gas at the anode at the rate of 0.224 c.c. per second at STP, current passed is
(A) 0.224 A (B) 2.24 A
(C) 9.65 A (D) 3.86 A
  1. 📷0.275 g of metal M is deposited at the cathode due to passage of 1 A of current for 965 s. Hence atomic weight of the metal M is
(A) 27.5 (B) 55.0
(C) 110.0 (D) 13.75
  1. Same quantity of current is passed through molten NaCl and molten cryolite containing Al2O3. If 4.6 g of sodium were liberated in one cell, the mass of aluminium liberated in other cell was
(A) 0.9 g (B) 2.7 g
(C) 1.8 g (D) 3.6 g
  1. 100 mL of a buffer of 1 M NH3(aq) and 1 M 📷(aq) are placed in two voltaic cells separately. A current of 1.5 A is passed through both cells for 20 minutes. If electrolysis of water only takes place
📷
📷then
pH of the
(A) LHS half-cell will increase (B) RHS half-cell will increase
(C) both half-cells will increase (D) both half-cells will decrease
  1. If a steady current of 15.0 is passed through an aqueous solution of CuSO4, how many minutes will it take to deposit 0.250 mol of Cu at the cathode, assuming 100% efficiency?
(A) 3.217 × 103 (B) 1.613 × 103
(C) 53.62 (D) 0.893
  1. Cost of electricity for the production of x LH2 at NTP at cathode is Rs. x, then cost of electricity for the production of x LO2 gas at NTP at anode will be (assume 1 mol of electrons as one unit of electricity)
(A) 2x (B) 4x
(C) 16x (D) 32x
  1. Which has maximum conductivity?
(A) [Cr(NH3)3Cl3] (B) [Cr(NH3)4Cl2]Cl
(C) [Cr(NH3)5Cl]Cl2 (D) [Cr(NH3)6]Cl3
  1. One litre of 1 M CuSO4 solution is electrolysed. After passing 2F of electricity, molarity of CuSO4 will be
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) M (D) 0
  1. Borax crystal contains
(A) Two triangular units (B) Two tetrahedral units
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) None of these
  1. Borax is converted into B by steps
Borax 📷H3BO3 📷B2O3 📷B
I and II reagents are
(A) acid, Al (B) acid, C
(C) acid, Fe (D) acid, Mg
  1. On strong heating lead nitrate gives
(A) PbO, NO,📷 (B) PbO, NO, 📷
(C) 📷PbO,📷 (D) 📷
  1. The element with the highest first ionisation potential is
(A) Boron (B) Carbon
(C) Nitrogen (D) Oxygen
  1. Among LiCl, BeCl2, MgCl2 and RbCl, the compound with greatest and least ionic character, respectively are
(A) LiCl and RbCl (B) RbCl and BeCl2
(C) RbCl and MgCl2 (D) MgCl2 and BeCl2
  1. Which of the following statements is wrong?
(A) Anhydrous AlCl3 exists as Al2Cl6
(B) Anhydrous AlCl3 is a trigonal planar molecule
(C) Anhydrous AlCl3 fumes in air
(D) Anhydrous AlCl3 is ionic
  1. The basis for Al as a reducing agent in thermite process is
(A) High exothermic hydration of Al3+
(B) High Eox. Pot. of Al
(C) High exothermic enthalpy of formation of Al2O3
(D) High I.E. of Al
  1. The structures of quartz, mica and asbestos have the same common units of
(A) (SiO4)−4 (B) (SiO3)−2
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. Choose the wrong statement:
(A) Ge, Sn and Pb form +2 as well as +4 O.S.
(B) Ge2+ and Sn2+ compounds act as reducing agents
(C) Pb2+ compounds act as oxidizing agents
(D) Stability decreases from Ge2+ to Pb2+
  1. Identify the correct statement wiht respect to carbon monoxide.
(A) It combines with water to form carbonic acid
(B) It reacts with haemoglobin in red blood cells
(C) It is a powerful oxidising agent
(D) It is used to prepare aerated drinks
  1. The ratio of the rate constant of a reaction at any temperature T to the rate constant T → ∞ is equal to
(A) Energy of activation of the reaction
(B) Fraction of molecules in the activated state
(C) Average life of the reaction
(D) Pre-exponential factor in the Arrhenius equation
  1. The rate constant of a reaction: A ⎯→ B + C at 27°C is 3.0 × 10–5 s–1 at 27°C and at this temperature 1.5 × 10–4 percent of the reactant molecules are able to cross-over the P.E. barrier. The maximum rate constant of the reaction is
(A) 4.5 × 10–9s–1 (B) 4.5 × 10–11 s–1
(C) 0.2 s–1 (D) 20 s–1
  1. For a first order reaction: A 📷 B, whose concentration vs. time curve is as shown in the figure. The rate constant is equal to
(A) 41.58 h–1 (B) 4.158 s–1
(C) 1.155 × 10–3 s–1 (D) 6.93 min–1
📷
  1. If ΔH of a reaction be positive and k1 andk2 be the rate constants of forward reaction and backward reaction, respectively, at temperature t°C k′1 and k′2 be the respective rate constants at (t + 10)°C then
(A) 📷 (B0 📷
(C) 📷 (D) None of these
  1. Among ΔH, equilibrium constant (K), rate constant and Ea the one or more than one that is (are) not affected by catalyst is (one)
(A) Rate constant and ΔH (B) K and Ea
(C) ΔH and K (D) Only K
  1. For the gaseous reaction 📷 is found to be first order with respect to A. If at the starting the total pressure was 100 mm Hg and after 20 minutes it is found to be 400 mm Hg. The rate constant of the reaction is:
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. The decomposition of ozone is believed to occur by the mechanism:
📷, 📷
When the concentration of 📷 is increased, then the rate
(A) increases (B) decreases
(C) remains same (D) cannot be predicted
  1. In the sequence of the reaction, 📷 given that 📷 then the rate determining step of the reaction is:
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. What will be the fraction of molecule having energy equal to or greater than activation energy Ea?
(A) K (B) A
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. The ratio of the atoms of 📷 and 📷 in a sample of rock is found to be 4:1. The 📷 of 📷 is 📷 years. How long ago the solidification of the rock could have occurred? (log 2 = 0.30)
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. For the reaction, 📷
The kinetic data are as given below:
📷 📷 📷
0.2 0.1 📷
0.4 0.1 📷
0.4 0.2 📷
If 📷 for the above reaction is 📷, then the specific reaction rate 📷for the replacement of −OH group of methanol by Cl atom is:
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 10
  1. 📷and ΔH values of reactions 📷carried out at the same temperature are as given below:
📷
📷
📷
📷
At a given temperature and assuming that the backward reactions of all these reactions have the same frequency factor, the rates of 📷 in their respective backward reactions are in the increasing order of
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. For the radioactive sequential chain reaction, 📷
for the steady state of B, assuming that the no. of atoms of A is half of the no. of atoms of B then if the half life of B is 2 hours then the half of life of A (in hours) will be
(A) 4 (B) 2
(C) 1 (D) 3
  1. For the given reaction
📷
where K is zero order rate constant and b is a first order rate constant concentration of B at any time can be given by the expression.
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) can’t be expressed
  1. If 10–5% reactant molecule is crossing over the barrier in transition state at 298K, then find out the activation barrier needed to cross the transition state.
(A) 39.94 kJ (B) 49.94kJ
(C) 79.94kJ (D) 97.97 kJ
Multiple choice questions with more than one option correct
  1. Which of the following statements are correct about half-life period?
(A) it is proportional to initial concentration for zeroth order
(B) average life = 144 half-life for first order reaction
(C) time of 75% reaction is thrice of half-life period in second order reaction
(D) 99.9% reaction takes place in 100 minutes for the case when rate constant is 0.0693 min−1
  1. 📷
Half-life period is independent of concentration of zinc at constant pH. For the constant concentration of Zn, rate becomes 100 times when pH is decreased from 3 to 2. Hence
(A) 📷
(B) 📷
(C) rate is not affected if concentration of zinc is made four times and that of H+ ion is halved
(D) rate becomes four times if concentration of H+ ion is doubled at constant Zn concentration
53.
📷
Which of the following statements are correct?
(A) it is unimolecular nucleophilic substitution reaction 📷if I or II is formed.
(B) it is bimolecular nucleophilic substitution reaction 📷if I or II is formed.
(C) it is 📷 if I and its enantiomer are formed so that mixture is racemic.
(D) it is 📷if II is formed.
  1. Rate constant k varies with temperature by equation
📷. We can conclude
(A) pre-exponential factor A is 5 (B) Eα is 2000 kcal
(C) pre-exponential factor A is 105 (D) Eα is 9.212 kcal
  1. A reaction is catalysed by H+ ion. In presence of HA, rate constant is 2 × 10−3 min−1 and in presence of HB rate constant is 1 × 10−3 min−1, HA and HB both being strong acids, we may conclude
(A) equilibrium constant is 2
(B) HA is stronger than HB
(C) relative strength of HA and HB is 2
(D) HA is weaker than HB and relative strength is 0.5
  1. Electrode potentials of the given half cells
Pt(H2)⎪H+(C1); Pt(Cl2)⎪Cl−(C2); Ag⎪Ag+(C3)
p1 (I) p2 (II) (III)
(A) will increase on increasing C1, C2 and C3
(B) will decrease on increasing C1, C2 and C3
(C) will decrease on increasing C1 and C3 and increase on increasing C2
(D) will remain constant if C1 or C2 is doubled and p1 or p2 is made four times
  1. There is blue colour formation if
(A) Cu electrode is placed inside AgNO3 solution
(B) Cu electrode is placed inside ZnSO4 solution
(C) Cu electrode is placed inside dil HNO3
(D) Cu electrode is placed inside dil H2SO4
  1. The formation of rust on the surface of iron occurs through the reactions
(A) 📷at anode
(B) 📷at cathode
(C) 📷
(D) 📷
  1. In which case 📷is zero
(A) Cu⎪Cu2+(0.001 M)⎪⎪Ag+(0.1 M)⎪Ag
(B) Pt(H2)⎪pH = 1⎪⎪Zn2+(0.01 M)⎪Zn
(C) Pt(H2)⎪pH = 1⎪⎪Zn2+(1 M)⎪Zn
(D) Pt(H2)⎪H+(0.01 M)⎪⎪Zn2+(0.01 M)⎪Zn
  1. Reactions taking place in a fuel cell are
(A) 📷at the cathode
(B) reaction in (a) at the anode
(C) 📷at the anode
(D) reaction in (c) at the cathode
  1. It is not advisable to
(A) stir sugar solution with a steel spoon
(B) stir copper sulphate solution with a silver spoon
(C) stir copper sulphate solution with zinc spoon
(D) stir silver nitrate solution with a copper spoon
  1. By passage of 1 F of electricity
(A) 1 mol of Cu is deposited (B) 0.5 mol of Mg is deposited
(C) 9 g of Al is deposited (D) 5.6 L of O2 gas evolved at anode
  1. In the following electrochemical cell
📷
📷. This will be when
(A) [Zn2+] = [H+] = 1 M and pH2 = 1 atm
(B) [Zn2+] = 0.01 M, [H+] = 0.1 M and pH2 = 0.01 atm
(C) [Zn2+] = 1 M, [H+] = 0.1 M and pH2 = 0.01 atm
(D) [Zn2+] = [H+] = 0.1 M and pH2 = 0.1 atm
  1. Boron readily dissolves in
(A) conc. HCl
(B) fused NaOH at 673 K
(C) fused Na2CO3 + NaNO3 at 1173 K
(D) a mixture of conc. HNO3 and conc. H2SO4 (1 : 2)
  1. The allotropic forms of carbon, good conductor of electricity are
(A) diamond (B) graphite
(C) fullerenes (D) gas carbon
Comprehension-I
Three students performed three different experiments on electrolysis. Student ‘A’ electrolysied one litre of 1M aqueous solution of KMnO4 till after reduction. The final solution is 0.1 M K2MnO4, student ‘B’ electrolyzed 0.5 L of 2M Ni(NO3)2 solution by passing a current of 9.65 A for 3 hours between nickel electrodes. Student ‘C’ electrolysed NiSO4 solution by passing 12 ampere current but the current efficiency was only 60%.
Read the above paragraph carefully and answer the questions given below it:
  1. The quantity of electricity used by student A is
(A) 0.1 F (B) 1F
(C) 10F (D) 100F
  1. The molality of the solution left after electrolysis used by student ‘B’ is
(A) 0.46 M (B) 0.625 M
(C) 0.92M (D) 1.25M
  1. The nickel deposited on the cathode per hour in the solution used by student ‘C’ will be
(A) 7.883 g (B) 3.941g
(C) 5.91 g (D) 2.645 g
Comprehension-II
Order is an experimental fact for a reaction and molecularity is defined for elementary reactions and depends upon stoichiometric coefficient of a balanced reaction. Order can be fractional but molecularity is always a whole number. For elementary reaction order and molecularity can’t be differentiated.
Read the above paragraph carefully and answer the questions given below it:
  1. For the multistep reaction
📷 and 📷
Molecularity of reaction
(A) Is n1 + n2 (B) Is 📷
(C) Is n1 + 2n2 (D) Can’t be defined
  1. Order of reaction in question number 1
(A) Is n1 + n2 (B) Is 📷
(C) Is n1 + 2n2 (D) Can’t be predicted
  1. For the elementary reaction, 📷
Molecularity is
(A) 1.5 (B) 3
(C) 0.5 (D) 1
  1. For the reaction is question number 3, order of reaction is
(A) 3 (B) 1.5
(C) 0.5 (D) 1
  1. For chlorination of CH4 in which rate depends upon light only, order and molecularity are …………….. respectively.
(A) Two and zero (B) Zero and two
(C) Zero and one (D) One and zero
Comprehension-III
An organic Lewis acid (A) which gives fumes in moist air and intensity of fumes is increased when a rod dipped in NH4OH is brought near to it. An acidic solution of (A) on addition of NH4Cl and NH4OH gives a precipitate (B) which dissolves in NaOH solution. An acidic solution of A does not gives precipitate with H2S.
Read the above paragraph carefully and give the answer of following questions:
  1. What will be structure of (A)?
(A) Planar (B) Trigonal planar
(C) Pyramidal (D) Octahedral
  1. What will be (A) in above sequence?
(A) BF3 (B) AlCl3
(C) GaCl2 (D) ZnCl2
  1. The intensity of fumes increase due to the formation of–
(A) NH4OH (B) HCl
(C) NH4Cl (D) NaAlO2
  1. The soluble product obtained when the precipitate (B) dissolves in NaOH, is:
(A) Al2O3 (B) NaAlO2
(C) Na2AlO2 (D) None
  1. Chloride of compound (A) does not show 📷 bonding because:
(A) Absence of vacant orbital (B) Larger size of compound (A)
(C) Smaller size of compound (A) (D) None
Comprehension-IV
A metal is regarded as an assembly of metal ions and free electrons. When the metal is in contact with water, some metal ions enter into the liquid due to a tendency in the metal, called by Nernst as “Electrolytic solution tension”. An alloy of 1.45 gm Ag and Si was dissolved in desired amount of HNO3 and volume made upto 500 ml. An Ag electrode was dipped in solution and Ecell of the cell is 📷
Read the above paragraph carefully and answer the questions given below:
  1. Observed concentration of Ag+ in the cell
(A) 2.25 × 10–9 M (B) 9.25 × 10–6 M
(C) 9.25 × 10–7 M (D) 9.25 × 10–5 M
  1. % weight of Pb metal in above alloy sample is
(A) 99.25% (B) 89.95%
(C) 99.96% (D) 82.35%
  1. The emf of the cell involving the reaction, 📷 is 0.80 V. The standard oxidation potential of Ag electrode is
(A) 0.80 V (B) –0.80 V
(C) 0.40 V (D) 0.20 V
  1. In the above cell, reaction cathodic cell reaction is
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above
  1. Which of the following statement is correct?
(A) Oxidation number of oxygen in KO2 is +1.
(B) The specific conductance of an electrolytic solution decreases with increase in dilution.
(C) Sn2+ oxidizes Fe3+.
(D) Zn/ZnSO4 is a reference electrode.
Match The Following
  1. Match List-I with List-II
List-I List-II
(A) XeF2 (P) Square pyramidal
(B) PCl5 (Q) Linear shape
(C) XeOF4 (R) sp3d hybridization
(D) XeF4 (S) sp3d2
  1. Match List-I with List-II:
List-I List-II
(A) He (P) London dispersion force
(B) Xe (Q) Lowest boiling noble gas
(C) XeF6 (R) sp3d3
(D) IF7 (S) Distorted octahedral
  1. Match List–I and List–II.
LIST−I
LIST−II
(a)
Rate constant has the same unit as the rate of reaction.
(i) One
(b)
Reactions having apparent molecularity more than three.
(ii) Zero order reaction
(c)
Reactions having molecularity two but order of reaction is one.
(iii) Complex reaction
(d) The syum
For a reaction, A → B, the rate of reaction doubles as the concentration of A is doubled.
(iv) Pseudo unimolecular reaction
a b c d
(A) ii iv iii i
(B) ii iii iv i
(C) iii ii iv i
(D) ii iv i iii
  1. Match list – I with list – II and choose the correct answer from the code given below
List – I List – II
(a) Half life period of first order reaction (i) 📷
(b) Molecular concentration (ii) 📷
(c) Temperature coefficient (iii) active mass
(d) Half life period of zero order reaction (iv) 📷
Code is
a b c d
(A) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv)
(B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i)
(D) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii)
  1. Match List-I with List-II and List-III:
List-I List-II List-III
(Quantity) (Symbol) (Unit)
(a) Conductivity (p) 📷 (u) mho cm-1
(b) Cell constant (q) 📷 (v) cm-1
(c) Molar conductance (r) 📷 (w) ohm-1 cm2 mol-1
(d) Equivalent conductance (s) l/A (x) ohm-1 cm2 eq-1
  1. Match the salts in Column-I with their use in Column-II:
Column-I Column-II
(a) Hg2Cl2 (p) Salt bridge
(b) Agar-agar (q) Calomel electrode
(c) 0.1 N KCl (r) Used in ice cream
(d) Quinhydron (s) Redox electrode
ANSWERS TO WORK BOOK
Subjective:
Board Type Questions
  1. Percentage of Ag = 0.0296%
  2. 1.4336 cm-1
  3. 0.31045 volt
  4. 1.70 V
  5. 41239.4 C
  6. The reactions are
(i) Fe (s) ⎯→ Fe+2 (aq) + 2e–, 📷
(ii) 2H+ + 📷(g) + 2e− ⎯→ H2O (l), E0 = +1.23V
Adding equation (i) and (ii), we get
Fe (s) + 2H+ + 📷(g) ⎯→ Fe+ (aq) + H2O (l), 📷 = 1.67V 📷
∴ 📷 = positive = 1.67V
∴ ΔG0 is negative. So, the reaction is thermodynamically favourable or spontaneous.
  1. − 14.76 J K−1 mol−1.
  2. 📷12. 25 mL of a solution of HCl (0.1M) is being titrated potentiometrically against 0.1 M NaOH solution using a hydrogen electrode as the indicator electrode and saturated calomel electrode (SCE) as the reference electrode. What would be the EMF of the cell initially and after the addition of 20 mL of alkali at 25°C? Given Reduction potential of SCE = 0.2422V. [log 9 = 0.95].
  3. (b) It is because of the presence of polar water molecules which stabilizes Al3+ ion and increases the ionic character of Al–Cl bonds.
(c) As the hydration energy of BaSO4 is less than its lattice energy, it is insoluble in water.
  1. Maximum coordination of boron is four as it does not have d−orbitals while the maximum coordination numbers of aluminium is 6. Thus, Al forms [AlF6]3– ion while boron does not form [BrF6]3– ion.
  2. 2CH3Cl + Si 📷 (CH3)2SiCl2
  3. Because Al is highly active metal and its affinity towards oxygen is very high. At high temperature, reacting with carbon it converts into Al4C3 instead of free metal.
📷
  1. A gives dirty yellow ppt. soluble in yellow ammonium sulphide
∴ (A) has Sn2+
A gives chromyl chloride test of Cl–
∴ (A) is SnCl2
Reaction
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
  1. Al(OH)3 is soluble in NaOH forming NaAlO2, Fe(OH)3 is insoluble.
  2. 📷
  3. K = 📷
  4. Multiplying equation (ii) by 2 and adding (i) we get
Cl2 + 2CO 📷 2COCl ∴K1 = 📷
[COCl] = 📷 …(1)
∴ Slowest step is rate determining step hence
Rate = K1(COCl] [Cl2] …(2)
From equation (1) & (2) we get : Rate = K1📷
∴Rate = K′[CO] [Cl2]3/2
  1. 📷
  2. T = 311.2 K
  3. 📷
  4. No of α-particles = 8
No of β particles =6
  1. t1/2 = 5 year
t = 15 year ∴ n = 📷
Let original amount be No and amount after time t be N
∴ N = 📷
Hence (⅛)th of the original amount left.
  1. 280 days.
  2. K = 2.66×108 lit mol-2 sec-1 at 300 K
  3. (a) Initial rate (R1) = K [ ]1=1×10-2×(1) = 1×10-2
∴ Initial rate = 1×10-2 ml Lt -1 sec-1
(b) K = 📷
⇒ 1×10-2 = 📷 (t = 1 minute= 60 sec)
∴ (1-x) = 0.549
Rate after 1 minute (R2) = K× [ ]1 =10-2×0.549
= 5.49×10-3 mol Lt -1 Sec-1
  1. t = 3920 years.
  2. Rate of a reaction may be defined as the change in any one of the reactants or products per unit time.
  3. 📷
📷
  1. Rate of disappearance of Br−
= 📷
= 📷
  1. It is defined as the rate of a chemical reaction when the concentration of each reactant appearing in the rate equation is taken as unity.
  2. The units of rate constant is L mol−1s−1 or (mol L−1)−1s−1+. Equate this with general expression of (mol L−1)1−ns−1.
📷
∴ −1 = 1 − n or n = 2
The order of reaction = 2
  1. (i) Rate of a reaction = atm (min)−1
(ii) Rate constant = atm−1/2 min−1
  1. In the absence of Hbr, the rate equation is reduced to
📷
and the overall order is 📷
  1. (i) 📷
r = k[NH3]°
(ii) 📷
r = k[NH4NO2]
  1. 📷
where k = rate constant
[R]0 = initial concentration of the reactant
[R] = concentration of the reactant at time, t.
  1. (i) At very low concentration of NH3, 1 + k2[NH3] ≈ 1.
∴ Rate = k1 [NH3] and order of reaction = 1
(ii) At very high concentration of NH3,
1 + k2[NH3] ≈ k2[NH3]
∴ 📷order of reaction = 0
  1. As rate is independent of the concentration the order of the reaction is zero.
  2. The half-life of a reaction is defined as the time required for the reaction to be 50% complete.
It is also defined as the time during which the concentration of reactant is reduced to one half of its initial concentration.
  1. The order of the reaction is one, as t1/2 is independent of the concentration of the reactant.
IIT Level Questions
  1. Ea = 100 KJ
  2. Moles of He formed at STP= 3×3 = 9/4
Volume of He at STP = 9/4×22.4 =50.4 lt
  1. V = 5.95×103 ml = 5.95 L
  2. 0.99 V
  3. Ksp = 2.287 × 10–12 mol3 liltre–3
  4. (i) (A) is characteristic dimerised compound which sublimes in 180°C and forms monomer if heated to 400°C and thus (A) is (AlCl3)2 or Al2Cl6.
Al2Cl6(s) 📷Al2Cl4(s) 📷2AlCl3
(ii) It fumes with wet air
Al2Cl4 + 6H2O 📷2Al(OH)3↓ + 6HCl↑
(iii) 2AlCl3 + 6H2O 📷 2Al(OH)3↓ + 6HCl(s)
(iv) (A) gives white ppt. with NH4OH and NaOH, soluble in excess of NaOH
Al2Cl6 + 6NH4OH ⎯→ 2Al(OH)3 + 6NH4Cl
Al2Cl6 + 6NaOH ⎯→ 2Al(OH)3 + 6NaCl 📷2NaAlO2 + 2H2O
  1. The rate of reaction decreases continuously with time except for a zero order reaction. Therefore, average rate of reaction has no significance for the reaction. But instantaneous rate of reaction for a given instant of time does not change with time.
48.
Rate of reaction
Rate constant

(i)
It is defined as the change in concentration of the reactant or product with time, each divided by its stoichimetric coefficient.
(i)
It is defined as the rate of chemical reaction when the concentration of each reactant appearing in the rate equation is taken as unity.

(ii)
It always has a unit of (conc)/time.
(ii)
Its units depends on the order of a reaction. For nth order reaction the units of rate constant = (conc)1−n time−1

(iii)
It depends on the initial concentration of the reactants.
(iii)
It is independent of the initial concentration of the reactants.
  1. The order of a reaction is defined as the sum of the exponents to which each concentration terms is raised in the experimently derived rate equation. For example in the reaction
A + B + C ⎯→ Products and the rate law expression is
📷
Then, overall order of reaction = x + y + z.
Order of a reaction can be fractional value. An example of a fractional reaction is gas-phase decomposition of CH3CHO.
📷 and 📷
  1. 📷
Objective:
Single Correct Questions
  1. A 2. A 3. A 4. A
  2. A 6. B 7. C 8. D
  3. B 10. B 11. D 12. A
  4. B 14. C 15. C 16. A
  5. B 18. D 19. B 20. C
  6. B 22. C 23. A 24. D
  7. D 26. C 27. D 28. D
  8. C 30. B 31. D 32. C
  9. A 34. D 35. B 36. B
  10. D 38. C 39. C 40. C
  11. C 42. B 43. A 44. D
  12. B 46. B 47. D 48. C
  13. C 50. A
Multiple Correct Questions
  1. A,B,C,D 52. B,C,D 53. C,D 54. C,D
  2. B,C 56. C,D 57. A,C
  3. A,B,C,D 59. A,B 60. A,C 61. C,D
  4. B,C,D 63. A,B,C 64. C,D 65. B,D
Comprehension
  1. A 67. C 68. A 69. D
  2. C 71. B 72. A 73. B
  3. B 75. B 76. C 77. B
  4. B 79. B 80. C 81. A
  5. C 83. B
Match The Following
  1. (A-Q,R) (B-R) (C-P,S) (D-S) 85. (A-P,Q) (B-P) (C-R,S) (D-R)
  2. B 87. A
  3. (a−q−u), (b−s−v), (c−p−w ), (d−r−x)
  4. (a − q), (b − p, r), (c − p), (d − s)
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 08:20 rajusingh79 Work Book (Phase - III)

https://docs.google.com/document/d/140748SYaKhQzLVxSjONDIhBS6nfDdMjC/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
Work Book (Phase - III)
Subjective:
Board Type Questions
  1. How is anhydrous magnesium chloride prepared from magnesium chloride hexahydrate?
  2. Explain why halides of Be dissolve in organic solvents while those of Ba do not.
  3. Why potassium can not be obtained by the electrolysis of fused potassium chloride?
  4. Explain why halides of beryllium fume in moist air but other alkaline earth metals halides do not.
  5. A piece of burning magnesium ribbon continuous to burn in sulphur dioxide. Explain.
  6. Explain
(a) Be does not react with water or steam.
(b) Mg does not react readily with water.
  1. Blue colour of the solution of alkali metals in liquid ammonia fades on standing why?
  2. Explain
(a) The hydroxides of alkaline earth metals are weaker bases than their corresponding alkali metals.
(b) Ca, Br, Sr are stored in paraffin but Be & Mg are not?
  1. Account for the following
(a) 📷is insoluble but 📷 is fairly soluble in water.
(b) 📷is amphoteric while 📷 is basic.
  1. Give reasons for following
(i) concentrated HNO3 turns yellow in sun light
(ii) A bottle of liquor ammonia should be cooled before opening
(iii) Nitrous oxide supports combustion more vigorously than air
(iv) NF3 is not hydrolysed but NCl3 is readily hydrolysed
(v) Red phosphorus is densor and chemically less reactive than yellow phosphorus
(vi) N2 is diatomic while phosphrus molecule is tetraatomic
(vii) PCl5 is ionic in solid state and conducts current in fused state
(viii)Orthophosphorus acid is diabsic while orthophosphoric acid is tribasic
  1. What happens when?
(a) Phosphene is reacted with acidified cupric sulphate solution.
(b) Silver nitrate solution is treated with phosphene.
(c) Mercuric chloride solution is treated with phosphorous acid.
  1. What happens when?
(a) Phosphorus acid is treated with an aqueous solution of silver nitrate.
(b) Carbon dioxide is passed through a concentrated aqueous solution of sodium chloride saturated with ammonia.
(c) Methyl chloride is passed over silicon in the presence of copper catalyst at 275− 375°C.
  1. On the basis of the following reactions, identify A, B, C and D.
📷
📷
📷
  1. Explain the following
(i) Iodine dissolves more in KI solution, than impure water
(ii) KHF2 is well known, where as KHCl2 or KHBr2 does not exist
(iii) A mixture of He and O2 is used for respiration for deep see divers
  1. What happens when?
(i) Sulphur is boiled with caustic soda solution.
(ii) Sulphur dioxide is bubbled through aqueous solution of copper sulphate in presence of potassium thiocyanate.
  1. 20 ml of a solution containing 0.2 g of impure sample of 📷 reacts with 0.316 g of 📷 (acidic). Calculate
(a) Purity of 📷.
(b) Volume of dry 📷 evolved at 📷C and 750 mm P.
  1. What happens when?
(i) Chromium hydroxide is treated with hydrogen peroxide in the presence of NaOH.
(ii) Hydrazinc reacts with hydrogen peroxide.
(iii) Hydrogen peroxide reacts with 📷.
(iv) Sodium hypochlorite reacts with 📷.
  1. In the reaction H2+I2 ⎯→ 2HI the rate of disappearance of I2 is found to be 10-6 mole per litre per second. What would be the corresponding rate of appearance of HI?
  2. Rate of reaction A + B ⎯→ product is given as a function of different initial concentration of A and B Determine the order of reaction with respect to A and with respect to B. What is the value of rate constant?
A
(mole L-1)
(B)
(mole L-1)
Initial rate
(mole L-1 min-1)
0.01
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.005
0.010
0.005
  1. Following equilibrium is setup when SCN− ion is added to Fe3+ in aqueous solution
📷
When silver nitrate is added to the solution, AgCN gets precipitated. What will happen to the equilibrium?
  1. Which of the following reactions will get affected by increase in pressure? Also mention whether the change will cause the reaction to go to the right or left direction.
(i) 📷 (ii) 📷
(iii) 📷 (iv) 📷
  1. Given these equilibrium constants at 25°C
S + S2– 📷 S22– K1 = 1.7
S + S22– 📷 S32– K2 = 3.1
Calculate K for 2S + S2– 📷 S32– at 25°C
  1. At 540 K, 0.10 mole of PCl5are heated in a 8.0 L flask. The pressure of the equilibrium mixture is found to be 1.0 atm. Calculate Kp and KC for the reaction.
  2. In the reaction C(s) + CO2(g) 📷CO2(g) the equilibrium pressure is 12 atm. If 50% of CO2 reacts calculate Kp.
  3. Ammonium carbamate dissociates as: NH2COONH4 (s) 📷2NH3 (g) + CO2 (g)
In a closed vessel containing ammonium carbamate in equilibrium with its vapour ammonia is added such that the partial pressure of ammonia now equals to the original total pressure. Calculate the ratio of the total pressure now to the total pressure of the original mixture.
  1. Calculate the equilibrium constant for reaction📷, if equilibrium constant is 100 atm-1 for equilibrium📷, at constant temperature
  2. For the reaction📷. If 20.0 g of 📷were kept in a 10 lit container and heated up to📷, what percentage of 📷would remain unreacted at equilibrium.
  3. N2O4 is 20% dissociated at 27°C and 1 atm pressure. Calculate (i) Kp and (ii) the percentage dissociation at 0.2 atm and 27°C
  4. When 0.10 mole of NH3 is dissolved in water to make 1.0 L solution, the solution is found to have📷. Calculate Kb for NH3.
  5. An acid - base indicator, HIn(KIn= 10-6) displays the colour of its acid form only when it is ionised to a maximum of 9.09%, while it displays its basic colour when it is ionised to the extent of at least 95.24%. What is the pH - range of the indicator?
  6. When a solution containing Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions is at first saturated with NH4Cl(s) and then treated with (NH4)2CO3, only Ca2+ is precipitated as carbonate. Explain.
  7. A weak acid type indicator was found to be 40% dissociated at pH = 9.1249. What be % dissociation at pH = 9?
  8. Calculate pH of 10−8 M HCl.
  9. A buffer of pH 9.26 is made by dissolving x mole of ammonium sulphate and 0.1 mole of ammonia into 100 mL solution. If pKb of ammonia is 4.74, calculate value of x.
  10. Calculate [H+] in
(a) 0.01 M C6H5COOH solution and
(b) 0.01 M C6H5COOH in 0.01 M C6H5COONa; 📷
  1. Predict the direction of the following in aqueous solution:
📷
📷
  1. Calculate the pH at the equivalence point when a solution of 0.01 M CH3COOH is titrated with a solution of 0.01 M NaOH, pKa of CH3COOH is 4.74.
  2. It is found that 0.1 M solution of three sodium salts NaX, NaY and NaZ have pH 7.0, 9.0 and 11.0 respectively. Arrange the acids HX, HY and HZ in order of increasing strength. Where possible, calculate ionization constant of acids. 32. Concentration of HCN and NaCN in a solution is 0.01 M each. Calculate📷 and [OH−] 📷
  3. Concentration of HCN and NaCN in a solution is 0.01 M each. Calculate📷 and [OH−] 📷
  4. Determine degree of dissociation of 0.05 M NH3 at 25°C in solution of pH = 11.
IIT Level Questions
  1. Explain the following
(a) Alkali metals are obtained by the electrolysis of the molten salts and not by the electrolysis of their aqueous solutions.
(b) On exposure to air, sodium hydroxide becomes liquid and after sometimes it changes to white powder.
(c) An aqueous solution of iodine becomes colourless on adding excess of sodium hydroxide solution.
  1. To a 25 ml H2O2 solution excess of acidify solution of potassium iodide was added. The iodine liberated required 20 ml of 0.3 sodium thiosulphate solution. Calculate the volume strength of H2O2 solution.
  2. In a mixture of N2 and H2 initially in a mole ratio of 1:3 at 30 atm and 300oC, the percentage of ammonia by volume under equilibrium is 17.8. Calculate the equilibrium constant (KP) of the mixture, for the reaction, N2(g) + 3H2(g) 📷 2NH3(g)
  3. An equilibrium mixture at 300 K contains N2O4 and NO2 at 0.28 and 1.1 atm respectively. If the volume of container is doubled, calculate the new equilibrium pressures of the two gases.
  4. The value of Kc for the reaction 📷is 0.50 at 400°C. Find the value of Kp at 400°C when concentrations are expressed in 📷 and pressure in atmosphere.
  5. Given 📷
📷
📷
The equilibrium constant for 📷 will be.
  1. 0.10 mol sample of AgNO3 is dissolved in 1.00 L of 1.00 M NH3. If 0.010 mol NaCl is added to this solution, will AgCl(s) precipitate?
📷
  1. 30 ml solution of a weak monobasic acid requires 60 ml 0.25 M NaOH for the end point. During titration the pH of the acid solution upon addition of 20 ml alkali (0.25M) was 4.6. Calculate pH of the acid solution at the following two stages
(a) Before addition of any drop of alkali
(b) At the equivalence point, the contents of the conical flask having been diluted to 150 ml by the addition of distilled water (log 2=0.30) and pKw = 14)
  1. A solution of volume V contains ‘a’ mole of MCl and ‘b’ mole of NCl where MOH and NOH are two weak bases having dissociation constants K1, K2 respectively. Show that the pH of the solution can be expressed as pH = 📷
  2. 0.025 moles of a hydrochloride salt of α– amino acid (NH2 – CH2 – COOH) was dissolved in 250 ml of water and the pH of the solution was 2.7. Same moles of sodium salt of this acid is added to 250 ml water and the pH of solution now is 11, Calculate the pH of α amino acid at which isoelectric point will occur.
Objective:
Multiple choice questions with single correct options
  1. When a substance (A) reacts with water, it produces a combustible gas (B) and a solution of substance (C) in water. When another substance (D) reacts with the solution of (C), it produces the same gas (B) on warming, but (D) can produce (B) on reaction with dilute H2SO4 at room temperature. (A) imparts a golden yellow colour to brown flame. (A), (B), (C) and (D) could be?
(A) K, H2, KOH, Al (B) Na, H2, NaOH, Zn
(C) CaC2, C2H2, Ca(OH)2, Fe (D) Ca, H2, Ca(OH)2, Sn
  1. If NaOH is added to an aqueous solution on Zn2+ ions, a white ppt. appears and on adding excess NaOH, the ppt. dissolves. In this solution zinc exist in the
(A) cationic part (B) anionic part
(C) both in cationic and anionic parts (D) there is no zinc left in the solution
  1. Acidified solution of sodium thiosulphate is reactive because in thiosulphate
(A) the sulphur atoms are at unstable oxidation state of +2.
(B) the two sulphur atoms are at different oxidation states of +6 and – 2.
(C) the S – S bonds are less stable bonds.
(D) sulphur is in zero oxidation state.
  1. When hydrated MgCl2.6H2O is strongly heated?
(A) MgO is formed (B) Mg(OH)2 is formed
(C) Mg(OH)Cl is formed (D) Anhydrous MgCl2 is formed
  1. A metal (X) on heating in nitrogen gas gives (Y). (Y) on treatment with H2O gives a colourless gas which when passed through CuSO4 solution gives a blue colour .(Y) is
(A) Mg(NO3)2 (B) Mg3N2
(C) NH3 (D) MgO
  1. Phosphorus when dissolved in alkali forms
(A) PH3 + NaH2PO2 (B) PH3 + Na3PO3
(C) P2H4 + NaH2PO2 (D) Both (A) and (C)
  1. Match list – I with list – II and select the correct answer using the codes given below

List – I
List – II
(a)
Liquid Na metal
1.
Breathing apparatus in submarine
(b)
Potassium stearate
2.
Explosive
(c)
KNO3
3.
Coolant in nuclear reactors
(d)
KO2
4.
Soft soap
Codes
a b c d
(A) 3 4 1 2
(B) 3 1 4 2
(C) 3 4 2 1
(D) 4 3 2 1
  1. Which of the following is correct about the reaction,📷?
(A) It is a disproportionation.
(B) Oxidation number of Cl decreases as well as increases in this reaction.
(C) This reaction is used for the manufacture of halates.
(D) All of the above
  1. A greenish yellow gas reacts with an alkali metal hydroxide to form a halate, which can be used in fire works and safety matches. The gas and halate respectively, are
(A) Br2, KBrO3 (B) Cl2, KCIO3
(C) I2, NaIO3 (D) Cl2, NaCIO3
  1. Sodium nitrate decomposes above ~800°C to give
(A) N2 (B) O2
(C) Na2O (D) All of the above
  1. Which reagent would enable you to remove SO42− ion from solution containing both SO42− and Cl− ions?
(A) NaOH (B) Pb2+
(C) Ba(OH)2 (D) BaSO4
  1. The main factor responsible for weak acidic nature of B – F bonds in BF3 is
(A) large electronegativity of fluorine
(B) three centred two electron bonds in BF3
(C) pπ-dπ back bonding
(D) pπ- pπ back bonding
  1. Borax crystal contains
(A) Two triangular units (B) Two tetrahedral units
(C) (A) and (B) both (D) None of these
  1. Borax is converted into B by steps
Borax 📷H3BO3 📷B2O3 📷B
I and II reagents are
(A) acid, Al (B) acid, C
(C) acid, Fe (D) acid, Mg
  1. On strong heating lead nitrate gives
(A) PbO, NO,📷 (B) PbO, NO, 📷
(C) 📷PbO,📷 (D) 📷
  1. Hypo is used in photography because of its
(A) Reducing nature (B) Oxidising nature
(C) Complexing nature (D) Sensitivity towards light
  1. Disodium hydrogen phosphate in presence of NH4Cl and NH4OH gives a white ppt. with a solution of Mg2+ ions. The precipitate is
(A) Mg(H2PO4)2 (B) Mg3(PO4)2
(C) MgNH4PO4 (D) MgHPO4
  1. Commercial 10 volume H2O2 is a solution with a strength of approximately
(A) 30% (B) 3%
(C) 1% (D) 10%
  1. Hydrogen peroxide when added to a solution of KMnO4 acidified with H2SO4
(A) forms water only (B) acts as an oxidizing agent
(C) acts as a reducing agent (D) reduces H2SO4
  1. In basic medium, H2O2 acts as an oxidizing agent in its reaction with
(A) Cr2(SO4)3 (B) Ag2O
(C) K3[Fe(CN)6] (D) K2Cr2O7
  1. The reaction📷, shows
(A) acidic nature of H2O2 (B) alkaline nature of H2O2
(C) reducing action of H2O2 (D) oxidizing action of H2O2
  1. For the reaction: CO2(g) + H2(g) 📷 CO(g) + H2O(g)
The Kp for the reaction is 0.11. If the reaction was started with 0.45 moles of CO2 and 0.45 moles of H2 at 700K, the concentration of CO when 0.34 mole of CO2 and 0.34 mole of H2 are added when the first equilibrium is attained, is
(A) 0.52M (B) 0.17M
(C) 0.34M (D) 0.26M
  1. For the given reaction:
2A(s) + B(g) 📷 C(g) + 2D(s)+ E(s)
the degree of dissociation of B was found to be 20% at 300K and 24% at 500K the rate of backward reaction
(A) increases with increase in pressure and temperature
(B) increases with increase in pressure and decrease in temperature
(C) depends on temperature only and decreases with increase in temperature
(D) increases with increasing the concentration of B and increasing the temperature
  1. For the given equilibrium
L(g) 📷 M(g)
The Kf = 5 × 10–4 mole/litre/seconds
and Kb = 3 × 10–2 litre/mole/seconds
the equilibrium concentration of M is
(A) 0.13M (B) 0.3M
(C) 0.8M (D) Can’t be calculated
  1. For the following reaction
📷ΔH < 0. On increasing the temperature at constant pressure, which of the following effect will be observed? (K = equilibrium constant)
(A) K will decrease
(B) K will increase
(C) the degree of dissociation (α) of A2(g) & B2 (g) will increase.
(D) none of these
  1. 📷dissolves as
📷
When the initial pressure of 📷 is 500 mm Hg, the total pressure is 700 mm Hg. Calculate equilibrium constant Kp for the reaction, assuming that the volume of the system remains unchanged.
(A) 100 mmHg (B) 133.3 mm Hg
(C) 200 mm Hg (D) 214.6 mm Hg
  1. For this reaction at equilibrium, which changes will increase the quantity of Fe(s)?
Fe3O4(s) + 4 H2(g) 📷 3 Fe(s) + 4 H2O(g) ΔH > 0
  1. increasing temperature
  2. decreasing temperature
  3. adding Fe(s)
(A) 1 only (B) 1 and 2 only (C) 2 and 3 only (D) 1,2, and 3
  1. One mole each of 📷 and 📷 are heated in presence of little conc. 📷so as to establish the following equilibrium
📷
The moles of 📷 formed at equilibrium is
(A) 1 mol (B) 2 mol
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. 24 mL of HI are produced from the reaction of 15 mL of 📷and 17.1 mL of 📷 vapour at 4📷. The equilibrium constant for the reaction: 📷
(A) 27.5 (B) 37.647
(C) 73.647 (D) 57.25
  1. The vessel has nitrogen gas and water vapours at a total pressure of 1 atm. The partial pressure of water vapours is 0.3 atm. The content of this vessel are transferred to another vessel having one third of original volume, completely at the same temperature, the total pressure of the system in the new vessel is
(A) 3.0 atm (B) 1 atm
(C) 3.33 atm (D) 2.4 atm
  1. A gaseous mixture of 2 moles of A, 3 moles of B, 5 moles of C and 10 moles of D is contained in a vessel. Assuming that gases are ideal and the partial pressure of C is 1.5 atm the total pressure is
(A) 3 atm (B) 6 atm
(C) 9 atm (D) 15 atm
  1. The rate of a reaction does not involve gases is not dependent on
(A) pressure (B) temperature
(C) concentration (D) catalyst
  1. A reversible reaction is one which
(A) proceeds in one direction (B) proceeds in both directions
(C) proceeds spontaneously (D) all the statements are wrong
  1. The law of mass action was proposed by
(A) Goldberg and Waage (B) Le chatelier and Braun
(C) Kossel and Lewis (D) Van’t Hoff
  1. The rate at which a substance reacts, depend on its
(A) active mass (B) molecular mass
(C) equivalent mass (D) total volume
  1. The state of equilibrium refers to
(A) state of rest (B) dynamic state
(C) stationary state (D) state inertness
  1. A buffer solution contains 100 mL of 0.01 M CH3COOH and 200 mL of 0.02 M CH3COONa. 700 ml water is added. pH before and after dilution are: (pKa = 4.74)
(A) 5.04, 5.04 (B) 5.04, 0.504
(C) 5.04, 1.54 (D) 5.34, 5.34
  1. 📷
📷
Hence pH of 0.01 M NaH2PO4 is
(A) 9.35 (B) 4.675
(C) 2.675 (D) 7.350

39.
📷

(Aspirin) is a pain reliever with pKa = 2.
Two tablets each containing 0.09 g of asprin are dissolved in 100 mL solution. pH will be
(A) 0.5 (B) 1.0
(C) 0.0 (D) 2.0
  1. Molarity of the liquid HCl if density of the solution is 1.176 g/cc is
(A) 36.5 (B) 18.25
(C) 32.05 (D) 42.10
  1. A monoprotic acid in 1.00 M solution is 0.001% ionized. The dissociation constant of formic acid is
(A) 1.0 × 10−3 (B) 1.0 × 10−6
(C) 1.0 × 10−8 (D) 1.0 × 10−10
  1. Formic acid is 4.5% dissociated in 0.1 N solution at 20°C. The ionization constant of formic acid is
(A) 21 × 10−4 (B) 21
(C) 0.21 × 10−4 (D) 2.1 × 10−4
  1. What is the correct representation of solubility product of Ag2CrO4?
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. The precipitate of CaF2 (Ksp = 1.7 × 10−10) is obtained when equal volumes of which of the following are mixed?
(A) 10−4 M Ca2+ + 10−4 M F− (B) 10−2 M Ca2+ + 10−3 M F−
(C) 10−2 M Ca2+ + 10−5 M F− (D) 10−3 M Ca2+ + 10−5 M F−
  1. Buffering action of a mixture of CH3COOH and CH3COONa is maximum when the ratio of salt to acid is equal to
(A) 1.0 (B) 100.0
(C) 10.0 (D) 0.1
Multiple choice questions with more than one option correct
  1. Which of the following illustrate/s the anomalous properties of Li?
(A) The m. pt. and b. pt of Li are comparatively high.
(B) Li forms a nitride Li3N unlike group metals.
(C) Li is much softer than the other group I metals.
(D) Li+ ion and its compounds are more heavily hydrated than those of the rest of the group.
  1. For two ionic solids CaO and KI, identify the correct statement/s among the following:
(A) Lattice energy of CaO is much higher than that of KI.
(B) KI is soluble in benzene.
(C) CaO has high m. pt.
(D) KI has high m. pt.
  1. Boron readily dissolves in
(A) conc. HCl
(B) fused NaOH at 673 K
(C) fused Na2CO3 + NaNO3 at 1173 K
(D) a mixture of conc. HNO3 and conc. H2SO4 (1 : 2)
  1. Which metal can be obtained from electrolysis?
(A) Ca (B) Mg
(C) Cr (D) Al
  1. A reaction is catalysed by H+ ion. In presence of HA, rate constant is 2 × 10−3 min−1 and in presence of HB rate constant is 1 × 10−3 min−1, HA and HB both being strong acids, we may conclude
(A) equilibrium constant is 2
(B) HA is stronger than HB
(C) relative strength of HA and HB is 2
(D) HA is weaker than HB and relative strength is 0.5
  1. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) wrong?
(A) at equilibrium concentration of reactant and product become constant because the reaction stops
(B) addition of catalyst speeds up the forward reaction more than the backward reaction
(C) equilibrium constant of an exothermic reaction decreases with increase of temperature
(D) Kp is always greater than Kc
  1. Which of the following will not affect the value of equilibrium constant of a reaction?
(A) change in concentration of the reactants (B) change in temperature
(C) change in pressure (D) addition of catalyst
  1. The equilibrium constant of the reaction 📷and📷are K1 and K2 respectively. The relationship between K1 and K2 is
(A) K1 = K2 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. For which of the following reactions is the equilibrium constant called an acidity constant?
(A) 📷
(B) 📷
(C) 📷
(D) 📷
  1. For the reaction 📷which is correct representation?
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) none of these
  1. 📷
📷
Correct relation (s) between K1, K2, K3 and K4 is/are
(A) K1 × K3 = 1 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) none of these
  1. For the reaction, 📷the forward reaction at constant temperature is favoured by
(A) introducing an inert gas at constant volume
(B) introducing chlorine gas at constant volume
(C) introducing an inert gas at constant pressure
(D) introducing the volume of the container
(E) introducing PCl5 at constant volume
  1. Which of the following will favour the formation of NH3 by Haber’s process?
(A) increase temperature (B) increase of pressure
(C) addition of catalyst (D) addition of promoter
  1. Which of the following will not affect the volume of equilibrium constant of a reaction?
(A) change in the concentration of the reactants
(B) change in temperature
(C) change in pressure
(D) addition of catalyst
  1. For the gas phase reaction,
📷
Carried out in a reaction vessel, the equilibrium concentration of C2H4 can be increased by
(A) increasing the temperature (B) decreasing the pressure
(C) removing some H2 (D) adding some C2H6
  1. When NaNO3 is heated in a closed vessel oxygen is liberated and NaNO2 is left behind. At equilibrium which are not correct?
(A) Addition of NaNO2 favours reverse reaction
(B) Addition of NaNO3 favours forward reaction
(C) Increasing temperature favours forward reaction
(D) Increasing pressure favours reverse reaction
  1. 📷
Half life period is independent of concentration of Zn at constant pH. For the constant concentration of Zn, rate becomes 100 times when pH is decreased from 3 to 2. Hence
(A) 📷
(B) 📷
(C) rate is not affected if concentration of Zn is made four times and that of [H+] ion is halved
(D) rate becomes four times if concentration of [H+] ion is doubled at constant Zn concentration
  1. All of the following are acid-base conjugate pairs.
(A) 📷 (B) H3O+, OH−
(C) 📷 (D) HS−, S2−
  1. In the following reaction
📷
(A) A is an acid and B the base
(B) A is a base and B the acid
(C) C is the conjugate acid of A, and D is the conjugate base of B
(D) C is conjugate base of A, and D is the conjugate acid of B
  1. Which does not react with NaOH or which is not acid salt?
(A) NaH2PO2 (B) Na2HPO3
(C) Na2HPO4 (D) NaHCO3
  1. An acid-base indicator has a Ka of 3.0 × 10−5. The acid form of the indicator is red and the basic form is blue. Then
(A) pH is 4.05 when indicator is 75% red
(B) pH is 5.00 when indicator is 75% blue
(C) pH is 5.00 when indicator is 75% red
(D) pH is 4.05 when indicator is 75% blue
  1. pH of the following solution is not affected by dilution
(A) 0.01 M CH3COONa
(B) 0.01 M NaHCO3
(C) buffer of 0.01 M CH3COONa and 0.01 M CH3COOH
(D) 0.01 M CH3COONH4
  1. The term infinite dilution refers for
(A) 📷for weak electrolytes
(B) an electrolyte is 100 % dissociated
(C) all interionic effects disappear
(D) when equivalent conductance of an electrolyte becomes constant
Comprehension - I
Read the paragraph carefully and answer the following questions:
Hydrogen bromide gas is one of the strongest acids available in gas form. In aqueous solution, HBr has pKa value of approximately −12. A pKa value of −12 is indicative of a very strong acid. By comparison, HCl has a pKa of approximately −9. Hydrobromic acid (HBr) can be produced by reaction 1.
H2(g) + Br2(l) 📷2HBr(g) …Reaction 1
A student decides to study the equilibrium distribution for Reaction 1. Under ambient conditions, Reaction 1 Reaction reaches equilibrium at some temperature T and pressure P. Once at equilibrium, measurements are taken for the partial pressure of each gas and the mass of bromine liquid. The values are listed in Table
Br2(l)
10.0 grams
H2(g)
1.36 atm
HBr(g)
2.72 atm
The student takes notice that Reaction 1 shifts with changes in the conditions of the system, such as the addition of bromine liquid, the removal of hydrobromic acid, and increases in volume. The student irreversibly increases the volume of the system by opening a valve on the reaction flask that is connected to an evacuated column. Not all changes shift the reaction. Changes in the equilibrium concentrations are not accurately recorded.
  1. Evaluate the value of equilibrium constant K at ambient temperature & pressure as per data shown in table for Reaction – 1
  2. Addition of which of the either reactant or products to the equilibrium mixture will NOT affect the partial pressure of H2(g)?
  3. If we put the HBr(g), H2(g) over bromine liquid having partial pressure 3 atm., 1.5 atm. respectively in a closed container the gas whose pressure increases after attaining the equilibrium is ………….
  4. If there is an increase in mole percent of HBr(g) after increasing the temperature of the above reaction is ……………… in nature.
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 08:14 rajusingh79 Transition Element

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1Fdgg9mKttdfsHL3z6IhXxT0RuvF-tHtedit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
TRANSITION ELEMENTS
Transition elements (only the first row, 3d series): Definition, Werner’s approach to coordination compounds, general characteristic properties [viz., variable oxidation states, colour (excluding the details of electronic transition) calculation of spin-only magnetic moment, formation of complexes (stereochemistry excluded), nomenclature of simple coordination compounds, valence bond approach to define geometries of coordination compounds of linear, tetrahedral, octahedral and square planar geometries.
Transition Elements - Introduction

Definition and Electronic Configurations of Atoms

The elements lying between s and p-block elements of the periodic table are collectively known as transition or transitional elements (T.E.’s): These elements either in their atomic state or in any of their common oxidation state have partly filled (n-1)d orbitals of (n-1)th main shell. In these elements the differentiating electron enters (n-1)d orbitals of (n-1)th main shell and as such these are called d-block elements.
The valence shell configurations of these elements can be represented by (n-1)d1–10.ns0, 1, 2. The configurations clearly show that strictly, according to the definition of d-block elements, Cu, Ag and Au should be excluded from d-block elements, since these elements, both in their atomic state [with configuration (n-1)d10ns1] and in their +1 oxidation state [with configuration (n-1)d10], do not have partly filled (n-l)d-orbitals. Similarly Zn, Cd and Hg which both in their atomic state [(n-1)d10ns2] and in +2 oxidation [(n-1)d10] do not contian partly filled (n-1)d orbitals, should also be excluded from d-block elements. Similar is the case with Pd atom with configuration 4d105s0. Yet, in order to maintain a rational classification of elements, these elements (viz Cu, Ag, Au, Zn, Cd, Hg and Pd) are also generally studied with d-block elements.
All the d-block elements are classified into four series viz 3d, 4d, 5d and 6d series corresponding to the filling of 3d, 4d, 5d and 6d orbitals of (n-1)th main shell. Each of 3d, 4d and 5d series has ten elements while 6d series has at present only one element viz Ac80 whose valence shell configuration is 6d1 7s2.
Irregularities in Configurations
The irregularities in the observed configurations of Cr (3d54s1), Cu (3d104s1), Mo (4d55s1), Pd (4d105s0), Ag (4d10 5s1) and Au (5d106s1) are explained on the basis of the concept that half-filled and completely filled d-orbitals are realtively more stable than other d-orbitals.
On the basis of the above concept it is, however, not easy to explain the irregularities found in the observed electronic configurations of the atoms of other elements, since one has to consider the net effect of so many other factors such as (i) nuclear electronic attraction (ii) shielding of one electron by several other electrons (iii) inter-electronic repulsion (iv) the exchange-energy forces etc. All these factors play an important part together in determining the final stability of an electronic configuration of an atom. It is not easy to explain why W unlike Cr(3d54s1) and Mo(4d5 5s1) should have the idealised electronic configuration (4f145d46s2).
The properties of transition elements of any given period are not so much different from one another as those of the same period of non-transition elements. The reason of this fact lies in the electronic configuration of transition elements. We know that electronic configurations of transition elements is invariably (n-1)d1–10 ns0 or 1 or 2 which indicates that (i) the electronic configurations of transition elements differ from one another only in the number of electrons in d orbitals in the (n-1)th shell and (ii) the number of electrons in the outermost shell, ns, is invariably 1 or 2.
Physicochemical Properties
Metallic Character
All the transition elements are metals, since the number of electrons in the outermost shell is very small, being equal to 2. They are hard, malleable and ductile. They exhibit all the three types of structures: face centred cubic (fcc), hexagonal close packed (hcp) and body centred cubic (bcc). Metals of VIII and IB Groups are softer and more ductile than other metals.
It appears that covalent and metallic bonding both exist in the atoms of transition metals. The presence of unfilled d-orbitals favours covalent bonding. These metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.
Melting and Boiling Points
The transition elements have very high melting and boiling points as compared to those of s and p block elements. Zn, Cd and Hg have relatively low values. The reason for these low values is that these metals have completely filled d-orbitals with no unpaired electron that may be available for covalent bonding amongst the atoms of these metals. The formation of covalent bonding occurs in the rest of the d-block elements on account of the presence of unfilled d-orbitals.
Although melting and boiling points show no definite trends in the three transition series, the metals having the highest melting and boiling points are towards the middle of each transition series.
Atomic (Covalent) and Ionic Radii
The atomic and ionic radii (M2+ ions) for the elements of 3d-series are given in. it will be seen that these values decrease generally, on moving from left to right in the period. This is due to the fact that an increase in the nuclear charge tends to attract the electron cloud inwards. The atomic radii for the elements from Cr to Cu are, however, very close to one another. This is due to the fact that simultaneous addition of electron to 3d-level exercise the reverse effect by screening the outer 4s-electrons from the inward pull of the nucleus. As a result of these two opposing effects, the atomic radii do not alter much on moving from Cr to Cu.
The ionic radii of M2+ and M3+ ions follow the same trends as their atomic radii. The radii of M2+ ions, although somewhat smaller than that of Ca2+ ion (=0.99Å) are comparable with it. Thus Mo oxides the transition element should be similar to CaO in many ways, although somewhat less basic and less soluble in water. Similarly the hydration energies of M2+ ions should be similar to but somewhat greater than that of Ca2+ ion. This is borne out by facts, since the hydration energy of Ca2+ ion is 395 kcal and the observed values of hydration energies for the elements Ti2+ … Cu2+ are between 446 kcal and 597 kcal.
The radii of M3+ ions are slightly greater than that of Ga3+ ion (=0.62Å). Thus M2O3 oxides of transitional elements should be similar to but slightly less acidic (more basic) than Ga2O3 and the hydration energies of M3+ ions should be less than 1124 kcal which is the hydration energy of Ga3+ ion. The observed values of hydration energies for the series Sc3+ … Fe3+ are between 947 kcal and 1072 kcal.
Ionisation Potentials
The first ionisation potentials of transitional elements lie between the values of those of s- and p-block elements. The first ionisation potentials of all the transition elements lie between 5 to 10 electron volts. In case of transition elements the addition of the extra electron in the (n-1) d level provides a screening effect which shields the outer ns electrons from the inward pull of positive nucleus on the outer ns electrons. Thus the effects of the increasing nuclear charge and the shielding effect created due to the expansion of (n-1)d orbital oppose each other. On account of these counter effects, the ionisation potentials increase rather slowly on moving in a period of the first transition series.
First ionisation Potentials
It is evident that the values for the first four 3d block elements (Sc, Ti, V and Cr) differ only slightly from one another. Similarly the values for Fe, Co, Ni and Cu also are fairly close to one another. The value of I1 for Zn is considerably higher. This is due to the extra-stability of 3d10 level which is completely filled in Zn-atom.
Second ionisation Potentials
The second ionisation potentials are seen to increase more or less regularly with the increase of atomic number. The value of I2 for Cr and Cu are higher than those of their neighbours. This is due to the fact that the electronic configurations of Cr+ and Cu+ ions have extra stable 3d5 and 3d10 levels.
There is a sudden fall in the values of ionisation potentials in going from II B (Zn-group elements) to IIIA sub-group. This sudden fall is expalined on the basis that in case of IIIA group elements the electron to be removed is from a 4p-orbital which is incompletely filled, while in case of the II B group elements, the electron to be removed is from 4s-orbital which is completely filled. Thus more energy will be required to remove an electron from a filled 4s-orbital on comparison to that used to remove an electron from a 4p-orbital which is incompletely filled.
Electropositive character of transitional elements as compared to that of alkali metals and alkaline earth metals
The values of first ionisation potentials of transitional elements in most cases lie between those of s-and p-block elements. Thus the transitional elements are less electropositive than the elements of I A and II A groups. Thus, although the transitional elements do form ionic compounds, yet they do not form ionic compounds so readily as the alkali and alkaline earth metals do. Also, unlike the alkali and alkaline earth metals, the transitional elements also have a tendency to form the covalent compounds under certain conditions. Generally the compounds in which the transitional elements show a smaller valency are ionic, while those in which a higher valency is exhibited are covalent in character.
Oxidation States
One of the most important property that distinguishes transition elements from s-and p-block elements is that they show variable oxidation states. s-and p-block elements have oxidiation states either equal to their group number, G or equal to (8-G). The transition elements on the other hand exhibit variable oxidation states.
This unique property is due to the fact that the energy levels of 3d, 4d and 5d orbitals are fairly close to those of 4s, 5s and 6s orbitals respectively and, therefore, in addition to ns electrons and variable number of (n-1) d electrons are also lost in getting various oxidation states.
i) Minimum oxidation state: All the transition elements with the exception of Cr, Cu, Ag, Au and Hg which have a minimum oxidation state of +1 exhibit a minimum oxidation state of +2. In most cases this +2 oxidation state arises due to the loss of two s-electrons.
ii) Maximum oxidation state: Each of the elements in groups III B to VII B can show the maximum oxidation state equal to its group number. Thus, Cr in group VIB shows a maximum oxidation state of +6 in Cr2O72– ion. Most of the elements in VIII group show a maximum oxidation state equal to + 6. However, Ru and Os have a maximum oxidation state equal to +8 which is the highest oxidation state shown by any element.
iii) Relative stability of various oxidation states: The relative stabilities of various oxidation states of 3d-series elements can be correlated with the extra stability of 3d0, 3d5 and 3d10 configurations to some extent. Thus Ti4+ (3d0) is more stable than Ti3+ (3d1) and similarly Mn2+ (3d5) is more stable than Mn4+ (3d4). It may, however, be pointed out that such a generalisation for the relative stability of various oxidation states of 4d and 5d series elements is often rather difficult to realise.
The higher oxidation state of 4d and 5d series elements are generally more stable than those of the elements of 3d series, e.g., Mo, Te (4d series elements) and W, Re (5d-series elements) form the oxyanions: MoVIO42–, TcVII O4–, WVI, O42–, ReVIIO4– which are stable and in which the transition elements concerned show their maximum oxidation states. The corresponding oxyanions of Cr and Mn namely CrVI O42– and MnVII O4– are strong oxidising agents.
Furthermore, the highest oxidation states of second and third row elements are encountered in compounds containing the more electronegative elements viz. F, O and Cl. Thus for the compounds RuVIII O4, OsVIII O4, WVI Cl6 and PtVI F6 there are no analogs being formed by the first row elements. The lower oxidation states particularly +2 and +3 are important in the chemistry of aquated and complex ions of the 3d-series (i.e. first row) elements but these ions are not very important in the chemistry of second (i.e. 4d series) and third (5d-series) row elements. In short it may be said that in going down a sub-group the stability of the higher oxidation states increases while that of lower oxidation states decreases.
v) Formation of ionic and covalent compounds: Transition elements cannot form ionic compounds in higher oxidation states because the loss of more than three electrons is prevented by the higher attractive force exerted (on the electrons) by the nucleus. Higher oxidation states of these metals are not formed by the actual loss of electrons but due to the formation of new hybrid orbitals involving (n-1)d, ns and np orbitals.
The transition elements form ionic bonds in the lower oxidation states and the ionic character of the bond decreases with the increase in the oxidation state. With this decrease in the ionic character of the bond the basic character of the oxides decreases, e.g. MnO (oxidatioin states of Mn = +2) is basic, MnO2 (Mn + +4) is amphoteric and MnO3 (Mn = +6) is acidic.
Complex Formation
The transition elements have an unparallel tendency to form coordination compounds with Lewis Base, i.e., with groups which are able to donate an electron pair. These groups are called ligands. A ligand may be a neutral molecule such as NH3 as or ion such as Cl– or CN– etc.
Co3+ + 6(NH3) ⎯→ [Co(NH3)6]3+
Fe2+ + 6CN- ⎯→ [Fe(CN)6]4–
The reason for transition elements are good in forming complexes are:
i) Small size and high effective nuclear charge
ii) Availability of low lying vacant d–orbitals which can accept lone pair of electrons donated by a ligand.
Catalytic Properties
Transition metals and their compounds are known to act as good catalyst due to the following reasons:
i) Due to the variable oxidation states, they form unstable intermediate compounds and provide a new path with lower activation energy for the reaction (Intermediate compound formation theory)
ii) In some cases the finely divided metals or their compounds provide a large surface area for adsortion and the adsorbed reactants react faster due to the closer contact(Adsorption theory)
  1. TiCl3 Used as Ziegler – Nalta catalyst
  2. V2O5 Converts SO2 to SO3 in the contact process for making H2SO4
  3. MnO2 Used as a catlyst to decompose KClO3 to give O2
  4. Fe Used in Haber – Bosch process for making NH3
  5. FeCl3 Production of CCl4 from CS2 and Cl2
  6. FeSO4 & H2O2 Fenton’s reagent
  7. PdCl2 Wacker process for converting
C2H2 + H2O + PdCl2 to → CH3CHO + 2HCl + Pd
  1. Pd For hydrogenation (Phenol → Cyclohexanone)
  2. Pt/Pto Adam catalyst used for reduction
  3. Pt SO2 → SO3 contact process
  4. Pt Cleaning car exhaust fumes
  5. Cu In manufacture of (CH3)2SiCl2
  6. Cu/V Oxidation of cyclohexanol
  7. CuCl2 Deacon process or making Cl2 from HCl
  8. Ni Raneynickel
Magnetic Properties
When a substance is placed in a magnetic field of strength H, the intensity of the magnetic field in the substance may be greater than or less than H.
If the field in the substance is greater than H, the substance is paramagnetic. Thus paramagnetic materials attract lines of force and if it is free to move, a paramagnetic material will move from a weaker to a stronger part of the field. Paramagnetism arises as a result of unpaired electron in the atom. If the field in the substance is less than H, the substance is diamagnetic. They tend to repel lines of force and move from a strong to weaker part of a magnetic field. In diamagnetic substance, electrons are paired up:
It should be noted that Fe,Co and Ni are ferromagnetic. Ferromagnetic materials may be regarded as special case of paramagnetism in which the moments of individuals atoms become aligned and all point in the same direction . It is also possible to get antiferromagnetism by pairing the moments of adjacent atoms which point in opposite directions. It occurs in salts of Fe3+, Mn2+ etc.
Paramagnetism is expressed in terms of magnetic moment, which is related to the number of unpaired electrons are follows
μ = 📷 B.M.
n = number of unpaired electrons
B.M. = Bohr Magneton, unit of magnetic moment
More the magnetic moment more is the paramagnetic behaviour
Exercise 1: Calculate the magnetic moment of V3+.
Illustration 1: Compare the magnetic moments of Fe2+ and Fe3+
Solution: Following the same procedure as above try to calculate the magnetic moments of the two given species
n for Fe2+=4 μ = 📷 B.M.=📷= 📷 B.M
n for Fe3+ = 5 μ = 📷 B.M = 📷= 📷 B.M
📷
Formation of Alloys
As the transition elements have similar atomic sizes hence in the crystal lattice, one metal can be readily replaced by another metal giving solid solution and smooth alloys. The alloys so formed are hard and have often high melting point.
Interstitial Compound
Transition metals form no. of interstitial compounds, in which they take up atoms of small size e.g. H, C and N in the vacant spaces in the their lattices. The presence of these atoms results in decrease in malleability and ductility of the metals but increases their tensile strength.
Compounds of Iron
Ferrous sulphate (Green vitriol), FeSO4.7H2O
It occurs in nature as copperas and commonly known as hara Kasis.
Preparation i) By dissolving scrap Fe in dil. H2SO4
ii) From Kipp’s waste which contains ferrous sulphate with some free H2SO4; the latter is neutralised with scrap iron forming FeSO4 and hydrogen.
iii) By the action of air and water on iron pyrites. The solution is treated with scrap iron to remove H2SO4 and to reduce Fe3+ sulphate Fe2+ sulphate.
Properties i) Hydrated and anhydrous FeSO4 are green and white in colour respectively. It is isomorphous with epsom salt, MgSO4.7H2O and ZnSO4.7H2O. It effervesces on exposure to air.
ii) Light green crystals of FeSO4 lose water and turn brown on exposure to air, due to oxidation.
iii) On heating at 300°C it gives anhydrous FeSO4 which on further heating gives Fe2O3 and SO2.
iv) Like other ferrous salts, it takes up HNO3 forming brown coloured double compound, Fe(NO)SO4, nitroso ferrous sulphate (Ring test for nitrates).
v) It decolourises acidified potassium permanganate and turns acidified dichromate green (reducing character).
vi) It forms double salts with sulphates of alkali metals with general formula R2SO4.FeSO4.6H2O. With ammonium sulphate, it forms a double salt known as ferrous ammonium sulphate or Mohr’s salt, FeSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O. It does not effervesce. It ionises in solution to gives Fe2+, NH4+ and SO42– ions.
Ferric oxide, Fe2O3
i) It occurs in nature as haematite.
ii) Fe2O3 is a red powder, insoluble in H2O and not acted upon by air or H2O
iii) It is amphoteric in nature and reacts with acids and alkalies.
iv) It is reduced to iron by H2,C and CO.
v) It is used as a catalyst in the oxidation of CO to CO2 in the Bosch process.
Ferric chloride, FeCl3
Preparation i) Hydrated ferric chloride (FeCl3.6H2O) can be prepared by dissolving iron, Fe(OH)3 or ferric oxide in dil. HCl.
ii) Reaction of Fe with dry Cl2 gives anhydrous FeCl3,
Properties i) Anhydrous salt is yellow, deliquescent compound and highly soluble in H2O.
ii) Its aqueous solution is acidic due to hydrolysis.
iii) On heating it gives FeCl2 and Cl2.
iv) It oxidizes H2S to S, SO2 to H2SO4, SnCl2 to SnCl4 and Na2S2O3 to Na2S4O6.
Copper, Silver and gold
a) These metals are commonly called as coinage or currency metals. Their general electronic configuration is (n – 1) d10 ns1. These show variable valencies +1, +2 and +3.
b) Gradation in properteis
i) The nobility increases from copper to gold.
ii) The affinity of oxygen also decreases from Cu to Au.
iii) Copper forms a large number of salts followed by silver followed by gold.
iv) The ease with which the salts of these elements are reduced increases from Cu to Au.
Compounds of Copper
i) Copper sulphate, cupric sulphate or blue vitriol, CuSO4.5H2O.
Preparation i) By treating copper scrap or turnings, cuprous oxide, cupric oxide or malachite with H2SO4.
ii) BY roasting copper pyrites, CuFeS2 in air.
Properties i) It has 5 molecules of H2O of crystallisation; all of which can be removed on heating, to form colourless CuSO4 (again coloured with H2O).
ii) At high temperature it forms cupric oxide.
📷
iii) It forms double salts with alkali sulphates, e.g. K2SO4.CuSO4.6H2O
iv) When treated with NH4OH, it first forms precipitate of cupric hydroxide copper (II) sulphate (Schweitzer’s reagent), used for dissolving cellulose in the manufacture of aritifical silk.
v) It reacts with KCN forming a complex compound K3[Cu(CN)4].
vi) It liberates iodine from soluble iodides.
Uses in the preparation of Bordeaux mixture (CuSO4 solution + lime) which is used to kill moulds and fungi on wines.
Compounds Silver
Silver Nitrate (Lunar caustic) AgNO3
Preparation i) By dissolving Ag in warm dil. HNO3.
Properties i) It is very soluble in H2O and when comes in contact with organic substances (e.g. skin, clothes, etc.) it produces burning sensation and reduced to metallic silver which is white like the moon Luna hence its name Lunar caustic.
ii) On heating above its m.p. it decomposes to silver nitrite.
iii) When treated with soluble halides, it forms the corresponding silver halide.
iv) When treated with alkali, it forms silver oxide which in case of NH4OH dissolves to form complex ion.
v) It reacts with iodine and gives AgIO3 and AgI (when AgNO3 is in excess) or HIO3 and AgI (when I2 is in excess).
vi) With a very dilute solution of Na2S2O3, it gives white ppt. Which quickly changes to yellow, brown and finally black due to the formation of silver sulphide. With conc. solution of sodium thiosulphate, it does not give any ppt.
Uses: In volumetric analysis, photography and in silvering of mirrors.
Silvering of mirrors The process of based on the reduction of an ammonical solution of silver nitrate by some reducing agent like glucose, formaldehyde, tartarate, etc.
Silver Bromide, AgBr
Preparation By adding AgNO3 solution to soluble bromide solution
Properties i) It is insoluble in water and conc. acid but soluble in excess of strong solution of ammonia (cf. AgCl is soluble in dilute solution of NH4OH, AgI is insoluble in NH4OH solution).
ii) Silver halides, are also soluble in KCN and hypo solutions
iii) On heating, it melts to red liquid
iv) It is used as the light sensitive materail in photographic films. It is the most sensitive AgX to photo-reduction.
Zinc, Cadmium and Mercury
a) These are the elements of group 12 having electronic configuration (n – 1) d10 ns2 and +2 oxidation state. In these elements the d-subshell is full, hence these are regarded as non-transition elements which is evident from the following characteristics.
i) They do not show variable valency except mercury
ii) Many of their compounds are white.
iii) Their melting and boiling points are very low.
b) Unique structure of mercurous ion – Unlike Zn and Cd, Hg exhibits +1 well as +2 oxidation state. Thus mercurous ion exists are Hg22+ and not as Hg+.
c) Structure of mercurous ion – It consists of two atoms linked by a covalent and (–Hg – Hg –)2+ and explains the diamagnetic character of mercurous ion were Hg+ (presence of an unpaired electron in 6s orbital) and mercurous salt should have been paramagnetic.
d) Anomalous behaviour of mercury,
i) It is liquid at ordinary temperature while Zn and Cd are solids.
ii) It is less electropositive than hydrogen and therefore does not displace hydrogen from acids while Zn and Cd does.
iii) It does not form hydroxide or peroxide, while Zn and Cd do so
iv) Mercuric oxide, on heating, gives metallic mercury and oxygen while oxides of Zn and Cd are stable towards heat.
v) HgCl2 is covalent while zinc and Cd chlorides are ionic. With NH3, HgCl2 gives a white ppt. of Hg(NH2)Cl, while Zn and Cd salts form complex ions, [M(NH3)4]2+.

Inner Transition Elements

The f-block elements are known as inner transition elements because they involve the filling for inner sub-shells (4f or 5f)
Lanthanides: It consists of elements that follows lanthanum and involve the filling of 4f subshell
Some Important Properties of Lanthanides
1. Electronic Configuration : [Xe] 4fn+1 5d° 6s2 or [Xe] 4fn 5d1 6s2
2. Oxidation State: Lathanides exhibit the oxidation state of +3. Some of them also exhibit the oxidation state of +2 and +4.
3. Colouration: Many of the lanthanides ions are coloured in solid state as well as in solutions. The colour is due to the f-f transition since they have partly filled f-orbitals.
4. Lanthanide Contraction: The steady decrease in the size of lanthanide ions (M3+) with the increase in atomic no. is called lanthanide contraction.
Causes: As we move down the group from left to right in a lanthanide series, the atomic no. increases and for every proton in the nucleus the extra electron goes to 4f orbital. The 4f orbital is too diffused to shield the nucleus effectively, thus there is a gradual increase in the effective nuclear charge experienced by the outer electrons. Consequently , the attraction of the nucleus for the electrons in the outermost shell increases with the increase of atomic number, thus size decreases.

Consequence of Lanthanide Contraction

1. Separation of Lanthanides: Due to the similar sizes of the lanthanides, it is difficult to separate them but due to lanthanide contraction their properties slightly vary (such as ability to form complexes). The variation in the properties is utilized to separate them.
2. Basic Strength of Hydroxide: Due to the lanthanide contraction, size of M3+ ions decreases and there is increase in covalent character in M–OH and hence basic character decreases.
3. Similarity of second and third transition series: The atomic radii of second row transition elements are almost similar to those of the third row transition elements because the increase in size on moving down the group from second to third transition elements is cancelled by the decrease in size due to the lanthanide contraction.
Actinides
It consists of elements that follow Actinium and involve the filling of 5f subshell.
Co-ordination Chemistry
Introduction
(i) Double salt (ii) Complex compounds
e.g. K2SO4, Al2 (SO4)3, 24H2O.
e.g. K4[Fe(CN)6]
Depending upon the no. of donor sites, the ligands may be classified as:
monodentate, bidentate, tridentate etc.
Eg of monodentate : Cl–, Br– (negative ligands), H2O, NH3 (neutral ligand)
Eg of bidentate: (–CH2—NH2 —)2 and C2O42–
📷
Werner’s Co-ordination Theory
Werner’s Co-ordination theory in 1893 was the first attempt to explain the bonding in coordination complexes. Werner was able to explain the nature of bonding in complexes, and he concluded that in complexes the metal shows two different sorts of valency;
  1. Primary Valencies: The complex commonly exists as a positive ion. The primary valency is the number of charges on the complex ion. The complex [Co(NH3)6]Cl3 actually exists as [Co(NH3)6]3+ and 3Cl–. Thus the primary valency is 3, as there are three ionic bonds.
  2. Secondary Valencies: These are directional. In modern terms the number of secondary valencies equals the number of ligand atoms coordinated to the metal. This is now called the coordination number. Secondary valencies are directional, and so a complex ion has a particular shape, e.g. the complex ion [Co(NH3)6]3+ is octahedral. Whenever the complex is formed the secondary valency should always be satisfied. This he proved with the following example.
CoCl3.6NH3 + AgNO3 ⎯→ 3AgCl
CoCl3.5NH3 + AgNO3 ⎯→ 2AgCl
CoCl3.4NH3 + AgNO3 ⎯→ 1AgCl
Werner deduced that in CoCl3. 6NH3 the three chlorines acted as primary valencies, and the six ammonias as secondary valencies. In modern terms the complex is written [Co(NH3)6]Cl3. The three Cl– are ionic and hence are precipitated as AgCl by AgNO3. In the second complex two moles of AgCl is precipitated indicating the presence of two chlorine atoms in the outer sphere i.e., in order to fulfill the secondary valency one chlorine from the outer sphere drifts into the inner sphere. Similar is the case with the third complex. So actual structure becomes
[Co(NH3)6]Cl3, [Co(NH3)5 Cl]Cl2, [Co(NH3)4 Cl2]Cl,
IUPAC Nomenclature for Co-Ordination Compounds
  1. Positive part of a co-ordination compound is named first and is followed by the negative part.
  2. In naming the complex ion, the name of the ligands are given in alphabetical order regardless of their charge followed by metal.
  3. When there are several ligands of the same kind, we normally use the prefixes di, tri, tetra, penta and hexa to show the number of ligands of that type. An exception occurs when the name of the ligand includes a number (di, tri etc). To avoid confusion in such cases bis, tris and tetrakis are used instead of di, tri and tetra and the name of the ligand is placed in brackets.
  4. i) Negative ligands end in 'O', for example:
F− − Fluoro H− − hydrido OH− − hydroxo
Cl− Chloro I− − iodo NO2− − nitro.
ii) Neutral groups have no special endings, Examples include NH3 ammine, H2O aqua, CO carbonyl and NO nitrosyl. The ligands N2 and O2 are called dinitrogen and dioxygen. Organic ligands are usually given their common names for example phenyl, methyl, ethylenediamine, pyridine, triphenylphosphine.
iii) Positive ligands end in - ium e.g. NH2−NH3+ hydrazinium.
The spellings of ammine with two m’s distinguishes it from organic amines.
  1. The oxidation state of the central metal is shown by Roman numeral in brackets immediately following its name (i.e. no space, e.g. titanium(IV) ).
  2. Sometimes a ligand may be attached through different atoms. Thus M−NO2 is called nitro and M−ONO is called nitrito. Similarly SCN group may bond M−SCN thiocyanato or M−NCS isothiocyanato. These may be named systematically thiocyanato−S or thiocyanato−N to indicate which atom is bonded to the metal. This convention may be extended to other cases where the mode of linkage is ambiguous.
  3. When writing the formula of complexes, the complex ion should be enclosed by square brackets. The metal is named first, then the co-ordinated groups are listed in the order; negative ligands, neutral ligands; positive ligands (and alphabetically according to the first symbol with in each group).
  4. If a complex contains two or more metal atoms, it is termed polynuclear. The bridging ligands which link the two metal atoms together are indicated by the prefix μ. If there are two or more bridging groups of the same kind, this is indicated by di-μ, tri-μ etc. Bridging groups are listed alphabetically with the other groups unless the symmetry of the molecule allows a simpler name. If a bridging group bridges more than two metal atoms it is shown as μ3, μ4, μ5 or μ6 to indicate how many atoms it is bonded to.
  5. The complete metal name consists of the name of the metal, followed by-ate if the complex is an anion, which in turn is followed by the oxidation number of the metal, indicated by roman numerals in parenthesis. (An oxidation state of zero is indicated by 0 in parenthesis). When there is a latin name for the metal, it is used to name the anion (except for mercury). These names are given in the following table.
English name
Latin name
Anion name
Copper
Cuprum
Cuprate
Gold
Aurum
Aurate
Iron
Ferrum
Ferrate
Lead
Plumbum
Plumbate
Silver
Argentum
Argentate
Tin
Stannum
Stannate
Exercise 2: Write down the IUPAC name of the complex (1) K4[Fe(CN)6].
Illustration 2: IUPAC name of K2[Fe(NC)3Cl2(NH3)2]
Solutions: The positive part is named first followed by the negative part. In the negative part the names are written in alphabetical order followed by metal. So the name is Potassiumdiamminedichlorotricyano-N- ferrate (III)
Illustration 3: IUPAC name of [Co(NH3)4(NO2)2]Cl
Solution: In the earlier two examples the negative part was the complex part while in this case the positive part is the complex. So it is named first with ligands in alphabetical order followed by metal (but not ending in –ate as the metal belong to the positive part of the complex). This is followed by the negative part.
So the name is Tetraamminedinitrocobalt (III) chloride.
Illustration 4: Now let take complex where there is an organic ligand like ethylene diamine. [Co(NH3)2Cl(en)2]Cl2
Solution: The approach is same as the earlier one with the exception that in case of -en which is actually ethylene diammine the term bis – comes to indicate two – en groups instead of – bi
The name is Diamminechlorobis (ethylene diamine) cobalt(III) chloride
Illustration 5: Write IUPAC name of [Pt(Py)4][PtCl4].
Solution: Here both the positive and negative part has the same metal. Procedure is same earlier are the IUPAC name. Tetrapyridineplatinum(II) tetrachloroplatinate(II).
Illustration 6: Write the IUPAC name of [Fe(NH3)4O2C2O4]Cl
Solution: In this charge on the complex part is +1. The ligand oxalato has a charge of –2, so iron should be in +3 state meaning O2 to be neutral. Now had O2 been superoxo (O2–) or peroxo (O2– – ) the negative charge of the ligands should have been –3 and –4 respectively. In that case Iron has to be +4 and +5 which is not possible. So O2 will behave as a neutral ligand and IUPAC name is Tetraammineoxalatodioxygeniron (III) chloride.
Bonding in Co-Ordination Compounds
Pauling proposed a simple valence bond theory to explain bonding in Co-ordination Compounds According to this theory:
  1. Central metals loses a requisite no. of electrons to form the ion.
  2. The cation orbitals hybridize to form a new set of equivalent hybridized orbitals with definite directional properties.
  3. Each ligand contains a lone - pair of electrons. A covalent bond is formed by the overlap of a vacant hybridized metal orbital and a filled orbital of the ligand.
  4. If the complex have unpaired electron then it will be paramagnetic if not then it will be diamagnetic.
To understand the valence bond concept let us take some examples of co-ordination compounds.
1. [Cr(NH3)6]3+, the central metal is in +3 oxidation state
Orbitals of Cr3+ion
📷
d2sp3 hybridized orbitals of Cr3+
📷
d2sp3hybrid orbitals of [Cr(NH3)6]3+
📷
shape is octahedral
2. [Ni(CN4)]2-, Ni is in +2 oxidation state
Atomic orbitals of Ni
📷
dsp2 hybridized orbitals of Ni+2
📷
Hybridized orbitals of [Ni(CN)4]2-
📷
shape is square planar
Illustration 7: [FeF6]4– is an outer orbital complex while [Fe(CN)6]4– is an inner orbital complex
Solution: The oxidation state of Fe in both complexes is +2. i.e, the configuration is 4s°3d6.
📷
Now F– is a very weak ligand compared to CN–. Now a strong field ligand is one which can pair up the electrons while a weak field ligand is one which cannot pair up. So in presence of CN– the electrons in the d – orbitals of Fe2+ will be paired up. This will leave two vacant 3d orbitals which will then undergo hybridisation to form d2sp3. As the 3d orbital has participated with 4s and 4p orbitals for hybridisation it is called inner orbital complex. While had the outer d orbital ie 4 d participated with 4s and 4p, then the complex should have been called outer orbital complex. This happens in [FeF6]4–. In presence of F– which is a weak field ligand, electrons are not paired up and therefore there is no vacant 3d orbitals and so it is the outer 4d that participates.
📷
Moreover in [Fe(CN)6]4– there is no unpaired electrons and hence diamagnetic while in [FeF6]4– there are unpaired electron, hence paramagnetic.
State of Hybridisation and Magnetic Behaviour of Some Co-ordination Complex
Metal complex

Metal ion

Configuration of metal ion
Hybridiation of metal ion orbitals for ligand bonds
Number of unpaired electtrons
Magnetic behaviour
[V(H2O)6]3+
V3+
d2
sp3d2
2
Paramagnetic
[Cr(NH3)6]3+
Cr3+
d3
d2sp3
3
Paramagnetic
[MnF6]3–
Mn3+
d4
sp3d2
4
Paramagnetic
[Mn(CN)6]3–
Mn3+
d4
d2sp3
2
Paramagnetic
[Fe(CN)6]3–
Fe3+
d5
d2sp3
1
Paramagnetic
[FeF6]3–
Fe3+
d5
sp3d2
5
Paramagnetic
[FeCl4]2–
Fe2+
d6
sp3
4
Paramagnetic
[CoF6]3–
Co3+
d6
sp3d2
4
Paramagnetic
[Co(CN)6]3+
Co3+
d6
d2sp3
0
Diagmagnetic
[Ni(Cl)4]2–
Ni2+
d8
sp3
2
Paramagnetic
[Ni(CN)4]2–
Ni2+
d8
dsp2
0
Dimagnetic
[CuCl4]2–
Cu2+
d9
sp3
1
Paramagnetic
[ZnNH3)4]2+
Zn2+
d10
sp3
0
Diamagnetic
aramagnetic
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 07:51 rajusingh79 ORES & METALLURGY

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1DHqWMif0n7dnCRYI5EEU5yjB6jVF5QVu/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true

ORES & METALLURGY

Commercially important ores of iron, copper, lead, magnesium, aluminium, tin and silver. Carbon reduction process (iron and tin), Self reduction process (copper and lead), Electrolytic reduction process (magnesium and aluminium), Cyanide process (silver and gold).
Introduction
The earth’s crust is the main source of metals. The occurrence of metal in native or in combined state in the earth’s crust along with a number of rocky and other impurities depends upon the chemical nature of metals. Metals having less electropositive character have less affinity for oxygen, moisture and occur in free or metallic or native state i.e., in uncombined state e.g. Au, Pt , Ag etc. On the other hand metals with higher electropositive character occurs in combined state i.e., as compounds.
The compound of a metal found in nature is called a mineral. A mineral may be a single compound or a complex mixture. Those minerals from which metal can be economically extracted are called ores. Thus all ores are minerals but all minerals are not ores. For e.g. copper occurs in nature in the form of several minerals like Cu2O, Cu2S, CuFeS2, but copper pyrites is considered as the most economical mineral for the extraction of the metal. Hence copper pyrites is the chief ore of copper.
Ores may be divided into four groups:
i) Native Ores: These ores contain the metal in free state eg. Silver gold etc. These are usually formed in the company of rock or alluvial impurities like clay, sand etc.
ii) Oxidised Ores: These ores consist of oxides or oxysalts (eg. carbonates, phosphates, nitrates, sulphates, silicates etc.) of metal. The important oxide ores include, Fe2O3, Al2O3.2H2O etc. and important cabonate ores are limestone (CaCO3), Calamine (ZnCO3) etc.
iii) Sulphurised Ores: These ores consist of sulfides of metals like iron, lead, mercury etc. Examples are iron pyrites (FeS2). galena (PbS), Cinnabar (HgS)
iv) Halide ores: Examples include horn silver (AgCl), fluorspar (CaF2) etc.
Metallurgy
It is the process of extracting a metal from its ores. The following operations are carried out for obtaining the metal in the pure form.
i) Crushing the ore
ii) Dressing or concentration of the ore.
iii) Working up of the concentrated ore
v) Purification or refining of the metal.

Various Metallurgical Process

Crushing and Grinding: The big stones of ore are first crushed into small pieces in gyratory crushers and then ground to powder form. The process of grinder crushed ore into fine powder is known as pulverization.
Concentration / Dressing of Ore: Presence of earthy matter, sand limestone etc in the ores are called gangue or matrix. The removal of these impurities from ores is known as ore-dressing or ore-concentration. Process used to concentrate an ore is known as beneficiation process. Concentration can be carried out in one of the following ways depending on the nature of metal.
a) Hand-picking: The impurities which are distinguishable to naked eye can be easily separated by hand-picking.
b) Levigation or Gravity separation: This method of concentrating the ore is based on the difference in densities of the ore particles and impurities. Generally oxide and carbonate ores are concentrated by this method.
c) Magnetic concentration: This method is adopted when either the ore or the impurities are magnetic in nature. The two can be separated from each other by means of magnetic separators. By this method chromite ( an ore of chromium) being magnetic can be separated from the siliceous impurity. Similarly SnO2( non magnetic) and (TiO2) magnetic can be separated.
d) Froth Floatation Process: This process is mainly suitable for sulfide ores. The process is based on the different wetting characteristics of the ore and gangue particles with water and oil. The former is preferentially wetted by oil and the later by water. In certain cases other chemical compounds are also added during the process. These reagent act either as collectors, activators or depressants e.g. of collectors is ethyl xanthate, that of activators is copper sulfate while that of depressant is sodium cyanide.
e) Electrostatic concentration: This method is based upon the fact that the particles which are good conductors of electricity becomes electrically charged under the influence of an electrostatic field and are thus repelled by the electrode carrying the like charge. This is used to separate lead sulfide and zinc sulfide which are found together in nature.
f) Chemical Method: This process is done in cases where the ore is required in a very pure form Eg. in the concentration of bauxite containing ferric oxides, TiO2 and silica as impurities.
Calcination and Roasting
Calcination is a process in which the ore is heated, generally in absence of air to expel water from a hydrated oxide carbondioxide from a carbonate at a temperature below their melting points. For eg.
Al2O3.2H2O ⎯→ Al2O3 + 2H2O
CaCO3 ⎯→ CaO + CO2
Roasting is a term used to denote the process in which the ore (usually sulfide) alone or mixed with other materials is heated usually in presence of air, at temperature below their melting points
2ZnS + 3O2⎯→ 2ZnO +2SO2
CuS + 2O2 ⎯→ CuSO4
Calcination proceeds only with expulsion of some small molecules like water, CO2, SO2 etc. without any chemical change while during roasting definite chemical changes like oxidation, chlorination takes place. Calcination and roasting are generally carried out in reverberatory furnace. In this type of furnace the charge is placed on the hearth and heated by the flames deflected from its concave roof.
Leaching
This involves treatment of the ore with suitable reagent (acids bases or other reagents) which can selectively dissolve the ore but not the impurities. For eg. In the purification of white bauxite ore NaOH is used as the reagent to dissolved Al2O3 leaving behind Fe2O3 (impurity)
Al2O3+2NaOH→2NaAlO2+H2O
NaAlO2+2H2O→ Al(OH)3NaOH
2Al(OH)3 📷Al2O3+3H2O
Pure alumina
Reduction to free metal
The calcined or roasted ore is then reduced to the metallic state in either of the following ways.
a) Smelting: The oxides of less electropositive metals like Pb, Zn, Fe, Cu are reduced by strongly heating them with coke or coal. Reduction of oxide with carbon at high temperature is known as smelting. Blast furnace is used in reduction of iron oxides while reverberatory furnace in used in the reduction of tin oxide.
b) Electrolytic Reduction: Highly electropositive metals like Na, K, Al are extracted by electrolysis of their oxides, hydroxides or chlorides in fused state and the metal is liberated at cathode Eg. aluminum is obtained by electrolysis of alumina mixed with cryolite which acts as a electrolyte. Oxides of highly electropositive metals can’t be reduced with carbon because such metals react with carbon to form carbide at high temperature.
c) Reduction by Aluminum ( Alumino – Thermit process): Certain oxides like Fe2O3, Cr2O3 are not satisfactory reduced by carbon. In such cases Al is used as a reducing agent. An example is the extraction of Cr from Cr2O3.
Cr2O3 + 3Al ⎯→ Al2O3 + 2Cr + heat
Fe2O3 + 2Al ⎯→ Al2O3 + 2Fe+ heat
Apart from this reduction can also take place by precipitation and air. The former is known as hydrometallurgy and the latter is auto reduction.
All these processes give metals which are not totally pure. But in some cases we need metals of nearly cent percent purity. That may be achieved in either of the following ways depending on the metal.
a) Liquation process
b) Distillation process
c) Oxidation process (Bessemerisation, cupellation, poling)
d) Electro refining
e) Van Arkel process
f) Zone refining
Flux
The ores even after concentration contain some earthy matter called gangue which is heated combine with this earthy matter to form an easily fusible material called as slag. Such a substance is known as flux.
📷
Fluxes are of the following two types:
i) Acidic fluxes like silica, borax etc. These are used when the gangue is basic such as lime or other metallic oxides like MnO, FeO, etc. The chemical reaction which takes place in removing a basic gangue is follows:
📷
ii) basic fluxes like CaO, lime stone (CaCO3), magnesite (MgCO3), haematite (Fe2O3) etc. These fluxes are used when the gangue is acidic like silica, P4O10 etc. For example
📷
📷
Different types of Furnaces
a) Blast Furnace: It is used for smelting iron, copper and lead ores. It has a tall structure made of steel plates rivetted together lined inside with fire bricks. The furnace is provided with an arrangement for blowing air near the base, a slag hole, a tapping hole for removing the molten metal and an exist for waste gases near the top. The charge is introduced at the top. The mouth of the furnace is closed by a special arrangement through which the charge is introduced.
b) Reverberatory Furnace: It is used for calcination, roasting or for smelting. The charge in the powdered form along with a flux is placed on the hearth of the furnace. The fuel is placed on grate and the flames are deflected from its low sloping roof. This furnace is used in case of copper, tin lead, and wrought iron.
c) Muffle Furnace: A furnace in which the charge contianer is heated from all sides is called muffle furnace. The burnt materials including the vapours of the metal are allowed to escape through the same opening. The metal is obtained by condensing the vapours. In Belgian process for extracting zinc, the retorts act as muffles and prolongs help in completing the condensation.
d) Bessemer Converter: It is a pear-shaped furnace made of steel plates lined inside with lime or magnesium oxide. It is fixed on pivots and can be tilted in any direction. It is provided with pipes through which hot air can be blown for heating purposes.
Illustration 1: Explain the following processes as applied to metallurgy
i) Amalgamation
ii) Hydrometallurgy
iii) Solvent Extraction
Solution: i) Amalgamation: this process is used for the extractioin of noble metals like gold and silver from the native ores. The finely crushed ore is brought into contact with mercury which combines with the metal forming its amalgam. The metal is then recovered by distilling the amalgam.
ii) Hydrometallurgy or precipitation by a more electropositive metal: Hydrometallurgy is the process of bringing the metal into solution by the action of suitable chemical reagents (e..g., sodium cyanide solution or chlorine in present of water etc.) followed by recovery of the metal by the use of a proper precipitating agent which is a more electropositive metal.
For example, poor ores of silver are suspended in a dilute solution of sodium cyanide and air is blown through it when the silver present goes into solution as the argentocyanide complex. From this solution the metal is precipitated by adding zinc turnigs.
4Ag + 8NACN + O2 (air) 2H2O ⎯→ 4Na [Ag(CN)2] + 4NaOH
or AgCl + 2NaCN ⎯→ Na[Ag(CN)2] + NaCl
2Na [Ag(CN)2] + Zn ⎯→ Na2[Zn(CN)4] + 2Ag↓
iii) Solvent Extraction: Solvent extraction is the latest separation technique and has become popular because of its elegance, simplicity and speed. The method is based on preferential solubility principles.
Solvent or liquid-liquid extraction is based on the principle that a solute can distribute itslf in a certain ratio between two immiscible solvents, one of which is usually water and the other an organic solvent such as benzene, carbon tetrachloride or chloroform. In certain cases, the solute can be more or less completely transferred into the organic phase. The technique can be used for purpose of preparation, purification, enrichment, separation and analysis.
Illustration 2: Explain the following process as applied to metallurgy
i) Zone refining (Fractional crystallization)
ii) Electro-refining
iii) Van-Arkel Method
Solution: i) Zone refining (Fractional crystallization): This method is employed for preparing extremely pure metals. This method is based upon the principle that when a molten solution of the impure metal is allowed to cool, the pure metal crystilises cut while the impurities remain in the melt.
ii) Electro-refining: In this method, the impure metal is converted into a block which forms the anode while cathode is a rod or plate of pure metal. These electrodes are suspended in an electrolyte which is the solution of a soluble salt of the metal usually a double salt of the metal. When electric current is passed, metal ions from the electrolyte are deposited at the cathode in the form of pure metal while an equivalent amount of metal dissolves from the anode and goes into the electrolyte solution as metal ion. The soluble impurities present in the crude metal anode go into the solution while the insoluble impurities settle down below the anode as anode mud.
iii) Van-Arkel Method: In this method, the metal is converted into it volatile unstable compound such as iodide leaving behind the impurities. The unstable compound thus formed is decomposed to get the pure metal.
Ti(s) + 2F2(s) 📷TiF4(g) 📷 + 2F2(g)
Exercise 1: i) Which furnace is meant for roasting and calcination?
ii) If FeO is present in the ore as impurity then what type of flux is added to remove it?
Extraction of Sodium
Ores of Sodium
Sodium chloride or common salt (NaCl)
Sodium Nitrate or Chile Salt peter (NaNO3)
Sodium Carbonate (Na2CO3)
Sodium Sulphate (Na2SO4)
Two processes are in practice for extracting Na
  1. Castner’s process
  2. Down’s process
Castner process
Principle : Fused caustic soda is electrolysed
Cathode : Steel
Anode : Nickel
Cathode reaction
OH– – e ⎯→ OH
4OH ⎯→ 2H2O + O2↑
The water formed at cathode then dissociates as H2O 📷 H+ + OH– and H+ then gets discharged at cathode
H+ + e ⎯→ H; 2H ⎯→ H2;
at anode OH– – e– ⎯→ OH; 2OH ⎯→ H2O + 📷O2↑
The bath temperature is kept higher than the melting point of Na (318°) to dissolve Na in NaOH. Metallic sodium is taken from the cathode chamber from time to time with spoon.
Advantages
  1. Since the temperature is 327°C, not much Na is vaporised
  2. Valuable H2, O2 are produced
Disadvantages
  1. Costly raw material caustic soda is used
  2. 50% of the electrical energy is utilised for the production of Na and 50% wastage for the hydrolysis of water.
Down’s Process
Principle
Raw materials used : Anhydrous CaCl2 (66.8%), NaCl (32.2%)
Temperature : 600°C
Anode : Graphite
Cathode : Iron
NaCl ⎯→ Na+ + Cl–
Cathode reaction : Na+ + e ⎯→ Na (Reduction)
Anode reaction : Cl– – e ⎯→ Cl (oxidation)
2Cl ⎯→ Cl2
The metal produced at cathode is collected form the surface of the molten electrolyte and then collected kept under kerosene.
Comparison between Castner’s process and Down’s Process
Castner’s Process
Down’s process
  1. Molten NaOH is used
  2. Mixture of NaCl (32%) and anhydrous CaCl2 (66.8%) are used
  3. Temperature maintained 320–330°C
  4. Temperature of the both 600°C
  5. Iron vessel is the electrolyte cell
  6. Iron vessel lined inside in the acid resistant refractory.
  7. 50% electrical energy is utilised for the preparation of Na.
  8. Whole electrical energy is utilised.
Extraction of Potassium
Ores of Potassium
Sylvine KCl
Kainite KCl. MgSO4. 3H2O
Carnallite KCl.MgCl2. 6H2O
Felspar KAlSiO8
Saltpetre KNO3
Principle of Extraction of Potassium
Potassium can be extracted by reducing molten KCl in the metallic sodium at 850°C.
Na(g) + KCl(l) 📷 NaCl + K(g)
K being more volatile distills off. Reactivities of K is similar to Na. Potassium thus obtained is stored under kerosene.
Extraction of Calcium
Ores of Calcium
CaCO3 (Lime stone)
CaSO4.2H2O (Gypsum or alabaster)
Ca3(PO4) (Phosphorite)
Ca(PO4)2.CaF2 (Fluorapatite)
CaO.Al2O3.2SiO2 (Lime feldspar)
Extraction of Calcium
Flow chart diagram
📷
Illustration 3: Fluorspar is added to the anhydrous CaCl2 in the extraction of metallic calcium - Explain why?
Solution: This is because of the fact that, the melting point of CaCl2 is 780°C. Consequently much electrical energy is consumed to fuse CaCl2 at this high temperature. As a result the cost of production of calcium is increased. But if a little fluorsper is added to CaCl2, the melting point of CaCl2 is reduced from 780°C to 664°C. As a result the electrolysis of CaCl2 can be carried out a relatively low temperature. Consequently the consumption of electrical energy becomes much low and at the same time the cost of production becomes low. Besides this, the addition of CaF2 lowers the viscosity of the electrolyte and increases its electrical conductivity.
Extraction of Magnesium
Ores of Magnesium
Magnesite : MgCO3
Dolomite : CaCO3.MgCO3
Kieserite : MgSO4.H2O
Kainite : K2SO4.MgSO4.3H2O
Carnalite : KCl. MgCl2.6H2O
Talc : 3MgO. 4SiO2.H2O
Spinel : MgO. Al2O3
Extraction of Magnesium:
Process : Electrolysis
Anode : Graphite rod
Cathode : Iron pot (rectangular)
Electrolyte : MgCl2 (molten,75%),NaCl (25%)
Temperature : 700°C
Dissociation Step : MgCl2 📷 Mg+2 + 2Cl–
Cathode reaction : Mg2+ + 2e ⎯→ Mg
Anode reaction : 2Cl– – 2e ⎯→ Cl2↑
From sea water anhydrous MgCl2 is obtained by the following reactions
MgCl2 + Ca(OH)2 ⎯→ Mg(OH)2↓ + CaCl2
Mg(OH)2 + 2HCl ⎯→ MgCl2 + 2H2O
MgCl2.6H2O crystallises.
MgCl2. 6H2O📷 MgCl2+6H2O
By thermal reduction Mg can be produced
CaC2 + MgCl2 📷 CaCl2 + Mg + 2C
Exercise 2: In extraction of Magnesium by electrolytic reduction process NaCl is added to MgCl2 – Explain why?
Extraction of Zinc
Ores of Zinc
Zincite (ZnO)
Franklinite (ZnO, Fe2O3)
Zinc Blende (ZnS)
Calamine (ZnCO3)
Willemite (ZnSiO3, ZnO)
Electric Calamine (ZnSiO3, ZnO, H2O)
Principle
  1. Concentration of Zinc blende (ZnS) by froth floatation process with pine oil (foaming agent), sodium xanthate (collectors) and little acid. The oil forms froth with air and at first galena rises to surface and are removed. Next the ZnS particles are collected from the top.
  2. Roasting: Temperature: 860 – 900°C
2ZnS + 3O2 📷 2ZnO + 2SO2↑
2ZnS + 2O2 📷 ZnSO4
2ZnSO4 📷 2ZnO + 2SO2 + O2
  1. Smelting - Carbon reduction
  2. Belgian process
Raw material: Powdered coke (1/5 th weight of roasted ZnO)
Temperature: 1300° – 1400°C
Heating process is carried out and Zn(vapour) is formed and condenses Blue flame from the prolong is observed till the end of the reaction (due to formation of CO).
ZnO + C 📷 Zn + CO
Refining of Zn
Electrical refining is done by using impure Zn as the anode and ZnSO4 electrolyte and pure Zn as the cathode. The following electrolysis reaction will take place.
ZnSO4 📷 Zn+2 + SO4–2
Anode reaction: Zn – 2e 📷 Zn+2
Cathode reaction: Zn+2 + 2e 📷Zn(s)
Extraction of Mercury
Ore of Mercury: Cinnabar (HgS)
Modern Process: Cinnabar is crushed to powder and the crushed ore is then concentrated by forth flotation process. The concentrated ore is then charged in a shaft furnace through a hopper with charcoal. Furnace is fired and the following reaction takes place.
2HgS + 3O2 ⎯→ 2HgO + 2SO2↑
HgO + C ⎯→ Hg + CO↑
Extraction of Silver
Ores of Silver
Silver glance or Argentite (AgS)
Horn silver (AgCl)
Ruby Silver (3Ag2S, Sb2S3)
Silver Copper glance or stromeyerite (Ag2S, Cu2S)
Extraction of Silver
  1. Concentration: Crushed powder is concentrated by froth floatation process.
  2. The concentrated Ag2S is then treated with 0.5% solution of NaCN in presence of air.
Ag2S + 2NaCN 📷2AgCN ↓ + Na2S
AgCN + NaCN 📷Na[Ag(CN)2]
4Na2S + 5O2(air) + 2H2O 📷2Na2SO4 + 4NaOH + 2S
  1. Precipitation of Silver
As, 📷
Hence Zn will replace Ag from the complex as follows
2Na[Ag(CN)2] + Zn ⎯→ Na2[Zn(CN)4] + 2Ag↓
  1. Electro-refining: Metallic silver thus obtained contains impurities like Zn, Cu, Au etc. It is purified by electro-refining process. The electrolytic bath contains AgNO solution with 10% HNO3. Impure silver sheets are used as anode and thin sheets of pure silver are used as cathode. As electric current is passed through the electrolyte , the anode gradually dissolves and pure silver is deposited on the cathode. Impurities like Zn and Cu go into the solution while gold settles down at the anode as anode mud.
Extraction of Tin
Ores of Tin
Cassiterite or tinstone (SnO2)
Extraction
  1. Concentration of ore: Crushed ore is washed by a stream of water and mainly FeWO4 is present at this stage.
  2. Roasting: S, As present in the one ore are volatalised away in the form of their oxides in a revolving furnace. Iron and copper present in the ore are converted into their oxides and sulphates.
  3. Electromagnetic separation: From the hopper the dry ore is supplied and from the belt the FeWO4 is seperated by magnetic field. It contains 75%. SnO2 (black tin)
  4. Carbon reduction:
SnO2 + 2C ⎯→ Sn + 2CO
Temperature 1200 – 1300°C
Furnace: Reverberatory furnace.
The molten tin is collected as it got 99% pure Sn. The upper layer of the slag contains 10-20% Sn. This is smelted with coke.
SnSiO3 + CaO + C ⎯→ Sn + CaSiO3 + CO
Slag
  1. Refining: This is carried out by sweating process. Sn melts leaving behind Fe, CuO, N. Tin thus obtained is 99.5% pure.
Recovery of Sn from Scrap
The scrap tin plates, free from dirts are reacted by Cl2 to form SnCl4. SnCl4 being liquid is voltalised away and is condensed.
SnCl4 + 2H2O ⎯→ SnO2 + 4HCl
SnO2 + 2C ⎯→ Sn + 2CO↑
Extraction of Copper
Copper glance or Chalcocite: Cu2S
Chalcopyrites(copper pyrites): Cu2S⋅Fe2S3
Cuprite Cu2O
Malachite [CuCO3.Cu(OH)2]
Azurite [2CuCO3.Cu(OH)2]
Extraction of Metallic Copper
1. Concentration of the ore by froth floatation process: Copper pyrites contains only (2-3)% of copper. The rest of the ore contains iron or sulphide, silica, silicious materials, sulphur, arsenic etc. as impurities. Froth flotation by Xanthate and pine oil. The froth is collected and dried when concentrated ore is obtained which contains 25-30% of Cu.
2. Roasting
Cu2S.Fe2S3 + O2 ⎯→ Cu2S + 2FeS + SO2↑
Cu2S.Fe2S3 + 4O2 ⎯→ Cu2S + 2FeO + 3SO2↑
2Cu2S + 3O2 ⎯→ 2Cu2O + 2SO2↑
Cu2O + FeS ⎯→ Cu2S + FeO
3. Smelting of the roasted ore in blast furnace: material required
  1. Roasted ore
  2. Lime stone
  3. Coke (used as fuel)
  4. Silica (used as flux)
  5. Lime stone (used to remove excess silica)
Reactions occurring given as follows
2FeS + 3O2 ⎯→ 2FeO + 2SO2↑
Cu2O + FeS ⎯→ Cu2S + FeO
FeO + SiO2 ⎯→ FeSiO3 (removed as slag)
CaO + SiO2 ⎯→ CaSiO3 (removal as slag)
4. Self reduction in Bessemer Converter
Reactions involved are,
2FeS + 3O2 ⎯→ 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO + SiO2 ⎯→ FeSiO3 (slag)
2Cu2S + 3O2 ⎯→ 2Cu2O + 2SO2↑
Cu2S + 2O2 ⎯→ Cu2SO4
When 2/3 of the cuprous sulphide is oxiidsed, the balst is stopped. The produced Cu2O and Cu2SO4 are reduced by the rest of cuprous sulphide to produce metallic copper with the evolution of SO2.
Cu2S + 2Cu2O ⎯→ 6Cu + SO2↑
Cu2SO4 + Cu2S ⎯→ 4Cu + 2SO2↑
As the molten copper cools, it gives off the dissolved of SO2. The SO2 gas escaping in the form of bubbles, leaves the surface of the metal with full of cavities which gives the metal a blistered appearnace. This is why the metal thus obtained is by blister copper.
5. Refining
Electrorefining
Anode: Impure copper obtained above
Cathode: Pure copper
Electrolyte: 15% CuSO4 solution + 5% H2SO4
When electric current is passed through the electrolyte, the anodes gradually dissolve and pure copper is deposited on the cathodes which gradually grow in size. The impurities like Fe, Zn, Ni etc., dissolved in the solution as sulphates while gold, silver, platinum settle down below the anode as anode mud.
Reactions coming are as follows
CuSO4 📷 Cu+2 + SO4–2
At anode: Cu – 2e ⎯→ Cu+2
At cathode: Cu+2 + 2e ⎯→ Cu
Exercise 3: Name the by products obtained during the extraction of copper from copper pyrties.
Extraction of Iron
Ores of Iron
Magnetite (Fe3O4)
Red haematite (Fe2O3)
Brown haematic Limonite or (Fe2O3.3H2O)
Spathic iron or sidenite (FeCO3)
Iron pyrites (FeS2), Copper pyrites (CuFeS2)
📷
Extraction of Cast Iron
  1. Dressing of the ores: The iron ores are first broken into small pieces 3-5 cm in size and washed with water to remove clay & sand.
  2. Roasting or Calcination
During roasting S, As, P are oxidised to the respective oxides.
S + O2 ⎯→ SO2↑
4As + 3O2 ⎯→ 2As2O3↑
FeCO3 decomposes as,
FeCO3 ⎯→ FeO + CO2↑
Fe2O3.3H2O loses water
Fe2O3.3H2O ⎯→ Fe2O3 + 3H2O
Fe3O4 is decomposed to ferrous oxide and ferric oxides.
Fe3O4 ⎯→ FeO + Fe2O3
Ferrous oxide reacts with silica to forms ferrous silicate at high temperature.
FeO + SiO2 ⎯→ FeSiO3
But the conversion of FeO into Fe2O3 will prevent the formation of FeSiO3. Due to escape of gases and moisture entire mass of the ore becomes porous causing the increase in the effective surface area.
3. Semlting in the Blast furnance
Blast furnace is a shaft furnace made of steel plate of 20-30 in with 4 – 4.6 diameter.
Bosh: The diameter of the furnace gradually increases from the top downwards. Widest part of the furnace is called Bosh. At above 2 m. tuyeres are there through which hot air blast is blown into the furnace.
Hearth: Below the bosh this region exists. (1) slag notch is at higher height and (2) tap hole for metal passage at lower position from the bottom. At the top of the furnace the hopper is there which is cup and cone arrangement. Through this charge is introduced till the charge bed in the furnance is 4/5th the of the furnace. Hot air at 700°C is forced into the furnace through the tuyeres. The thermal gradient inside exists from 1800°C (hearth) to 400°C – 900°C in the upper region. Near the bosh the temperature varies from 1200°C – 1300°C chemical reactions which take place are.
  1. At 1200°C near the tuyeres,
C + O2 ⎯→ CO2; CO2 + C ⎯→ 2CO
  1. Above bosh 600° – 900°C, ferric oxide is partially reduced by CO as
Fe2O3 + 3CO 📷 2Fe + 3CO2↑
  1. CaCO3 📷 CaO + CO2
2CO 📷CO2 + C
Fe2O3+ 3C ⎯→ 2Fe + 3CO
CaO + SiO2 ⎯→ CaSiO3 (slag)
  1. The reaction at 1500°C, MnO2 is reduced to Mn.
MnO2 + 2C ⎯→ Mn + 2CO
Ca3(PO4)2 + 3SiO3 ⎯→ 3CaSiO3 + P2O5
CaO + SiO2 ⎯→ CaSiO3
2P2O5 + 10C ⎯→ P4 + 10CO
5. Collection of Cast Iron
Metal is cast into ingots or in the laddle for further refining like steel making.
There are two types of cast iron
a) White cast iron: This type of cast iron contains carbon mostly in the form of iron carbide (Fe3C) and small amount of graphite.
b) Grey cast iron: This type of cast iron contains carbon mostly in the form of graphite and small amount of iron carbide.
Wrought Iron
Minimum % of carbon, is 0.1 – 0.15% and other impurities like S, P, Mn, Si less than 0.3%.
Manufacturing Porcess
Cast iron takes in puddling furnance and metled by hot blast of air. The chemical reactions which occur are
S + O2 ⎯→ SO2↑ ; 3S + 2Fe2O3 → 4Fe + 3SO2↑
3Si + 2Fe2O3 ⎯→ 4Fe + 3SiO2
Mn + Fe2O3 ⎯→ 2Fe + 3MnO
MnO + SiO2 ⎯→ MnSiO3 (slag)
3C + Fe2O3 ⎯→ 2Fe + 3CO
4P + 5O2 ⎯→ 2P2O5; Fe2O3 + P2O5 ⎯→ 2FePO4 (slag)
The impurities are removed from iron, the melting point of the metal rises and it becomes a semi solid mass. Metal taken out from the furnace in the form of balls with the help of the rabbles. The balls are then beaten under hammer to separate out the slag. The product thus formed is called wrought iron.
Steel
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 06:47 rajusingh79 CONCEPTS OF ACIDS AND BASES

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1gi5ZZXGEX8k5cGuT4NM_SmYtpO9Lnu6_/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
CONCEPTS OF ACIDS AND BASES
Strength of acids and bases (qualitative treatment), balancing equations of chemical reaction, (including oxidation-reduction using ion-electron and oxidation number methods)
Introduction
There are several so-called theories of acids and bases, but they are not really theories but merely different definitions of what we choose to call an acid or a base. Since it is only a matter of definition, no theory is more right or wrong than any other, and we use the most convenient theory for a particular chemical situation. So before we talk of strength of acids and bases, we need to know several theories.
Various Theories Regarding Acids & Bases
i) Arrhenius Theory: According to Arrhenius, substances producing H+ ions in solution are acids and those producing OH- ions in solution are bases. Therefore, substances like H2O, HCl, H2SO4, CH3 COOH etc. are acids and the ones like NH4OH, NaOH, KOH, H2O etc. are bases.
ii) Bronsted-Lowry Theory: In 1923, Bronsted and Lowry independently defined acids as proton donors, and bases as proton acceptors. For aqueous solutions the definition does not vary much for acids from the Arrhenius theory but it widens the scope of bases. In this, the bases need not contain OH- ions and simply have to accept protons. So ions like Cl-, CH3COO-, Br- etc. which do not contain OH- ions can be considered as bases under this definition.
Levelling Solvents: Whenever an acid is dissolved in water, it acts as an acid only if the solvent acts as a base. That is, if we dissolve acids like HCl, HNO3 etc in water, their acidic strength is almost the same since water acts as a base for both these acids. Infact, it is known that all strong acids show equal acidic strength when dissolved in water. This is because, water acts as a base to all these acids and thus forces them to donate almost the same amount of protons irrespective of their chemical nature. Since water levels the acidic strength of strong acids, it is referred to as a levelling solvent. In order to measure the strength of strong acids, they are dissolved in glacial acetic acid and the amount of protons measured by conductometry. It is found that the strength of acids varies as
HClO4 > HBr> H2SO4 > HCl > HNO3
Amphiprotic species: Many molecules and ions can behave like water and may either gain or lose a proton under the appropriate conditions. Such species are said to be amphiprotic. eg.
Acid1 Base2 Acid2 Base1
HS- + OH- H2O + S2-
HBr + HS- H2S + Br-
📷 + CN- HCN + 📷
H3O+ + 📷 H2CO3 + H2O
The hydroxides of metals near the boundary between metals and non-metals in the periodic table, are amphiprotic and so react either as acids or as bases.
[Al(H2O)3 (OH)3] + OH- H2O + [Al(H2O)2(OH)4]-
H3O+ + [Al(H2O)3(OH)3] [Al(H2O)4(OH)2]+ + H2O.
Exercise 1: Identify conjugate acid base pair in the following reactions
C6H5OH + H2O 📷 H3O+ + C6H5O–
HCl + OH– 📷 H2O + Cl–
iii) Lewis Theory: Lewis developed a definition of acids and bases that did not depend on the presence of protons, nor involve reactions with the solvent. He defined acids as materials which accept electron pairs, and bases as substances which donate electron pairs. Thus a proton is Lewis acid and ammonia is Lewis base since, the lone pair of electrons on the nitrogen atom can be donated to a proton:
H+ : NH3 → [H ← : NH3]+
📷
Conditions to be a Lewis Acid
i) Compounds whose central atoms have an incomplete octet. E.g. BF3, AlCl3, GaCl3 etc.
ii) Compounds in which the central atom has available d-orbital and may acquire more than an octet of valence electrons.
E.g. SiF4 + 2F- → SiF62-
Other examples are : PF3, SF4, SeF4, TeCl4.
iii) All simple cations : Na+, Ag+, Cu2+, Al3+, Fe3+ etc.
Conditions to be a Lewis Base
i) All simple negative ions, Cl- , F- etc.
ii) Molecules with unshared pair of electrons, H2O, NH3 etc.
iii) Multiple bonded compounds which form co-ordination compounds with transition-metals . E.g., CO, NO, Ethylene, Acetylene etc.
Exercise 2: In the following reaction, identify each of the reactant as a Lewis acid or Lewis base
i) Cr+3 + 6H2O ⎯⎯→ 📷
ii) BF3 + (C2H5)2O ⎯⎯→ F3B: O(C2H5)2
Hard and soft acids and bases (Principle of HSAB)
Lewis acids & bases are classified as hard & soft acids & bases. Hardness is defined as the property of retaining valence electrons very strongly.
Thus hard acid is that in which electron-accepting atom is small with a high positive charge and no electron which are easily polarised or removed.
Soft acid is that in which the acceptor atom is large, carries a low positive charge or it has electrons in orbitals which are easily polarised or distorted.
A lewis base which holds its electrons strongly is called hard base eg. OH-, F-, NH3, H2O etc.
A lewis base in which the position of electrons is easily polarised or removed is called a soft base eg. I-, CO, CH3S-, (CH3)3P etc.
A hard acid prefer to bind to hard bases and soft acids prefer to bind to soft bases. The bonding between hard acids & hard bases is ionic & that between soft acids & bases is mainly covalent.
Exericise-3: Identify the hard acid and hard bases among the following
OH–, H2O, Al+3, Cr+3, Sn+4, 📷
Relative Strength of Acids and Bases
i) Predict the relative acidic strength among the following:
CH3 - H, H2N - H, OH - H, F -H
Assume that all these compounds have lost their protons. So we get -CH3 , -NH2, -OH, F-
We shall qualitatively analyse the charge density in each of the species and we shall follow the rule given below:
In the above case one can see that, the size of the central atom over which the negative charge is present is decreasing from left to right. But it can also be seen that 3/4 th of the volume of C is overlapped by hydrogens in -CH3, 2/3 of the volume of N is overlapped by hydrogens in -NH2, 1/2 the volume of oxygen is overlapped by hydrogens in -OH where as, the entire volume of F is available for the charge in -F SO, actually the space available for the charge is increasing in the order -CH3 < -NH2 < -OH < -F. Therefore, the following conclusion may be arrived at.
CH4, NH3, H2O, HF.
  1. Volume available for the negative charge is increasing in the conjugate bases from left to right.
  2. Charge density of the conjugate bases is decreasing from left to right.
  3. Basicity of the conjugate bases is decreasing from left to right.
  4. Acidity of the acids is increasing from left to right.
Therefore the increasing acidic character is CH4 < NH3 ii) Predict the relative acidic strength among the following :
HF, HCl, HBr, HI.
Assume that each has lost a proton
We get F- , Cl- , Br- , I-
  1. Volume available for the charge is increasing from left to right
  2. Charge density is decreasing from left to right.
  3. Basicity of the ions is decreasing from left to right.
  4. Acidity of the conjugate acids is increasing from left to right.
Therefore increasing acidic strength is : HF iii) Predict the relative acidic strength among the following :
HOCl, HOClO, HOClO2 , HOClO3 .
Assume that each has lost a proton. So we get,
-OCl, -OClO, - OClO2, -OClO3
The species which have more than one oxygen atoms show resonance.
That is:
📷
It can be clearly seen that more the no. of oxygen atoms, more the resonance and more is the volume available for the negative charge.
Therefore -OCl, -OClO, - OClO2, -OClO3
  1. Volume available for the negative charge is increasing from left to right
  2. Charge density is decreasing from left to right.
  3. Basicity of the anion is decreasing from left to right.
  4. Acidity of the conjugate acid is increasing from left to right.
Therefore, the order of acidic strength is :
HOCl < HOClO < HOClO2 < HOClO3
iv) Predict the relative acidic strength among the following :
H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te.
Assume that each has lost a proton : So, we get : HO-, HS- , HSe- , HTe-
It can be easily seen that the volume available for the negative charge is increasing from HO- to HTe-, Therefore :
  1. Volume available for the negative charge is increasing from left to right.
  2. Charge density is decreasing from left to right.
  3. Basiciy is decreasing from left to right.
  4. Acidity of conjugate acids is increasing from left to right.
v) In general, for oxo-acids with different central atoms of same oxidation states, acidity increases with the decrease in size of the central atom.
This is because, smaller the size of the central atom of an oxo- acid of the type HOY, larger is the electro negativity of Y, more is the pull of the electrons of O-Y bond towards Y. This would result in a more positive character on O which would consequently help the H-O electrons to be pulled by O and release H as H+.
Therefore,
(a) HOI < HOBr (c) HPO3 < HNO3 (c) H3 AsO4 < H3 PO4.
For oxo - acids having the same central atom at different oxidation states, the rule to be followed is :
For oxo- acids of the general formula, (HO)m ZOn , where Z is the central atom, m is the no. of oxygen atoms attached to Z and attached to H, while n is the no of oxygen atoms attached to Z but not attached to H. It is these oxygen atoms which help in resonance and which determine the acidic strength.
For n= 0 Acid is very weak HOCl, (HO)3Br
n = 1 Acid is weak HOClO, HONO
n = 2 Acid is strong HOClO2, HONO2
n = 3 Acid is very strong HOClO3, HOIO3
Origin of Acidity and Basicity in Organic Compounds
i) Among hydrocarbons, acidity increases with the % `s' character . This is because, higher the `s' character, closer are the electrons to the nucleus of C and farther the electrons go from H, easily can H be removed as H+.
Therefore CH3 - CH3 < CH2 = CH2 < CH = CH
ii) Alcohols are more acidic than C because oxygen is more electro negative than C and consequently O - H bond easily give H+ than C - H bond
H3C - H < CH3 - O - H
iii) Carboxylic acids are more acidic than alcohols because carboxylate anion is more resonance stabilised than carboxylic acid as compared to alkoxide anion with respect to alcohol.
📷
Therefore CH3O - H < 📷
v) Phenols are more acidic than alcohols because phenoxide ion is more resonance stabilised as compared to phenol than alkoxide as compared to alcohol.
Therefore CH3 - O - H< C6H5 - O - H
vi) Phenols are less acidic than carboxylic acids. This is because in phenoxide ion some of the resonance structures are of higher energy and this makes phenoxide ion not very much stable as compared to phenol.
Therefore C6H5 O- H < 📷
vii) In simple aliphatic acids, more the no. of CH3 added, less is the acidity. This is due to the +I (inductive) effect of CH3. This effect of adding CH3 decreases with increase in distance between CH3 added to the substituent, which releases H+.
CH3 -COOH > CH3 - CH2 - COOH
(viii) Increase in `s' character increases acidity of carboxylic acids.
(CH3)2 - COOH < CH2 = CHCOOH ix) Increase in electron withdrawing substituents into simple aliphatic acids increases acidity.
CH3 - COOH < I - CH2 - COOH
📷
x) Nearer Cl is placed to COOH group, more is acidity.
📷
📷
xi) Benzoic acid is more acidic than carboxylic acids because benzoate anion shows/has more resonance.
CH3 COOH < C6H5 COOH
Exception to this is formic acid.
There is no destabilising factors for formate anion. Therefore, it is highly stabilised compared to formic acid because of resonance. Where as, Benzoic acid itself is resonance stabilised due to benzene ring. Therefore, benzoate ion is not very stable compared to benzoic acid. Thus C6H5 COOH < HCOOH
xii) More the no. of methyl or ethyl groups in NH3, more is its basicity. This is because of +I effect of methyl or ethyl which helps nitrogen to donate its lone pair of electrons.
NH3 < CH3 - NH2 < (CH3)2 NH
NH3 < EtNH2 < (Et)2 NH
An exception to the above trend is the trisubstituted derivative. It is seen that if we introduce an alkyl group in a secondary amine, the basic strength of amines actually decreases. This is due to the fact that, the basic strength of an amine in water is determined not only by electron - availability on the nitrogen atom, but also by the extent to which the cation, formed by uptake of a proton, can undergo solvation, and so become stabilised. The more hydrogen atoms attached to nitrogen in the cation, the greater the possibilities of powerful solvation via hydrogen bonding between these and water which increases stabilisation by solvation.
📷
Thus, on going along the series NH3 → RNH2 → R2NH → R3N, the inductive effect will tend to increase the basicity, but progressively less stabilisation of the cation by hydration will occur, which will tend to decrease the basicity. The net effect of introducing successive alkyl groups thus becomes progressively smaller, and an actual change over takes place, on going from secondary to a tertiary amine. That is why, (CH3)3 N < (CH3)2 NH
If this is the explanation, no such changeover should be observed, if measurements of basicity are made in solvent in which hydrogen- bonding cannot take place; it has, indeed, been found that, in chlorobenzene the order of basicity of the butylamines is
BuH2 < Bu2 NH xiii) Aniline is less basic than NH3. This is because in aniline the nitrogen atom is again bonded to an sp2 hybridised carbon atom but, more significantly, the unshared electron pair on nitrogen can interact with the delocalised orbital of the nucleus:
If aniline is protonated, any such interaction, with resultant stabilisation in the anilinium cation is prohibited, as the electron pair on N is no longer available :
The aniline molecule is thus stabilised with respect to the anilinium cation, and it is therefore energetically unprofitable for aniline to take up a proton ; it thus functions as a base with almost reluctance.
xiv) Introduction of alkyl, e.g. Me groups on the nitrogen atom of aniline results in small increase in pKa due to the +I effect of alkyl groups.
C6H5NH2 < C6H5 NHMe < C6H5NMe2
xv) Introduction of phenyl groups on N lowers basicity because the substituted amine becomes much more stable than the ion.
ph2NH < phNH2
Answer to Exercises
Exercise 1: Conjugate acid conjugate base
C6H5OH C6H5O–
H3O+ H2O
HCl Cl–
H2O OH–
Exercise 2: i) Lewis acid ⎯⎯→ Cr+3
Lewis base ⎯⎯→ H2O
ii) Lewis acid ⎯⎯→ BF3
Lewis base ⎯⎯→ (C2H5)2O
Exercise 3: Hard acids: Al+3, Cr+3, Sn+4
Hard bases: OH–, H2O, 📷
Solved Problems
Subjective
Problem 1: On the basis of H-bonding explain that the second ionization constant K2 for fumaric acid is greater than for maleic acid.
Solution: We know that H-bonding involving acidic H has an acid weakening effect and H-bonding in conjugate base has an acid strengthening effect.
Both dicarboxylic acids have two ionisable hydrogen atoms. Considering second ionization step.
📷
Since the second ionisable H of the Maleate participates in H-bonding more energy is needed to remove this H because the H-bond must be broken. The maleate mono anion is, therefore, the weaker acid.
Problem 2: Arrange o-nitro, p-nitro, m-nitrophenol in decreasing acid strength
Solution: p-nitrophenol > o-nitrophenol > m-nitrophenol
The –NO2 is electron – withdrawing and acid – strengthening. Its resonance effect, which occurs only from para and ortho positions, predominates over its inductive effect, with occurs also from the meta position between ortho and para derivative, para derivative is more acidic because incase of ortho the hydrogen of phenolic group is attached through hydrogen bonding with oxygen of NO2 group and hence not possible to remove easily.
Problem 3: Among N,N dimethyl aniline and N,N,2,6 – tetramethyl aniline which one is a stronger base and why.
Solution:
📷
In N,N-2,6 – tetramethyl aniline the methyl groups on nitrogen and the ortho position are very close to each other resulting in a steric crowding. Now to avoid steric crowding the C—N bond rotates and becomes perpendicular to the benzene ring. In this process the lone pair on nitrogen becomes perpendicular to the p-orbitals of benzene ring thereby inhibiting resonance. But in N,N dimethyl aniline there is no steric hindrance, so the lone pair is in the same plane as the benzene ring and undergoes resonance. Therefore the lone pair on the tetramethyl derivative is more available and hence it is more basic.
Problem 4: Which is the stronger base towards a proton 📷 or 📷 and why?
Solution: Bond energy (N—H > P—H) ionisation suggests that 📷 will be stronger base. This is constituent with the relative strengths of the respective conjugate acids: NH3 < PH3.
Problem5: Predict the nature of change, if any on the acidity of the solution consequent to the addition (i) HgO to an aqueous solution of KI. (ii) CuSO4 to an aq. solution of (NH)2SO4, (iii) Al(OH)3 to aqueous caustic soda solution.
Solution: i) Due to the formation of the stable complex 📷 species, the concentration of OH– increase according to the reaction
HgO + 4KI + H2O ⎯⎯→ HgI4 + 2OH– + 4K+
Hence acidity decreases
ii) Due to the formation of Cu(NH3)4+2 complex ion increases H+ ion concentration. Hence the acidity increases acid to the reaction
Cu2+(aq) + 4NH4+(aq) ⎯⎯→ 📷+ 4H+(aq)
iii) Formation of the complex 📷 anion consumes. OH– ions. Hence acidity increases.
Al(OH)3(s) + OH– (aq) ⎯⎯→ 📷
Objective
Problem 1: The conjugate base of OH– ion is
(A) H2O (B) O22–
(C) H3O+ (D) O–
Solution: 📷
∴ (B)
Problem 2: Which salt undergoes hydrolysis
(A) CH3COONa (B) KNO3
(C) NaCl (D)K2SO4
Solution: Salt of strong acid and strong base does not undergo hydrolysis.
∴ (A)
Problem 3: The compound HCl behaves as …. in the reaction
Cl + HF ⎯→ H2+Cl + F–
(A) Strong acid (B) Strong base
(C) Weak acid (D) Weak base
Solution: HCl is accepting proton in HF medium and acts as weak base.
∴ (D)
Problem 4: The conjugate acid of 📷 is
(A) H3PO4 (B) H2📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
Solution: Conjugate acid and base differs by one proton hence the conjugate acid of PO4–3 is HPO3–2
∴ (D)
Problem 5: The anhydride of H3PO4 is
(A) P2O5 (B) P2O3
(C) PO2 (D) None
Solution: P has +5 oxidation number in P2O5 and H3PO4
∴ (A)
Problem 6: The conjugate base of hydrazoic acid is
(A) HN3– (B) N3H
(C) N3– (D) N2–
Solution: N3H 📷N3–
∴ (C)
Problem 7: Which of the following is a strong acid
(A) HClO4 (B) HBrO4
(C) HIO4 (D) HNO3
Solution: The acidic character of oxy acids decreases down the group and increases along the period. Also acidity increases with increase in oxidation number of central atom.
∴ (A)
Problem 8: H3BO3 is ….acid
(A) Monobasic (B) Dibasic
(C) Tribasic (D) None
Solution: H3BO3 is monobasic acid
H3BO3 + H2O ⎯→ B(OH)4–
∴ (A)
Problem 9: Which is not Lewis base
(A) Ag+ (B) Cl–
(C) CN– (D) H2O
Solution: metal cations are Lewis acids
∴ (A)
Problem 10: Tribasic acid furnishes…. Type of anion
(A) 2 (B) 1
(C) 3 (D) 4
Solution: H3PO4 furnish H2PO4–, HPO42– and PO43– anions
∴ (C)
Assignment
Subjective
LEVEL - I
  1. The ionization constant of HCN is given as 4 × 10-10. The ionization constant of NH3 is 1.8 × 10-5. Decide which is the stronger acid, HCN or NH4+.

2. Write down the conjugate base of the following

(i) NH4+, (ii) HCOOH (iii) H3O+, (iv) H2NCONH3+
  1. Predict the relative acidic strength among the following:
HI, HIO4, ICl.
  1. Predict the relative basic strength among the following :
HOCl, HOClO,HOClO2,HOClO3
  1. Compare the strength of formic acid and acetic acid
  2. Phenol is acidic but why ethanol is neutral
  3. Among CH4, H2S, HI which one is most acidic? Justify your answer
  4. Which one of the two i.e., CH3SH and CH2OH more strong acid and why?

9. Which of the following oxide is most acidic

Ag2O, V2O5, CO, N2O5
  1. Identify soft and hard bases among the following
F–, I–, RS–, RSH
LEVEL - II
  1. Which way would the pH shift when CuSO4 is added to pure water. Write a net ionic equation to support your answer.
  2. What is the order of increasing strength of α-chloro butanoic acid, β-chloro butanoic acid, γ-chloro butanoic acid and n – butanoic acid?
  3. Write the cation, anion and the neutralisation reaction if thionyl chloride reacts with sodium sulphate.
  4. Among different hydroxy benzoic acids o-hydroxybenzoic acid is the strongest compared to m-and p-isomers considerably. Why?
  5. Why diphenyl amine is less basic than aniline?
  6. Arrange the following in increasing order of basicity
Phenol, o-nitrophenol, cresol
  1. Arrange the following in the increasing order of basicity. Justify answer
R3—N—, —R2NH, RNH2
  1. N-ethyl aniline is more basic than N methyl aniline why?
  2. Arrange the following in the order of their basic strength. Justify your answer
NH2NH2,NH3,NH2OH
  1. Arrange the following in the order of their decreasing acidic strength
CH4 , LiH, BeH2, H2O, HF, NH3
LEVEL - III
  1. Why CHCl3 is more acidic than CHF3?
  2. Why F–– is most basic among the halogen anion
  3. Arrange the following in the increasing order of acidic strength.
📷
  1. Why pyrole is less basic than pyridine
  2. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their basic strength.
CH3NH–Na+, C2H5NH2, (iso-C3H7)3N and CH3CONH2
  1. What should be the order of acidic strength in the series H3PO4, H3PO3 and H3PO2?
  2. Arrange the following in correct order of acidity
📷
  1. In dilute benzene solutions, equimolar additions of (C4H9)3N and HCl produce a substance with a dipole moment. In the same solvent, equimolar additions of (C4H9)3N and SO3 produce a substance having an almost identical dipole moment. What is the nature of the polar substances formed and what is the unifying feature of HCl and SO3?
  2. Arrange according to increasing Lewis acid character,
B(n–Bu)3, B(t–Bu)3
  1. Arrange according to increasing Lewis acid character,
SiF4, SiCl4, SiBr4, Sil4
Objective
LEVEL - I
  1. Which one of following is the strongest acid
(A) ClO3(OH) (B) ClO2(OH)
(C) SO(OH)2 (D) SO2(OH)2
  1. Amongst the following the most basic compound is
(A) Benzyl amine (B) Aniline
(C) Acetanilide (D) p –nitro aniline
  1. Amongst the trihalides of nitrogen, which one is least basic
(A) NF3 (B) NCl3
(C) NBr3 (D) NI3
  1. What is the decreasing order of strength of bases
(A) CH3 – CH2− > NH2− > H – C ≡ C− > OH−
(B) H – C ≡ C− > CH3- CH2− > NH2− > OH−
(C) OH− > NH2− > H- C ≡ C− > CH3−CH2−
(D) NH2− > H – C ≡ C− > OH− > CH3 -CH2−
  1. H2O is capable to act as an acid with
(A) NH3 (B) H2SO4
(C) C6H6 (D) HCl
  1. Which of the following is Lewis acid
(A) PCl3 (B) AlCl3
(C) NCl3 (D) AsCl3
  1. The strongest bronsted base in the following anions is
(A) ClO− (B) ClO2−
(C) ClO3− (D) ClO4−
  1. With reference to protonic acid which of the following statement is correct ?
  2. PH3 is more basic than NH3
  3. PH3 is less basic than NH3
  4. PH3 is equally basic than NH3
  5. PH3 is amphoteric while NH3 is basic
  6. Which of the following is a hard base
(A) F– (B) Li+
(C) I– (D) Mg+
  1. The conjugate acid of NH2– is
(A) NH3 (B) NH2OH
(C) NH4+ (D) N2H4
  1. The conjugate acid of S2O8–2
(A) H2S2O8 (B) H2SO4
(C) HSO4– (D) HS2O8–
  1. The conjugate acid of 📷 is
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) H3PO4 (D) H3PO3
  1. Which of the following are amphiprotic in nature
(A) OH– (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) HF
  1. Among the following compounds, the strongest acid is
(A) HC ≡ CH (B) C6H6
(C) C2H6 (D) CH3OH [IIT-JEE ’98]
  1. The following acids have been arranged in order of decreasing acid strength. Identify the correct order.
ClOH (I) BrOH (II) IOH (III)
(A) I > II > III (B) II > I > III
(C) III > II > I (D) I > III > II [IIT-JEE ’96]
LEVEL – II
  1. The conjugate acid of HF is
(A) F– (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) none of these
  1. Which of the following species is an acid and also a conjugate base of another acid
(A) 📷 (B) H2SO4
(C) OH– (D) H3O+
  1. Which of the following is the strongest acid
(A) H3PO4 (B) H3PO3
(C) H3PO2 (D) All have same strength
  1. In the equilibrium CH3COOH + HF 📷 📷 + F–
(A) F– is the conjugate acid of CH3COOH
(B) F– is the conjugate base of HF
(C) CH3COOH is the conjugate acid of 📷
(D) 📷 is the conjugate base of CH3COOH.
  1. The conjugate base of 📷 is
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
  1. Which of the following is a hard acid
(A) CO2 (B) Br2
(C) Fe3+ (D) Cd2+
  1. Pyrophosphoric acid is a
(A) mononbasic acid (B) dibasic acid
(C) tribasic acid (D) tetrabasic acid
  1. Which among the following is the strongest base
(A) aniline (B) N,N dimethyl amine
(C) para nitro aniline (D) meta nitro aniline
  1. Which of the following statements is/are correct
(A) I– is a weaker base than F–
(B) 📷
(C) HONH2 is a weaker base than NH3
(D) F3C:– is a stronger base than Cl3C:–
  1. Which of the following orders regarding acid strength is correct?
(A) HCOOH < CH3COOH < PhCOOH
(B) HCOOH > PhCOOH > CH3COOH
(C) HCOOH > CH3COOH > PhCOOH
(D) CH3COOH > HCOOH > PhCOOH
  1. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(A) Maleic acid is a stronger acid than fumaric acid but maleate monoanion is a weaker acid than fumarate monoanion
(B) Maleic acid is a stronger acid than fumaric acid and also maleate monoanion is a stronger acid than fumarate monoanion
(C) Maleic acid is a weaker acid than fumaric acid but maleate monoanion is a stronger acid than fumarate monoanion
(D) Maleic acid is a weaker acid than Fumaric acid and also maleate monoanion is a weaker acid than fumarate monoanion.
  1. Of the following orders regarding basicity, which one is correct
(A) CH3CH2NH2 > PhCONH2 > CH3CONH2
(B) CH3CH2NH2 > PhCONH2 > CH3CONH2
(C) CH3CH2NH2 > PhCONH2 < CH3CONH2
(D) CH3CH2NH2 < PhCONH2 < CH3CONH2
  1. In the following compounds:
📷
(A) III > IV > I > II (B) I > IV > III > II
(C) II > I > III > IV (D) IV > III > I > II [IIT-JEE ’96]
  1. In the following compounds, the correct order of basicity is
📷
(A) IV > I > III > II (B) III > I > IV > II
(C) II > I > III > IV (D) I > III > II > IV [IIT-JEE ’97]
  1. Arrange the following ions in increasing order of acidity.
[Na (H2O)n]+, [Al (H2O)6]3+,[Mn (H2O)6]2+, [Ni (H2O)6]2+
(I) (II) (III) (IV)
(A) I < II < III < IV (B) I < III < IV < II
(C) I < III < II < IV (D) II < IV < III < II
Answers
Subjective
LEVEL - I
  1. NH4+ is slightly stronger acid (Ka for NH4+ = 5.6 × 10-10).
[Larger the value of ionization constant, stronger the acid will be.]
  1. To form a conjugate base means removal of a proton
So answer is
(i) NH3 (ii) HCOO–
(iii) H2O (iv) H2NCONH2
  1. IO4- is more stable than I- and I+ is unstable. Hence HIO4 will be strongest acid.
HIO4 > HI> ICI
  1. HOCl < HOClO < HOClO2 < HOClO3
  2. The –CH3 group which is present in acetic acid decrease the acidic character of the –COOH group.
  3.  Conjugate base of phenol in resonance stabilized white that of alcohol is not. 
  4. Acidic nature
CH4 < H2S < HI
Size of the central atoms is greatest in HI hence it is most acidic.
  1.  The conjugate base of CH3OH – CH3O– is stronger than the conjugate base of CH3SH i.e CH3SH i.e. CH3S–. Since S is large, the negative charge in CH3S– is dispersed over a large. Hence CH3S– is the weaker base. 
  2. The oxide with the highest positive oxidation state on the element other than O should be most acidic. Oxidation states of V in V2O5 and N in N2O5 are both +5. But the electronegativity of N is higher, making N2O5 the most acidic oxide.
  3. Hard bases ⎯⎯→ F–
Soft bases ⎯⎯→ I–, RSH, RS–
LEVEL - II
  1. The pH will shift down below 7. It is clear from the following equation.
CuSO4 + H2O 📷 Cu(OH)2 + SO42– + 2H+
  1. CH3 – CH2 – CHCl –COOH > CH3 – CHCl – CH2 – COOH > CH2Cl – CH2 – CH2 – COOH > CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – COOH
  2. Reaction SOCl2 + Na2SO3 ⎯→ 2NaCl + 2SO2
Cation SO++
Anion SO32–
  1. O–hydroxy benzoate anion is stabilized by chelation due to hydrogen bonding which is absent in meta and para isomers.
📷
  1. Diphenyl amine is less basic than aniline because lone pair of electron on N-atom is used by two benzene rings in case of diphenyl amine.
  2. o-nitrophenol > phenol > cresol
  3. R2NH > RNH2 > R3N
  4. N-alkylated anilines are stronger bases than aniline because of steric effects which decrease the resonance of the lone pair of electron on nitrogen and hence makes it more available for protonation. Ethyl group is bigger than the methyl group so N-ethyl aniline is stronger base than N-methyl aniline.
  5. NH3 > NH2 NH2 > NH2OH
  6. HF > H2O > NH3 > CH4 > BeH2 > LiH
LEVEL - III
  1. Cl3C–: is less basic than F3C–: because fluroine can disperse charge only by an inductive effect. White Cl (having empty 3d orbitals) disperses charge by inductive effect as well as by pπ - pπ bonding delocalisatioin. Fluorine is a second period element with no 2d orbital.
  2. Among the halogens, fluorine has the smallest size hence it has availability of electron most.
  3. I > V > IV > II > III
  4. Pyrole uses lone pair of electron on nitrogen atom in delocalisation hence less electron are available for protonation, hence less basic than pyridine.
  5. CH3CONH2 < (iso-C3H7)3N, C2H5NH2, CH3ONH–Na+
  6. It can be seen that hydrogens in these molecules are not all bonded to oxygens. It is clear from their structures,
📷 📷 📷
that the number of terminal oxygen atoms is 1 in all three acids. The electronegativities of P and H are almost the same. Thus no much difference in acidity is expected.

7. IV > III > I > II

  1. Both HCl and SO3 are Lewis acids and can react with amine base to form polar substances which could presumably undergo ionic dissociation in a solvent sufficiently more polar than benzene. The reactioins may be represented as follows (R = C4H9):
📷
Sulphur is a third element which can expand its octet due to availability of vacant d-orbitals. Thus sulphur expands its number of valance electron by attaching to the lone pair on the nitrogen. The N – S bond will be polar because of the big difference in electronegativity between N and S.
📷 ⎯⎯→ 📷
Here the proton of the HCl attaches to the lone pair on the N. The connection between N – H and Cl is designated by (----) symbolizing an electron pair on the Cl connected to nitrogen by a hydrogen bond.
  1. The highly branched tertiary butyl group involve appreciable back – strain (B-strain) when the boron atom changes to pyramidal environment on adduct formation. This destabilizes the adduct. Hence the order is
B(t–Bu)3 < B(n–Bu)3
  1. The order in this case is the reverse of that for BX3. π-conjugation from the halogen p-orbital to the Si-d orbital is not as intense as in the case of BX3 and the order of acidity follows the increase in electron withdrawing power of the halogen from I to F. Hence the order is
SiI4 < SiBr4 < SiCl4 < SiF4
Objective
LEVEL - I
  1. A 2. A
  2. A 4. A
  3. A 6. B
  4. A 8. B
  5. A 10. A
  6. D 12. A
  7. A 14. A
  8. A
LEVEL - II
  1. C 2. A
  2. C 4. B
  3. D 6. A,C
  4. D 8. B
  5. A, C, D 10. B
  6. A 12. A
  7. D 14. D
  8. B
6
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.20 06:46 rajusingh79 CHEMICAL BONDING

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1ceBwDU3QWnipIOUKssOzni6ClgUgJ0qD/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true

CHEMICAL BONDING

Electrovalent (ionic bond) and covalent (including coordinate) bonds; polarity in molecules; dipole moments (qualitative aspects only); concept of hybridization involving s and p orbitals only; hydrogen bond.
Introduction
There are several different theories which explain the electronic structure and shapes of known molecules, and attempt to predict the shapes of molecules whose structures are so far unknown. Each theory has its own virtues and shortcomings. None is rigorous. Theories change in the light of new knowledge. If we knew or could prove what a bond was, we would not need theories, which by definition cannot be proved. The value of a theory lies more in its usefulness than in its truth. Being able to predict the shape of a molecule is important. In many cases all the theories give the correct answers.
The Lewis Theory
The octet rule:- The Lewis theory gave the first explanation of a covalent bond in terms of electrons that was generally accepted. If two electrons are shared between two atoms, this constitutes a bond and binds the atoms together. For many light atoms, a stable arrangement is attained when the atom is surrounded by eight electrons.
This octet can be made up from some electrons which are totally owned and some electrons which are ‘shared’. Thus atoms continue to form bonds until they have made up an octet of electrons. This is called the ‘octet rule’. The octet rule explains the observed valencies in a large number of cases. There are exceptions to the octet rule; for example, hydrogen is stable with only two electrons. Other exceptions are discussed later.Today, the conventional Lewis structure representation of a pair of bonded electrons is by means of a ‘dash’ (-) usually called a ‘bond’. Lone pairs or ‘non-bonded’ electrons are represented by ‘dots’. Some structures are represented below:
Such representations of organic molecules are not usually problematic. However, ‘hit-and-trial’ is generally the method (obviously not very efficient) used by most students in figuring out the structures of inorganic molecules.
Type I: A systematic method, applicable to species in which the octet rule is not violated is described :
∙ Determine n2 = [2 × (no. of H atoms) + 8 × (no. of other atoms)].
∙ Determine the number of bonding electrons, n3, which equals n2-n1. No. of bonds equals n3/2.
∙ Determine the number of non-bonding electrons, n4, which equals n1- n3. No. of lone pairs equals n4/2.
∙ Knowing the central atom (you'll need to know some chemistry here, math will not help!), arrange and distribute other atoms and n3/2 bonds. Then complete octets using n4/2 lone pairs.
∙ Determine the `formal charge' on each atom.
Formal charge = [ valence electrons in atom)-(no. of bonds) - (no. of unshared electrons)]
∙ Other aspects like resonance etc. can now be incorporated.
To illustrate with a couple of examples ;
Illustration 1: a) CO32 - ; n1 = 4 + (6 × 3) + 2 = 24 [2 added for net charge]
n2 = (2 × 0) + (8 × 4) = 32 (no H atom, 4 other atoms (1’C’ and 3 ‘O’)
n3 = 32 - 24 = 8, hence 8/2 = 4 bonds
n4 = 24 - 8 = 16, hence 8 lone pairs.
Since carbon is the central atom, arrange 3 oxygen atoms around it, thus,
, but total bonds is equal to 4
Hence we get . Now, arrange lone pairs to complete octetsFigure out the formal charge to get 📷
b) CO2 ; n1 = 4+(6 × 2) = 16
n2 = (2 × 0) + (8 × 3) = 24
n3 = 24 -16 = 8, hence 4 bonds
n4 = 16 - 8 = 8, hence 4 lone-pairs.
Since C is the central atom, arrange the two oxygen atoms around it thus the structure would be; O-C-O, but total no. of bonds = 4
Hence we get O=C=O.
Arrange lone pairs to complete octets
Figure out the formal charges and get the final structure;
c) CO; n1= 10; n2= 16; n3=6 ∴ No. of bonds = 3
n4=4 ∴ no. of lone-pairs =2.
Since C is the central atom, arrange the oxygen atom using the number of bonds and complete octets. Thus, we get
Figure out the formal charge and we get; 📷 or 📷
d) CN- ; n1=10, n2=16, n3=6 ∴ No. of bonds = 3
n4=4 ∴ No. of lone pairs = 2.
Thus the structure of CN- using, the no. of bonds and lone-pairs, would be
📷
e) NO2-; n1=18 , n2=24, n3=6 ∴ No. of bonds = 3
n4=12 ∴ No. of lone pairs = 6
since N is the central atom, arrange the two oxygen atoms around N using the number of bonds and lone-pairs. Hence we get,
Figure out the formal charge and we get;
📷
f) NO3-; n1 = 24, n2 = 32, n3 = 8 ∴ No. of bonds = 4
n4 = 16 ∴ No. of lone pairs = 8
Since N is the central atom, arrange the three oxygen atoms around the N atom using the number of bonds and number of lone pairs.
Hence we get,
Figure out the formal charge and we get
g) NH4+; n1 = 8, n2 = 16, n3 = 8, ∴ No. of bonds = 4; n4 = 0
Since N is the central atom, arrange the four H atoms around the N atom using the no. of bonds.
Thus we get,
The method for determining Lewis structures described above does not hold good for species in which the octet rule is violated (this should be obvious from the procedure. Why ?).
It is therefore useful to remember some important categories of exceptions:
∙ Odd-electron species like NO, NO2, O2 etc. Since it is impossible to distribute an odd number of electrons into pairs, these species necessarily violate the octet rule.
The Valence Bond theory handles such species rather clumsily (odd-electron bonds etc.) the molecular orbital theory copes much better.
∙ Species in which the central atom `expands' its octet (so to speak) PCl5, SF6, many transition metal compounds etc.
∙ Electron -deficient species like BCl3, BeCl2, AlCl3, B2H6 etc. in which the central atom has fewer than eight electrons.
VSEPR (Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion) Theory
Type II: The geometric arrangement of atoms in molecules and ions may be predicted by means of the valence-shell electron-pair repulsion (VSEPR) theory. This type includes molecules which may or may not obey the octet rule but have only single bonds.
VSEPR theory may be summarized as follows:
  1. The shape of the molecule is determined by repulsions between all of the electron pairs present in the valence shell.
  2. A lone pair of electrons takes up more space around the central atom than a bond-pair, since the lone pair is attracted to one nucleus whilst the bond pair is shared by two nuclei. It follows that repulsion between two lone pairs is greater than repulsion between a lone pair and a bond pair, which in turn is greater than the repulsion between two bond pairs. Thus the presence of lone pairs on the central atom causes slight distortion of the bond angles from the ideal shape. If the angle between a lone pair, the central atom and a bond pair is increased, it follows that the actual bond angle between the atoms must be decreased.
  3. The magnitude of repulsions between bonding pairs of electrons depends on the electronegativity difference between the central atom and the other atoms.
  4. Double bonds cause more repulsion than single bonds and triple bonds cause more repulsion than double bonds.
A brief summary of molecular shapes resulting from different configurations of electrons pairs is presented below:
With very few exceptions, the predictions based on the VSEPR theory have been shown to be correct.
Some Examples Using the VSEPR Theory:
To find the shape of a molecule follow the steps given below:
i) Identify the central atom and count the number of valence electrons.
ii) Add to this, number of other atoms.
iii) If it is an ion, add negative charges and subtract positive charges. Call it total N
iv) Divide N by 2 and compare the result with chart I and obtain the shape.
Chart I
Total N/2
Shape of molecule or ion
Example
2
Linear
HgCl2/BeCl2
3
Triangular planar
BF3
3
Angular
SnCl2, NO2
4
Tetrahedral
CH4, BF4-
4
Trigonal Pyramidal
NH3, PCl3
4
Angular
H2O
5
Trigonal bipyramidal
PCl5, PF5
5
Irregular tetrahedral
SF4, IF4+
5
T-shaped
CIF3, BrF3
5
Linear
XeF2, I3-
6
Octahedral
SF6, PF6-
6
Square Pyramidal
IF5
6
Square planar
XeF4, ICI4
Illustration 2: a) BF3 : Central atom is B. There are 3 fluorine atoms. The sum (N) is now 6.
Since there is no charge, nothing is to be added or subtracted. Divide 6 by 2.
The value is 3. Looking at chart I, it can be seen that when the total is 3 the shape of BF3 is predicted to be triangular planar. In fact it is so.
b) BF4- : Central atom is B. There are 4 fluorine atoms.
Valence electrons = 3
Negative charge is = -1
Add all these, 3 + 4 + 1 = 8
No. of bonds (N/2) = 8/2 = 4
Chart I tells us that it is a tetrahedron. It is so.
c) Ammonia NH3 : Central atom is N
Valence electrons = 5
There are 3 Hydrogen atoms
Add these, 5 + 3 = 8
No. of bonds (N/2) = 8/2 = 4
∴ Shape is trigonal pyramidal.
d) H2O : Central atom is O
Valence electrons = 6
There are two H - atoms,
So the sum(N) is 8. No. of bonds = 8/2 = 4.
∴ Shape is angular.
📷
e) PCl5 : Central atom is P
Valence electrons = 5
There are 5-Cl atoms, so the sum (N) is 10.
No. of bonds = 10/2 = 5
Bonding electrons = 5. Non-bonding = 0
∴ Shape is trigonal bipyramidal
f) ClF3 : Central atom is Cl.
Valence electrons = 7
There are 3F atoms, so the number of electron pairs shared is = 3
Sum is 10. No. of bonds = 10/2 = 5
∴ It is T-shaped.
Note : Even though 3 possible structures are possible viz.
📷
Only C is possible because LP-LP repulsion is at 120°, and 2 LP-BP are at 120°. This is because in (A) though the LP-LP repulsion is at 180°, LP-BP repulsion is at 90° each. (B) is not possible because LP-LP repulsion is at 90°. Hence in a trigonal bipyramidal structure, the lone pairs will always occupy the equational position.
g) SF4 (Sulphur tetrafluoride)
Central atom is S
Valence electrons = 6
No of Fluorine atoms (4F atoms) = 4
Total N = 10
N/2 = 10/2 = 5
∴ shape is Irregular tetrahedral
📷
h) I3- :
Central atom is I
Valence electrons = 7
No of I atoms = 2
Negative charge = 1
Total (N) = 7 + 2 + 1 = 10
N/2 = 10/2 = 5
∴ shape is linear
📷
i) Sulphur hexaflouride SF6 :
Central atoms is S
Valence electrons = 6
No. of Fluorine atoms = 6
Total (N) = 12
N/2 = 12/2 = 6
It is Octahedral in shape
📷
j) IF7 (iodine hepta fluoride)
Central atoms = I
Valence electrons = 7
No of Fatoms = 7
Total N = 14
N/2 = 7
Shape is Pentagonal bipyramidal
📷
Hybridization
The mixing or merging of dissimilar orbitals of similar energies to form new orbitals is known as hybridization and the new orbitals formed are known as hybrid orbitals.
The following points are to be remembered about hybridization.
∙ Orbitals belonging to the same atom or ion having similar energies get hybridized.
∙ No of hybrid orbitals is equal to the no. of orbitals taking part in hybridization.
∙ The reason hybridization takes place is to produce equivalent orbitals which give maximum symmetry.
∙ It is not known whether actually hybridization takes place or not. It is a concept which explains the known behaviour of molecules.
  1. sp3 Hybridization : In this 1 `s' and 3 `p' orbitals of the same principle quantum number mix to form 4 sp3 hybridized orbitals. These orbitals orient themselves towards the corners of a regular tetrahedron. The angle between the orbitals is 109°28'.
For example CH4
📷
  1. sp2 hybridization : In this 1 `s' and 2 `p' orbitals of the same principle quantum number mix to form three sp2 hybridized orbitals. These orbitals orient themselves towards the corners of an equilateral triangle E.g. BF3.
📷
In cases like ethene (C2 H4), the two carbon atoms have one p orbital each with an unpaired electron. The p-orbitals overlap in sideways fashion to give rise to a double bond.
When a bond is formed with head-to-head overlap, it is called a sigma (σ) bond. when a bond is formed with sideways overlap, it is called a pi (π) bond.
  1. sp hybridization : In this one `s' and one `p' orbital of the same principle quantum number mix to form 2 sp hybridized orbitals. eg. BeCl2.
In cases like ethyne C2H2, two p orbitals with two unpaired electrons are present in each carbon atom. These overlap in sideways fashion and produce a triple bond.
sp3 d hybridization : In this one `s' three `p' and one `d' orbital of the same principle quantum number mix to give 5 sp 3 d hybridized orbitals.
These orbitals orient themselves towards the corners of a trigonal bipyramidal structure.
e.g. PCl5.
📷
  1. sp3d2 hybridization : In this one `s' three `p' and two `d' orbitals mix to form 6 sp3d2 hybridized orbitals.These orient themselves towards the corners of a regular octahedron. e.g. SF6 .
Type III: Molecules which have multiple bonds and may or may not obey the Octet rule.
  1. Electronic configuration of the outermost orbit of central atom using boxes.
  2. Find O.S. of central atom. Exite the electrons from orbits of higher energy in such a way that total no. of unpaired electrons = O.S. of central atom,
  3. Create a pocket.
Add electrons to the pocket starting from s orbital in such a way that total no. of unpaired electrons inside the pocket = No. of atoms other than central atom and that gives hybridisation.
N/2 Shape Hybridisation
2 Linear sp
3 Trigonal planar sp2
4 Tetrahedral sp3
5 Trigonal bipyramidal sp3d
6 Octahedral sp3d2
7 Pentagonal bipyramidal sp3d3
Illustration-3: a) ClO3-
Outermost
conf. of Cl
O.S. of Cl. = 5
El. Conf. after
excitation
📷
∴ No. of unpaired electrons = 5 = O.S. of Cl.
∴Shape is Trigonal pyramidal
b) SO2
Outermost El. Configuration of S
O.S. of S = 4
El. Conf. after excitation
add electrons to pocket
∴Shape of the molecule is angular
📷
c) CO2
Electronic configuration of C
O.S. of C = 4
El. cof. after excitation
add electrons to pocket ∴
📷
∴ Shape of the molecule is linear

e) SO3
Electronic configuration of S
O.S. of S. = 6
El. conf. after
excitation
∴ Shape of the molecule is Trigonal planar
📷
f) SO42-
Electronic configuration of S
O.S. of S = 6
El. conf. after
Excitation
∴ Shape is Tetrahedral
📷
g) CO32-
Electronic configuration of C
O.S. of C. = 4
El. conf. after excitation
∴Shape is Trigonal planar
📷 📷
h) NO3- :
Electronic configuration of N
O.S. of N. = 5
El. conf. after
excitation
∴ Shape is Trigonal planar
📷
i) ClO-
Electronic configuration of Cl
O.S. of Cl. = 1
El. conf. after excitation
∴ Shape is Linear
j) ClO2-
Electronic configuration of Cl
O.S. of Cl. = 3
El. conf. after excitation.
∴ Shape is Angular
📷
k) ClO4-
Electronic configuration of Cl
O.S. of Cl. = 7
El. conf. after excitation
∴ Shape is Tetrahedral
i) SO32-
Electronic configuration of S
O.S. of S. = 4
El. conf. after excitation
∴Shape is Trigonal pyramidal
m) PO43-
Electronic configuration of P
O.S. of P. = 5
El. conf. after excitation
∴ Shape is Tetrahedral
n) XeOF2
Electronic configuration of Xe
O.S. of Xe = 4
El. conf. after excitation
∴ The molecule is T shaped .
📷
o) XeOF4
Electronic configuration of Xe
O.S. of Xe = 6
El. conf. after excitation
∴Shape is Square paramidal
📷
p) XeOF6
Electronic configuration of Xe
O.S. of Xe = 8
El. conf. after excitation
∴ Shape is Pentagonal bipyramidal
📷
Exercise -1: Predict the hybridisation and shape of the following:
(a) BeF2 (b) BBr3 (c) PBr3Cl2
  1. Fajan's Rule: Although atomic bond in a compound like M+X- is considered to be 100% ionic, actually it also has some covalent character. An explanation for the partial covalent character of an ionic bond has been given by Fajan. According to Fajan, if two oppositely charged ions are brought together, the nature of the bond between them depends upon the effect of one ion on the other.
When two oppositely charged ions (say A+ and B- ) approach each other the positive ion attracts electrons on the outermost shell of the anion and repels its positively charged nucleus. This results in the distortion, deformation or polarization of the anion. If the polarization is quite small, an ionic bond is formed, while if the degree of polarization is large, a covalent bond results.
Thus the power of an ion (cation) to distort the other ion is known as its polarization power and the tendency of the ion(anion) to get polarized by the other ion is known as its polarisability. Greater the polarization power or polarisability of an ion, greater will be its tendency to form a covalent bond.
The polarising power, or polarisability and hence formation of covalent bond is favoured by the following factors:
i) Small Positive Ion (Cation): Due to greater concentration of positive charge on a small area, the smaller cation has high polarising power. This explains why LiCl is more covalent than KCl.
ii) Large Negative Ion (Anion): The larger the anion, the greater is its polarisability, i.e. susceptibility to get polarised. It is due to the fact that the outer electrons of a large anion are loosely held and hence can be more easily pulled out by the cation. This explains why iodides, among halides, are most covalent in nature.
iii) Large Charge on Either of the Two Ions: As the charge on the ion increases, the electrostatic attraction of the cation for the outer electrons of the anion also increases, with the result its ability for forming the covalent bond increases. Thus covalency increases in the order : Na+ Cl-, Mg2+ (Cl2) 2-, Al3+ (Cl3)3 -
iv) Electronic Configuration of the Cation : For the two ions of the same size and charge, one with a pseudo noble gas configuration (i.e., 18 electrons in outer-most shell) than a cation with noble gas configuration (i.e. 8 electrons in outermost shell) will be more polarising. Thus copper (I) chloride is more covalent than sodium chloride although Cu+ ion (0.96A°) and Na+ ion (0.95A°) have same size and charge.
The orbital overlapping involved in covalency reduces, the charge on each ion and so weakens the electrovalent forces throughout the solid, as is evident from the melting point of lithium halides.
LiF = 870°C LiCl = 613°C
LiBr = 547°C LiI = 446°C
From the above discussion, we find that greater the possibility of polarisation, lower is the melting point and heat of sublimation and greater is the solubility in non-polar solvents.
Illustration 4: The melting point of KCl is higher than that of AgCl though the crystal radii of Ag+ and K+ ions are almost the same.
Solution : Now whenever any comparison is asked about the melting point of the compounds which are fully ionic from the electron transfer concept it means that the compound having lower melting point has got lesser amount of ionic character than the other one. To analyse such a question first find out the difference between the 2 given compounds. Here in both the compounds the anion is the same. So the deciding factor would be the cation. Now if the anion is different, then the answer should be from the variation of the anion. Now in the above example, the difference of the cation is their electronic configuration. K+ = [Ar]; Ag+ = [Kr] 4d10. This is now a comparison between a noble gas core and pseudo noble gas core, the analysis of which we have already done. So try to finish off this answer.
Exercise -2: SnCl2 is solid but SnCl4 is liquid - Explain
  1. Polar & Non-Polar Covalent Bonds: We had seen in the previous section how an ionic bond could change to a covalent one. The reverse of this is also true. A covalent bond could change bond to partially ionic. This happens when the electronegativity values of the two atoms forming the bond are similar but not same. Such bonds are referred to as polar covalent bonds. For example, bond formed between hydrogen atom and halogen atom, bonds in water, ammonia etc.
δ+ δ - δ+ δ - δ+
H ⎯ Cl ; H ⎯ O ⎯ H.
Dipole Moment: Molecules like H- X having two polar ends are known as dipole or polar molecules. The degree of polarity in a polar compound is given by its dipole moment (μ) which is defined as the product of the net positive or negative charge and distance between the two charged ends, i.e., the bond length.
Dipole moment (μ) = electronic charge (e) × Distance (d) Dipole moment is measured in debye unit (D);
1D = 3.33 × 10-30 Cm
Dipole moment is usually indicated by an arrow, having + on the tail (+ →), above the molecule and pointing towards the negative end, e.g.
📷
Note
  1. In a bond H-X, hydrogen atom is the positive end of diplole where X is any atom other than C or H.
  2. In a bond C-X, the carbon atom is the positive end of the dipole where X is any atom other than carbon. However, in the C-H bonds of hydrocarbons the value and direction of the dipole are not constant and depends upon the state of hybridization of the carbon. For example, the direction and value of dipole moments in C-H bonds of methane and ethylene are as below:
📷
  1. Dipole moment is a vector quantity. So to get the net dipole moment of a molecule the individual dipole moments must be added vectorally.
  2. Zero dipole moment of a molecule indicates that the molecule is symmetric.
Illustration 5: CO2 has got dipole moment of zero why?
Solutions: The structure of CO2 is📷. This is a highly symmetrical structure with a plane of symmetry passing through the carbon. The bond dipole of C–O is directed towards oxygen as it is the negative end. Here two equal dipoles acting in opposite direction cancel each other and therefore the dipole moment is zero.
Exercise -3: Dipole moment of CCl4 is zero while that of CHCl3 is non zero.
Percentage Ionic Character:
Every ionic compound having some percentage of covalent character according to Fajan’s rule. The percentage of ionic character in a compound having some covalent character can be calculated by the following equation.
The percent ionic character = 📷
Illustration 6: Calculate the % of ionic character of a bond having length = 0.92 Å and 1.91 D as it’s observed dipole moment.
Solution: Calculated μ considering 100% ionic bond
= 4.8×10–10× 0.92 ×10–8esu cm
= 4.8 × 0.92 × 10–18 esu cm
= 4.416 D
∴ % ionic character = 📷 = 43.25
The example given above is of a very familiar compound called HF. The % ionic character is nearly 43.25%, so the % covalent character is (100 – 43.25) = 56.75%. But from the octet rule HF should have been a purely covalent compound but actually it has some amount of ionic character in it which is due to the electronegativity difference of H and F. Similarly knowing the bond length and observed dipole moment of HCl, the % ionic character can be known. It was found that HCl has 17% ionic character. Thus it can be clearly seen that although we call HCl and HF as covalent compounds but it has got appreciable amount of ionic character. So from now onwards we should call a compound having more of ionic less of covalent and vice versa rather than fully ionic or covalent.
Exercise 4: Calculate the percentage of covalent character of HI having bond length = 1.62Å and observed dipole moment = 0.39 D.
Hydrogen Bonding
It is an electrostatic attractive force between covalently bonded hydrogen atom of one molecule or a part of a molecule and an electro negative atom (such as F,O, N) of another molecule or another part of the same molecule. It is very weak (strength about 2 - 10 k cal mol-1 or 8.4 - 42 kJ mol-1) as compared to a covalent bond strength 50 – 100 KCal mol -1 or 209-418.4kJ mol-1)
Conditions for Hydrogen Bonding
  1. The molecule must possess a highly electronegative atom linked to hydrogen atom.
  2. The size of the electronegative atom should be small.
Types of Hydrogen Bonding
  1. Inter-Molecular Hydrogen Bonding: In this, two molecules of the same compound join to form aggregates. For example,
📷
Intermolecular hydrogen bonding increases the boiling point of the compound and also its solubility in water.
  1. Intramolecular Hydrogen Bonding: In this hydrogen bonding occurs between atoms of the same molecules present on different sites. This type of hydrogen bonding is generally known as chelation. Some examples are:
📷
Consequence of hydrogen bonding
Intermolecular hydrogen bonding increases boiling point of the compound and also its water solubility on the other hand intramolecular hydrogen bonding decreases the boiling point of the compound and also its water solubility. High boiling points and melting points of NH3,H2O, HF in comparison to hydrides of other elements of group V, VI and VII to which N,O and F belong respectively are due to hydrogen bonding. H2O exists in liquid state whereas H2S in gaseous state because hydrogen bonding exist in water and no H-bonding exists in H2S. Strength of certain acids and bases can be explained on the basis of hydrogen bonding. The organic compounds like alkane, alkenes, alkynes are insoluble in water due to absence of H-bonding whereas alcohols, organic acids, amines are soluble in water due to H-bonding. Density of ice is less than water and water contracts when heated between 0°C and 4°C because ice has open case structure due to hydrogen bonding.
Illustration-7: Ethyl alcohol (C2H5OH) has got a higher boiling point than dimethyl either (CH3-O-CH3) although the molecular weight of both are same.
Solution: Though ethyl alcohol and dimethyl ether have the same molecular weight but in ethyl alcohol the hydrogen of the O-H groups forms intermolecular hydrogen bonding with the OH group in another molecule. But in case of ether the hydrogen is linked to C is not so electronegative to encourage the hydrogen to from hydrogen bonding.
C2H5 C2H5
⎜ ⎜
-----O ⎯ H ----------O ⎯ H ------
Due to intermolecular H-bonding, ethyl alcohol remains in the associated form and therefore boils at a higher temperature compared to dimethyl ether.
Exercise-5: o-hydroxy benzaldehyde is more soluble in water than p-hydroxy benzaldehyde.
Weak Interactions
Van der Waals forces : Although the covalent, ionic, as well as the metallic bond can be used to explain the structural characteristics and the physical states of many substances, a large number of systems do not fit into these categories e.g., inert gases, non polar molecules like H2, N2, Cl2, CH4 etc. (intermolecular interactions of these.). Obviously, weak attractive forces operate between these molecules (else they would not exist in the liquid state, for example). The existence of these forces was first recognised by van der waals as early as 1813, hence these forces.Three obvious sources of van der waals forces are:
∙ Weak dipole-dipole electrostatic attractive forces which would exist in any molecule with permanent dipole eg. HCl, H2O etc.
∙ Weaker dipole-induced dipole interactions resulting from the polarisation of one molecule by the dipole of a neighbouring molecule.
∙ London dispersion forces. For symmetrical molecules (like Ne, Cl2, H2 CH4 etc. ) only London forces operate. Very weak dipoles form even in non-polar molecules due to temporary fluctuations in the electron density distribution.These transient dipoles can now induce dipoles in neighbouring molecules producing a flux of weak temporary interactions.
Valence bond theory (VBT)
A covalent bond is formed by overlapping of valence shell atomic orbitals of the two atoms having unpaired electron. As a result of overlapping, there is maximum electron density between the bonding atoms and large part of bonding force arises due to electrostatic force of attraction between accumulated electron cloud and two nuclei. Greater the overlapping of atomic orbitals higher is the strength of chemical bond. The paired electron of valence shell of an atom can take part in covalent bonding subject to availability of vacant orbitals of slightly higher energy of the same main energy shell and availability of energy for unpairing of paired electron and their shifting to vacant orbitals. This point explains the trivalency of boron, tetravalency of carbon, pentavalency of phosphorous hexavalency of S and hepta valency of Cl, Br, I.
Depending on type of overlapping atomic orbitals covalent bond can be classified into two types
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.19 11:56 rajusingh79 d & f block elements

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1UJPV1hdlGEEpM2JTTfz1ho4tVTRYNXYW/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
INTRODUCTION
The series of elements, that are formed by filling the 3d, 4d and 5d shells of electrons, comprise the d-block elements. They are often called as transition elements because their position in the periodic table is between s-block and p-block elements. Their properties are transitional between the highly reactive metallic elements of the s-block, which form ionic compounds and elements of p-block which form covalent compounds. In s and p blocks electrons add to the last shell, in d-block electrons are added to the penultimate shell. Typically the transition elements have an incompletely filled d level. The zinc group has d10 configuration and compounds of these elements show some differences from other transition elements. The elements make up three complete rows of ten elements and an incomplete fourth row. The position of the incomplete fourth series is discussed along with the f-block elements.
Illustration 1. Through copper, silver and fold have completely filled sets of d-orbitals yet they are considered as transition metals. Why?
Solution: These metals in their common oxidation states have incompletely filled d-orbitals e.g. Cu2+ has 3d9 and Au3+ has 5d8 configuration.
Illustration 2. Zinc, cadmium and mercury are generally not considered as transition metals. Give reasons.
Solution: These elements in their most common oxidation state of +2 have completely filled d-orbitals.
ELECTRONIC CONFIGURATION
The general electronic configuration is (n – 1)1-10 ns1-2 where n is the outermost shell. The number of electrons in their outermost subshell remains two while their penultimate shell of electrons expands from 8 to 18 electrons.
Electronic configuration of 3d series
Sc
Ti
V
Cr
Mn
Fe
CO
Ni
Cu
Zn
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
Anamolous configuration of Cu and Cr
Copper and chromium have a single electron in 4s-orbital. This is due to the gain of additional stability by the atom having either half-filled (5 electrons) or completely filled (10 electrons) d-shell.
Illustration 3. In what way is the electronic configuration of transition elements different form that of the non-transition elements?
Solution: Transition elements contain incompletely filled d-subshell i.e. their electronic configuration is (n – 1)d1−10ns0−2 whereas non-transition elements have no d-subshell or their subshell is completely filled and have ns1−2np1-2 in their outermost shell.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSITION ELEMENTS
(i) Except for mercury, which is a liquid at room temperature all other elements are solid metals exhibiting all the characteristics of a metal.
(ii) The show variable oxidation states unlike s and p block elements.
(iii) They, and some of their compounds, show catalytic properties.
(iv) Their compounds are coloured.
(v) They have great tendency to form complex compounds.
(vi) They form alloys and interstitial compounds.
Conductivity
All the transition metals are good conductors of heat and electricity. Silver is the best conductor of electricity.
Density
Because of small size of their atoms and strong metallic bonding the density and hardness of transition elements are high.
Ionization Energy
The ionization energy (IE) of transition elements are higher than those of s-block elements but lower than p-block elements. In a particular transition series, ionization energy although increases gradually as we move from left to right but this increase is not appreciable.
The increase in ionization energy is due to increase in nuclear charge, the effect of increase in nuclear charge is partly balanced by the increase in screening effect. Consequently, the increase in ionization energy along the period of d-block elements is very small.
Illustration 4. K2PtCl6 is a well known compound whereas corresponding Ni compound is not known. State a reason for it.
Solution: This is because Pt4+ is more stable than Ni4+ has the sum of four ionization energies of Pt is less than that of Ni.
Exercise 1.
Most of the transition metals do not displace hydrogen from dilute acids. Why?
Exercise 2.
Why are the ionization energies of 5d elements greater than 3d elements?
VARIABLE OXIDATION STATES
Transition elements usually exist in several different oxidation states and the oxidation states changes in units of one, e.g. Fe2+ and Fe+3, Cu+1 and Cu+2.
Scandium can have an oxidation number of (+II) if both s electrons are used for bonding and (+III) when two s and one d electrons are involved. Similarly all the elements show variable oxidation states depending upon the number of electrons available for bonding in their s and d sub-shells.
Illustration 5. Why do transition elements show variable oxidation states?
Solution: In the transition elements, the energies of (n-1)d orbitals and ns orbitals are very close. Hence electrons from both can participate in bonding.
Illustration 6. Explain briefly how +2 state becomes more and more stable in the first half of the first row transition elements with increasing atomic number.
OR
Compare the stability of +2 oxidation state of the elements of the first transition series.
Solution: The sum IE1 + IE2 increases. As a result the standard reduction potentials (E0) becomes less and less negative. Hence the tendency to form M2+ ion decreases. The greater stability of +2 state for Mn is due to half-filled d-subshell (d5), that for zinc is due to completely filled d-subshell (d10) and half that for nickel is due to highest negative enthalpy of hydration.
Exercise 3.
Why are Mn2+ compounds more stable than Fe2+ towards oxidation to their +3 state?
COMPLEXES AND THEIR PROPERTIES
The transition elements have an unparalleled tendency to form coordination compounds with the Lewis bases, which are called as ligands.
📷
📷
s and p block elements form very few complexes. The reason transition elements are so good at forming complex is that they have small, highly charged ions and have vacant low energy orbitals to accept lone pairs of electrons donated by ligands.
Size of Atoms and Ions
The covalent radii of the elements decrease from left to right across a row in the transition series. This is because of the poor screening by the d electrons due to which, the nuclear charge attracts all of the electrons more strongly, hence a contraction in size occurs.
The elements in the first group in the d-block show the excepted increase (due to the addition of extra shell) in size Sc→ Y → La. However in the subsequent groups there is an increase between first and second members, but hardly any increase between second and third elements. This is due to lanthanide contraction (discussed in f-block elements).
Exercise 4.
Why have the transition elements high enthalpy of hydration?
Colour
Many compounds of transition elements are coloured in contrasts to those of s and p block elements.
In compound state due to the surrounding groups (ligands), the d-orbitals of transition elements are not degenerate but split into two groups of different energy. Thus it is possible to promote electrons from one group to another group. This corresponds to fairly small amount of energy difference and so light is absorbed in visible region. Some compounds of transition metals are white, for example ZnSO4 and TiO2. In these compounds it is not possible to promote the electrons within the d-level.
Illustration 7. Why Zn2+ salts are white while Ni2+ salts are blue?
Solution: Zn2+ has completely filled d-orbitals (3d10) while Ni2+ has incompletely filled d-orbitals (3d8).
Illustration 8. Why Zn2+ salts are white while Cu2+ salts are blue?
Solution: Reason same as above.
Illustration 9. Giving reasons indicate which one of the following would be coloured?
Cu+, VO2+, Sc3+, Ni2+ (At. Nos Cu = 29, V = 23, Sc = 21, Ni = 28)
Solution: Ni2+ due to incompletely filled d-orbitals.
Exercise 5.
[Ti(H2O)6]3+ is coloured while [Sc(H2O)6]3+ is colourless. Explain.
Exercise 6.
Why is copper sulphite pentahydrate coloured?
Magnetic Properties
On the basis of behaviour in a magnetic field, substance are classified as paramagnetic, diamagnetic and ferromagnetic. Those substance which are attracted by the applied magnetic field are called paramagnetic where as those which are repelled by the magnetic field are called diamagnetic. Substances which are very strongly attracted by the applied field are called ferromagnetic.
Paramagnetism is a property due to the presence of unpaired electrons. Thus most of the transition metals are paramagnetic. As the number of unpaired electrons increases, the paramagnetic character also increases.
The magnetic moment is calculated from the following formula 📷
Where n is the number of unpaired electrons and B. M stands for Bohr magneton.
Illustration 10. Why does Mn(II) show maximum papamagentic character amongst the bivalent ions of the first transition series?
Solution: Mn2+ has maximum number of unpaired electrons i.e. 3d5.
Illustration 11. A substance is found to have a magnetic moment of 3.9 B.M. How many unpaired electrons does it contain?
Solution: Using the formula, 📷
Catalytic Properties
Many transition metals and their compounds have catalytic properties. For e.g. V2O5, Fe, FeCl3, Ni, Pd etc.
This property of transition elements is due to their variable oxidation states. In some cases the transition metals with their variable valency may form variable unstable intermediate compounds. In other cases the transition metal provides a suitable reaction surface.
NON STOICHIOMETRY
Another feature of the transition elements is that they sometimes form non stoichiometry compounds. These are compounds of indefinite structure and proportions. For example📷. It is mostly due to the variable valency of transition elements. Sometimes, non stoichiometry is caused by defects in the solid structures.
ALLOY FORMATION
Alloys are homogenous solid solutions of two or more metals obtained by melting the components and then cooling the melt. These are formed by metals whose atomic radii differ by not more than 15% so that the atoms of one metal can easily take up the positions in the crystal lattice of the other. Since transition metals have similar atomic radii, they form alloys very readily.
STUDY OF SOME IMPORTANT COMPOUNDS
(I) Copper (II) Sulphate pentahydrate or blue vitriol, CuSO4.5H2O
Preparation
In the laboratory, it is prepared by dissolving cupric oxide, cupric hydroxide or carbonate in dilute H2SO4.
CuO + H2SO4 ⎯⎯→ CuSO4 + H2O
Cu(OH)2 + H2SO4 ⎯⎯→ CuSO4 + 2H2O
CuCO3 + H2SO4 ⎯⎯→ CuSO4 + H2O + CO2
The solution of CuSO4 thus obtained is concentrated and cooled when crystals of blue vitriol, CuSO4.5H2O separates out. Commercially it is prepared by the action of hot dilute sulphuric acid on scrap copper in the presence of air.
📷
Properties
1. Action of heat
📷
In CuSO4.5H2O, four H2O molecules are coordinated to the central Cu2+ ion. While the 5th one is attached between 📷 and H2O molecule by hydrogen bonding. This fifth H2O molecule is thus deep inside the crystal lattice and is not easily lost.
2. Action of alkalis
📷
With NH4OH it forms tetraamminecopper (II) sulphate
📷
3. Reaction with KI
📷
📷
The liberation of iodine in this reaction is quantitative. Therefore, this reaction is used to estimate copper volumetrically.
Uses
(i) It is used as an electrolyte in electroplating, electrotyping and refining of copper.
(ii) It is used in reservoirs and swimming pools to prevent the growth of weeds.
(iii) It is used as a fungicide under the name Bordeaux mixture, which is a mixture of CuSO4 and slaked lime Ca(OH)2.
(iv) Anhydrous CuSO4 is used for detection of moisture in organic liquids such as alcohol, ether etc.
Silver Nitrate, AgNO3
Preparation
It is prepared by the action of dilute nitric acid on silver and then evaporating the solution to crystallization.
📷
Properties
1. Action of heat
It decomposes on heating.
📷
2. On coming into contact with organic matter like skin or clothes, it is reduced to finely – divided silver, giving a black stain.
3. Precipitation reactions
It gives precipitates with some salt solutions which help in the detection of acid radicals. Some of the precipitation reactions are:
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
📷
Uses
It is used for
  1. Preparing silver halides used in photography.
  2. For making inks and hair dyes.
  3. In qualitative and quantitative analysis.
  4. For silvering of glass, i.e. preparation of mirrors.
Halides
1. Silver halides (AgF, AgCl, AgBr & AgI)
Preparation
Silver halides are prepared by the action of sodium or potassium halide on silver nitrate solution (except for AgF)
📷
Silver fluoride is prepared by the action of HF on silver (I) oxide.
📷
Properties
(i) AgCl is white solid, AgBr is a pale yellow solid and AgI is a yellow solid.
(ii) AgF is soluble in water whereas other halides are insoluble in water. AgCl dissolves in ammonia to form a complex.
📷
AbBr is partially soluble and AgI is insoluble in NH4OH.
(iii) All the silver halides dissolve in potassium cyanide and Na2S2O3 solution to form complexes.
📷
📷
Uses
All silver halides (particularly AgBr) are photosensitive and hence are widely used in photography.
2. Mercury halides
(a) Mercury (I) chloride or mercurous chloride or calomel, Hg2Cl2
Preparation
(i) It can be prepared by mixing a chloride solution with a mercury (I) salt solution.
📷
(ii) It can also prepared by heating a mixture of mercuric chloride and mercury in an iron vessel.
📷
Properties
(i) It is a white power insoluble in water but soluble in chlorine water.
📷
(ii) It decomposes on heating to HgCl2
📷
(iii) On treatment with ammonia, if turns black due to the formation of finely divided mercury.
📷
Uses
(i) In making standard calomel electrode and
(ii) As a purgative in medicine.
(b) Mercury (II) chloride HgCl2
  1. It is prepared by passing dry chlorine over heated mercury.
📷
  1. It is also obtained by treating HgO with HCl
📷
  1. Commercially, it is prepared by heating a mixture of HgSO4 and NaCl in the presence of MnO2
📷
Properties
  1. It is a white crystalline solid sparingly soluble in cold water but soluble in hot water. Its solubility can be increased by adding Cl−.
📷
  1. It is readily soluble in organic solvents suggesting its covalent nature.
  2. When treated with SnCl2 it is reduced to mercury.
📷
📷
  1. When Cu turnings are placed in its contact a shining grey film of mercury deposits over them.
📷
Uses
It is used for preserving wood and hides and for making fungicides.
(c) Mercury (II) Iodide
Preparation
It is prepared by treating HgCl2 with KI.
📷
Properties
  1. Mercuric iodide exists in two forms, i.e. red and yellow. The yellow form is stable above 400 K white the red form is stable below this temperature.
📷
  1. It readily dissolves in KI forming a complex
HgI2 + 2KI ⎯→ K2[HgI4]
An alkaline solution of K2HgI4 is called Nessler’s reagent and is used to detect the presence of NH4+ with which it gives a brown precipitate due to the formation of iodide of Million’s base.
Uses
It is used to prepare Nessler’s reagent and for making ointments for treating skin infections.
Potassium Dichromate, K2Cr2O7
Preparation
It is prepared from the ore called chromate or ferrochrome or chrome iron, FeO.Cr2O3. The various steps involved are
(a) Preparation of sodium chromate
📷
📷
(b) Conversion of sodium chromate into sodium dichromate.
📷
(c) Conversion of sodium dichromate into potassium dichromate.
📷
Properties
It forms orange red crystals. It is moderately soluble in cold water but freely soluble in hot water.
1. Action of heat
When heated, it decomposed to its chromate
📷
2. Action of alkalis
With alkalis it is converted into chromate which on acidifying gives back dichromate.
📷
📷
In dichromate solution the 📷 ions are in equilibrium with 📷 ions at pH = 4.
📷
3. Action of conc. H2SO4 solution
(a) In cold conditions
📷
(b) In hot conditions
📷
4. Oxidising properties
It is a powerful oxidising agent. In the presence of dil. H2SO4 it furnishes 3 atoms of available oxygen.
📷
Some of the oxidizing properties of K2Cr2O7 are
(a) It liberates I2 from KI
📷
(b) It oxidises ferrous salts to ferric salts
📷
(c) It oxidises S−2 to S
📷
(d) It oxidises nitrites to nitrates
📷
(e) It oxidises SO2 to 📷
📷
(f) It oxidises ethyl alcohol to acetaldehyde and acetic acid.
5. Chromyl chloride test
When heated with conc. HCl or with a chloride in the presence of sulphuric acid, reddish brown vapours of chromyl chloride are obtained.
📷
Thus reaction is used in the detection of chloride ions in qualitative analysis.
Uses
  1. In volumetric analysis for the estimation of Fe2+ and I−.
  2. In chrome tanning in leather industry.
  3. In photography and in hardening gelatin film.
Potassium Permanganate, KMnO4
Preparation on a large scale
It is prepared from the mineral pyrolusite, MnO2. The preparation involves the following steps
(i) Conversion of MnO2 into potassium manganate.
When finely powdered MnO2 is fused with KOH. K2MnO4 is obtained.
📷
(ii) Oxidation of potassium manganate into permanganate
(a) Chemical oxidation
K2MnO4 is oxidised to KMnO4 by bubbling CO2 or Cl2 or ozone into the former.
📷
(b) Electrolytic oxidation
The manganate solution is electrolysed between iron electrodes. The oxygen evolved at anode converts manganate into permanganate.
📷
Properties
KMnO4 exists as deep purple prisms. It is moderately soluble in water at room temperature and its solubility in water increases with temperature.
(i) Action of heat
When heated it decomposes to K2MnO4.
📷
(ii) Action of conc. H2SO4
With cold conc. H2SO4 it gives Mn2O7 which on warming decomposes to MnO2.
📷
📷
With hot Conc. H2SO4 O2 is evolved
📷
(iii) Oxidising properties
KMnO4 is a powerful oxidizing agent. The actual oxidizing action depends upon the medium i.e. acidic, basic or neutral.
(a) In neutral solution, it acts as moderate oxidizing agent.
📷
Some oxidizing properties of KMnO4 in neutral medium are
📷
📷
(b) In strong alkaline solution, it is converted into 📷
📷
Some reactions in alkaline medium are
📷
(c) In acidic medium, Mn+7 is converted into Mn+2
📷
Some other reactions are
(i) 📷
(ii) 📷
(iii) 📷
(iv) 📷
(v) 📷
(vi) 📷
Uses
(i) It is used in volumetric analysis for the estimation of ferrous salts, oxalates, iodides and H2O2.
(ii) It is used as oxidizing agent in the laboratory as well as in industry.
(iii) It is also used as disinfectant and germicide.
PHOTOGRAPHY
Modern photography is an application of the chemical behaviour of the silver halides which decomposes and turn black in light.
For example:
📷
Following steps are involved in photography:
1. Preparation of sensitive plate or film
To a solution of NH4Br containing gelatin, amm. AgNO3 is added. Thus an emulsion of AgBr in gelatin is prepared
📷
The mixture is allowed to stand is order for AgBr particles to grow in size. This process is called ripening of emulsion. Then the emulsion is solidified. It is washed with water to expel NH3NO3 and then melted and applied uniformly on a glass plate or celluloid film.
2. Exposure
The plate or film is fixed in camera. For a fraction of a second the film is exposed so that an impression of the object to be photographed is made on the film. The silver bromide which is affected by light gets reduced.
📷
An actual but inverted image of the object is thus formed on the plate which is not visible to the eye.
3. Developing
The exposed film is immersed in a solution of the developer which contains reducing agents like pyrogallol or quinol. This solution reacts with the exposed part of the film. After the developing process, those parts of the film are white which were originally dark in the object and those parts are black which were originally white. This is known as negative.
📷
The process of developing is carried out in a dark room.
4. Fixing the negative
Fixing is the process of making the image permanent. This is done by placing the negative in the hypo which will dissolve the undecomposed silver bromide.
📷
The negative plate can now be taken out of dark room into light.
5. Printing of the photograph
The positive paper is prepared in a similar manner as the negative with the only difference that it is less sensitive. Either the P.O.P (printing out paper) or bromide paper is generally used for the purpose. The POP has got a coating of AgCl and AgNO3. The paper is placed below the negative and then exposed to light. A negative of negative plate or positive with respect to the object is obtained on the print paper.
6. Toning
In order to impart a beautiful golden colour to the photograph, it is dipped in a dilute solution of gold chloride. The process is called toning. If a shining grey tinge is desired in the photograph, it is dipped in potassium chloroplatinate, K2PtCl4 solution.
The silver particles on the print are replaced by gold or platinum particles resulting in the toning up of the photograph.
📷
f – BLOCK ELEMENTS
The elements in which the differentiating electron enters the anti penultimate energy level i.e. (n – 2)f, are called f – block elements. These are often called as inner transition elements or rare earth elements. The differentiating electron in transition elements may enter either 4f or 5f orbitals based upon which they are differentiated into lanthanides and actinides.
Lanthanides
In lanthanides the differentiating electron enters 4f orbital. These are cerium to lutetium. The name lanthanides is because they come immediately after lanthanum.
Actinides
In actinides the differentiating electron enters 5f orbitals. These are thorium to lawrencium. These elements come immediately after actinium.
Electronic configuration
General electronic configuration of f – block elements is 📷
Lanthanides 📷
Actinides 📷
CHARACTERISTICS OF LANTHANIDES
1. Oxidation states
Lanthanides show only one stable oxidation state, which is not in the case of actinides. The typical oxidation state of lanthanides is +3. Some elements show +2 and +4 also, when they lead to
(a) a noble gas configuration e.g. 📷
(b) a half filled f shell e.g. 📷
(c) a completely filled f shell e.g.📷
2. Lanthanide contraction
In lanthanide series with increasing atomic number there is a progressive decrease in the atomic as well as ionic radii. This regular decrease is known as lanthanide contraction. This is due to the poor shielding of f orbitals, which are unable to counter balance the effect of increasing nuclear charge. Net result is contraction in size.
Consequences of lanthanide contraction
Since the change in ionic radii in lanthanides is very small (only 15 pm from Ce3+ to Cu3+), their chemical properties are similar. This makes the separation of the elements in pure state very difficult.
Due to lanthanide contraction, the difference in size between second (4d) and third (5d) is very small.
As the size of the lanthanide ions decreases from La+3 to Lu+3, the covalent character of the hydroxides increases and hence the basic strength decreases. Thus La(OH)3 is most basic whereas Lu(OH)3 is least basic.
3. Complex formation
The lanthanides do not have much tendency to form complexes due to low charge density because of their size. However, the tendency to form complex and their stability increases with increasing atomic number.
4. Chemical Behaviour
The first few members of the series are quite reactive like calcium. However with increasing atomic number, their behaviour becomes similar to that of aluminum.
(a) They combine with H2 on gentle heating. When heated with carbon, they form carbides. On burning in the presence of halogens, they form halides.
(b) They react with dilute acids to liberate H2.
(c) They form oxides and hydroxides of the type N2O3 and M(OH)3 which are basic alkaline earth metal oxides and hydroxides.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF ACTINIDES
1. Oxidation states
The dominant oxidation state of these elements is +3 (similar to lanthanides). Besides +3 state, they also exhibit +4 oxidation state. Some actinides show still higher oxidation states. The maximum oxidation state first increases upto the middle of the series and then decreases i.e. it increases from +4 for Th to +5, +6 and +7 for Pa, V and Np but decreases in the succeeding elements.
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.19 10:28 rajusingh79 ALKYL & ARYL HALIDES

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1hLYxflz6swysmUEPIEWaACTVwUR5GMdZ/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
INTRODUCTION
Alkyl halides or halo alkanes are compounds in which a halogen is bonded to an alkyl group. They have the general formula RX (where R is alkyl group CnH2n+1) X is halogen atom.
📷
Alkyl halides are classified as primary, secondary and tertiary alky halides depending on whether the halogen atom is attached to a primary, secondary or tertiary carbon atom respectively.
For example
📷
📷
📷
Aromatic halogen compounds or halo arenes are the halogen compounds which contain atleast one aromatic ring. Halogen derivatives of aromatic compounds are of two types.
1. Aryl halides
In this type of compounds, the halogen atom is directly linked to the carbon of benzene nucleus e.g.
📷
2. Aralkyl halides
In this type of compounds halogen is linked to the carbon atom of the side chain.
📷
NOMENCLATURE OF ALKYL & ARYL HALIDES
In the common system, aliphatic halogen derivatives are named as alkyl halides. The words n⎯, sec⎯, tert⎯, iso⎯, neo⎯ & amyl are usually used in writing the common names. In IUPAC nomenclature they are named as halo alkanes.
Example:
Formula
Common name
IUPAC name
CH3Cl
Methyl chloride
Chloro methane
CH3CH2CH2Cl
n – propyl chloride
1 – chloro propane
📷
Isopropyl chloride
2 – chloro propane
The dihalogen derivatives having same type of halogen atoms on the same carbon are known as geminal dihalides and are assigned common name alkylidene halides.
The dihalogen derivatives having 2 similar halogen atoms on adjacent carbon atoms are known as vicinal dihalides & are assigned common name alkylene halides.
Tri halo methanes are called haloforms in trivial system.
Example:
Formula
Common name
IUPAC name
CH2Cl2
Methylene chloride
Dichloromethane
📷
Ethylene chloride
1, 2 – dichloro ethane
📷
Ethylidene chloride
1, 1 – dichloro ethane
Haloarenes are named by prefixing the halogen and its position.
📷
📷
📷
Illustration 1. Write structural formulae of 3 Bromo hexane.
Solution:
📷
Illustration 2. Write IUPAC name of following compounds.
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
Solution: (i) 1, 2 – dichloropropane
(ii) 3-chlorprop-1-ene
Exercise 1.
(i) Write IUPAC name for
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(c)
📷
(d)
📷
(ii) Give structural formulae of
(a) Ethylene dibromide
(b) 2 – chloro – 3, 3 – dimethyl butane
PREPARATION
(i) From Alkanes: Alkanes react with halogens in the presence of light to give alkyl halides.
📷
📷
Alkyl halides formed further react with halogen to give di, tri and tetra halogen compounds.
(ii) From alkenes: Alkenes add halogen acids to give halides. For example
📷
Markonikoff’s rule: In the addition reactions of unsymmetrical alkenes the −ve part attaches to the carbon atom having lesser number of H-atoms. E.g.
📷
In case of HBr if peroxide is added antimarkonikoff’s addition takes place which is also called Kharash effect or peroxide effect e.g.
📷
(iii) From silver salt of carboxylic acids:
📷
This reaction is called Borodine Hunsdiecker reaction.
(iv) Finkelstein reaction: Alkyl chlorides and bromides reacts with NaI in acetone to give alkyl iodides.
📷
This reactions is possible because NaI is soluble in acetone but NaCl and NaBr are insoluble in acetone.
Illustration 3. Dry gaseous hydrohalogen acid and not their aqueous solutions are used to prepare alkyl halides from alkenes.
Solution: Dry gaseous halogen acids are better electrophiles than 📷 formed in water solutions. Also in aqueous solution H2O acting as nucleophile may produce alcohol.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Halo Alkanes
1. Boiling Points
The boiling points of haloalkanes are in the order RCl < RBr < RI. It is because with increase in size and mass of halogen atom the magnitude of Vander Waal’s forces of attraction increases.
Among isomeric alkyl halides, the boiling point decreases with increase in branching in alkyl group.
e.g the decreasing order of boiling point among the isomers of butane is
CH3(CH2)CH2Cl >
📷
>
📷
>
(CH3)3CCl
For same halogen, the boiling point increases with increase in molecular mass.
e.g. CH3Cl has lower boiling point than CH3CH2Cl
The boiling points of various halogen compounds increase with increase in number of halogen atoms.
For e.g. boiling point of CCl4 is more than boiling point of CHCl3 which is further more than CH2Cl2
Halo Arenes
1. Boiling point
The boiling points of mono halogen derivatives of benzene follows the order:
Iodo > Bromo > Chloro
The boiling points of isomeric dihalo benzenes are nearly the same. However their melting points are quite different. The melting point of para isomer is generally 70 – 100 degrees more than the melting points of ortho & meta isomers.
📷
📷
📷
B.P 453 K 446 K 448 K
M.P. 256 K 249 K 325 K
The higher melting point of p – isomer is due to its symmetry which leads to more close packing of its molecules in the crystal lattice.
2. Solubility
Haloarenes are insoluble in water, acids or base but are soluble in organic solvents.
Haloarenes are insoluble in water because they can not form hydrogen bonds with water molecules.
3. Density
They are all heavier than water. Their densities follow the order:
Iodo > Bromo > Chloro
Illustration 4. Explain why chloroform (CHCl3) is not soluble in water although it is polar.
Solution: Chloroform is insoluble is water inspite of its polar nature because its molecules can not form hydrogen bonds with water.
Illustration 5. Arrange the following in increasing order of density
CHCl3, CH2Cl2, CCl4, CH3Cl
Solution: CH3Cl < CH2Cl2 < CHCl3 < CCl4
Illustration 6. Melting and boiling points of alkyl halides are higher then their corresponding alkanes. Why?
Solution: The higher molecular mass and polar nature of alkyl halides is the reason of high melting and boiling points which are in the order
📷
Exercise 2.
(a) p-dichlorobenzene is solid at room temperature whereas ‘o’ and ‘m’ – derivatives are liquids.
(b) Haloalkanes are used as solvents in industry are chloro compounds rather than bromo compounds.
(c) Ethyl chloride is a gas whereas ethyl iodide is a liquid at room temperature. Why?
Exercise 3.
(i) Arrange the following in order of increasing boiling points
bromobenzene, chlorobenzene, iodobenzene
(ii) Explain why haloarenes are insoluble in water but are soluble in benzene.
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Haloalkanes are highly reactive class of aliphatic compounds. Their reactivity is due to the presence of polar carbon – halogen bond in their molecule. In general for a given alkyl group, the order of reactivity decreases as:
Iodides > Bromides > Chlorides
The explanation of above order is that reaction of alkyl halides involve cleavage of C – X bond. So higher the bond dissociation energy smaller reactivity & the bond dissociation energy decrease with increase in size of halogen atom.
The chemical reactions of halo alkanes are of 4 types:
  1. Nucleophilic substitution reactions
  2. Dehydro halogenation reactions
  3. Reactions with metals
  4. Reduction reactions
NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION REACTION
In halo alkanes, the halogen atom is attached to the carbon atom. As the halogen atom is more electronegative than carbon, the bond between carbon & halogen is polar in character.
📷
Due to the presence of partial positive charge on the carbon atom, the nucleophiles can attack on electron deficient carbon.
📷
The order of reactivity of various alkyl halides towards nucleophilic substitution is in the order:
RI > RBr > RCl > RF
Mechanism
Nucleophilic substitution reactions in halides containing 📷 bond may take place through either of the two different mechanism – SN1& SN2.
SN1 mechanism (Unimolecular Nucleophilic Substitution)
In this type the rate of reaction is dependent only on the concentration of alkyl halide i.e.
Rate = k[RX]
Step1:
In this step the alkyl halide slowly dissociates into halide ion & carbocation.
📷
Step 2:
In the 2nd step carbocation at once combines with the nucleophile to form the final substituted product.
📷
The order of reactivity of various alkyl halides through SN1 mechanism is
30 > 20 > 10
Allylic & benzylic halides show greatest reactivity through SN1 mechanism due to stability of allylic & benzylic carbocations.
SN2 Mechanism (Bimolecular Nucleophilic Substitution)
In this type the rate of reaction is dependent on the concentration of alkyl halide as well as nucleophile i.e.
Rate = K[RX] [Z−]
Primary alkyl halides react by SN2 mechanism via formation of transition state.
📷
The order of reactivity of various alkyl halides through SN2 mechanism is
10 > 20 > 30
Factors affecting SN1 & SN2 Mechanism
The reaction mechanism, SN1 or SN2, followed by nucleophilic substitution depends upon a number of factors. These factors are
1. Nature of alkyl halides: Primary alkyl halides react through SN2 & tertiary alkyl halides through SN1 mechanism.
2. Nature of Nucleophile: Strong nuclophile favour SN2 mechanism whereas weak nucleophile favours SN1 mechanism.
3. Concentration of Nucleophile: High concentration of nucleophile favours SN2 while low concentration favours SN1 mechanism.
4. Nature of Solvent: Polar solvents favour SN1 mechanism.
Illustration 7. Why are alkyl halides very reactive?
Solution: Cδ+ − Xδ− bond in alkyl halides is polar and the negative charge on halogen atom is intensified by the positive inductive effect of alkyl groups.
Illustration 8. Amongst the following the most reactive alkyl halide is
(A) C2H5F (B) C2H5Cl
(C) C2H5Br (D) C2H5I
Solution: (D)
Illustration 9. Which of the following alkyl halides is hydrolysed by SN2 mechanism?
(A) C6H5CH2Br (B) CH3Br
(C) CH2 = CHCH2Br (D) (CH3)3CBr
Solution: (B)
Illustration 10. Which compound has a faster rate of reaction with HCl :
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Solution: More stable the carbocation formed faster is the reaction.
(i)
📷📷
📷
Exercise 4.
Vinyl chloride does not give SN reaction but allyl chloride gives. Explain.
Some nucleophilic reactions are as follows:
1. Replacement by hydroxyl group (formation of alcohols)
Haloalkanes on treatment with aqueous solution of KOH or moist silver oxide give alcohol.
📷
📷
2. Replacement by Alkoxy (Formation of ethers) (Williamson’s synthesis)
Haloalkanes on treatment with alcoholic sodium or potassium hydroxide form ethers. This reaction is known as Williamson’s synthesis .
📷
Exercise 5. What are the products of the following reactions?
📷
📷
3. Replacement by cyano group
Haloalkanes on treatment with alcoholic KCN give alkyl nitriles or alkyl cyanides as major product.
📷
Exercise 6.
When CH3—CH=CH–CH2Cl reacts with alcoholic KCN, a mixture of isomeric products is obtained. Explain.
4. Replacement with Isocyanide Group (Formation of isocyanides)
On reaction with alcoholic silver cyanide solution, haloalkanes give alkyl carbylamines or alkyl isocyanides as the major product along with or small amount of alkyl cyanide.
RX + alc. AgCN ⎯⎯⎯→ R ⎯ NC + AgX
Isocyanide
5. Replacement by Amino Group (Formation of amines)
On heating haloalkanes with alcoholic ammonia solution in a sealed tube, halogen is replaced by ⎯NH2 group to form primary amine.
R ⎯ X + NH3 (alc.) ⎯⎯⎯→ R ⎯ NH2 + HX
Primary amine
In case haloalkanes is in excess, the other 2 hydrogen atoms of amino group are also replaced by alkyl groups leading to the formation of secondary & tertiary amines.
C2H5 ⎯ Br + HNHC2H5 ⎯⎯⎯→ (C2H5)2NH + HBr
Diethylamine
6. Replacement by Nitro group (Formation of nitro alkanes)
On treating ethanolic solution of haloalkanes with silver nitrite (Ag ⎯ O ⎯ N = O), nitro alkane is formed.
📷
It is because the bond between Ag ⎯ O being covalent, the lone pair on nitrogen act as attacking site for nucleophilic substitution.
7. Replacement by Nitrite group (Formation of alkyl nitrites)
On treatment of haloalkanes with potassium nitrite alkyl nitrite is formed.
R ⎯ X + KNO2 ⎯⎯⎯→ R ⎯ O ⎯ N = O + KX
Alkyl nitrite
8. Replacement of halogens by Mercaptide (:SR Group)
On treating haloalkanes with sodium mercaptide, thio ethers are formed.
📷
9. Replacement by ⎯SH (Hydrosulphide) group (Formation of thiols or mercaptals)
On treating haloalkanes with 📷 or 📷 thioalcohols are formed.
📷
10. Replacement by Alkynyl Group (Formation of higher alknes)
On treating halo alkanes with sodium alkynide 📷 , higher alkynes are formed.
📷
11. Replacement by Carboxylate Group (Formation of esters)
Haloalkanes on treatment with silver salt of carboxylic acids in ethanol give esters.
📷
12. Replacement by Hydride Ion
Alkyl halides on reaction with lithium aluminium hydride in the presence of dry ether as solvent yield corresponding hydrocarbon.
📷
Dehydrohalogenation Reactions or β - elimination Reactions
When halo alkanes are heated with alcoholic KOH, they undergo dehydrohalogenation to form alkanes. These reactions are called β - elimination because the hydrogen atom present at β - position of halo alkanes is removed.
📷
CH3 ⎯ CH2 ⎯ Br + KOH (alc.) ⎯⎯⎯→ H2C = CH2 + KBr + H2O
Ethene
The reactivity of haloalkanes towards elimination reaction follows the order
Tertiary > secondary > Primary
This is because tertiary alkyl halides on dehydrohalogenation form most substituted alkenes which are more stable & are formed at faster rate.
Among various halides with same alkyl group the order of reactivity is
RI > RBr > RCl
In case the haloalkanes can eliminate hydrogen halide in 2 – different ways, the preferred alkane is the one which is maximum alkylated (most substituted).
for e.g.
📷
Illustration 11. What is the function of anhyd. ZnCl2 in the reaction of alcohols with conc. HCl (or Lucas reagent)?
Solution: The function of anhydrous zinc chloride is to help in the cleavage of C – O bond. Being a lewis acid anhydrous ZnCl2 co-ordinates to the O-atoms of R – OH and thus weakens the C – O bond which then breaks to give carbocation. Moreover anhyd. ZnCl2 acts as a dehydrating agent and helps the reaction to go in the forward direction.
Reactions with Metals
1. Reaction with sodium (Wurtz reaction)
Haloalkanes react with sodium in the presene of ether to form alkanes.
📷
2. Reaction with Magnesium
Haloalkanes react with magnesium in the presence of dry ether to form alkyl magnesium halide (Grignard reagents)
📷
Grignard reagents are organometallic compounds, i.e. compounds having metal carbon bond. Grignard regents are highly reactive. They react with proton donors (acids) to give hydrocarbons.
📷
3. Reaction with Lithium
Haloalkanes react with lithium in the presence of dry ether to form alkyl lithium. These salts serve as strong bases.
📷
4. Reaction with lead sodium Alloy
Ethyl bromide react with lead sodium alloy in the presence of dry ether to form tetra ethyl lead (TEL).
📷
Reduction
Haloalkanes can be reduced to alkanes by any of following methods
  1. Reaction with H2/Ni
📷
  1. Reaction with zinc copper couple
In the presence of alcohols, Zn – Cu couple reduces haloalkanes to alkanes.
📷
📷
Illustration 12. The order of reactivity of alkyl halides towards elimination reaction is :
(A) 📷 (B) 📷
(C) 📷 (D) 📷
Solution: (A)
Illustration 13. The end product “Z” in the following reaction, ethylamine 📷 is
(A) Methyl amine (B) Acetamide
(C) Ethylamine (D) Propylamine
Solution: (C)
Illustration 14. Why Grignard reagents should be prepared under anhydrous conditions?
Solution: Grignard reagents react with water & get decomposed (hydrolysed) hence they should be prepared under anhydrous conditions.
📷
Illustration15. Predict the major product in each of following reaction.
📷
Solution: Ph ⎯ C ≡ C ⎯ Ph
Illustration 16. Alkyl iodides darken on standing. Why?
Solution: Iodides being less stable, lose I2. The liberated iodine is absorbed by iodides which results in darkening of colour.
Illustration 17. Iodine reacts with alcohols to form alkyl iodide only in the presence of phosphorous. Explain why?
Solution: Phosphorus reacts with I2 to give PI3 which replaces OH group of alcohol to produce R − I.
📷
📷
Exercise 7.
(i) Arrange the following in order of increasing reactivity towards nucleophilic substitutions: - (CH3)2CHBr, (CH3)2CHI, (CH3)2CHCl.
(ii) Why neo-pentyl bromide undergoes nucleophilic substitution reactions very slowly?
Difference in Reactivity of C – X bond in Alkyl halides & Aryl halides
Aryl halides are much less reactive towards nucleophilic substitution reaction than haloalkanes. The less reactivity of aryl halides can be explained as follows:
1. Withdrawal of Electrons by benzene & stabilization by resonance
In aryl halide, the electron pair of halogen atom is in conjugation with π electrons of benzene ring. Thus halobenzene is a resonance hybrid of following structures:
📷
The contributing structures II, III & IV indicate that C ⎯ X bond has partial double bond characters.
As a resultant the C ⎯ X bond in halobenzene is shorter & hence stronger as compared to that in alkyl halides. Thus cleavage of C ⎯ X bond in halobenzene becomes difficult which makes it less reactive towards nucleophilic substitution.
2. Different hybrid states of carbon atom
In haloalkanes, the carbon atom bearing halogen is sp3 hydridized while halogen bearing carbon atom is sp2 hybrized in haloarenes. sp2 hybrid orbital is smaller in size due to greater s – character. As a result bond in haloarenes is smaller & is cleaved with difficulty.
3. Polarity of C ⎯ X Bond
The C ⎯ X bond in halo alkanes is more polar than the C ⎯ X bond in haloarenes. Now greater the polarity of bond more is the reactivity.
Illustration18. Benzyl chloride is more reactive than chlorobenzene towards nuclephilic substitution. Explain.
Solution: In the molecule of benzyl chloride, the electron pairs on the chlorine atom are not in a position to conjugate with the π-electrons of the ring.
📷
whereas electron pairs on the chlorine atom are in conjugation with the π-electrons of the ring in the molecule of chlorobenzene. Consequently the C-Cl bond in chlorobenzene acquires some double bond character which is not present in benzyl chloride. As a result, the reactivity of chlorobenzene towards nucleophilic substitution is much less than that of benzyl chloride.
Illustration 19. It is difficult to remove halogen from the aromatic ring by an attack of KOH. Why?
Solution: Only at 600 K and 300 K (very drastic conditions) Cl atoms of chlorobenzene is replaced by −OH on treatment with KOH. Haloarenes are less reactive due to resonance stabilization.
📷
Reactions of Aryl Halides
Aryl halides being less reactive, can be made to react under drastic conditions.
Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions
1. Replacement by Hydroxyl group
On heating chlorobenzene with an aq. solution of NaOH at 623 K under 300 atm pressure, sodium phenoxide is formed which on subsequent acidification produces phenol.
📷
2. Replacement by Cyano Group
When heated with anhydrous CuCN in the presence of pyridine or dimethyl formamide at 470 K, bromo benzene gives cyanobenzene.
📷
3. Replacement by Amino Group
Halogen atom of haloarenes is replaced by amino group by reacting it with aq. NH3; & in presence of catalyst, Cu2O
📷
Reactions with metals
1. Action with magnesium
Aryl bromides & iodides form Grignard’s reagents with Mg in dry ether.
📷
2. Reaction with Sodium
Aryl halides react with sodium in the presence of ether. During reaction two phenyl rings unite. The reaction is called Fittig reaction.
📷
However aryl halides when treated with halo alkane & sodium in dry ether undergo Wurtz fitting reaction.
📷
3. Reaction with Lithium
Aryl halides react with lithium metal to form the corresponding organometallic compound.
📷
These organometallic compounds behave like Grignard reagents.
4. Reaction with Copper Powder
Iodo benzene when heated with copper powder in a sealed tube gives diphenyl
📷
Reduction
An aryl halide is reduced to parent hydrocarbon by the action of nickel aluminium alloy in the presence of an alkali.
📷
Illustration 20.
📷
The above transformation proceed through
(A) Electrophilic addition (B) Benzyne intermediate
(C) Activated nucleophilic substitution (D) Oxirane
Solution: (C)
Illustration 21. 📷
The compound X is
(A) Phenol (B) Benzene
(C) o & p – chlorophenol (D) Benzol
Solution: (B)
Illustration 22. Which out of o – chloro nitrobenzene and 1 – chloro – 2, 4, 6 – tri nitrobenzene is more reactive towards nucleophilic substitution.
Solution: 1 – chloro – 2, 4, 6 – trinitrobenzene
Exercise 8.
Write equations for
(i) Borodine Hunsdiecker reaction
(ii) Finkelstein reaction
(iii) Baltz-Schimann reaction
RING SUBSTITUTION REACTIONS
An aryl halide undergoes electrophilic substitution reactions in benzene ring. The presence of halogen atom in the ring directs the incoming substituent to the ortho & para position.
Aryl halides are less reactive than benzene towards electrophilic substitution reactions.
Some ring substitution reactions of aryl halides are given below:
1. Halogenation
Halogentation takes place in the presence of iron or FeCl3 or anhydrous AlCl3 as a catalyst.
📷
2. Nitration
📷
3. Sulphonation
📷
4. Friedel Craft’s Alkylation
With alkyl halide in presence of anhydrous AlCl3, alkylation takes place for e.g.
📷
5. Friedel Craft’s Acylation
Acylation of haloarenes can be carried out with the reaction of acyl chlorides in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3. for example
📷
Illustration 23. Complete the following giving structures of the principal organic products.
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Solution: (i)
📷
⎯ CCl3 is meta – directing group.
(ii)
📷
Illustration 24. How would you prepare 1 – iodopropane from?
(i) Propene (ii) 1 – propanol
Solution: (i) 📷
📷
(ii)
📷
Illustration 25. How is chlorobenzene obtained from?
(i) benzene and
(ii) benzene diazonium chloride
Solution: (i) Chlorobenzene is obtained by the direct chlorination of benzene in the presence of a halogen carrier.
📷
(ii) Chlorobenzene is obtained by the treatment of benzene diazonium chloride with cuprous chloride (Cu2Cl2) and HCl. (Sandmeyer’s reaction).
📷
Exercise 9.
Find X, Y & Z in the following sequence of reaction:
📷
Exercise 10.
How may the two substances in each of the following pairs be distinguished from each other?
(i) Chlorobenzene and hexyl chloride.
(ii) CH2 = CH − CH2Br and CH3CH2CH2Br
(iii) p-Bromobenzyl chloride and chlorobenzyl bromide
Exercise 11.
(i) Identify X, Y & Z in the following reactions
📷
(ii) How will you obtain 2, 6-dinitrophenol from chlorobenzene?
POLY HALOGEN COMPOUNDS
Carbon compounds containing more than one halogen atom are usually referred to as polyhalogen compounds. Some important polyhalogen compounds are:
Dichloromethane (Methylene Chloride)
Preparation:
It is prepared industrially by direct chlorination of methane. The mixture so obtained is separated by fractional distillation.
Properties
It is a colourless, sweet smelling, volatile liquid boiling point = 313K. Because of its low boiling point & low inflammability, it is an effective extraction solvent used in pharmaceutical & food industries
Trichloro Methane (Chloroform)
Preparation
1. From Methane:
Chloroform is manufactured by chlorination of methane in presence of light or catalyst.
CH4 + Cl2 ⎯⎯→ CH3Cl + HCl
CH3Cl + Cl2 ⎯⎯→ CH2Cl2 + HCl
CH2Cl2 + Cl2 ⎯⎯→ CHCl3 + HCl
CHCl3 + Cl2 ⎯⎯→ CCl4 + HCl
CHCl3 can be separated by fractional distillation.
2. From Chloral Hydrate
📷
3. Laboratory Method
In this method chloroform obtained from ethanol or acetone by reaction with a paste of bleaching powder and water.
📷
📷
📷
📷
4. From Carbon tetra chloride
By partial reduction of carbontetrachloride with iron filings & water.
📷
Physical Properties
CHCl3 is a colourless, oily liquid which has sweetish, sickly odour & taste. It is heavier than water.
Chemical Properties
1. Action of Sun light & Air
In presence of sunlight chloroform is oxidized by air to a highly poisonous compound phosgene, COCl2.
📷
2. Hydrolysis:
When boiled with aqueous KOH, CHCl3 is hydrolysed to potassium formate.
📷
3. Reduction
Chloroform can be reduced with Zn & HCl.
Zn + 2HCl ⎯⎯→ ZnCl2 + 2[H]
CHCl3 + 2[H] ⎯⎯→ CH2Cl2 + HCl
Methylene chloride
4. Reaction with acetone
Chloroform reacts with acetone in presence of a base such as KOH & forms the addition product, chloretone.
📷
Chloretone is used as hypnotic (as sleep inducing) drug.
5. Reaction with Nitric acid
Chloform reacts with conc. HNO3 on heating.
CHCl3 + HONO2 ⎯⎯⎯→ CCl3.NO2 + H2O
Chloropicrin
Chloropicrin is used as an insecticide & war gas.
6. Reaction with primary amines (carbyl-amine reaction)
When chloroform is warmed with a primary amine aliphatic or aromatic) in the presence of alcoholic KOH an offensive smell of isocyanide or carbyl-amine is obtained.
📷
Illustration 26. Which one of the following compounds when heated with KOH and a primary amine gives carbylamine test?
(A) CHCl3 (B) CH3Cl
(C) CH3OH (D) CH3CN
Solution: (A)
7. Reaction with Silver Powder
On heating with silver powder, chloroform forms acetylene. 📷
8. Chlorination
On further chlorination it gives CCl4
📷
9. Reimer – Tiemann reaction
CHCl3 reacts with phenol & KOH to form salicylaldehyde.
📷
Uses of Chloroform
  1. As solvent in oils and varnishes
  2. In medicine
  3. As preservative
  4. As laboratory reagent
Illustration 27. When chloroform reacts with acetone, the product is
(A) ethylidene dichloride (B) mesitylene
(C) Chloretone (D) chloral
Solution: (C)
Illustration 28. H atom of chloroform is acidic. Why?
Solution: The three chlorine atoms attached on carbon atom make it partially positive. Due to negative inductive effect of Cl atom carbon attracts the shared pair of electrons of C and H bond more effectively to produce partial positive charge on H to behave as acid.
📷
Illustration 29. Chloroform is stored in dark coloured bottles. Why?
Solution: To prevent oxidation of CHCl3 to COCl2 (poisonous) which occurs in the presence of sunlight.
Tri iodo Methane (Iodoform)
Preparation
It is prepared by heating ethanol or acetone with sodium hydroxide & iodine or sodium carbonate & iodine in water.
📷
📷
Physical Properties
Iodoform is a yellow coloured solid having m.p. = 382 K. It is insoluble in water but dissolves readily in organic solvents.
Chemical Properties
📷
Uses
  1. It is used as antiseptic for dressing wounds.
  2. It is used to manufacture pharmaceuticals.
Tetrachloro methane (carbon tetra chloride)
Preparation
CCl4 is manufactured by following methods:
(i) From methane: By chlorination of methane in the presence of sunlight.
📷
(ii) From carbon disulphide: By reaction of chlorine with CS2 in presence of AlCl3 as catalyst.
📷
Physical Properties
CCl4 is colourless oily liquid with characteristic sickly smell. It is heavier than water & is insoluble in water but is soluble in organic solvents such as ether. CCl4 is used as solvent for organic reactions.
Chemical Properties
(i) Reduction
On reduction with moist iron filling, CCl4 gives chloroform.
📷
(ii) Hydrolysis
On heating with alc. KOH, it undergoes hydrolysis & gives CO2 which dissolves in KOH to yield K2CO3.
📷
📷
(iii) Stability
CCl4 is stable to red heat but when the vapours come in contact with water, phosgene is liberated.
📷
Uses
  1. As industrial solvent.
  2. for the manufacture of chloroform.
  3. As laboratory reagents.
  4. In dry cleaning.
  5. As a fire extinguisher.
p – Dichloro benzene
It is prepared by chlorination of benzene.
Properties
It is white volatile, solid m.p. = 325K, which readily sublimes.
Uses
  1. As insecticide
  2. As germicide
  3. As soil fumigant
  4. As deodrant & moth repellent.
Perfluoro carbon (PFC’s)
Preparation
They are prepared by controlled fluorination of alkanes in vapour phase. The reaction mixture is diluted with nitrogen in order to control the reaction
📷
Teflon is a common perfluoro carbon.
Properties
They are non – toxic, non-inflammable, non-corrosive & extremely stable compounds.
Uses
  1. As lubricants
  2. For surface coating
  3. As electrical insulator.
Benzene haxa chloride
These are popularly known as lindane & gammaxene. It is commercially prepared by the addition of chlorine to benzene in presence of ultraviolet light.
Uses
As a pesticide in agriculture.
p - p′ - Dichloro diphenyl tri chloro ethane (DDT)
It is manufactured by condensation of chloro benzene with trichloro acetaldehyde (chloral) in the presence of sulphuric acid.
📷
Properties
It is a white powder insoluble in water but soluble in oils.
Uses
It is a powerful insecticide. However it is highly stable & is not easily decomposed in the environment. Therefore its long term effect could be potentially dangerous & its use is banned in many countries
Illustration 30. What does DDT stands for? What is its chemical name?
Solution: DDT stands for p, p′ - dichlorodiphenyl trichloro ethane. Its actual name is 2, 2 – bis (4 – chlorophenyl) – 1, 1, 1 – trichloro ethane.
Exercise 12.
(i) Why the hydrogen in CHCl3 is slightly acidic?
(ii) Pyrene can be used as a fire extinguisher, why?
ANSWERS TO EXERCISES
Exercise 1:
(i) (a) 1 – bromo 2, 2 – dimethyl propane
(b) 2 – bromo 2 – methyl propane
(c) 1, 3 – dichloro propane
(d) 3 – chloro toluene
(ii) (a)
📷
(b)
📷
Exercise 2.
(a) Amongst the three isomeric dichlorobenzens, the p-isomer has the highest melting point as this molecule is symmetric and affords a better fitting in crystal lattice. Thus it is solid.
(b) In alkyl chlorides the C-Cl bond is more polar than the C – Br bond in alkyl bromide, as chlorine is more electronegative than bromine. Due to greater polarity of molecules, alkyl chlorides are better solvents than alkyl bromides.
(c) Because ethyl iodide has greater molecular mass so greater van der Waal’s attraction hence ethyl iodide is liquid at room temperature.
Exercise 3:
(i) Iodobenzene > bromobenzene > chlorobenzene
(ii) Haloarenes are insoluble in water because of their incapability of formation of hydrogen bonds.
Exercise 4:
In vinyl chloride C—Cl bond is stable due to resonance (as in chlorobenzene).
📷
Hence SN reaction in which Cl is replaced by nucleophile is not possible.
In allyl chloride, SN reaction is easier since allyl carbonium ion formed after removal of Cl– is stabilized by resonance.
📷⎯→ 📷
📷↔ 📷
Exercise 5:

📷
📷(nucleophile) can't attack 3° carbon having high electron - density hence elimination takes place.
📷
Nucleophilic attack on methyl carbon is possible giving ether (Williamson synthesis).
Exercise 6:
It can undergo SN1 and SN2 reaction. By SN2 reaction only one product is formed. But by SN1 reaction, intermediate is carbonium ion.
📷
Thus we get two isomeric products by SN1 reaction.
Exercise 7:
(i) (CH3)2CHI > (CH3)2CHBr > (CH3)2CHCl
(ii) Neo pentyl bromide being a primary halide reacts slowly through SN1 and being sterically hindered reacts slowly even through SN2.
Exercise 8:
(i) 📷
(ii) 📷
(iii)
📷
Exercise 9:

📷📷
📷

📷
Exercise 10:
(i) On heating with aqueous KOH solution C6H5Cl is not hydrolysed but C6H13Cl (n hexyl chloride) is hydrolysed easily and resulting solution gives test for Cl− ion. After acidifying with dil. HNO3, the resulting solution forms a white precipitate with AgNO3 solution.
📷
📷
(ii) CH3 − CH2CH2Br will not discharge the pink colour of dilute alkaline KMnO4 (Baeyer’s reagent) whereas CH2 = CH − CH2Br will decolourise its colour.
📷
(iii) On adding aq. solution of NaOH, dilute HNO3 and few drops of AgNO3 solution, p-bromobenzyl chloride give white precipitate of AgCl, while the other give yellow ppt.
📷
📷
📷
📷
Exercise 11:
(i) X = C6H5 ⎯ NH2
Y = C6H5 ⎯ N ≡ N+ ⎯ Cl−
Z = C6H5 ⎯ I
(ii)
📷
Exercise 12:
(i) H atom in CHCl3 is slightly acidic because of following two reasons
(a) Due to ⎯I effect of three Cl – atoms.
(b) The : CCl3− ion left after the removal of a proton from CHCl3 is stabilized by resonance in which Cl atom can expand its valence shell octet because of the presence of d – orbitals.
(ii) Pyrene can be used as fire extinguisher because its vapours are non – inflammable.
MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES
Exercise 1: Arrange each set of compounds in order of increasing boiling point.
(i) Methyl bromide, methylene bromide, bromoform.
(ii) n – butyl chloride, iso – butyl chloride, tert – butyl chloride.
Exercise 2: Complete the following sequences of reactions by giving A, B & C
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Exercise 3: Arrange the following compounds in decreasing order of SN1 reactions.
(i)
CH3CH2CH2Cl, CH2 = CH CHClCH3, CH3CH2CHClCH3
(ii)
BrC2H5
📷
(CH3)3CBr
Exercise 4: Explain why:
Grignard reagents are prepared under anhydrous conditions.
Exercise 5: Write structural formula of the following
(i) Benzyl chloride
(ii) 4 – chloropent – 2 – ene
(iii) 1 – bromo – 2, 2 – dimethyl propane
(iv) 3 – chloro – 2, 4 – dimethyl pentane
Exercise 6: How many dichloro derivatives are possible for propane? Give their structures & IUPAC names.
Exercise 7: Give the structure & names of the chief organic products expected from the reaction of n – butyl bromide with each of the following reagents.
(i) Zn/H+ (ii) Mg/ether
Exercise 8: Why are haloarenes more stable than haloalkanes & undergo electrophilic substitution at ortho & para position?
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.19 10:04 rajusingh79 ALCOHOL_PHENOL & ETHER

https://docs.google.com/document/d/10PsIom0rdAUw-VgIh6JE8wW8DcEVFSz4/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
INTRODUCTION
Hydroxy compound can be classified in the following three categories.
1. Aliphatic hydroxy compound
Monohydric i.e.
📷
Dihydric
📷
Polyhydric
📷
Contain three and more than three hydroxyl group.
Monohydric alcohols are of three types.
📷
Illustration 1. Classify the following into primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols:
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(c)
📷
Solution: (a) Tertiary
(b) Secondary
(c) Tertiary
PREPARATION OF ALCOHOLS
  1. From Alkanes
Alkanes having tertiary carbon on oxidation with cold alkaline KMnO4 give tertiary alcohol.
📷
  1. From Alkenes
Alkenes can be converted into alcohol by the following reactions:
📷
  1. From alkyl halides
Alkyl halides give alcohol with KOH/NaOH or with moist Ag2O.
📷
  1. Reduction of aldehydes and ketones
(a) Reduction by reducing agents
(i) Aldehyde gives primary alcohol
📷
(ii) Ketone gives secondary alcohol
📷
Reducing agents
(i) LiAlH4 (ii) NaBH4
(iii) Na/C2H5OH (iv) Metal (Zn, Fe or Sn)/Acid (HCl, dil H2SO4 or CH3COOH)
(v) (a) Aluminium isopropoxide/isopropylalcohol (b) H2O
(vi) H2/Ni
📷
📷
📷
(b) Reduction by Grignard reagents
Addition followed by hydrolysis
📷
  1. Reduction of carboxylic acid, Acid chlorides and esters:
(a) Reduction by LiAlH4
📷
G = OH (acid)
G = Cl (acid chloride)
G = OR′ (ester)
(b) Reduction by BH3
Carboxylic acids and esters are reduced in to primary alcohol by BH3.
📷
📷
(c) Bouveault – Blanc reaction
📷
Illustration 2.
📷
Solution:
📷

If compound has ⎯COOH as well as ester group then reactivity of ester is more than acid towards LiAlH4.

📷

Acid is more reactive than ester towards BH3.
Exercise 1. Find A and B.
(i)
📷
(ii) 📷
  1. From aliphatic primary amines
It react with nitrous acid to give alcohol.
📷
7. From Oxiranes
Oxiranes react with Grignard reagent to give mono hydric alcohol. Nature of G.R is basic hence it attack on less hindered carbon of oxirane ring.
📷
Illustration 3. (a) Find A, B, C, D, E.
📷
(b) 📷
Solution: (a)
📷
(b)
📷
  1. Fermentation of carbohydrates
📷
Illustration 4.
(i)
📷

(ii)
📷
Solution:
(i)
📷

(ii)
📷
Exercise2.
(i) Identify A, B & C
📷
(ii)
📷

📷

Account the reason for the above reactions.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Solubility
Alcohols are soluble in water due to formation of H – bonding between water & them. As the molecular mass increases, the alkyl group become larger which resists the formation of H – bonds with water molecules and hence the solubility goes an decreasing.
Boiling Point
Intermolecular H – bonding is present between alcohol molecules. This makes high boiling point.
📷
Amongst the isomeric alcohols, the order of boiling point is 1° > 2° > 3° alcohol.
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Chemical properties of alcohols can be discussed under following categories:
(A) Reaction involving breaking of carbon – oxygen bond.
(B) Reaction involving breaking of oxygen – hydrogen bond.
(C) Oxidation of alcohols.
(D) Dehydrogenation of alcohols.
(E) Some miscellaneous reactions of monohydric alcohol.
(A) Reaction involving breaking of carbon – oxygen bond
Order of reactivity of alcohol. 3° > 2° > 1°
(i) SN reaction

📷
(ii) Dehydration of alcohol
Dehydration of alcohol to give alkene.
(a) Dehydrating agents are
Conc H2SO4/Δ, KHSO4/Δ, H3PO4/Δ, Anhyd Al2O3/Δ, Anhyd PCl5/Δ, Anhyd ZnCl2/Δ, BF3/Δ, P2O5/Δ.
(b) Reactivity of alcohols. (Ease of dehydration)
3° > 2° > 1°
(c) Product formation always takes place by saytzeff rule.
📷
* Alcohols on acetylation gives acetyl derivative which on pyrolytic elimination always gives Hofmann product.
📷
Mechanism in presence of acidic medium
E1 mechanism: follow saytzeff’s rule.
📷
Exercise 3.
Write mechanism
📷
(B) Reactions due to breaking of oxygen hydrogen bond. (Reactions due to acidic character of alcohols)
(a) Alcohols are acidic in nature because hydrogen is present on electro negative oxygen atom.
(b) Alcohol is weaker acid
📷
acidity ∝ stability of acid anions.
Acidity of 1° > 2° > 3°
Alcohols give following reactions due to breaking of oxygen – hydrogen bond.
(i) Reaction with metal
📷
M = 1st group metal.
M = Al, Mg, Zn
📷
Aluminium alkoxide
(ii) Esterification (With carboxylic acid)
📷
It is reversible acid catalysed reaction. It follow SN1 mechanism.
📷
Increasing the size of alkyl group on alcohol part decreases the nucleophilic character because steric hindrance increases.
📷
Order of reactivity of alcohols CH3OH > 1° alc > 2° alc > 3° alc
(iii) Ester formation with proton acid having –OH group: to give inorganic ester.
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(iv) Alkylation of Alcohol
📷
Methylation is mainly used for determination of hydroxyl groups in an unknown compound.
📷
Exercise 4.
Arrange the following in increasing order of acidic strength.

(a)
📷

(b)
Arrange the following in increasing order of esterification:
MeCOOH EtCOOH (Et)2CHCOOH
(i) (ii) (iii)
(C) Oxidation of alcohol
Oxidation of alcohol is dehydrogenation reaction which is 1, 2 – elimination reaction.
📷
So oxidation of alcohol ∝ numbers of α - hydrogen atom.
(a) With mild oxidising agents:
Like
(i) X2
(ii) Fenton reagent [FeSO4/H2O2]
(iii) Jones reagent / CH3COCH3 [CrO3/dil. BaSO4]
(iv) K2Cr2O7/H+ cold
📷
📷
📷
Note:
PCC (Pyridinium chloro chromate) is a selective reagent which converts 1° alc to aldehyde.
(b) With strong oxidising agent
Oxidising agents are
(i) 📷 (ii) 📷
(iii) 📷 (iv)📷 📷
📷
(D) Dehydrogenation with Cu/573K or Ag/573K
(a) 1° alcohol ⎯⎯→ aldehyde
📷
(b) 2° alcohol ⎯⎯→ ketone
📷
(c) 3° alc ⎯→ undergo dehydration to form alkene.
📷
Reduction
📷
(E) Miscellaneous reactions of mono hydric alcohol
(i) Methylation with CH2N2 in presence of BF3.
📷
(ii) Haloform reaction
Ethyl alcohol and 2° methyl alcohol gives haloform reaction.
📷
Exercise 5.
(i) Out of these compound which gives iodoform test.
(a) CH3 ⎯ CH2 ⎯ CHOHCH3 (b) PhCH2CHOHCH3
(c) PhCHOHCH3 (d) CH3CH2OH
(e) CH3COCH2 ⎯ COOC2H5
(ii)
📷
Distinguishing 1°, 2°, 3° alcohol
Test
1° alc
2° alc
3° alc
(I) Lucas test
[ZnCl2 + HCl]
No reaction at room temperature
White turbidity after 5 – 10 min.
📷
White turbidity instantaneously 📷
(II) Victor Meyer test
(P/I2, AgNO2, HNO2, NaOH)
Red colour
Blue colour
Colourless

📷
📷
📷
PERIODATE OXIDATION
Compounds that have hydroxyl group on adjacent atoms undergo oxidation cleavage when they are treated with aq. Periodic acid (HIO4). The reaction breaks carbon carbon bonds and produced carbonyl compounds (aldehyde, ketones or acids)
📷
It takes place through a cyclic intermediate.
📷
Other examples
📷
📷
This oxidation is useful in determination of structure.
Illustration 5. Write the products of the reaction of t-butyl alcohol with PBr3, conc. H2SO4, CH3COCl, Na, CH3MgBr, Na2Cr2O7/H2SO4.
Solution: 📷.
Illustration 6. Write products
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
Solution: (a) 2HCHO + CO2
(b) No reaction (as it is not a vicinal diol)
Exercise 6.
(a) Arrange the following alcohols in order of ease of dehydration.
📷
(b) Find product
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(c)
📷
PINACOL – PINACOLONE REARRANGEMENT
Action of H2SO4 on 1, 2 diols.
Ditertiory – 1, 2 diols convert in to ketones on treatment wit H2SO4.
📷
Mechanism
📷
Migratory preference of the group
Migration depends on the stability of Transition state.
In general migration of C6H5 > alkyl
Illustration 7. List three methods with chemical equations for the preparation of alcohols from alkenes.
Solution: Hydration, hydroboration and oxymercuration – demercuration of alkenes.
Hydration:
📷
Hydroboration
📷
Oxymercuration – demercuration
📷
Illustration 8. Which of the following alcohols would react fastest with Lucas reagent?
📷
Solution: 📷, it being a tertiary alcohol.
Exercise 7.
Find out
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Exercise 8.
Give a possible structure for the substance C5H10O2 behaving in the following manner.
📷
ETHER
* R ⎯ O ⎯ R′ Alkoxy alkane (Di alkyl ether)
* R = R′ Symmetrical ether.
R ≠ R′ Unsymmetrical or mixed ether.
‘O’ is to be counted with least number of C atom.
Example:
CH3 ⎯ O ⎯ C2H5 Methoxy ethane
CH3 ⎯ O ⎯ C6H5 Methoxy benzene
There are various types of cyclic ethers also.
📷
PREPARATION OF ETHERS
(i) From 1° alcohol
(a) With H2SO4
📷
Order of dehydration 1° > 2° > 3° alcohol
(b) With diazomethane
📷
(c) Alcohol having at least one hydrogen at fourth carbon gives five membered cyclic ether with Pb(OAC)4. The reaction is free radical reaction which is initiated by heat or light.
📷
📷
Williamson’s synthesis
📷 reaction of a sodium alkoxide with alkyl halide, alkyl sulphonate or alkyl sulphate is known as Williamson synthesis of ethers.
📷
📷
📷
📷
Illustration 9. Write the product
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Solution:
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Exercise 9.
Find product
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
(3) From Alkane
(a)
📷

📷
(b)
📷
(4) From Grignard reagent
Higher ethers can be prepared by treating α - halo ethers with suitable reagents.
📷
(5) From Alkyl halide
📷
PROPERTIES OF ETHERS
Dipole nature of ether
Ethers have a tetrahedral geometry i.e. oxygen is sp3 hybridized. The C ⎯ O ⎯ C bond angle in ether is 110°. Because of the greater electronegativity of oxygen than carbon, the C ⎯ O bonds are slightly polar and are inclined to each other at an angle of 110°C, resulting in a net dipole moment.
📷
The bond angle is slightly greater than the tetrahedral angle due to repulsive interaction between the two bulky groups.
Chemical Reaction
Dialkyl ethers reacts with very few reagents other than acids. The only active site for other reagents are the C ⎯ H bonds of the alkyls. Ethers has ability to solvate cations (electrophile) by donating an electron pair from their oxygen atom. These properties make ether as solvents for many reactions.
On standing in contact with air, most aliphatic ethers are converted slowly into unstable peroxides.
Ether gives following reactions:
  1. Nucleophilic substitution reactions
📷
Note:
Type of ethers also make a difference in the mechanism followed during the cleavage of C—O by HI/HBr.
Combinations
Mechanism follows
1°R + 2°R
Less sterically hindered ⇒ SN2
2°R + 3°R
More sterically hindered ⇒ SN1
1°R + 3°R
Nature of mechanism decoded by nature of solvent.
📷
Methyl cation is stabler than phenyl cations
(B) Dehydration with H2SO4/Δ and Anhy Al2O3/Δ
(i) When both alkyl groups has β - hydrogen.
📷
(ii) When only alkyl group has β - hydrogen.
📷
(CH3)3CO—CH3 📷 (CH3)2—C=CH2 + CH3OH
📷
(C) Miscellaneous reactions
(1) Halogenation:
Monohalogenation takes place at α carbon (with small amount)
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(2) Reaction with CO: give ester
📷
Illustration 10. Explain why sometimes explosion occurs while distilling ethers.
Solution: It is due to formation of peroxide
📷
Illustration 11. The basicity of the ethers towards BF3 has the following order, explain.
📷
Solution: There are steric effects in the Lewis acid-Lewis base complex formation between BF3 and the respective ethers.
Illustration 12. What are crown ethers? How can the following reaction be made to proceed?
📷
Solution: Crown ethers are large ring polyethers and are basically cyclic oligomers of oxirane which may have annulated rings. They are designated according to ring size and the number of complexing oxygen atoms, thus 18-crown – 6 denotes an 18-membered ring with 6-oxygens. The molecule is shaped like a “doughnut”, and has a hole in the middle.
📷
These are phase transfer catalysts. This is a unique example of “host-guest relationship”. The crown ether is the host, the cation is the guest. The cavity is well suited to fit a K+ or Rb+ which is held as a complex. Interaction between host and guest in all these complexes are mainly through electrostatic forces and hydrogen bonds.
The reaction can be made to process by using catalytic amount of crown ether, 18-crown-6.
Illustration 13. Explain why
📷

is much more soluble than furan in water.
Solution: THF is more soluble than furan. In THF, in contrast to furan the electron pairs are available for H-bonding with water which makes it more soluble in water.
Exercise 10.
What chemical methods can be used to distinguish between the following pairs of compounds?
(a) Ethoxy ethanol and methyl isopropyl ether.
(b) Butyl iodide and butyl ethyl ether.
(c) Ethyl propyl ether and ethyl allyl ether.
Exercise 11.
Ether A cleaves much faster than B with conc. HI. Explain.
📷
📷
PHENOL
These are organic compounds a hydroxyl group attached directly to a benzene ring.
📷
Preparation
Industrial Method
(i) From chloro benzene (Dow’s process)
Chlorobenzene is heated with NaOH at 673 K and under pressure of 300 atm to produced sodium phenoxide which on acidification yields phenol.
📷
(ii) Cumene Process
Cumene obtained from propene & benzene cumene on air oxidation followed by acidification with H2SO4 gives phenol & acetone.
📷
(iii) From benzene sulphonic acid
It is fused with NaOH gives sodium salt of phenol.
📷
(iv) From benzene diazonium chloride
This gives Ar SN1 reaction with H2O to form phenol.
📷
Illustration 14. Starting from 1-methyl cyclohexene, prepare the following:
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
Solution:
(a)
📷

(b)
📷
Exercise 12.
Starting from 1-methyl cyclohexene, prepare the following:
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Phenol is needle shaped solid, soon liquefies due to high hygroscopic nature. It is less soluble in water, but readily soluble in organic solvents.
Phenol has high boiling point due to presence of hydrogen bonding.
Acidity of phenol
Phenol is weak acid. It reacts with aqueous NaOH to form sodium phenoxide, but does not react with sodium bicarbonate.
The acidity of phenol is due to the stability of the phenoxide ion, which is resonance stabilized as shown below:
📷
In substituted phenols, the presence of electron withdrawing groups at ortho and para positions such as nitro group, stabilizes the phenoxide ion resulting in an increase in acid strength. It is due to this reason that ortho and para nitro phenols are more acidic than phenol.
On the other hand, electron releasing groups such as alkyl group, do not favour the formation of phenoxide ion – resulting in decrease in acid strength.
For example: (cresol are less acidic then phenol)
Exercise 13.
Arrange each group of compounds in order of decreasing acidity:
📷
📷
CHEMICAL REACTIONS
(A) Reaction due to breaking of O – H bond
Phenol is more reactive than alcohol for this reaction because phenoxide ion is more stable than the alkoxide ion.
📷
Reactions of phenol due to breaking of ⎯O ⎯ H bond are given below:
📷
Acylation
📷
Fries rearrangement
Phenolic esters are converted in to o ⎯ and p ⎯ hydroxy ketones in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3. Generally low temperature favours the formation of p – isomer and higher temperature favour the o - isomer.
📷
(B) Reactions due to breaking of carbon- Oxygen bond
Nucleophilic substitution reaction
Phenols are less reactive than aliphatic compound because:
(i) ⎯OH group is present on sp2 hybridised carbon. This makes C ⎯ O bond stronger.
(ii) ‘O’ is more electronegative than halogens. This also makes C ⎯ O bond stronger than C ⎯ X.
(iii) There is some double bond character between carbon and oxygen due to the resonance. This also makes C ⎯ O bond stronger.
However it give SN under drastic condition.
📷
(C) EAS in Phenol: It is strong activating group.
📷
📷
MERCURATION
Mercuric acetate cation. [HgOAC]+ is a weak electrophile which substitutes in ortho and para position of phenol. Usually donating product is O–acetoxy mercuriphenol. The mercuric compound can be converted to iodophenol.
📷
Miscellaneous reaction
(i) Reaction with Zn dust
📷
(ii) Oxidation
📷
(iii) Condensation with phthalic anhydride
📷
Exercise 14.
Discuss the product formed in the bromination of p-phenol sulfonic acid.
Mechanism of some important reactions
  1. Reimer Tieman reaction
📷
The electrophile is the dichloro carbene, :CCl2, formation of carbene is an example of α - elimination.
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
(iii)
📷
  1. Kolbe’s reaction
📷
Mechanism
📷
Illustration 15. How will you convert?
(i) phenol to aspirin (ii) phenol to salol.
(iii) phenol to oil of winter green. (iv) phenol to benzoic acid.
Solution:
(i)
📷

(ii)
📷

(iii)
📷

(iv)
📷
Illustration 16. What product would you expect in the following reaction? Explain.
📷
Solution: 📷
📷
It is an ‘abnormal’ product formed in the Reimer-Tiemann reaction when the dienone cannot tautomerize to regenerate a phenolic system.
Illustration 17. How would you distinguish between the following pairs?
(a) Phenol and cyclohexanol
(b) Ethyl alcohol and methyl alcohol
Solution: (a) Phenol gives coloration with FeCl3 solution
(b) Ethyl alcohol responds to the iodoform test
Exercise 15.
How would you distinguish between the following pairs?
(a) 2-Pentanol and 3-pentanol
(b) 1-Propanol and phenol
Exercise 16.
Offer explanation for the following observations:
(a) Why is phenol unstable in the keto-form?
(b) The following dehydration is extremely facile:
📷
(c) Why does thionyl chloride provide alkyl chlorides of high purity?
(d) 2-Methyl -2- pentanol dehydrates faster than 2 – methyl – 1 – pentanol.
(e) Phenol is acidic but ethyl alcohol is neutral.
(f) Ethanol responds to Iodoform test but tert- butanol does not.
(g) A tertiary alcohol reacts faster than a primary alcohol in the Lucas test.
Exercise 17.
How will you effect the following conversion?
(a)
📷
(b)
C2H5OH ⎯→ CH3CH2CH2OH
Exercise 18.
How will you effect the following conversion?
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(c)
📷
(d)
📷
Exercise 19.
Write mechanism
📷
Some Commercially Important Alcohols And Phenols
(i) Methanol: Methanol is also called wood spirit since originally it was obtained by destructive distillation of wood. Now a days it is prepared by catalytic hydrogenation of water gas.
📷
Uses: It is largely used as:
(a) a solvent for paints, varnishes and celluloids.
(b) for manufacturing of formaldehyde.
(c) for denaturing ethyl alcohol, i.e. to make it unfit for drinking purpose. Denatured alcohols is called methylated spirit.
(d) in manufacture of perfumes and drugs.
Ethanol: Ethanol is mainly prepared by hydration of ethene formation of carbohydrates gives only 95% alcohol the rest being water. This is called rectified spirit.
Uses: It is largely used as an
(a) antiseptic.
(b) solvent for paints, lacquers, varnishes, dyes, cosmetics, perfumes, tinctures, cough syrups etc.
(c) As an important starting material for manufacture of ether, chloroform, Iodoform etc.
(d) As an important beverages.
(e) As power alcohol a mixture of 20% absolute alcohol and 80% petrol (gasoline) with benzene or tetralin as a co-solvent.
(f) As an antifreeze in automobile radiators.
Absolute alcohol: Absolute alcohol is 100% ethanol prepared from rectified spirit 95.5% alcohol as follows:
In laboratory absolute alcohol is prepared by keeping the rectified spirit in contact with calculated amount of quick lime for few hours and then refluxing and distilling it.
Phenol or Carbolic Acid
Uses
(i) As an antiseptic and disinfectant in soaps and lotions.
(ii) In manufacture of drugs like, aspirin, salol, salicylic acid, phenacetin.
(iii) In the manufacture of bakelite.
(iv) In the manufacture of picric acid, phenolphthalein, azo dyes.
(v) As a preservative for ink.
Ethylene Glycol: Ethane 1, 2 diol
Preparation: Lab preparation by hydroxylation.
(i)
📷
Manufacture
📷
Physical properties:
It is highly viscous because of the presence of two OH bond it undergoes extensive intermolecular H-bonding. Same reason owes to high solubility in water and high boiling point.
Chemical properties
Reaction with sodium
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
(iii)
📷
(iv)
📷
(v)
📷
(vi)
Oxidation: Ethyelene glycol upon oxidation gives different products with different oxidising agents. For example.

(a)
📷

(b)
With periodic acid HIO4 or lead tetra acetate.
📷
Also called malapride reaction.
📷
Dehydration
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
(c)
📷
(d)
📷
Uses
(a) As a solvent.
(b) Antifreeze in the radiators of cars and aeroplanes.
(c) In manufacture of terylene and other polyester.
Exercise 20.
How would you convert cyclohexane to 1, 6 – hexanediol?
Glycerol (Propane 1, 2, 3 triol)
One of the most important trihydric alcohol.
Preparation:
(i) By Saponification of oils and fats.
📷
(ii) From Propylene
📷
(iii) Synthesis from its elements
📷
Physical Properties
Highly viscous due to three ⎯OH group due to which it undergoes extensive intermolecular H-bonding.
Chemical Properties
(i) It undergoes reaction of both secondary and primary alcoholic group.
📷
(ii)
📷
To replace the third hydroxyl group in either of two dichlorohydrins, PCl5 or PCl3 is fused.
(iii)
📷
  1. Reaction with concentrated nitric acid:
📷
A mixture of glyceryl trinitrate and glyceryl dinitrate absorbed on Kieselguhr is called dynamite.
  1. Reaction with KHSO4 – Dehydration.
📷
  1. Oxidation.
📷
(i) With dil. HNO3, a mixture of glyceric acid and tartronic acid is produced.
(ii) With conc. HNO3, mainly glyceric acid is obtained.
(iii) With bismuth nitrate, only mesoxalic acid is formed.
(iv) Mild oxidising agents like bromine water, sodium hypobromite (Br2/NaOH) and Fenton’s reagent (H2O2 + FeSO4) give a mixture of glyceraldehyde and dihydroxyacetone. The mixture is called glycerose.
(v) With periodic (HIO4) acid.
📷
(vi) With acidified potassium permanganate.
📷
  1. Reaction with phosphorous halides.
📷
  1. Reaction with monocarboxylic acids. Glycerol reacts with monocarboxylic acids to form mono-, di- and tri- ester depending upon the amount of the acid used and the temperature of the reaction. An excess of the acid and high temperature favour the formation of tri-esters. For example, with acetic acid, glycerol monoacetate, diacetate and triacetate may be formed.
📷
  1. Acetylation. When treated with acetyl chloride, glycerol forms glycerol triacetate.
📷
  1. Reaction with oxalic acid
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷
Uses: Glycerol is used:
  1. In the preparation of nitroglycerine used in making dynamite. Nitroglycerine is also used for treatment of angina pectoris.
  2. As an antifreeze in automobile radiators.
  3. In medicines like cough syrups lotions etc.
  4. In the production of glyptal or alkyl resin (a cross – linked polyester obtained by the condensation polymerization of glycerol and phthalic acid) which is used in the manufacture of paints and lacquers.
  5. In making non-drying printing inks, stamp colours, shoes polishes etc.
  6. In the manufacture of high class toilet soaps and cosmetics since it does not allow them to dry due to its hydroscopic nature.
  7. As a preservative for fruits and other eatables.
  8. As a sweetening agent in beverages and confectionary.
Exercise 21.
How does glycerol react with a. HI, b. (COOH)2 and c. conc HNO3?
ANSWER TO EXERCISES
Exercise 1:
(i)
📷
(ii) A = CH3CH2CH2OH
B = CH3OH
Exercise 2:
(i)
📷
(ii) The R– (carbanion) pulls acidic hydrogen from OH group making it an acid-base reaction instead of usual nucleophilic addition reaction. On further hydrolysis it produces reactant. But in the second case you have two moles of RMgX that completes the reaction because there are two R– for two different sites.
Exercise 3:
📷
Exercise 4:
(a) (iii) > (ii) > (i) > (iv)
(b) (i) > (ii) > (iii)
Exercise 5:
(i) Only (c) and (d) gives iodoform test.
(ii)
📷
Exercise 6:
(a) 📷
(b) (i) No reaction
(ii) 6HCOOH
(iii) RCHO + R′CHO + NH3
Exercise 7:
(i)
📷
(ii)
📷

Here phenyl migration takes place.
Here methyl migration takes place.
Exercise 8:
Considering the reactions of C5H10O2, it is likely that C6H5NHNH3, I2, NaOH will react only with a keto group while CH3COCl and oxidation are reactions of an alcohol. Therefore two isomeric structures are possible for the original compound.
📷
Exercise 9:
📷
α, w – halo alcohols undergoes intramolecular Williamson ether.
📷
Synthesis in the presence of NaOH by 📷 reaction.
Exercise 10:
(a) Ethoxyethanol give the Iodoform test.
(b) Butyl iodide with AgNO3 yields AgI precipitate.
(c) Ethyl allyl ether decolorize bromine water.
Exercise 11:
The cleavage reaction of an ether by HI is initiated by protonation of the ether oxygen.
📷
In the second step the attack by Br− has to take place by SN1 or SN2 process. Since the system B is rigid either attack is very slow. The ether A does not pose such a problem
Exercise 12:
(a)
📷
(b)
📷
Exercise 13:
📷
📷
Exercise 14:
A phenol is highly reactive towards electrophilic substitution. Treatment of phenol with aqueous solution of bromine results in the replacement of every hydrogen ortho and para to the ⎯OH group, and it even cause the displacement of the sulfonic group to yield tribromophenol.
📷
Exercise 15:
(a) 2-Pentanol responds to the Iodoform test
(b) Phenol gives coloration with FeCl3 solution
Exercise 16:
(a) Phenol loses the aromatic stabilization in the keto form.
(b) The alkene formed is more stable due to resonance.
(c) Because the other products during the reaction of thionyl chloride with alcohols are gaseous.
(d) 2-Methyl-2-pentanol yield a stable alkene
(e) The phenoxide ion formed from phenol is stabilized by resonance.
(f)
📷
(g) A tertiary alcohol form a stable tertiary carbonation.
Exercise 17:
(a)
📷

(b)
📷
Exercise 18:

(a)
📷

(b)
📷

(c)
📷

(d)
📷
Exercise 19:
📷
Exercise 20:
📷
Exercise 21:
See the text
MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES
Exercise 1: Write a note on: (a) Oxo process (b) absolute alcohol
Exercise 2: What happens when?
(a) ethanol vapours are passed over alumina at 600 K,
(b) excess of ethanol is heated with conc. H2SO4 at 413 K,
(c) phenol is treated with acetyl chloride?
Exercise 3: How is glycerol prepared from fats and oils? Why it is highly viscous? Give its uses?
Exercise 4: Discuss the following reactions:
(a) Reimer and Tiemann reaction
(b) Kolbe’s reaction
Exercise 5: Complete the following by putting structures of A, B, C, D.
📷
Complete the following.
Exercise 6: Compete the following by drawing correct structures.
📷
Exercise 7: How the sugar is converted to ethanol?
Exercise 8: Write the structure of organic compounds A to F in the following sequence of reactions:
📷
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.19 07:32 rajusingh79 Module_IV

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1SJ7QopKLgOFududfvDiLPVSkQuifJPZy/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
MODULE – IV
📷
Contents:
1. Aromatic Chemistry
2. Carbonyl Compounds
3. Carboxylic Acids and Derivatives
4. Amines
5. Preparation and Properties of some Important Inorganic Compounds
📷

P L A N N I N G

  1. In aromatic chemistry we are going to take up some important reactions like halogenation, oxidation of alkylbenzene, nitrocompounds and aromatic amines.
  2. Here we shall mainly focus on different methods of preparation of carboxyls and their reactions with special emphasis to condensation (Aldol, Claisen), oxidation and reduction (Cannizzaro) and other reduction (MPV, LAH) and oxidation reactions (Bayer Villiger oxidation) we shall also focus on the point of difference of aldehydes and ketones (in terms of reaction.)
  3. In carboxylic acid our focus should be on methods of preparation of acid , the relative order of reactivity of derivatives with special emphasis in esters.
  4. In amines our point focus is on the sythesis and reaction of amines (1°,2° and 3°)
  5. In this chapter we have mainly given emphasis to preparation and properties of certain important inorganic compounds

AROMATIC CHEMISTRY

Aromatic Compounds

Alkylbenzene (Toluene) ⎯⎯→ Halogenation
📷
📷
Halogenation of toluene can be carried out in 2 ways
(i) side chain chlorination when the hydrogen of the side chain are replaced by chlorine
(ii) Nucleus chlorination where the hydrogens of the ring are replaced giving o & p products
The products of nucleus chlorination are resistant towards hydrolysis while the side chain products can be hydrolysed.
Side chain or benzylic halogenation taken place when the reaction is carried out in absence of Lewis acid and under conditions that favour formation of radical.
The greater stability of bezylic radicals accounts for the fact that when ethylbenzene is halogenated the major product is 1-halo-1-phenylethane.
📷

Addition to double bond of Alkenyl benzenes

In absence of peroxides HBr adds to the double bond of 1-Phenyl propene to give 2- bromo 1 phenylpropane as the major product .
📷
Strong oxidising agents oxidises toluene to benzoic acid eg. hot Alk. KMnO4. Alkyl benzenes with alkyl groups longer than methyl are ultimately degraded to benzoic acids.
Nitro compounds: Nitrobenzene can be reduced in different media to give different products.
📷
📷
In dilute acid solution phenyl hydroxylamine rearranges to p – aminophenol.

Aniline

In aniline direct nitration cannot be carried out as NH2 being an activating group activates the ring ; so that any oxidising atmosphere will result in the charring of ring.
Illustration 1 : Aniline ⎯⎯→ O – Bromo Aniline
Solution:
📷
Mono and dialkylanilines ( and quaternary compounds) as their hydrochlorides undergo rearrangement on strong heating an alkyl group migrating from nitrogen atom and entering preferentially the p – position.
📷

ALDEHYDE AND KETONES

Carbonyl compounds include both aldehydes and ketones having the formula 📷 where R and R′ may be different or same

Methods of Preparation

1. oxidation
(a) A primary alcohol an oxidation gives an aldehyde and this on further oxidation gives an acid. Both aldehyde and acid contains the same number of carbon atoms as the original alcohol.
RCH2OH 📷 RCHO ⎯⎯→ RCOOH
It is better to use pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC) which does not oxidise the aldehyde further.
Secondary alcohols on oxidation gives ketones
R2CHOH 📷 R2C = O
Ketone
There is however specific reagent for oxidising secondary alcohols to ketones by using aluminum t – butoxide [(CH3)3CO]3Al in acetone medium t – butyl alkoxide is used since t – butyl alcohol produced is not further oxidised under these condition.
By pyrolysis of Ca, Ba salts of fattyacids
📷
Formic acid salts will always produce aldehydes.
The reaction first leads to the formation of β - keto acids which then eliminate CO2 to give the desired ketone.
📷
📷
Intramolecular chelation by hydrogen bonding through a 6 membered cyclic TS.
📷 📷 📷
Rosenmund Reaction (From Acyl chloride)
📷 RCHO
quinoline
Aldehydes are more easily reduced than acid chlorides and therefore we should expect to obtain the alcohol as the final product. It is BaSO4 that by acting as a poison to the palladium catalyst in this reaction prevents reduction of aldehydes further
Stephen’s Reduction:
RC ≡ N 📷 📷 📷
↓ H2O
RCHO
From Alkynes
R – C ≡ C – H + H2O 📷 📷

📷
From 1,2 diols
📷 📷
Pb(OH)4
📷
illustration-1 : One mole of each of the following is treated with HIO4. What product will be formed and how many moles HIO4 will be consumed.
(a) CH3CHOHCH2OH
(b)
📷
(c) cis – 1,2 cyclopentandiol
Solution: (a) CH3CHO and HCHO 1 mole HIO4
(b) HCHO and OHC CH2OCH3 1 mole HIO4
(c) 📷 1 mole HIO4
Reactions:
As far reactivity is concerned ketones are less reactive than aldehydes because of (I) less electrophilicity of the carboxyl carbon and (ii) steric effect of R groups
  1. Addition of HCN
📷 ⎯⎯→ 📷 📷 📷α - hydroxy acid
  1. Addition of NH2 – Z types of substances
📷 📷 📷
The reaction is acid catalysed and fully reversible
Eg Z is – NH2
📷 + 📷NH2 📷 📷
Z is OH
📷 📷 📷
📷+ 📷 📷 📷
  1. Acetal formation
📷 📷 📷
📷
📷
Acetals are stable towards aqueous alkali but unstable in acid. This is because acetals are actually diethers and acid will protonate the oxygen lone pair reaedily thereby facilitating the release of EtOH which is a good leaving group. Thus acetals are unstable in acid. In basic medium OEt– is a stronger nucleophile than OH–. As a result a weak nucleophile cannot replace a stronger nucleophile and hence acetals are stable in basic medium.

Acetals as protecting groups

Although acetals are hydrolysed to aldehydes and ketones in acids they are stable in basic solution. Because of this property, acetals give us a convenient method for protecting aldehyde and ketone groups from undesired reaction in basic solution.
Illustration 2 : convert
📷
Solution: Keto groups are more easily reduced than ester groups any strong reducing agent that can reduce the ester group can reduce the keto group as well. So we have to protect the keto group. But ketones do not react with alcohols, instead they react better with diols.
📷
Haloform Reaction
📷
In steps (2) the acid base reaction is less dominant than nucleophilic attack by OH– because of more electrophilicity of >C=O attached with CX3 which is electron withdrawing due to –I effect of X. The presence of CH3CO in the compound is the indication that it will respond to iodoform test.
Aldol Condensation:
Aldehydes and /or ketones having α - Hydrogen when treated with dilute alkali forms a condensation product called aldol
2CH3CHO 📷 📷
On heating aldols eliminate water to form unsaturated compound
📷 ⎯⎯→ CH3CH = CH – CHO
α, β unsaturated aldehyde.
The aldol condensation can occur between 2 aldehydes (identical / different) between two ketones or between aldehyde and ketone.
Mechanism ( Base catalyses)
📷
Cross Aldol
When two different aldehydes undergo reaction always four products are obtained. As the first step (d step) is the formation of carbanion the one which will produce amore stable carbanion will decide the major product.
Illustration 3 : Convert
CH3–CHO ⎯⎯→ CH2 = CH2 📷
Solution:
📷
Reaction related to Aldol condensation
  1. Perkin reaction
  2. Claisen Reactin
  3. Dieckmann
Each of these involves attack by a carbo anion on a carboxyl group like aldol condensation. Different bases may be used NaOEt, NaOH, CH3COONa.
  1. Perkin : When benzaldehyde or any other aromatic aldehyde is heated with the anhydride of an aliphatic acid containing ( two α– hydrogen atom) in presence of its sodium salt condensation takes place to form a β - acetylacrylic acid.
(1)
📷
(2)
📷
(3)
📷
Claisen Condensation :
An α - hydrogen in an ester is weakly acidic, when ethyl acetate treated with NaOEt and the resulting mixture is acidified ethyl acetoaceta is obtained.
2CH3COOC2H5 + NaOEt 📷 📷
β - Keto ester
Another eg.
2CH3CH2COOEt + C2H5O– ⎯⎯→ 📷
📷
Ketones (but not aldehydes) undergo a crossed claisen condensation with ester .
Eg. CH3COOC2H5 + CH3COCH3 📷 CH3COCH2COCH3 (Acetylacetone)
Sodium ethoxide converts ethyl a dipole into 2 carbethoxy cyclopentanone. This is an example of intramolecular claisen condensation known as a name reaction Dieckmann reaction.
📷
Mechanism:
📷
Cannizzaro reaction:
Aldehydes having no α - hydrogen atom when treated with conc. alkali will undergo disproportionation reaction to form an alcohol and the Salt of an acid in equivalent amount .
2HCHO 📷 HCOO– + CH3OH
Mechanism:
📷
In a cross canizzaro it is formaldeyde which always undergoes the hydride shift i.e. formaldehyde reduces the other aldehyde.
Tischeanko Reaction:
All aldehydes can be made to undergo the canizzaro reaction by treatment with aluminum ethoxide. Under these reaction conditions the acid and alcohol are combined as ester and the reaction is known as Tischenko reaction.
Examples: 2CH3CHO 📷 📷
Reduction: Reductionof aldehydes / ketones can be carried out in different ways some reagents lead to the formation of alkane and some other lead to alcohols
(a) Reduction to alcohols
(1) MPV reduction
📷 📷 📷
(b) LAH reduction
📷
(c) Bouvalentvault Blanc Reduction
📷
(2) Reduction to Alkanes
(a) Clemmenson Reduction
📷
(b) Wolff Kishner Reaction
📷
Oxidation
Baeyer Villigar Oxidation
📷
📷
Mechanism:
📷
📷
Since Ph has higher migratory aptitude than CH3
📷
Tests for Aldehydes / Ketones
Aldehydes have remaining properties but ketone does not have. Aldehydes reduces Tollen’s Reagent which is ammoniacal silver nitrate
📷
Aldehydes also reduce Fehling’s solution
RCHO + 2CuO ⎯⎯→ RCOOH + Cu2O ↓
red ppt

CARBOXYLIC ACIDS AND DERIVATIVE

These compound contain the carboxyl group attached to hydrogen to an alkyl group (RCOOH) or an aryl group (ArCOOH). These are also named as fatty acid because some of higher members particularly palmitic and stearic acids occurs in natural fats (general formula CnH2nO2).
Acidity: Most unsubstituted carboxylic acids have pKa values in the range of 4-5. The acidity of a carboxylic acid is due to resonance stabilisation of its anion.
📷
The replacement of the non hydroxylic hydrogen atom of methanoic acid by an alkyl group produces a weaker acid as the electron donating inductive effect of the alkyl group reduce the residual electron affinity of the oxygen atom carrying the incipient proton. Further substitution of alkyl group in ethanoic acid has much less effect than this first induction and being now essentially a second order effect, the influence on acid strength is not always regular, steric and other influence playing a part if there is a doubly bonded carbon atom adjacent to the carboxyl group the acid strength is increased. Thus properoienoic acid CH2 = CHCO2H has a pKa = 4.25 compared with 4.88 for the saturated analogue propanoic acid this is due to the fact that the unsaturated α - carbon atom is sp2 hybridised which means that electrons are drawn closer to the carbon nucleus than in a saturated sp3 hybridised atom due to rather large 5 contribution in the sp2 hybrid. The effect of introducing electron withdrawing substituents into simple aliphatic acids is more marked.
Thus halogen with an inductive effect acting in the opposite direction to alkyl increases the strength of acids as is obvious from thefollowing pKa values
FCH2CO2H
2.57
Cl-CH2COOH
2.86
📷
0.65
The introduction of a Halogen atom further away from the carboxyl group than the adjacent α - position has much less influence.
Its inductive effect quickly dies away down a saturated chain, with the result that the negative charge becomes progressively less spread.
Aromatic Carboxylic acid :
Benzoic acid (pKa = 4.2) is a strong acid than cyclohexane carboxylic acid (pKa = 4.9) because of the higher stability of the conjugate base of benzoic acid (benzoate ion) than the aliphatice analogue due to resonance. In case of substituted benzene the ortho isomer has higher acidity than the m or p isomer. The effect is sometimes known as ortho effect. Since benzoic acid is a resonance hybrid and so the carboxyl group is a resonance hybrid and so the carboxyl group is coplanar with the ring. An ortho substituant tends to prevent this coplanarity. Thus resonance is diminished (or prevented) and so the O atom of the OH group has greater positive charge resulting in increased acid strength. It follows from this that the greater thesteric inhibition of resonance, the stronger the acid. This is evident from the following substituted benzoic acids.
2,6 di.Me (pKa = 3.21) > 2t.Bu (pKa = 3.46) > 2-Me (pKa = 3.9)
Illustration 1: Use the inductive effect to account for the following differences in acidity.
(a) FCH2COOH > ClCH2COOH (b)Me3CCH2COOH > Me3SiCH2COOH
(c) CH ≡ CCH2COOH > CH2 = CHCH2COOH
Solution: (a) Since F are more electronegative than Cl, it is a better electron withdrawing group and a better acid strengthens.
(b) Si is more electropositive and therefore results in weakening of acid strength.
(c) C ≡ C, has C is sp hybridised state and so better electron withdrawing capacity compared to C = C, in which C in sp2 hybridised.
Illustration 2: o – nitrobenzoic acid is a stronger acid than 3,5 dinitrobenzoic acid in water whereas in ethanolic solutions the opposite is true. Explain.
Solution: (a) EtOH is weaker base and poorer ion – solvator than is H2O. Thus the ionisation equilibrium lies more to the left in EtOA where the acids are weaker. The Δs of ionisation has a greater influence on pKa in water which is the better solvating medium. O – nitrobenzoic acid is probably a stronger acid in water because of a more favourable ΔS. In ethanol where the entropy term in less significant, 3,5 dinitrobenzoic acid may be stronger because of a more favourable ΔH that can arise from the inductive effect of two nitro groups.
Illustration 3: Salicylic acid o–OHC6H4COOH is a stronger acid than o-CH3OC6H4COOH
Solution: As far as the electronic effects are considered –OH and –OCH3 groups are nearly the same. Because of the bulkyness (-OCH3) might be more acid strengthening (ortho effect). The answer lies in the ability of salicylate ion to undergo intra molecular H – bonding, thereby stabilizing the conjugate base and enhancing acidity.
📷

PREPARATION OF CARBOXYLIC ACID

  1. By oxidation of alkenes
RCH = CHR′ 📷 RCO2 H + R′CO2H
  1. By oxidation of aldehydes and primary alcohols
Aldehydes can be oxidised to carboxylic acids with mild oxidising agents such as Ag(NH3)2+ OH–
R—CHO 📷 RCO2H
RCH2OH 📷 RCO2H
By hydrolysis of Nitriles
R – C ≡ N 📷 RCO2H + NH3
Nitriles can be prepared by nucleophilic substitution reactions of alkyl halides with sodium cyanide. Hydrolysis of nitriles yields a carboxlic acid with a chain one carbon atom longer than the original alkyl halide.
By reaction with Grignard Reagent
R – X + Mg 📷 RMgX 📷 RCO2MgX
↓ H3O+
RCO2H
Most primary alcohols on oxidation with dichromate form esters in addition to acid. Eg n – butanol gives n butyl n butyrate
RCH2OH 📷 RCHO 📷 📷 📷
The mechanism involves hemiacetal formation

Reactions

Nucleophilic, Substitution at the acyl carbon
Mechanism
📷
Acyl compound react as they do because they all have good or reasonably good leaving groups (or can be protonated to have good leaving group) attached to the carboxyl carbon atom.

Relative Reactivity of Acyl compounds

📷
The general order of reactivity of acid derivatives can be explained by taking into account the basicity of the leaving group. We know weaker the base, the better the leaving group. Cl– is the weakest while amines are the strongest base and therefore is the order.

Synthesis and reaction of Acyl chloride

📷
Synthesis and Reaction of Acid Anhydrides
(1) 📷 ⎯⎯→ 📷 Linear anhyanide
(2) Cyclic anhydrides can be prepared by heating some appropriate dicarboxylic acids
📷
📷
Anhydrides also undergo hydrolysis
📷
ESTERS
Carboxylic acids react with alcohols to form esters through a condensation reaction known as esterification
📷 + R′ - OH 📷 📷
Esterification reaction are acid catalysed . they proceed very slowly in the absence of strong acid, but they reach the equilibrium within a matter of few hours when an acid and alcohol is refluxed with small amount of C – H2SO4. Since position of equilibrium controls the amount of ester formed the use of an excess of either the carboxylic acid or the alcohol increases the yield of the limiting agent.
When benzoic acids reacts with mathanol that has been labelled with 18O the labelled oxygen appears in the ester. This results reveals just which bonds breaks in the esterfication.
📷 📷 📷
Mechanism for Acid catalysed esterification
📷
Mechanism: of base catalysed ester hydrolysis
📷
The hydrolysis of carboxylic ester can also be formulated in two ways depending on cleavage of bond
📷 📷
So taking all the factor i.e. the medium of hydrolysis and cleavage of bond ester hydrolysis can be classified into 8 types symbolised in different ways. Eg AAC1 means it is acid catalysed, acyl – oxygen and 1 indicates the molecularity of the rate determining step similarly BAL2 indicates base catalysed alkyl – oxygen cleavage bimolecule of these 8 types all are not likely.
The reverse of the above mechanism is called the acid catalysed hydrolysis of an ester
📷📷 📷
Steric factors strongly affect the rates of acid catalysed hydrolysis of ester. Large groups near the reaction site, whether in the alcohol component or the acid component slow down the reaction markedly. Tertiary alcohols for eg. React so slowly n acid catalysed esterification that they can be converted to ester safely though not acyl chlorides and anhydrides.

Base catalysed hydrolysis of esters

Base promoted hydrolysis is sometimes called sapanification
📷 📷
The carboxylate ion is very much unreactive toward nucleophilic substitution because it is negatively charged. Base promoted hydrolysis of an ester are result irreversible reaction.
-I effect
MeCO2Me
ClCH2CO2Me
CHCl2CO2Me
Ester
Relative rates
1
760
16000
Steric effect
MeCO2Et
EtCO2Et
Iso –PrCO2Et
Relative Rates
1
0.47
0.10
Further evidence that nucleophilic attack occurs at the acyl carbon comes from the studies in which ester of chiral alcohols were subjected to base promoted hydrolysis. Reaction by path A (at the acyl carbon) should lead to retention of configuration in the alcohol. Reaction by path B (at the alkyl carbon) should lead to an inversion of configuration of alcohol.
📷
This mechanism preferred with alkyl carboxylates
Path B: Nucleophilic substitution at Alkyl carbon
📷
Although nucelophilic attack at the alkyl carbon seldom occurs with ester of carboxylic acids, it is the preferred made by attack with esters of sulfuric acids.
📷
This mechanism prefered with alkyl sulphonates

AMINES

In common nomenclature most primary amines are called alkylamines. Amines are classified as primary (1°), secondary (2°) or tertiary (3°) on the basis of the number of organic groups attached to nitrogen.
Structure of Amines : The nitrogen atom of most amine is like that of ammonia, it is approximately sp3 hybridised. The 3 alkyl groups occupy corners of a tetrahedron the sp3 orbital containing the unshared electron pair is directed towards the other corner. If the alkyl groups of a tertiary amine are all different, the amine will be chiral. These will be two enantiomeric forms and we should be able to resolve these enantiomers. But practically resolution is impossible because the enantiomers inter convert rapidly. Thus inter conversions energy is about 6 Kcal mol–1 for most simple amines. In the T.S for the inversion the nitrogen atom becomes sp2 hybridised with unshared electron pairs occupying a p orbital.
📷
Ammonium salts cannot undergo inversion because they do not have an unshared pair. Therefore those quaternary ammonium salts with four different groups are chiral and resolvable.
Basicity: Aliphatic bases: As increasing strength in nitrogenous basis in rotates to the reactions with which they are prepared to take up proton and therefore to the availability of the unshared electron pair on nitrogen, one might expect to see an increase in basic strength on going NH3 ⎯⎯→ RNH2 ⎯⎯→ R2NH ⎯⎯→ R3N due to increasing inductive effect of successive alkyl groups making the nitrogen atom more negative. It will be seem that the introduction of an alkyl group into ammonia increases the basic strength markedly is expected. The introduction of a second alkyl group further increases the basic strength but the net effect of introducing the second alkyl groups is very much less pronounced. The introduction of a third alkyl group actually decreases the strength of base.
This is due to the fact that the basic strength of an amine in water is determined not only by the electron availability of nitrogen, but also by the extent to which the cation formed by uptake of a proton can undergo solvation and so become stabilised.
📷
Decreasing stabilisation by solvation
Thus on going along the series NH3 → RNH2→ RNH2 →R3N. The inductive effect will tend to increase the basicity, but progressively less stabilisation of the cation by hydration will occur which will tend to decrease the basicity. The net replacing effect of introducing successive alkyl group thus becomes progressively smaller and a actual change over takes place from secondary to tertiary amine. In a solvent where no hydrogen bonding can take place, the order is tertiary > secondary > primary
Illustration1 : Compare the basicities PhNH2, Ph2NH and cyclohexyl amine
Solution: Aromatic amines are much less basic them alkylamines because the electron density from the unshared e’s delocalised into the ring, moving to the ortho and para position . An increase in the number of phenyls bonded to N increases delocalisation and decreases basicity. In cyclohexyl NH2 the electron density is localised and thus amine is most basic. The decreasing order of basicities is cyclohexyl NH2 > PhNH2 > Ph2NH
Preparation: Alkylation
R – X + NH3 ⎯⎯→ 📷X– (SN2 reaction)
↓ R – X
R2NH 📷R3N 📷 R4N+}x′
(2°) 3° Quaternary ammonium salt
  1. Alkylation of Imides
📷
  1. Reduction of N – containing compounds
(1)
📷
📷
(2) Nitriles
RCN 📷 RCH2NH2
(3) Amides
📷 📷 ( one C less )
The mechanism is as follows
📷 📷 📷
↓ OH–
📷
Reaction with HNO2
(1) Primary amines
Aromatic Ph – NH2 📷 Ph— N+ ≡ N } Cl–
Benzene diazonium chloride
Alifatic
RNH2 📷 CH3—CH2—CH2—CH2
R = CH3CH2CH2CH2
Cl– H+ shift
CH3CH2CH2CH2Cl CH3CH2—CH—CH3
↓ Nu
CH3CH2—CH (Nu)—CH3
  1. Secondary Amines
R2NH + HNO2 ⎯⎯ ↓(R2N-NO) + H2
N nitrosoamine
  1. Tertiary Amines : No reaction except for N, N – dialkyl asylamines
📷
Nucleophilic Displacement
RNH2 + CHCl3 + KOH ⎯⎯→ R - 📷
Nucleophile (RNH2) attacks electrophilic intermediate [:CH2]

Replacement reactions of Arenediazonium salts

Diazonium salts are highly useful intermediates in the synthesis of aromatic compounds because the diazo group can be replaced by any group F, Cl, Br, OH etc.
📷
Coupling Reaction
📷 + Phg ⎯→ P.g C6H4–N = N–Ar
Azo compound
g = electron releasing group
= OH, NR2, NHR, NH2
Ar N = NAr 📷 ArNH – NHAr
Hydrazobenzene
Hydroazobenzene also undergoes rearrangement in presence of H3O+ to give benzidine(major)
📷

PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OF SOME IMPORTANT INORGANIC COMPOUND

Boron

Boric Acid

Preparation: Boric acid is mainly prepared from the mineral colemanite. The mineral is powdered and mixed with boiling water. SO2 gas is passed through the solution when boric acid is formed.
Ca2B6O11 + 2SO2 + 9H2O ⎯⎯→ 2CaSO3 + 6H3BO3
(ii) From Borax
Na2B4O7 + 2HCl + 5H2O ⎯⎯→ 4H3BO3 + 2NaCl
Properties : Since B(OH)3 only partially reacts with water to form H3O+ and [B(OH)4] it behaves as a weak acid. Thus H3BO3 cannot be satisfactorily titrated with NaOH, as a sharp end point is not obtained. If certain organic polyhydroxy compound such as glycerol, mannitol or sugar are added to the titration mixture, then H3BO3 behaves as a strong monobasic acid. It can now be titrated with NaOH.
B(OH)3 + NaOH 📷 Na [B(OH)4]
The added compound must be a cis diol to enhance the acidic properties in this way. The cis diol forms very stable complexes with the [B(OH)4]– formed by the forward reaction above, thus effectively removing it from solution. The reaction is reversible. Thus removal of one of the products at R.H.S of the equation upsets the balance, the reaction proceeds completely to the right.
📷
On heating, orthoboric acid decomposes to give metaboric acid at 100°C, tetraboric acid of 160° boron trioxide at red heat.
H3BO3 📷 HBO2 + H2O
Meta boric acid
4HBO2 📷 H2B4O7 + H2O
Tetrboric acid
H2B4O7 📷 2B2O3 + H2O
Boron trioxide or boron sesquioxide
When burnt in presence of ethyl alcohol, it forms ethyl borate having a green edged flame
H3BO3 + 3C2H5OH ⎯⎯→ (C2H5)3 BO3 + 3H2O
BORAX: Sodium tetraborate Na2B4O7.10H2O
As the reaction indicates, it is the sodium salt of tetraboric acid. It is a useful primary standard for titrating against acids)
Preparation: (I) From colemanite. The mineral colemanite is finely powdered and boiled with Na2CO3 solution
Ca2B6O11 + 2Na2CO3 ⎯⎯→ 2CaCO3 ↓ + Na2B4O7 + 2NaBO2
Properties : It is a useful primary standard for titrating against acids
(Na2[B4O5(OH)4] 8H2O + 2HCl ⎯⎯→ 2NaCl + 4H3BO3 + 5H2O
One of the products is itself a weak acid. Thus the indicator used to detect the end point of this reaction must be one that is unaffected by H3BO3 methyl orange is normally used, which changes in the pH range 3.1 – 4.4.
One mole of borax reacts with 2 moles of acid. This is because when borax is dissolved in water both B(OH)3 and [B(OH)4] are formed but only the [B]OH)4]– reacts with HCl.
[B4O5(OH)4]2 + 5H2O 📷 2B(OH)3 + 2[B(OH)4]
2[B(OH)4] + 2H3O+ ⎯⎯→ 2B(OH)3 + 4H2O
On heating borax loses water and swells into a white mass which on further heating melts to form a transparent glassy solid called borax bead
Na2B4O7.10H2O 📷 Na2B4O7 + 10H2O
↓Δ
2NaBO2 + B2O3
This borax bead when fused with metal salts form corresponding metaborate having characteristic colour
B2O3 + MnO ⎯⎯→ Mn(BO2)2
Pink
B2O3 + NiO ⎯⎯→ Ni(BO2)2
brown
Diborane : Diborane is the simplest and most studied of the hydrides. It is used to prepare the higher boranes and is an important reagent in synthetic organic chemistry. It is a versatile reagent for the production of organo borane , which are useful intermediates in organic synthesis alternatively diborane is used as a powerful electrophilic reducing agent for certain functional group. It is important to note that borane does not form simple monomeric hydride i.e. BH3 although anlaogous boron trihalides BX3 are well known. This is due to the fact that hydrogen atoms in BH3 have no free electron to form pπ - pπ back bonding and thus B has incomplete octet. Actually when BH3 molecules come in contact with each other, they dimerise to form diborane B2H6. Thus BH3 can exist only as complex compound like BH3z with donor (z) like CO,(CH3)3N etc.
Preparation: (I) Reducing the ethanoate complex of boron halides with LiAlH4
4[Et2O.BF3] + 3Li[AlH4] 📷 2B2H6 + 3Li[AlF4] + 4Et2O
  1. Reducing BF3 with NaBH4 in diglyme solution
3NaBH4 + 4BF3 📷 3NaBF4 + 2B2H6
Properties: Diborane is a colorless gas. It is hydrolyped by water forming boric and 8H2OB2H6 + 6H2O ⎯⎯→ 2H3BO3 + 6H2O
Diborane reacts with ammonia under different condition to give variety of products.
B2H6 + NH3 📷B2H6.2NH3
📷
Boron nitride is some times called as inorganic graphite because it has almost the same structure as graphite.
Borazine B3N3H6 is sometimes called inroganic benzene because its structure shows some formal similarity with benzene with delocalised electrons aromatic character
📷
📷
Structure and bond in boranes: The bonding and structure of boranes are of great interest. The are not enough valence electrons to form conventional two electron bonds between all of the adjacent pairs of atom and so these compounds are termed electron deficient.
📷
The two boron atoms and the 4-terminal hydrogen atoms (Ht) lie in the same plane, the two bridging atoms are in plane perpendicular to the rest of the molecule and prevent rotation between the two boron atoms. The terminal BH distances are the same as the bond length measured in non electron deficient compounds. These are assumed to be normal covalent bonds with 2 electrons shared between two atoms. Thus the electron deficiency must be associated with the bridge groups.
The complete structure of diborane can be explained on the basis of molecular orbital concept. Two of the sp3 orbitals of each of the boron atom overlap with the 1s orbitals of two terminals hydrogen atoms forming two normal B–H σ bonds. One of the remaining sp3 hybrid orbital (either filled or empty) of one of the boron atom. The 1s orbitals of the bridge hydrogen atom and one of the sp3 hybrid orbitals (empty of filled respectively) of the second boron atom overlap to form a delocalised orbital covering the three nuclei. This is three centre two electron bond.
📷
Carbon (oxide and carbides)
Carbon burnt in air to form two oxides carbon monoxide (CO) and carbondioxide (CO2)

Carbon monoxide Preparation

(i) By heating carbon in limited supply of oxygen
C + 📷O2 ⎯⎯→ CO
(ii) By heating oxides of heavy metals eg. Iron zinc with carbon
Fe2O3 + 3C ⎯⎯→ 2Fe + 3CO
ZnO + C ⎯⎯→ Zn + CO
The following important industrial fuels contain CO as ore of the ingredients
  1. Water gas (equimolar mixture of CO and H2)
It is prepared by blowing steam through red / white C
C + H2O 📷 📷 ΔH° = +131 kJ mol–1
Δs° = + 134 kJ mol–1
The reaction is strongly endothermic (ΔG = ΔH - TΔS)
It has a high calorific value as both CO H2 burn and evolved heat
  1. Producer gas: It is made by blowing air through red hot coke
📷 ⎯⎯→ CO2 + 4N2
↓ +C
2CO + N2 (producer gas)
Producer gas is a less efficient fuel than water gas, i.e., it has a lower calorific value as only part of the gas will brown. Composition is 70% N2, 75% CO, 4% CO2 with traces of CH4,H2 and O2
  1. Coal gas is a mixture of CO, H2, CH4 and CO2 produced at a gas work by distilling coal
Reactions (i) CO is a good reducing agent and can reduce many metal oxides to the metal
CuO + CO ⎯⎯→ Cu + CO2
Fe2O3 + 3CO ⎯⎯→ 2Fe + 3CO2
  1. CO is an important ligand. It can donate an electron to many transition metals forming carbonyl compounds
Ni + 4CO ⎯⎯→ Ni(CO)4
Fe + 5CO 📷 Fe(CO)5

Carbon dioxide

Preparation :
(i) In lab, H is prepared by the action of acids on carbonates
CaCO3 + 2HCl ⎯⎯→ CaCl2 + H2O + CO2
(ii) By combustion of carbon
C + O2 ⎯⎯→ CO2
Properties:
(i) It turns lime water milky and milkyness disappears when CO2 is passed in excess
Ca(OH)2 + CO2 ⎯⎯→ CaCO3 ↓ + H2O
CaCO3 + H2O + CO2 ⎯⎯→ Ca(HCO3)2
(ii) CO2 can be liquified under pressure between –57°C and +31°C. The solid CO2 is produced as white snow by expanding gas from cylinders
Carbides: Compounds of carbon with elements of nearly the same or lower electronegativity than itself are called carbides are of three main types.
(i) Ionic or Salt like C arbide. These are the ionic salts containing either 📷 or C4– ions eg CaC2, Al4C3 etc.
Covalent carbides: These are compounds of carbon with elements having similar electronegativity. They are thermally stable, hard and high melting SiC and B4C are the equation
SiC is known as carborundum and is prepared by heating quartz and with an excess of coke in electric furnace at 200° SiO2 +2C ⎯⎯→ Si + 2CO
Si + C ⎯⎯→ SiC
SiC is very unreactive. It is unaffected by acids (except H3PO4) but does react with NaOH and air. It is widely used as an abrasive and refractory bricks.
Interstitial carbides. They are formed by transition metals and consists of metallic lattices with carbon atoms in the interstices eg. tungsten, tantalum carbide.
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.19 06:18 rajusingh79 Concepts of Acids and Bases_Final

https://docs.google.com/document/d/12cFRBzmY7w8m3is3BYJYavHiAzGnfDlW/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
1. IIT-JEE Syllabus
Various concepts of Acids and Bases, Relative Strengths of Inorganic and Organic Acids and Bases.
2. Introduction
There are several so-called theories of acids and bases, but they are not really theories but merely different definitions of what we choose to call an acid or a base. Since it is only a matter of definition, no theory is more right or wrong than any other, and we use the most convenient theory for a particular chemical situation. So before we talk of strength of acids and bases, we need to know several theories.
3. Modern Concepts of Acids and Bases
Following are the important modern concept of acids and bases:
3.1 Arrhenius Concept - The Water Ion System
According to this concept, an acid is any hydrogen containing compound which gives H+ ions in aqueous solution and a base which gives OH– ions in aqueous solution. The HCl is an acid and NaOH is a base and the neutralisation process can be represented by a reaction involving the combination of H+ and OH– ions to form H2O.
📷
NaOH 📷 Na+ + OH–
H+ + OH– ⎯⎯→ H2O
Utility
i) Since the reaction representing neutralisation process involves the combination of H+ and OH– ions, the approximately constant molar heat of neutralisation would be expected. Thus the constant heat of neutralisation of a strong acid by a strong base is readily understandable in terms of this concept.
ii) This concept has offered a means of correlating catalytic behaviour with the concentration of the H+ ion.
Limitations
i) According to this concept, HCl is regarded as an acid only when dissolved in H2O and not in some other solvent such as C6H6 or when it exists in the gaseous form.
iii) The neutralisation process is limited to those reactions which can occur in aqueous solution only, although reactions involving salt formation do occur in many other solvents and even in the absence of solvents.
iv) It cannot explain the acidic character of certain salts such as AlCl3 in aqueous solution.
3.2 Bronsted - Lowry Theory - The Proton - donor - Acceptor System
Bronsted and Lowry in 1923 independently proposed a more general definition of acids and bases. According to them, an acid is defined as any hydrogen containing material (a molecule or a cation or an anion) that can release a proton (H+) to any other substance, whereas a base is any substance (a molecule or a cation or an anion) that can accept a proton from any other substance. In short, an acid is a proton -donor and a base is a proton - acceptor.
📷
📷
📷
📷
Conjugate Acid - Base Pairs
Consider a reaction
📷
Acid1 Base2 Acid2 Base1
H2O + NH3 📷 H3O+ OH–
In this reaction HCl donates a proton to H2O and is, therefore an acid. Water, on the other hand, accepts a proton from HCl, and is, therefore, a base. In the reverse reaction which at equilibrium proceeds at the same rate as the forward reaction, the H3O+ ions donates a proton to Cl– ion, hence H3O+, ion is an acid. Cl– ion, because it accepts a proton from H3O+ ion, is a base. Acid base pairs such as.
📷
the members of which can be formed from each other mutually by the gain or loss of proton are called conjugate acid - base pairs.
If in the above reaction, the acid HCl is labelled Acid1 and its conjugate base viz. Cl– as Base1 and further, if H2O is designated Base2 and its conjugate acid viz. H3O+ as Acid2, the equilibrium can be represented by a general equation.
📷
This is the fundamental equation representing the relationship between an acid and a base on the basis of Bronsted concept. Thus on the basis of this concept Acid1 and Base1 form one conjugate acid-base pair and Acid2 and Base2 form another conjugate acid-base pair.
Two important axioms of the Bronsted concept and position of equilibrium in acid-base reactions:
📷 📷 📷 + 📷
In the equilibrium mixture two acid HCl and H3O+ ion are competing to donate protons to a base. Since HCl wins, it is the stronger acid. Similarly two bases, H2O and Cl– ion, are competing to accept protons. Here H2O is the stronger base. It will be seen that the stronger acid, HCl, has the weaker conjugate base Cl– ion and the stronger base, H2O, has weaker conjugate acid, H3O+ ion. The stronger acid and weaker base form one conjugate acid - base pair and weaker acid and stronger base form another conjugate acid base pair. It is quite evident that HClO4 is the strongest acid; its conjugate base 📷 ion, is consequently the weakest base. CH4 and H2 are the weakest acids; their conjugate bases, 📷 ion and H– ion respectively, are consequently the strongest bases.
As a stronger acid, HCl is highly ionised even in concentrated aqueous solution. At equilibrium, the above reaction proceeds to the right, with most of HCl ionised to form H3O+ and Cl– ions. This fact can be illustrated by using arrows of unequal length to designate the forward and reverse reactions respectively. Thus.
Stronger acid + Stronger Base 📷 Weaker acid + Weaker Base
HCl + H2O 📷 H3O+ + Cl– ………..(1)
The longer arrow indicates that the position of equilibrium lies to the right.
In the ionisation of CH3COOH in H2O, equilibrium is reached when the reaction has proceeded to the right only to slight extent, with only a small fraction of the CH3COOH present in the form of ions.
Weaker acid + Weaker base 📷 Stronger acid + Stronger base
CH3COOH + H2O 📷 H3O+ + CH3COO– ……….. (2)
Here the longer arrow indicates that the position of equilibrium lies to the left.
Evidently H3O+ ion in equilibrium (2) is a stronger acid and CH3COO– ion is a stronger base. It is also evident that the stronger acid H3O+ ion has the weaker conjugate base, H2O and the stronger base, CH3COO– has the weaker conjugate acid, CH3COOH. We thus see that all the proton transfer reactions (i.e., protolysis reactions) run downhill to form predominantly the weaker acid and the weaker base.
Exercise 1: Identify the conjugate acid base pair
CH3NH2 + OH– 📷 📷+ H2O
📷 📷 📷
Relative Strengths of Acids and Bases
According to Bronsted concept, a stronger acid has a stronger tendency to donate a proton and a strong base has a strong tendency to accept a proton. At least two general methods are generally used for the comparison of relative acidity of given acids.
i) The first of these consists of making a comparison of proton-donating tendencies of different acids towards the same base. For moderately strong acids, H2O is generally used as the base. Suppose we have to compare the acidic strengths of CH3COOH and HCN. Experimentally it has been observed that the ionisation or acidity constant, Ka for CH3COOH and HCN at 25°C is 1.8 × 10–5 and 4.0 × 10–10 respectively.
CH3COOH + H2O 📷 H3O+ + CH3COO– (Ka = 1.8 × 10–5)
HCN + H2O 📷 H3O+ + CN– (Ka = 4.0 × 10–10)
CH3COOH is, therefore, a stronger acid than HCN and CN– ion is a stronger base than CH3COO– ion.
ii) The second method is the competitive protolysis method. In this method one acid is added to the conjugate base of another and the equilibrium concentration are determined experimentally. For example, when NaOC2H5 is added to H2O, it is experimentally seen that 📷 ion, which is the conjugate base of C2H5OH reacts fairly completely with H2O to form C2H5OH and OH– ion.
📷 + 📷 📷 📷 + 📷
Ethoxide ion, C2H5O– is, therefore, a stronger base than OH– and H2O is a stronger acid than C2H5OH. Similarly when HS– is added to NH3, it has been found experimentally that NH4+ and S2– ions are present in the reaction mixture. This shows that NH3 is a stronger base in comparison to HS–.
Periodic variations of acidic and basic properties
The discussion of this topic is made under the following heads.
a) Hydracids of the elements of the same period. We can consider the hydracids of the elements of 2nd period viz. CH4, NH3, H2O and HF. These hydrides become increasingly acidic as we move from CH4 to HF. Thus CH4 has negligible acidic properties, but NH3 donates a proton (H+) to strong bases to form 📷, H2O loses a proton even more readily and HF is a fairly strongly acid. The increase in the acidic properties of these hydrides is due to the fact that as we move from CH4 to HF, the stability of their conjugate base viz 📷,📷, OH– and F– increases in the order:
📷 < 📷 < OH– < F–
the increase in acidic properties is supported by the successive increase in the dissociation constant values of these hydrides as shown.
CH4(=10–58) < NH3(=10–35) < H2O(=10–14) < HF (=10–4)
b) Hydracids of the elements of the same group. The following examples make this point clear:
i) Hydracids of VA groups elements (NH3,PH3, AsH3, SbH3,BiH3). All these hydrides show basic character. With the increase in size and decrease in electronegativity from N to Bi, there is a decrease in electron density in sp3 hybrid orbital and thus electron donor capacity (i.e.basic character) decreases.
ii) Hydracids of VI A group elements (H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te). Aqueous solution of the hydrides of this group behave as weak diprotic acid and ionise as:
H2R 📷 H+ + HR–
HR– 📷 H+ + R2–
The strength of the hydrides as acids increases in the order:
H2O < H2S < H2Se < H2Te.
This order is supported by the successive increase of their dissociation constants as shown.
H2O (1.0 × 10–14) < H2S (1.1× 10–7) < H2Se(2 × 10–4) < H2Te(2.3 × 10–3)
The increasing acidic character reflects decreasing trend in the electron donor ability of OH–, HS–,HSe– or HTe– ions. The increasing acidic character is explained by saying that as the charge density on the conjugate base decreases from OH– to HTe–, the proton is less tightly held in higher members and, therefore, acidic character increase.
iii) Hydracids of VIIA group elements (HF,HCl, HBr, HI). The aqueous solutions of these hydrides show acidic character which increases in the order HF < HCl < HBr < HI. This order is explained by saying that as we pass from HF to HI, there is a gradual decrease in the bond energies of H – X bonds (H – F = 135 kcal/mole, H—Cl = 103, H – Br = 88, H – I = 71). This decreasing order of bond energies increase the tendency to HX molecule to split up into H+ and X– ions in aqueous solution and thus the acidic character increases from HF to HI.
c) Oxyacids.
i) The acidic character of oxyacids of the same element which is in different oxidation states increases with the increase of its oxidation state. The following series follow this rule (called oxidation number or oxidation state rule).
a) HCl+O < HCl3+O2 < HCl5+O3 < HCl7+O4
b) H2S4 +O3 < H2S6+O4 (c) HN3 +O2 < HN5 +O3.
Explanation: With reference to the oxyacids of halogens explanation of the oxidation rule can be given as follows. It is well known that the stronger the acid, the weaker will be its conjugate base and vice versa. Now the conjugate bases of the acids are : ClO–, 📷, 📷,📷 respectively the oxyanions in which the central atom (i.e. chlorine atom) has larger oxidation number, has the larger number of lone oxygen atoms for participation in extension of the π bond. Thereby the charge on the ion is delocalised which greatly stabilises the ion and thus deceases its tendency to accept a proton i.e., causes the ions to be a very weak base with the result that the strength of the acid increases.
📷
📷
When the oxidation state rule as given above is applied to the oxyacids of phosphorus viz. H3P+O2 < H3P+3O3 < H3P+5O4, but the experimental observation suggest the reverse order viz H3PO2 ≥ H3PO3 > H3PO4.
Explanation: The experimental order can be explained when we consider the structures of these acids as given below. In these the number of protonated and unprotonated oxygen atoms have also been indicated. The oxygen atom attached with a proton is called protonated oxygen while that attached directly with phosphorus (central atom) is known as unprotonated oxygen.
Structure:
📷
📷
📷
Nature of the acid:
Monobasic
Dibasic
Tribasic
No. of protonated oxygen atoms
1
2
3
No. of unprotonated oxygen atoms:
1
1
1
The proton attached to any oxygen atom has a far greater chance of dissociation than that linked directly with phosphorus atoms (which is the central atom). Thus in this series, since the number of protonated oxygen atoms and consequently the number of dissociable protons increases from one in H3PO2 to three in H3PO4, the acidity of these acids decrease in the order : H3PO2 ≥ H3PO3 > H3PO4
ii) The acidic character of the oxyacids of different elements which are in the oxidation state decrease with the increase in atomic number of the central atom. The following series follow this rule
a) HOCl+ > HOBr+ > HOI+
b) HCl7+O4 > HI7+O4
c) H2S4+O3 > H2Se4+O3
Explanation: As the atomic number of the central atom increase, its electronegativity decreases and its size increase. As a result of this the tendency of the acid to lose a proton to water decrease. This makes the acid a weaker acid.
d) Hydrated metal ions: Under favourable conditions one or more protons may dissociate from the coordinated aquo groups.
📷
Thus hydrated metal ions also develop acidity. The other things being equal, acidity increases with the increase of positive charge and basicity increases with the increase of negative charge. Thus [Fe(H2O)6]3+ ion is a stronger acid than [Fe(H2O)6]2+ ion and [Ni(OH)4]2– is a stronger base than [Ni(OH)4]– ion.
Amphiprotonic substances
These substances act as an acid as well as a base: e,g, CH3COOH is acid with water while is a base with HF.
📷
Urea is also anphiprotonic as it is an acid with NH3 while a base with sulphuric acid
📷
Similarly water can act as an acid in the presence of bases stronger than itself such as NH3, amine, C2H5O–, OH– and CO32– ions. Water can act as a base in the presence of acids stronger than itself such as HClO4, HCl, CH3COOH and phenol.
In fact the amphiprotonic nature of H2O is well illustrated in the extremely slight dissociation or self-ionisation:
📷 + 📷 📷 📷 + 📷 (Kw = 1.0 × 10–14)
The levelling effect, levelling and differentiating solvents
The apparent strength of a protonic acid is dependent on the solvent in which the acid is dissolved. When all the acids in the acid chart which are stronger than H3O+ ion (i.e., the acids above H3O+ acids) are added to H2O, they donate as proton to H2O to H3O+ ion and appear to have equal strength, since all these acids are levelled to the strength of H3O+ ion which is left in solution and is common to all such solutions. This phenomenon viz. The strength of all the acids becomes equal to that of H3O+ ion is called leveling effect of the solvent, water, and here water is called a leveling solvent for all these acids.
In aqueous solution all very strong bases like Na+H–, Na+NH2–, Na+OC2H5– are levelled to the strength of OH– ion, for they react completely with H2O to produce OH– ions. The solvent in which complete proton-transfer occurs are called levelling solvents. In other words, the solvent in which the solute is ~100% ionised, are called levelling solvents. Since HF and HCl both are ~ 100% ionised in liquid NH3 to give ~100% NH4+ ions, these appear to be of equal strength and liq. NH3 acts as a levelling solvent for HF and HCl. In H2O, HF is only partially ionised, whereas HCl and HBr are ~ 100% ionised. Thus H2O is a differentiating solvent for HF, but for HCl and HBr it is a leveling solvent. Several mineral acids are partially ionised in glacial CH3COOH medium because CH3COOH is a poor proton-acceptor but rather a better proton donor. CH3COOH, therefore, acts as a differentiating solvent towards the mineral acids. But, for bases, CH3COOH act as a leveling solvent.
Utility of Bronsted Concept
i) It defines acids and bases in terms of the substances themselves and not in terms of their ions in aqueous solution. Thus HCl is an acid because of the fact that it can give a H+ ion.
HCl 📷 H+ + Cl–
ii) The Bronsted concept recognises that acid-base behaviour is neither restricted to, nor depends on, any particular, solvent
iii) This concept is useful in accounting for the hydrolysis of salt solution. When a salt is dissolved in water, an unbalance in the concentration of the solvent cation (H3O+) and anion (OH–) will result, if the salt cation and anion differ in their proton-donor and proton-acceptor properties towards H2O. This point can be illustrated by considering the aqueous solution of FeCl3. Aqueous hydrated ferric ion, [Fe(H2O)x]3+, exceeds the proton-acceptor ability of Cl– ion and a considerable excess of H3O+ ion is produced in the solution, making FeCl3 acidic.
FeCl3 + xH2O 📷 [Fe(H2O)x]3+ + 3Cl–
Aqueous solution of a Na2CO3 is alkaline in character, because the proton acceptor ability of 📷 ion exceeds the proton-donor ability of hydrated sodium ion, [Na(H2O)x]+.
2xH2O + Na2CO3 📷 2[Na(H2O)x]+ + 📷
Limitations
i) This concept lays excessive emphasis on the proton - transfer. Although it is true that most common acids are protonic in nature, yet there are many which are not.
ii) There are a number of acid-base reactions in which no proton transfer takes place, e.g. SO2 + SO2 📷 SO2+ + 📷
Acid1 + Base2 📷 Acid2 + Base1
Thus the protonic definition cannot be used to explain the reactions occuring in non-protonic solvents such as COCl2,SO2, N2O4 and BrF3.
3.3 General theory of solvent system
The protonic definition of acids and bases given by Bronsted can be extended to the reactions occurring in non-aqueous solvents containing hydrogen such as NH3, N2H4,HF, H2SO4, CH3COOH, HCN and alcohols.
In an attempt to have a more general definition of acids and bases applicable to protonic and non-protonic solvents, several definitions have been proposed. One of these is due to Cady and Elsey (1928) according to whom an acid is solute that, either by direct dissociation or by reaction with the solvent gives the anion characteristic of the solvent and a base is a solute that, either by direct association or by reaction with the solvent, gives the cation characteristic of the solvent. If for example, we consider the solvent H2O, its characteristic cation and anion are H3O+ and OH– respectively as shown below:
📷 📷 📷
Thus all those compounds which can give H3O+ ions in H2O will act as acids and all the compounds which can give OH– ions in H2O will behave as bases.
Similarly in N2O4 as solvent substance such as NOCl which yield NO+ ions are acids and the substances such as NaNO3 which yield NO3– ions are bases.
📷 + 📷 📷 📷 + 📷
Evidently this definition of acids applies equally well to protonic and non-protonic solvents.
The auto-ionisation of some protonic and non-protonic solvents is shown below.

Acid
Base
Acid
Base
Protonic solvents
H2O
+
H2O
📷
H3O+
+
OH–

NH3
+
NH3
📷
NH4+
+
NH2–

CH3COOH
+
CH3COOH
📷
CH3COOH2+
+
CH3COO–
Non-protonic solvents
SO2
+
SO2
📷
SO2+
+
📷

COCl2
+
COCl2
📷
(COCl.COCl2)+
+
Cl–

BrF3
+
BrF3
📷
BrF2+
+
BrF4–

N2O4
+
N2O4
📷
2NO+
+
2NO3–
Just as with the Arrhenius definition, neutralisation is a reaction between an acid and a base to produce a salt and the solvent. Neutralisation reaction in some non-aqueous solvents are given below:

Acid
Base
Salt
Solvent
In liq. NH3
:
NH4Cl
+
NaNH2
📷
NaCl
+
2NH3
In N2O4
:
NOCl
+
NaNO3
📷
NaCl
+
N2O4
In CH3COOH
:
HCl
+
CH3COONa
📷
NaCl
+
CH3OOH
In liq. SO2
:
SOCl2
+
[N(CH3)4]2 SO3
📷
2[N(CH3)4]Cl
+
2SO2
It may be seen from the following reactions that there is a complete analogy between the solvolytic acid and amphoteric behaviours in aqueous solvents.
Solvolytic behaviour
In liq. NH3:
AlCl3 + NH3 ⎯⎯→ [Al(NH2)]2+ + H+ + 3Cl–
In H2O:
: AlCl3 + H2O ⎯⎯→ [Al(OH)]2+ + H+ + 3Cl–
Amphoteric behaviour
In liq. NH3:
In H2O
Zn(NH2)2 + 2NH2– ⎯⎯→ [Zn(NH2)4]2–
Zn(OH2) + 2OH– ⎯⎯→ [Zn(OH)4]2–
Utility of the concept
Evidently this concept of solvent system can be used to explain the acid-base reactions occurring in aqueous solvents (protonic and non-protonic both).
Limitations
i) This theory does not consider a number of acid base reactions included in the protonic definition.
ii) It limits acid base phenomena to solvent systems only. Thus it does not explain the acid - base reactions which may occur in the absence of solvent.
iii) It cannot explain the neutralisation reactions occurring without the presence of ions.
Thus this theory can simply be said to be an extension of the Arrhenius water - ion system.
3.4 The Lewis Concept - The Electron - Donor - Acceptor System
This theory explains the acid-base phenomena not in terms of ionic reactions but in terms of electronic structure of the acid and base along with the formation of a coordinate covalent bond. According to Lewis (1923), an acid is any species (molecule, radical or ion) that can accept an electron-pair to form a coordinate covalent bond and a base is any species that can donate an electron-pair to the formation of a coordinate covalent bond. Thus, in the Lewis system, an acid is an electron pair-acceptor and a base is an electron pair-donor.
Thus according to Lewis theory, the process of neutralisation is simply the formation of a coordinate bond between an acid and a base. The neutralisation product, termed as coordinate complex or adduct, may be either non-ionisable or may undergo dissociation or condensation reaction depending on its stability.
Now consider the reaction between a proton (H+) and : NH3 molecules as shown below.
📷
Evidently in the above reaction proton (H+) accepts one electron pair from :NH3 molecule and is, therefore, acid, whereas :NH3 molecule which donates an electron pair, is a base. The adduct is NH4+ ion.
Lewis bases and Bronsted-Lowry bases are the same substances, since any molecule or ion which accepts protons does so because of the presence of an unshared pair of electrons. In the above example NH3 molecules is a proton acceptor (i.e., Bronsted-base) and an electron pair donor (i.e., Lewis - base).
Bronsted and Lewis theories are thus identical as far as bases are concerned except that the wording used for definition of the bases is different in both the theories. Thus NH3, H2O, OH–, Cl–, CN– etc. are the bases on the Bronsted as well as on the Lewis systems. There are however, few compounds such as amides, ethers, nitriles, C2H4,C2H2,C6H6 etc. which have little or no tendency to accept protons but react readily with Lewis - acids.
Classification of Lewis Acids
Any Lewis acid must contain at least one empty orbital in the valence shell of one of its atoms to accept an electron pair form a Lewis-base. Lewis - acids may be classified as:
i) Molecules containing a central atom with an incomplete octet. Typical examples of this class of acids are electron deficient molecules such as alkyls and halides of Be, B and Al. Some reactions of this type of Lewis acid with Lewis bases are shown below:
Lewis Acid + Lewis base ⎯⎯→ Adducts
📷
ii) Molecules containing a central atom with vacant d-orbitals. The central atom of the halides such as SiX4,GeX4,TiCl4,SnX4, PX3,PF3,SF4,SeF4,TeCl4 etc. have vacant d-orbitals. These substances can, therefore, accept an electron pair from the Lewis base to accommodate in their vacant d-orbital and can thus form adducts with a number of halide ions and organic bases. These substances are, therefore, Lewis acids. These halides are vigorously hydrolysed by H2O to form an oxy acid or oxide of the central atom and the appropriate HX. The hydrolytic reactions take place presumably through the intermediate formation of unstable adducts with H2O. For example
📷
iii) Simple cations. Theoretically all simple cations are potential Lewis acids. Reactions of some cations as Lewis acids with Lewis Bases are shown below. It will be seen that these reactions are identical with those which produce Werner complexes.
Lewis acid + Lewis base ⎯⎯→ Adduct or Addition compounds
Ammonation: Ag+ + 2(:NH3) ⎯⎯→ [NH3 ⎯⎯→ Ag ←⎯⎯ NH3]+
📷
📷
📷
The Lewis acid strength or coordinating ability of the simple cations which, according to Lewis, are Lewis acids, increases with (a) an increase in the positive charge carried by the cation (b) an increase in the nuclear charge for atoms in any period of the periodic table. (c) a decrease in ionic radius. (d) a decrease in the number of shielding electron shells.
Evidently the acid strength of simple cations increases for the element on moving from left to right in a period and from bottom to top in a group of periodic table. Thus:
Fe2+ < Fe3+ (positive charge increases, +2 ⎯⎯→ +3)
K+ < Na+ (on moving from bottom to top in a group)
Li+ < Be2+ (on moving from left to right in a period)
⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯strength of Lewis acids increasing⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯→
iv) Molecules having multiple bond between atoms of dissimilar electro-negativity. Typical examples of molecules falling in this class of Lewis acids are CO2,SO2 and SO3. In these compounds the oxygen atoms are more electronegative than S– or C- atom. As a result, the electron density of π-electrons is displaced away from carbon or sulphur atoms which are less electronegative than oxygen, towards the O-atom. The C- or S-atom thus becomes electron deficient and is, therefore, able to accept an electron pair from a Lewis base such as OH– ions to from dative bond.
📷
SO2 also reacts in the same manner with OH– ion
📷
v) Elements with an electron sextent. Oxygen and sulphur atoms contain six electrons in their valence shell and can, therefore, be regarded as Lewis acids. The oxidation of 📷 to 📷 ion by oxygen and to 📷 ion by sulphur are the acid-base reactions.
Lewis base
Lewis acid
Adduct
📷
+
📷
⎯→
📷
📷
+
S
⎯→
📷
Utility of Lewis concept
i) This concept also includes those reactions in which no protons are involved.
ii) Lewis concept is more general than the Bronsted - Lowry concept (i.e. protonic concept) in that acid-base behaviour is not dependent on the presence of one particular element or on the presence or absence of a solvent.
iii) It explains the long accepted basic properties of metallic oxides and acidic properties of non-metallic oxides
iv) This theory also includes many reactions such as gas phase, high temperature and non-solvent reaction as neutralisation process.
v) The Lewis approach is, however, of great value in case where the protonic concept is inapplicable, for example, in reaction between acidic and basic oxides in the fused state.
Limitations
i) Since the strength of Lewis acids and bases is found to depend on the type of reaction, it is not possible to arrange them in any order of their relative strength. Thus, for example, experiments show that fluoride complex of Be2+ ions is more stable than that of Cu2+ ion, indicating that Be2+ ion is more acidic than Cu2+ ion. On the other hand amine complex of Cu2+ is more stable than that of Be2+ ion indicating that Cu2+ is more acidic than Be2+ ion.
ii) According to the phenomenological criteria, an acid-base reaction should be a rapid reaction. There are, however, many Lewis acid-base reactions which are slow.
Exercise 2: In the following reaction, identify each of the reactant as a Lewis acid or Lewis base.
i) Co+2 + 6NH3 ⎯→[Co(NH3)6]2+
ii) NH3 + BF3 ⎯→ F3B ← NH3
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.18 10:00 rajusingh79 chemical bonding

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1jsKhbTr0HGh7FiTEFF5qlXYnVhfAMeQF/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
1. IIT-JEE Syllabus
Lewis structure; orbital overlap and covalent bond; hybridisation involving s, p & d orbitals only; coordinate covalent bond; ionic bond; orbital energy diagrams for diatomic species; polarity in molecules, dipole moment (qualitative aspects only); VSEPR model and shapes of molecules (linear, angular, planar, pyramidal, tetrahedral, octahedral and square planar.
2. Introduction
There are several different theories which explain the electronic structure and shapes of known molecules, and attempt to predict the shapes of molecules whose structures are so far unknown. Each theory has its own virtues and shortcomings. None is rigorous. Theories change in the light of new knowledge. If we knew or could prove what a bond was, we would not need theories, which by definition cannot be proved. The value of a theory lies more in its usefulness than in its truth. Being able to predict the shape of a molecule is important. In many cases all the theories give the correct answers.
3. The Lewis Theory
The octet rule: The Lewis theory gave the first explanation of a covalent bond in terms of electrons that was generally accepted. If two electrons are shared between two atoms, this constitutes a bond and binds the atoms together. For many light atoms, a stable arrangement is attained when the atom is surrounded by eight electrons.
This octet can be made up from some electrons which are totally owned and some electrons which are ‘shared’. Thus atoms continue to form bonds until they have made up an octet of electrons. This is called the ‘octet rule’. The octet rule explains the observed valencies in a large number of cases. There are exceptions to the octet rule; for example, hydrogen is stable with only two electrons. Other exceptions are discussed later. Today, the conventional Lewis structure representation of a pair of bonded electrons is by means of a ‘dash’ (-) usually called a ‘bond’. Lone pairs or ‘non-bonded’ electrons are represented by ‘dots’. Some structures are represented below:
📷
📷 Such representations of organic molecules are not usually problematic. However, ‘hit-and-trial’ is generally the method (obviously not very efficient) used by most students in figuring out the structures of inorganic molecules.
Different ways of attaining the octet give rise to different types of bonds
  1. Ionic bond
  2. Covalent bond
  3. Co-ordinate bond
4. Ionic Bond
A pure ionic bond may be described with a simple electrostatic model. This electrostatic model can be viewed as a lattice composed of positive and negative ions in such a way that the attractive forces between oppositely charged ions are maximized and the repulsive forces between ions of same charge are minimized.
4.1 Occurrence of Ionic Bonding
Simple ionic compounds form only between very active metallic elements and very active non metals. Two important requisites are that the ionization energy to form the cation and the electron affinity to form the anion, must be energetically favorable. This does not mean that these two reactions must be exothermic, but means, rather, that they must not cost too much energy. Thus the requirements for ionic bonding are
a) The atoms of one element must be able to lose one (or) two electrons (and rarely three), without undue energy input.
b) The atoms of the other element must be able to accept one (or) two electrons (and rarely three), without undue energy input.
These restricts ionic bonding two compounds between the most active metals : Groups I(A), II(A), part of III(A) and some lower oxidation of the transition metals (forming cations) and most active non metals : Groups VII A, VI (A) and nitrogen (forming anions).
4.2 Properties of Ionic compounds
a) Ionic compounds cannot show electrical conductivity as solids but conduct electricity quite well when molten.
b) Ionic compounds tend to have high melting points.
c) Ionic compounds usually are very hard but brittle substances
d) Ionic compounds are often soluble in polar solvents with high dielectric constants
5. Covalent Bond
Normally two electrons pair up to form each bond. This is a consequence of the Pauli's exclusion principle - two electrons must have paired spins if they are both to occupy the same region of space between the nuclei and thereby attract both nuclei. The definition of a bond as a shared pair of electrons, however, is only restrictive.
For most atoms there will be maximum of eight electrons in the valence shell. This is absolutely necessary for atoms of the elements lithium to fluorine since they have only four orbitals (an s and three p) in the valence shell. It is quite common, as well, for atoms of other elements to utilize only their s and p orbitals. Under these conditions the sum of shared pairs (bonds) and unshared pairs (lone pairs) must equal the number of orbitals four. This is the maximum, and for elements having lesser than four valence electrons, the octet will usually not be filled. The following compounds illustrate these possibilities.
📷
For elements with available d orbitals the valence shell can be expanded beyond an octet. Because, d- orbitals first appear in the third energy level, they are low enough in energy to be available for bonding in elements of period 3 and beyond. These elements are nonmetals in the higher valence compounds and transition metals in complexes. In the non metals, where the number of valence electrons is usually the limiting factor, we have maximum covalencies of 5,6,7 and 8 in groups V A, VI A, VII A and VIII A respectively. Note that covalency (the number of atoms bonded to another atom) are not always the same. Factors determining covalencies and co-ordination numbers in complexes are of several kinds.
Examples of molecules and ions containing more than eight electrons in the valence shell of the central atom are
📷
It has been assumed implicitly in all of these rules that the molecule will seek the lowest overall energy. This means that, in general, the maximum number bonds will form, and that the arrangement of the atoms in the molecule will be such as to minimise adverse repulsion energies.
5.1 Properties of covalent compounds
a) Under normal conditions of temperature and pressure, these exist as gases (or) liquid of low boiling points. This is due to the fact that very weak forces of attraction (Vander Waal's forces) exist between discrete molecules. Some exist as soft solids if their molecular masses are high.
b) With the exception of few which have giant three dimensional structure such as diamond, carborundum (SiC), silica (SiO2), others have relatively low melting and boiling points. This is due to the presence of weak attractive forces between the molecules. On supplying heat energy, the molecules are readily pulled out from these forces and move freely having high kinetic energy.
c) In general, covalent substances are bad conductors of electricity. Substances which have polar character like HCl in solution, can conduct electricity. Covalent solids having giant molecules are bad conductors since they do not contain charged particles or free electrons. Graphite can conduct electricity due to free movement of electrons within the layer.
d) In general, covalent substances are insoluble in polar solvents like H2O, but soluble in non polar solvents like benzene, CCl4, ether etc. This is based on the principle, like dissolves like. Some of the covalent compounds like alcohols, amines dissolve in water due to hydrogen bonding. Covalent solids having giant molecules are practically insoluble in all solvents.
e) Covalent substances show molecular reactions. The reaction rates are usually low as it involves breaking and establishing of covalent bonds.
f) The covalent bond is rigid and directional. On account of this, there is a possibility of different arrangements of atoms in space. Covalent compounds can, thus show isomerism.
5.2 Sigma and Pi Bonding
When two hydrogen atoms form a bond, their atomic orbitals overlap to produce a greater density of electron cloud along the line connecting the two nuclei. In the simplified representations of the formation of H2O and NH3 molecules, the O—H and N—H bonds are also formed in a similar manner, the bonding electron cloud having its maximum density on the lines connecting the two nuclei. Such bonds are called sigma bonds (σ-bond).
A covalent bond established between two atoms having the maximum density of the electron cloud the line connecting the centre of the bonded atoms is called a σ-bond. A σ-bond is thus said to possess a cylindrical symmetry along the internuclear axis.
Let us now consider the combination of two nitrogen atoms. Of the three singly occupied p-orbitals in each, only one p-orbital from each nitrogen (say, the px may undergo “head –on” overlap to form a σ-bond. The other two p-orbitals on each can no longer enter into a direct overlap. But each p-orbital may undergo lateral overlap with the corresponding p-orbital on the neighbour atom. Thus we have two additional overlaps, one by the two py orbitals, and the other by the two pz orbitals. These overlaps are different from the type of overlap in a σ-bond. For each set of p-orbitals, the overlap results in accummulation of charge cloud on two sides of the internuclear axis. The bonding electron cloud does no more posses an axial symmetry as with the σ-bond; instead, it possess a plane of symmetry. For the overlap of the pz atomic orbital, the xy plane provides this plane of symmetry; for the overlap of the py atomic orbitals, the zx plane serves the purpose. Bonds arising out of such orientation of the bonding electron cloud are designated as π-bonds. The bond formed by lateral overlap of two atomic orbitals having maximum overlapping on both sides of the line connecting the centres of the atoms is called a π-bond. A π-bond possess a plane of symmetry, often referred to as the nodal plane.
📷
📷
📷
📷
6. Co-ordinate Bond
It is a special type of covalent bond in which both the shared electrons are contributed by one atom only. It may be defined as a covalent bond in which both electrons of the shared pair are contributed by one of the two atoms. Such a bond is also called as a dative bond.
A coordinate or a dative bond is established between two such atoms, one of which has complete octet and possesses a pair of valency electron while the other is short of a pair of electrons.
📷
The atom which contributes electron pair is called the donor while the atom, which accepts is called acceptor. Co-ordinate bond after formation is indistinguishable from a covalent bond
6.1 Characteristics of coordinate compounds
a) They exist as gases, liquids and solids under ordinary conditions
b) Their melting and boiling points are higher than purely covalent compounds and lower than purely ionic compounds
c) They are sparingly soluble in polar solvents like water but readily soluble in non-polar solvents
d) They are as stable as the covalent compounds. The addition compounds are however not very stable. It is also a strong bond because the paired electrons cannot be separated easily.
e) Like covalent compounds, these are also bad conductors of electricity. The solutions or fused mass do not allow the passage of electricity.
f) They undergo molecular reactions. The reactions are slow
g) The bond is rigid and directional. Thus co-ordinate compounds show isomerism.
h) The compounds containing co-ordinate bond possess high values of dielectric constants.
7. Hybridization
We can explain the formation of four covalent bonds by an atom of carbon by considering promotion of a 2s electron to a 2p orbital. Let us now consider the formation of a molecule of methane, CH4, by such an excited carbon atom. There will be three C—H bonds formed by overlap of the three 2p-orbitals of carbon with the 1s orbitals of three hydrogen atoms. The sp bonds will be mutually perpendicular to one another. The fourth C—H bond would be formed by overlap of the 2s orbital of carbon with an 1s orbital of hydrogen atom. Since the 2s orbital is spherically symmetrical, the direction of the hydrogen atom held by this bond cannot be directly ascertained. At the same time, one should expect this s—s bond to be of lower strength than the other three s—p bonds. But it is contrary to our experience. We know that the four C—H bonds in methane are all alike and they are arranged symmetrically around the central carbon atom directed along the four corners of a tetrahedron. This necessitates a concept of mixing the s-orbital of carbon with its three p-orbitals before overlap. The resulting equivalent orbitals, each having one-fourth s-character and three –fourth p-character, may now undergo overlap with four hydrogen atoms to form four equivalent C—H bonds. We may reasonably extend this concept to interpret the equivalence of the two bonds in BeF2 or the three bonds in BCl3. This procedure of prior mixing of the orbitals has been given rigorous mathematical formulation.
Hybridization is a concept of mixing different atomic orbitals of comparable energy resulting in an equal number of orbitals with mixed character. The resulting hybrid orbitals undergo better overlap and form stronger bonds than the pure orbitals in conformity with the most stable geometry for a molecule. The formation of four equivalent C—H bonds by carbon in forming methane may then be conceived of in terms of the following successive steps:
📷
📷
📷
📷
At first, a 2s electron of the carbon atom gets unpaired and promoted to a 2p orbital. The 2s and the three 2p orbitals are now hybridized to give four equivalent orbitals, each possessing one part s character to three parts p character in their wave function, directed to the corners of a regular tetrahedron. These sp3 hybrid orbitals now form four equivalent C—H bonds in the methane molecule; the bonds are distributed tetrahedrally around the carbon atom.
Shape Hybridisation
Linear sp
Trigonal planar sp2
Tetrahedral sp3
Trigonal bipyramidal sp3d
Octahedral or square bipyramidal sp3d2
Pentagonal bipyramidal sp3d3
7.1 VSEPR (Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion Theory)
When we investigate molecules containing lone electron pairs we must take into account the differences between the bonding electrons and the non bonding electrons. First, before considering hybridisation and the energies implicit in the water molecule in which the oxygen atom has a ground state electron configuration of 1s22s22p222px12py1, the unpaired electrons in the Px and Py orbitals may now be paired with electron on two hydrogen atoms to give H2O. Since Px and Py orbitals lie at right angles to one another maximum overlap is obtained with an H—O—H bond angle of 90°. The experimentally observed bond angle in water is however about 104.5°, much closer to a tetrahedral angle. Inclusion of repulsion of positive charges on the adjacent hydrogen atoms (resulting from the fact that the oxygen does not share the electrons equally with the hydrogens) might cause the bond angle to open up some what but cannot account for the large deviation from 90°.
Bond angles in molecules tend to open up was much as possible as a result of the repulsions between the electrons bonding the substituents to the central atoms. Repulsion between unshared electrons on the central atom and other unshared electrons or bonding electrons will affect the geometry. In fact, it is found that the repulsions between lone pair of electrons are greater than those between the bonding electrons. The order of the repulsive energies is
lone pair - lone pair > lone pair - bonding pair > bonding pair - bonding pair
This results from the absence of a second nucleus at the distal end of the lone pair which would tend to localize the electron cloud in the region between the nuclei. Because the lone pair does not have this second nucleus, it is attracted only by its own nucleus and tends to occupy a greater angular volume.
📷
From this point of view, the water molecule can be considered to be hybridised tetrahedrally to a first approximation. Since, water molecule has two lone pairs of electrons and the two lone pairs will occupy a greater angular volume than the bonding pairs the angle between the latter two is reduced somewhat (from 109.5° to 104.5°), allowing the angle between the lone pairs to open up slightly.
As a general rule we can state that the lone pair will always occupy a greater angular volume than bonding electrons. Furthermore if given a choice, the lone pair tends to go to that position in which it can expand most readily.
Shapes of Molecules / Ions on the Basis of VSEPR Model
Types of Molecule / Ion
No. of bond pairs
No. of lone pairs
Hybrid Orbitals
Shape of Molecule/ Ion
Examples
AX2
2
0
sp – linear
Linear
BeCl2, HgCl2
2
1
sp2 –Trigonal planar
bent (V-shape)
SnCl2, PbCl2
2
2
sp3 – Tetrahedral
bent (V-shape)
H2O, OF2
2
3
sp3d – Trigonal bipyramidal
Linear
I3–, XeF2
AX3
3
0
sp3 – Trigonal planar
Trigonal planar
BF3, BCl3
3
1
sp3 – Tetrahedral
Pyramidal
NH3, H3O+
3
2
sp3d – Trigonal bipyramidal
T-shape
ClF3, BrF3
AX4
4
0
sp3 – Tetrahedral
Tetrahedral
CH4, NH4+
4
1
sp3d – Trigonal pyramidal
Distorted tetrahedral
SF4
4
2
sp3d2 – Octahedral
Square planar
XeF4
AX5
5
0
sp3d – Trigonal bipyramidal
Trigonal bipyramidal
PCl5
5
1
sp3d2 – Octahedral
Square pyramidal
IF5
AX6
6
0
sp3d2 – octahedral
Octahedral
SF6
6
1
sp3d3 – pentagonal bipyramidal
Distorted Octahedral
XeF6
AX7
7
0
sp3d3 – pentagonal bipyramidal
Pentagonal bipyramidal
IF7
Illustration 1: The bond angle of H2O is 104° while that that of F2O is 102°. Explain
Solution: Both H2O and F2O have a lone pair of electrons. But fluorine being highly electronegative, the bond pair electrons are drawn more towards F in F2O, whereas in H2O it is drawn towards O. So in F2O the bond pairs being displaced away from the central atom, has very little tendency to open up the angle. But in H2O this opening up is more as the bond pair electrons are closer to each other. So bond ∠ of F2O is less than H2O.
📷
Rule for determination of total number of hybrid orbitals
  1. Detect the central atom along with the peripheral atoms.
  2. Count the valence electrons of the central atom and the peripheral atoms.
  3. Divide the above value by 8. Then the quotient gives the number of σ bonds and the remainder gives the non-bonded electrons.
So, number of lone pair = 📷.
  1. The number of σ bonds and the lone pair gives the total number of hybrid orbitals.

An example will make this method clear

SF4 : Central atom S
Peripheral atom F
∴ total number of valence electrons = 6+(4 ×7) = 34
Now 8) 34 (4
📷
∴ Number of hybrid orbitals = 4σ bonds + 1 lone pair
So 5 hybrid orbitals are necessary and hybridisation mode is sp3d and it is trigonal bipyramidal (TBP).
📷
Both the structures are TBP. But the lone pair is placed in different position. In (B) it is placed in equatorial position and in (A) it is in axial.
Now when a lone pair is in equatorial position the repulsion are minimised. So structure (B) is correct.
Note: Whenever there are lone pairs in TBP geometry they should be placed in equatorial position so that repulsions are minimum.
Some more examples are given below
  1. NCl3 Total valence electrons = 26
Requirement = 3 σ bonds + 1 lone pair
Hybridsation = sp3
Shape = pyramidal
📷
  1. BF3 Total valence electron = 24
Requirement = 3σ bonds
Hybridisation = sp2
Shape = trigonal planar
📷
  1. SiF4 Total valence electrons = 32
Requirement = 4σ bonds
Hybridisation = sp3
Shape = Tetrahedral
📷
  1. CCl4 Total valence electron = 32
Requirements = 4 σ bonds
Hybridisation = sp3
Shape = Tetrahedral
📷
  1. SF6 Total valence electrons = 48
Requirement = 6 σ bonds
hybridisation = sp3d2
shape = octahedral / square bipyramidal
📷
  1. BeF2 Total valence electrons : 16
Requirement : 2 σ bonds
Hybridisation : sp
Shape : Linear
F – Be – F
  1. ClF3 Total valence electrons : 28
Requirement : 3 σ bonds + 2 lone pairs
Hybridisation : sp3d
Shape : T – shaped
📷
We have already discussed that whenever there are lone pairs they should be placed in equatorial positions. Now a question that may come to your mind that though the hybridisation is sp3d, so the shape should be T.B.P. But when all the bonds are present the actual shape is BP. But when instead of bond there are lone pairs in TBP the actual geometry is determined by the bonds not by the lone pairs. Here in ClF3 the bond present (2 in axial and 1 in equatorial) gives the impression of T shape.
  1. PF5 Total valence electrons : 40
Requirement : 5 σ bonds
Hybridisation : sp3d
Shape : Trigonal bipyramidal (TBP)
📷
  1. XeF4 Total valence electrons : 36
Requirement : 4 σ bonds + 2 lone pairs
Hybridisation : sp3d
Shape : Square planar
📷
Now in (A) the lone pair is placed in the axial position whereas in (B) and (C) they are placed in equatorial positions. But the basic difference of (B) and (C) is that in (B) the lone pair are present in the anti position which minimises the repulsion which is not possible in structure (C) where the lone pairs are adjacent. So in a octahedral structure the lone pairs must be placed at the anti positions to minimise repulsion. So both structure (A) and (B) are correct.
  1. XeF2 Total valence electrons : 22
Requirements : 2σ bonds + 3 lone pairs
Hybridisation: sp3d
Shape : Linear
📷
[ lone pairs are present in equatorial position and ultimate shape is due to the bonds that are formed]
  1. PCl2Br3 Total valence electrons : 40
Requirements : 5 σ bonds
Hybridisation: sp3d
Shape : trigonal bipyramidal
📷
Now the question that may come to your mind is that why chlorine are placed in the axial positions. In this regard there is a rule called Bent’s Rule which states that “more electronegative substituents prefer hybrid orbitals having less s-character and less electronegative atoms prefer orbitals having more s-character”. So as axial bonds have less s-character and chlorine being more electronegative than bromine prefer the axial position.
  1. 📷
Total valence electrons : 32
Requirement : 4 σ bonds
Hybridisation: sp3
Shape: tetrahedral
📷
Here all the structures drawn are resonating structures with O– resonating with double bonded oxygen.
  1. SO32– Total valence electron: 26
Requirement : 3σ bonds + 1 lone pair
Hybridisation: sp3
Shape: trigonal pyramidal
As 2 negative charges, so two oxygen atoms would be as O– and the rest is attached to S by double bond. Here the negative charge on the oxide ions are declocalised over the entire oxygen atoms in SO32–
📷
  1. CO32– Total valence electrons : 24
Requirement = 3 σ bonds
Hybridisation = sp2
Shape: planar trigonal
But C has 4 valence electron of these 3 forms σ bonds ∴ the rest will form a π bond.
📷
In the structure one bond is a double bond and the other 2 are single. The position of the double bonds keep changing in the figure. Since peripheral atoms are isovalent, so contribution of the resonant structures are equal. Thus it is seen that none of the bonds are actually single or double. The actual state is
📷
  1. 📷 Total valence electrons : 32
Requirement: 4 σ bonds
Hybridisation: sp3
Shape: Tetrahedral
📷
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.18 09:10 rajusingh79 Amines

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1DAfH2MI4BibRX8PQwJlQuSy9c33nXG6M/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true

1. IIT-JEE Syllabus

Basicity of aniline and aliphatic amine, preparation from nitro compounds, reaction with nitrous acid, formation and reactions or diazonium salts, and its coupling with phenols, carbylamine reaction.
2. Introduction and Nomenclature
2.1 Structure of Amines
Amines are the alkyl (or) aryl derivatives of NH3. The general formula of amine is RNH2,R2NH,R3N, where R is an alkyl (or) aryl group.
📷 📷 📷
In amines one or more Hydrogen atoms of ammonia are replaced by Alkyl or aryl groups. Here nitrogen atom of amines is like that of NH3, it is sp3 hybridised. The three Alkyl groups (or hydrogen atoms) occupy corners of a tetrahedron, one of sp3 orbital occupying the unshared electron pair directed towards the other corner. We say shape of amine as “Trigonal Pyramidal”.
📷
2.2 Classification of Amines
Amines are classified as primary, secondary (or) tertiary according to the number of groups attached to the nitrogen atom. How? If one alkyl group has replaced one hydrogen atom of ammonia, it is primary amine. Similarly, if two hydrogens are replaced, it is secondary amine and if all the three are replaced, it is tertiary amine.
We can also replace all the 4 hydrogens in 📷 with alkyl groups to get a quaternary tetra alkyl ammonium ion.
📷
📷
2.3 Nomenclature of Amines
Nomenclature of amines is quite simple. Aliphatic amines are named by naming the alkyl group (or) groups attached to nitrogen , and following there by the word amine.
📷
More complicate amines are often named as prefixing amino - (or-N-methylamino -, N-N, diethyl amino -, etc) to the name of the parent chain.
📷
Aromatic amines - those in which nitrogen is attached to an aromatic ring - are generally named as derivatives of the simplest aromatic amine, aniline.
📷
📷
Salts of amines are generally named by replacing - amine by - ammonium (or - aniline by - anilinium), and adding the name of the anion.
📷
Exercise 1: Give name of the following structures
📷
2.4 Physical Properties
Amines are moderately polar substances; they have boiling points that are higher than those of alkanes but generally lower than alcohols of comparable molecular weight. Molecules of primary and secondary amines can form strong hydrogen bonds to each other and to water. Molecules of tertiary amines can not form hydrogen bonds to each other, but they can form hydrogen bonds to molecules of water or other hydroxylic solvents. As a result, tertiary amines generally boil at lower temperatures than primary and secondary amines of comparable molecular weight.
3. Basicity
3.1 Aliphatic Bases
As increasing strength in nitrogenous bases is related to the readiness with which they are prepared to take up protons, and therefore, to the availability of the unshared electron pair on nitrogen, we might expect to see an increase in basic strength on going: NH3 → RNH2 → R2NH→ R3N, due to the increasing inductive effect of successive alkyl groups making the nitrogen atom more negative. An actual series of amines was found to have related pKa values as follows, however:
📷
It will be seen that the introduction of an alkyl group into ammonia increases the basic strength markedly as expected. The introduction of a second alkyl group further increases the basic strength, but the net effect of introducing the second alkyl group is very much less marked than with the first. The introduction of a third alkyl group to yield a tertiary amine, however, actually decreases the basic strength in both the series quoted. This is due to the fact that the basic strength of an amine in water is determined not only by electron - availability on the nitrogen atom, but also by the extent to which the cation, formed by uptake of a proton, can undergo solvation, and so become stabilized. The more hydrogen atoms attached to nitrogen in the cation, the greater the possibilities of powerful solvation via hydrogen bonding between these and water :
📷
Thus on going along the series, NH3 → RNH2 → R2NH → R3N, the inductive effect will tend to increase the basicity, but progressively less stabilisation of the cation by hydration will occur which will tend to decrease the basicity. The net replacing effect of introducing successive alkyl groups thus becomes progressively smaller, and an actual changeover takes place on going from a secondary to a tertiary amine. If this is the real explanation, no such changeover should be observed if measurements of basicity are made in a solvent in which hydrogen - bonding cannot take place; it has, indeed, been found that in chlorobenzene the order of basicity of the butylamines is
BuNH2 < Bu2NH < Bu3N
Tetralkylammonium salts, e.g. R4N⊕ I-, are known, on treatment with moist silver oxide, AgOH, to yield basic solution comparable in strength with the mineral alkalis. This is readily understandable for the base so obtained, R4N⊕ –OH, is bound to be completely ionised as there is no possibility, as with tertiary amines, etc.,
📷
of reverting to an unionised form. The effect of introducing electron withdrawing groups, e.g. Cl, NO2, close to a basic center is to decrease the basicity, due to their electron withdrawing inductive effect. Thus the amine
📷
is found to be virtually non - basic, due to the three powerfully electron withdrawing CF3 groups. The change is also pronounced with C=O, for not only is the nitrogen atom, with its electron pair, bonded to an electron withdrawing group through an sp2 hybridised carbon atom but an electron withdrawing mesomeric effect can also operate :
📷
Thus amides are found to be only very weakly basic in water [pKa for ethanamide(acetamide) is ≈ 0.5], and if two C=0 groups are present the resultant imides, far from being basic, are often sufficiently acidic to form alkali metal salts, e.g. benzene - 1, 2 - dicarboximide:
📷
Exercise 2: Amines are stronger bases than ammonia. Why?
3.2 Aromatic Bases:
The exact reverse of the above is seen with aniline, which is a very weak base (pKa = 4.62) compared with ammonia (pKa = 9.25) or cyclohexylamine (pKa = 10.68). In aniline the nitrogen atom is again bonded to a sp2 hybridised carbon atom but, more significantly, the unshared electron pair on nitrogen can interact with the delocalised π orbitals of the nucleus:
📷
If aniline is protonated, any such interaction, with resultant stabilisation, in the anilinium cation is prohibited, as the electron pair on N is no longer available :
📷
The aniline molecule is thus stabilised with respect to the anilinium cation, and it is therefore ‘energetically unprofitable’ for aniline to take up a proton ; it thus functions as a base with the utmost reluctance (pKa = 4.62, compared with cyclohexylamine, pKa = 10.68). The base weakening effect is naturally more pronounced when further phenyl groups are introduced on the nitrogen atom ; thus diphenylamine, Ph2NH, is an extremely weak base (pKa = 0.8), while triphenylamine, Ph3N, is by ordinary standards not basic at all. Introduction of alkyl, e.g. Me, groups, on to the nitrogen atom of aniline results in small increase in pKa :
C6H5NH2 C6H5NHMe C6H5NMe2 MeC6H4NH2
4.62 4.84 5.15 o-4.38
m-4.67
p-5.10
Unlike on such introduction in aliphatic amines this small increase is progressive : suggesting that cation stabilisation through hydrogen - bonded solvation, responsible for the irregular behavior of aliphatic amines, here has less influence on the overall effect. The major determinant of basic strength in alkyl-substituted anilines remains mesomeric stabilisation of the aniline molecule with respect to the cation ; borne out by the irregular effect of introducing Me groups into the o-, m- and p-positions in aniline.
A group with a more powerful (electron - withdrawing) inductive effect, e.g. NO2 is found to have rather more influence. Electron withdrawal is intensified when the nitro group is in the o- or p-position, for the interaction of the unshared pair of the amino nitrogen with the delocalised π orbital sytsem of the benzene nucleus is then enhanced. The neutral molecule is thus stabilised even further with respect to the cation, resulting in further weakening as a base. Thus the nitro - anilines are found to have related pKa values :
📷
The extra base - weakening effect, when the substituent is in the o-position, is due in part to the short distance, over which its inductive effect is operating, and also to direct interaction, both steric and by hydrogen bonding, with the NH2 group. o-Nitroaniline is such a weak base that its salts are largely hydrolysed in aqueous solution, while 2, 4 - dinitroaniline is insoluble in aqueous acids, and 2, 4, 6 - trinitroaniline resembles an amide; it is indeed called picramide and readily undergoes hydrolysis to picric acid (2, 4, 6 - trinitrophenol).
With substituents such as OH and OMe that have unshared electron pairs, an electron - donating, i.e. base strengthening, mesomeric effect can be exerted from the o- and p-, but not from the m-position, with the result that the p-substituted aniline is a stronger base than the corresponding m-compound. The m-compound is a weaker base than aniline itself, due to the electron - withdrawing inductive effect exerted by the oxygen atom in each case. As so often, the effect of the o - substituent remains somewhat anomalous, due to the interaction with the NH2 group by both steric and polar effects. The substituted anilines are found to have related pKa values as follows:
📷
Exercise 3: Aniline is a weak base than ethylamine. Why?
4. Preparation of Amines
Now, that we have learnt something about amines, we shall now get into the methods of their preparation.
4.1 From Alkyl halides
Many organic halogen compounds are converted into amines by treatment with aqueous (or) alcoholic solution of ammonia. This reaction is generally carried out either by allowing the reactants to stand together at room temperature (or) by heating them under pressure. Displacement of halogen by NH3 yields the amine salt, from which free amine can be liberated with hydroxide ion.
CH3Cl + NH3 ⎯→ 📷 📷CH3NH2 + Cl– + H2O
The above reaction is a class of substitution reaction, which we know as nucleophilic substitution. Ammonia can act as a nucelophile and it can also act as a base. If ammonia acts a nucleophile substitution takes place,
CH3CH2CH2Br + NH3 ⎯→ CH3CH2CH2NH2 + HBr
And, if ammonia acts as a base, elimination takes place.
📷
It is very evident that primary alkyl halides under go substitution very easily than tertiary alkyl halides, which undergo elimination very easily.
Look at the sequence of reactions below,
RX 📷 📷📷📷📷📷📷 📷
The reaction is quite simple and we can convert alkyl halide into all class of amines.
Exercise 4: How can the formation of 2° and 3° amines can be avoided during the preparation of 1° amines by alkylation?
4.2 From nitrogen containing Compounds
Nitro compounds

Nitro alkanes can be reduced quantitatively to their corresponding amines.

📷
Nitro compound can be reduced in two general ways: (A) by catalytic hydrogenation using molecular hydrogen, or (B) by chemical reduction, usually by a metal and acid. This method cannot be used when the molecule also contains some other easily hydrogenated group, such as a Carbon carbon double bond.
Chemical reduction is most often carried out by adding hydrochloric acid to a mixture of the nitro compound and metal, usually granulated tin or iron.
📷

Nitriles

Alkyl and aryl cyanides can be reduced to their corresponding amines using LiAlH4

📷

Amides

Amides can directly be converted into their corresponding amines. This reaction is carried out by treating the amide with a mixture of base and bromine (KOH + Br2). This reaction is called as Hofmann Bromamide reaction. The reaction is as follows,

RCONH2 + Br2 + 4KOH ⎯⎯→ RNH2 + K2CO3 + 2KBr + 2H2O

Here we can see that the amine formed has one carbon less than that of the corresponding amide. Due to the loss of carbon atom, this reaction is also called as Hofmann degradation of amides.

The mechanism of the reaction is as follows:
Step 1
📷
(one of the hydrogen attached to nitrogen is substituted by a bromine atom)
Step 2
📷
(The N-bromamide anion thus formed as a result of proton by base is stabilized by resonance)
Step 3
📷
(Bromine leaves and we have an electron deficient nitrogen)
Step 4
📷
(There is a shift of alkyl group to the nitrogen)
Step 5
📷
(A simple hydrolysis of an imine gives us the amine)
Apart from this, amides can be dehydrated by P2O5 to their corresponding nitriles and nitriles can then be reduced.
📷 📷R—C ≡ N 📷 R—CH2NH2
By this method you are retaining the number of carbon atoms in both amide and the amine.
4.3 From carbonyl compounds
While studying carbonyl compounds we have seen that carbonyl compounds can be converted into any other functional group. How are we converting carbonyl group into amino group?
See, the following sequence,
CH3CH = O + NH3 ⎯⎯→ 📷 📷 📷
The reactions are clear and simple so that, we can get an amine from carbonyl compound just by reductive amination (amination and reduction).
Using this reductive amination we can go from 1° amine to 2° amines. How? Look at the following reaction.
CH3CH2CH = O + 📷 ⎯⎯→ CH3CH2CH=NCH2CH3
↓H2/Ni
📷
4.4 Curtius reaction
Amines can be prepared by treating acid chloride with sodium azides the isocyanate thus formed is decomposed with treatment of water and amines are obtained.
📷

4.5 Schmidt Reaction

Hydrozoic acid reacts with carboxylic acid in presence of a mineral acid to give amines.
📷

4.6 By the reduction of an Alkyl Isocyanide

RNC + 4[H] ⎯⎯→ R – NH – CH3

4.7 Preparation of Tertiary Amines

3RX + NH3 📷 R3N + 2HX
(in excess)
Exercise 5: In the presence of base, acyl derivatives of hydroxamic acids undergo the Lossen rearrangement to yield isocyanates or amines.
📷
Write mechanism for the reaction.
5. Chemical Reaction
5.1 Basic Nature
Amines turn red litmus blue and also combine with water and mineral acids to form corresponding salts.
📷
R – NH2 + HCl ⎯→ R – 📷–
R–NH2 + H2SO4 ⎯⎯→ 📷
When the amine salts are treated with strong bases like NaOH, the parent amines are regenerated.
RN+H3Cl– + OH– ⎯⎯→ RNH2 + H2O + Cl–
Amine salt Amine
(Soluble is water) (insoluble in water)
Further, due to basic character amines react with auric and platinic chlorides in presence of HCl to form double salts.
📷
Chloroplatinic acid
These double salts decompose on ignition to pure metal, therefore, the formation and decomposition of the double salts is used for determining the molecular weight of amines.
5.2 Acylation (Reaction with Acyl Chlorides or Acid Anhydrides)
Primary and secondary amines can react with acid chlorides or acid anhydrides to form substituted amides.
RNH2 + R′COCl ⎯→ R′CO NHR an N-substituted amide
R2NH + R′COCl ⎯→ R′CO.NR2 an N,N disubstituted amide
5.3 Benzoylation (Schotten Baumann Reaction)
Primary amine reacts with benzoyl chloride to give the acylated product.
📷
(Benzoyl chloride) Benzoyl alkyl amine
5.4 Carbylamine Reaction (Given Only by Primary Amines)
Primary amines when heated with chloroform and alcoholic caustic potash give isocynaides (carbylamines) having very unpleasant smell, which can be easily detected
C2H5NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH ⎯→ C2H5NC + 3KCl + 3H2O
Ethylamine Ethyl isocyanide
C6H5 NH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH ⎯→ C6H5NC + 3KCl + 3H2O
Aniline Phenyl isocyanide
5.5 Action with Aldehyde and Ketone
Both primary aliphatic and aromatic amines react with aldehydes and ketones to form schiff’s bases also called anils.
C2H5NH2 + CH3CHO ⎯→ C2H5N = CHCH3 + H2O
Ethylamine Acetaldehyde Ethylidene ethylamine (Schiff’s base)
5.6 Hofmann Mustard Oil Reaction
Primary amines when warmed with alcoholic carbon disulphide followed by heating with excess of mercuric chloride form isothiocyanates having pungent smell similar to mustard oil.
📷
C6H5NH2 + S = C = S 📷C6H5NCS + 2HCl + HgS
5.7 Reaction with Carbonyl Chloride
This reaction is given only by primary amines.
C2H5 – NH2 + COCl2 ⎯→ C2H5NCO + 2HCl
Ethylisocyanate
5.8 Reaction of Quaternary Ammonium Salts:
Hofmann Elimination
When a quaternary ammonium hydroxide is heated strongly (125° or higher) it decomposes to yield water, a tertiary amine and an alkene
This reaction is called as the Hofmann elimination. The formation of quaternary ammonium salts followed by an elimination of the kind just described and identification of the alkene and tertiary amine formed was once used in the determination of the structure of complicated amines.
📷
Illustration 1: What is the effect of heat on quaternary bases?
Solution: (C6H5)4+NOH– 📷(C2H5)3N + CH2 = CH2 + H2O
A Hoffman’s elimination occurs if B – H atoms are available and the major product is the least substituted ethylene derivative.
📷
Tetramethyl ammonium hydroxide unable to form an alkene is converted to CH3OH and (CH3)3N. It is particularly useful for cyclic amines.
📷
5.9 Reaction of Amines with Nitrous Acid
The diazonium salts of amines
What are these diazonium salts? Let us look at the name. The name suggests that, the compound has two nitrogen atoms (diazo) and the whole group has a positive charge (ium). There is also an anion to balance it (It is a salt)
So, the possible structure can be
📷
How to prepare them? The preparation is quite simple if we adhere to the experimental conditions.
These diazonium salts are prepared by treating a primary amine with NaNO2 in presence of con. HCl; the temperature being 0°C. (Here the temperature has to be taken care of and if the temperature exceeds 5°C, the reaction will not take place.)
Let us take a case of aliphatic amines,
CH3CH2CH2NH2 📷 CH3CH2CH2📷Cl–

Mechanism for Diazotization is as follows

📷
📷
📷
The diazonium salts of aliphatic amines are generally unstable and they decompose to give different products.
📷
Thus we can have a wide range of products. Let us now see some thing about aromatic amines
📷
These aryl diazonium salts undergo a variety of displacement reaction. The reactions are simple and are summarised below.
📷
Illustration 2: During diazotisation of aryl amines excess of mineral acid is used. Comment
Solution: It is b’coz high concentration of H+ ions converts aniline to anilinium ion and thus prevents coupling reaction.
📷
Reaction of secondary Amines with Nitrous acid
Secondary amines both aryl and alkyl react with nitrous acid to yield N-nitrosoamines. N-nitrosoamines usually separate from the reaction mixture as oily yellow liquid.
📷
📷
N-nitrosoamines are very powerful carcinogens (cancer causing substances)
Reaction of Tertiary amines with Nitrous acid
When a tertiary aliphatic amine is mixed with nitrous acid, an equilibrium is established among the tertiary amine, its salt, and an N-Nitrosoammonium compound.
📷
Tertiary arylamines react with nitrous acid to form C-nitroso aromatic compound. Nitrosation takes place almost exclusively at the para position if it is open and if not, at the ortho position. The reaction is another example of electrophilic aromatic substitution.
📷
5.10 Coupling Reactions of Arene Diazonium Salts
Arenediazonium ions are weak electrophiles; they react with highly reactive aromatic compounds with phenols and tertiary arylamines to yield azo compound. This electrophilic aromatic substitution is called a diazo coupling reaction occurring mainly at p-position.
📷
📷
Couplings between arenediazonium cations and phenols take place most rapidly in slightly alkaline solution. If the solution is too alkaline (pH > 10), however, the arenediazonium salt itself reacts with hydroxide ion to form a relatively unreactive diazohydroxide or diazotate ion.
📷
📷
Hydrazo compounds are also made as follows:
Ph—NO2 📷 Ph—NH—NH—Ph
Diaryl hydrazo compounds undero the benzidine rearrangement
📷
Mechanism:
📷
📷
Exercise 6.: A weakly basic solution favours coupling with phenol. Is there any other explanation?
Ring Substitution in Aromatic Amines
The –NH2, – NHR and –NR2 are benzene activating groups through resonance effect of nitrogen where the lone one pair of electron of nitrogen is shifted to the benzene ring making ortho and para, position available for electrophilic attack.
📷
The carbocation formed as intermediate are
📷
The group – NHCOCH3 is less powerful ortho and para director because of the electron-withdrawing character of oxygen makes nitrogen a poor source of electrons. This fact is made use in preparing mono substituted aniline. The –NH2 group is such a powerful activator, that substitution occurs at all available ortho and para positions of aniline. If, however, –NH2 group is converted to –NHCOCH3, the molecule becomes less powerful activator. Hence only mono substitution products are obtained. Finally – NHCOCH3 is converted back to –NH2 by hydrolyzing with acid. This technique is especially used while nitrating aniline as strong oxidizing agent destroys the highly reactive ring.
📷
Exercise 7: Explain the following
i) It is necessary to acetylate aniline first for preparing bromoaniline.
ii) While carrying out an electrophilic substitution reaction on aniline. Lewis acid is not used
5.12 Aniline -X rearrangement
📷
Such compounds are not much stable so the group X migrates mainly at p-position.
  1. Fisher-Hepp rearrangement
📷
  1. Phenylhydroxylamine - p-aminophenol rearrangement.
📷
Mechanism
📷
Nucleophilic attack by H2O at p - position.
📷

6. Separation of a Mixture of Amines

6.1 Hinsberg’s Method

Treating a mixture of 3 amines with Hinsbergs reagent (benzene sulfonyl chloride) and finally treating the product formed with NaOH can separate the 3 class of amines.
Primary amine:
RNH2 + C6H5SO2Cl ⎯→ C6H5– SO2 – NH – R + HCl
(N-alkyl benzene sulfonamides)
(Dissolves in NaOH due to acidic H-attached to Nitrogen)

Secondary amine

📷
Tertiary amine
Tertiary amines do not react with Hinsberg’s reagent.
After reacting with NaOH the aqueous layer and the second layer [Secondary and Tertiary) can be separated by ether. Aqueous layer Hydrolysed with conc. HCl gives primary amine. The ether layer is distilled and tertiary amine is distilled over. Residue hydrolysed with conc. HCl to recover secondary amine.
6.2 Hofmann’s Method
The mixture of amines is treated with diethyloxalate, which forms a solid oxamide with primary amine, a liquid oxime ester with secondary amine. The tertiary amine does not react.
📷
📷
7. Test for Amines
Test for Primary Amines (Carbyl Amine Reaction)
When a primary amine is treated with a strong base in presence in chloroform, an isocyanide is formed and this isocyanide thus formed has a very foul smell.
📷
Here attacking electrophile is the dichlorocarbene (:CCl2). The primary amine can be identified with its foul smell.
7.2 Test for Secondary Amines(Libermann Reaction)
The secondary amine is converted into nitrosoamine by treating the amine with nitrous acid. The resultant solutions warmed with phenol and concentrated H2SO4, a brown or red colour is formed at first soon it changes to blue and then to green. The colour changes to red on dilution and further changes to greenish blue on treating with alkali. Tertiary arylamines react with nitrous acid to form o-nitroso aromatic compound.
8. Solution to Exercises
Solution 1: i) 2-aminobutane ii) 2-methylpropanamine
iii) N-methyl-2-aminopropane
Solution 2: Amines have electron-repelling groups, which increase the electron density on nitrogen, while ammonia has no such group.
Solution 3: In aniline the electron pair of nitrogen atom is delocalised due to resonance and hence lesser available for protonation while ethylamine does not undergo resonance.
Solution 4: Use of excess ammonia reduces chances of reaction of 1° amine with alkyl halide to form 2° and 3° amines.
Solution 5:
📷
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.18 06:51 rajusingh79 Thermochemistry_final

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1Pt4B9arlcr4MGz-094neGvMWR2kfmGcT/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true

1. IIT–JEE Syllabus

First and second law of thermodynamics; Internal energy; enthalpy, work and heat; heats of reaction, fusion, and vaporisation, Hess’s law; pressure – volume work.
2. Thermodynamics
The study of the transformation of energy is called thermodynamics. Actually, it deals with energy in its various forms, which include thermal, chemical, electrical, and mechanical, with the restrictions on the transformation of one type of energy in to the other types and with the relation of energy changes to physical and chemical changes.
2.1 Terminology of Thermodynamics
System and Surroundings
System is part of the universe which is arbitrarily set off from the rest of the universe by definite boundaries for the purpose of experimental or theoretical studies. The remainder of the universe is then, in fact the surroundings of the system. The space separating the system from its surrounding is termed as boundary.
Types of Systems
a) Real system In experimental work, the system is called Real.
b) Ideal system In pencil and paper work, the system treated is called ideal. An ideal system is always considered to simplify the thermodynamic problems.
c) Isolated system A system is said to be isolated when it can neither exchange energy nor matter with its surroundings.
d) Closed system A system is said to be closed when it permits passage of energy but not mass, across the boundary.
e) Open system A system which can exchange both energy and matter with its surroundings.
State of System (State variables)
The quantities whose value serve to describe the system completely are called the thermodynamic properties of the system. Once the properties of the system are completely specified, one says that the state of the system is specified. Thus, the defining properties are sometimes called state variables or state properties. Examples of state properties are pressure, volume, temperature and composition. The question now arises as how many variables must be determined to define the system completely. The answer to this question can be obtained by considering the following example.
A homogeneous system consists of a single substance and hence the composition is fixed automatically. The state of a homogeneous system can, therefore, be defined by only three variables:
i) Pressure
ii) Volume and
iii) Temperature
For a homogenous system of definite mass, these three properties are related to one another by a mathematical equation PV = RT, called equation of state. With the help of this equation (PV = RT) the values of any one of these properties can be determined knowing the values of the other two properties. Therefore, state of a simple homogeneous system may be completely defined by specifying only two of the three variables (i.e.) pressure, temperature and volume. The two variables generally specified are temperature and pressure. These are termed as independent variables. The third variable, generally volume is called a dependent variable because its value depends upon the values of pressure and temperature.
When we are considering a closed system consisting of one or more components, mass is not a state variable.
In order to define the state of a homogeneous system having more than one substance, one must consider and describe each of the phases of the system. For each phase, one must specify the content (i.e.) the amount of each substance present, and two other independent variables.
In order to define a system completely, the state variables are generally (T), Pressure (P) Volume (V) and concentration (n). Besides these there are two more variables. Work (W) and heat (q), which are not state properties. These six variables play an important role in defining chemical systems completely.
Properties of a System: The observable properties of system are of two types:
a) Extensive Properties: There are some properties called Extensive properties whose values are proportional to the mass of the portion of the system or one can say that extensive properties are dependent upon size of the system.
b) Intensive Properties: There are some properties of a system called intensive properties, whose values are independent of the quantity of matter contained in the system.
Extensive Property
Intensive Property
Volume
Molar volume
No. of moles
Density
Mass
Refractive index
Free Energy
Surface tension
Entropy
Viscosity
Enthalpy
Free energy per mole, specific heat
Heat capacity
Pressure, Temperature, Boiling Point, Freezing Point
2.2 Internal Energy
It is the energy associated with a system by virtue of its molecular constitution and the motion of its molecules. The contribution of energy due to molecular constitution is known as cinternal potential energy and the contribution of energy due to the motion of molecules is called internal kinetic energy. Internal energy of a system is given by the sum of two types of energies.
Determination of ΔE: When a reaction is carried out in such a manner that the temperature and volume of the reacting system remain constant, then the internal energy change (ΔE) of the reaction is equal to the heat exchanged with the surrounding.
2.3 Enthalpy
When we deal certain process in open vessels (at constant pressure). It becomes essential to introduce in place of internal energy, a new themrodynamic function called heat enthalpy. This new function is denoted by H.
H = E + PV
The change in enthalpy of a given system is given as follows,
ΔH = H2 – H1
or ΔH = (E2 + P2V2) – (E1 + P1V1) = (E2 – E1) + (P2V2 – P1V1)
or ΔH = ΔE + ΔPΔV
If P is maintained constant
ΔH = ΔE + PΔV
or ΔH = Q
Hence the change in enthalpy of the system ΔH may be defined as the amount of heat absorbed at constant pressure.
2.4 Thermodynamic Process
i) Adiabatic Process: When a process is carried out under such conditions that no exchange of heat takes place between the system and its surrounding, the process is called adiabatic.
Ex: The sudden bursting of a cycle tube. If the process is exothermic the heat evolved will remain in the system and, therefore, the temperature of the system rises and vice versa.
ii) Isothermal Process: The process which occurs at constant temperature is called isothermal. In an isothermal change the temperature is kept constant by adding heat or taking it away from the substance. So in an isothermal process the system exchanges heat with the surroundings.
iii) Isobaric Process: If the pressure of the system remains constant during each step of the change in the state of a system, this process is said to be an isobaric process.
iv) Isochoric process: A process is defined to be isochoric if the volume of the system remains constant during the process.
2.5 First law of Thermodynamics
Energy may be converted from one form to another, but it is impossible to create or destroy it. There are various ways of expressing the first law of thermodynamics. Some of the selected statements are given below:
i) When work is transformed into heat or heat into work, the quantity of work is mechanically equivalent to the quantity of heat.
ii) Energy of an isolated system must remain constant, although it may be transformed from one form to another.
iii) Energy in one form, if it disappears will make its appearance in an exactly equivalent in another form.
iv) It is never possible to construct a perceptual motion machine that could produce work without consuming any energy.
2.5.1 Mathematical Formulation of the First Law
Suppose a system absorbs a quantity of heat q and its state change form A to B (fig – I). This heat is used up,
i) In increasing the internal energy of the system i.e, ΔE = EB – EA
📷
ii) To do some external work ‘w’ by the system on its surroundings.
From the first law, we get.
Heat observed by the system = its internal energy + work done by the system.
∴q = ΔE + w …1
2.6 Differential form of the First Law
For an infinitesimal process, equation (1) takes the form
δq = dE + δw …2
a) Change in internal energy is independent of the path taken. So in mathematical terms, an exact differential is always denoted by a notation d, e.g. dE in equation (2).
b) q and w are not state functions because changes in their magnitude is dependent on the path by which the change is accomplished. Mathematically q & w are not exact differentials and we always write the inexact – differential by δq, δw etc.
c) For a cyclic process, the change in the internal energy of the system is zero because the system is brought back to the original condition.
📷 = 0
or 📷= 📷 i.e. the total work obtained is equal to the net heat supplied.
d) In an isolated system, there is no heat exchange with the surrounding i.e. δq = 0
∴ dE + δW = 0
or δw = – dE
The sign convention: According to latest S.I. convention, w is taken as negative if work is done by the system whereas it is taken as positive if work is done on the system. When heat is given by the system to surrounding it is given as negative sign. When heat is absorbed by the system from the surrounding then positive sign is given.
2.7 Heat, Energy, Work
Heat
Like work, heat is regarded in thermodynamics as energy in transit across the boundary separating a system from its surroundings. However, quite unlike work, heat transfer results from a temperature difference between system and surroundings, and simple contact is the only requirement for heat to be transferred by conduction. Heat transfer ceases when thermal equilibrium is attained. All other forms of energy can be quantitatively converted into work but heat cannot be completely converted into work without producing permanent changes either in the system or in the surroundings. Heat is an algebraic quantity and is symbolised as Q.
The units of heat are those of work and energy. The sign convention used for a quantity of heat Q is opposite to that used for work. Heat added to a system is given by a positive sign, whereas heat extracted from a system is given negative sign.
Like work Q is not a state function, its work depends on the path which is followed for carrying out the transformation in the state of the system. Heat is, therefore a path dependent quantity.
Energy
It is the capacity for doing work. Whenever, there is a rearrangement of atoms as in chemical reactions or as in changes in the state of matter (e.g. fusion, vapourisation, sublimation, etc.) energy changes are involved. Energy manifests itself in various forms. For example, the kinetic energy of a body is due to its motion and potential energy of a body is due to its motion and potential energy of a body is due to its position in space. These two forms of energy are little importance for chemical system. The energy which is of great significance from chemical point of view is the internal energy of substance.
The energies acquired by a system in a force field like electric, magnetic, gravitational surface etc. are termed as external energies and are usually not considered as part of the internal energy of the system.
Energy is an extensive property i.e., its magnitude depends upon the quantity of material in the system.
In SI system, the unit of energy is expressed in J or kJ.
Work
In thermodynamics, work is generally defined as the force multiplied by the distance. If the displacement of body under the force F is ds, the work done will be,
δW = Fds
The symbol δW stands for the small amount of work and also the inexactness of the function. Several things should be noted in the definition of work.
a) Work appears only at the boundary of the system
b) Work appears only during a change in state
c) Work is manifested by an effect in the surroundings
d) Work is an algebraic quantity. It is positive if the work has been produced in the surroundings. It is negative if the work has been destroyed in the surroundings.
e) In SI system of units, work is expressed in Joule or Kilojoule 1J = 1 Nm.
Types of work
a) Gravitational Work: The work is said to be done when a body is raised through a certain height against the gravitational field. Suppose a body of mass m is raised through a height h against the gravitational field. Then the magnitude of the gravitational work is mgh.
b) Electrical work: This type of work is said to be done when a charged body moves from one potential region into another. If the charge is expressed in coulombs and the potential difference in volts, then the electrical work is given by QV.
c) Mechanical Work: work associated with change in volume of a system against an external pressure is referred to as the mechanical or pressure-volume work.
Now we shall discuss mechanical work in detail.
Work has been done by the system if a weight has been raised in the surrounding, work has been done on the system if a weight has been lowered.
2.8 Work in reversible process
a) Expansion of a gas
📷
  1. Suppose n moles of a perfect gas is enclosed in a cylinder by a frictionless piston. The whole cylinder is kept in large constant temperature bath at T°K. Any change that would occur to the system would be isothermal.Suppose area of cross section of cylinder = a sq. cm
Pressure of the piston = P
Distance through which gas expands = dll cm
Then force (F) = P × a
Work done by the gas = F × dl ⇒ P × a × dl
 a × dl = dV
∴ w = P . dV
Let the gas expand from initial volume V1 to the final volume V2, then the total work done(w) = 📷
2.9 Work done in isothermal reversible expansion of an ideal gas
The small amount of work done, δw when the gas expands through, a small volume dV, against the external pressure, P is given by
δw = – PdV
∴Total work done when the gas expands from initial volume V1 to final volume V2 will be W = 📷
Ideal gas equation PV = nRT
i.e, P = 📷
Hence W = 📷 [ T = constant]
∴ W = – nRT ln 📷
= – 2.303 nRT log 📷
= –2.303 nRT log 📷
The –ve sign indicates work of expansion.
Note: 1 Work in the reversible process is the maximum and is greater than that in the irreversible process.
Illustration 1: 70 gms of nitrogen gas was initially at 50 atm and 25°C
a) It was allowed to expand isothermally against a constant external pressure of one atmosphere. Calculate, ΔU, ΔQ and ΔW assuming the gas to behave ideally.
b) Also find out the maximum work that would be obtained if the gas expanded reversibly and isothermally to one atmosphere.
Solution: a) Amount of gas n = 📷 = 2.5 moles
Initial pressure; P1 = 50 atm
Final pressure = 1 atm
Since the gas is ideal, ΔU = 0, as the temperature is constant.
The work obtained Δw = P2 (V2 – V1)
⇒ P2 📷= 📷
= 📷
= 1.5 Kcal
b) The maximum work for its isothermal reversible expansion.
ΔW = nRT ln📷
= 2.303 × 2.5 × 2 × 298 log 📷 = 5.8 Kcal
Exercise 1: Calculate the maximum work done by the system when 2 mole of ideal gas expands from 2.4 dm3 to 5.6 dm3 at 10°C reversibly. Also calculate the heat change. Repeat the above calculations at 110°C.
2.10 Adiabatic Process (Reversible)
An adiabatic change by definition, is one which does not allow any transfer of heat, i.e., q = 0, it follows from the 1st law,
ΔU = – W
dU = – dW
Let only mechanical work of expansion or contraction is involved, dW = PdV. Moreover, dU= CVdT
∴CVdT = –PdV
For a system of 1 mole of an ideal gas, expanding adiabatically and reversibly from temp T1 to T2 and volume V1 to V2, we have
CVdT = 📷
or 📷.📷
or 📷
∴ ln📷 = 📷
or 📷📷
or 📷 = K
 Cp – Cv = R
∴ ln📷
or 📷
or (γ-1) 📷 ( γ = Cp/Cv)
📷
or 📷
or 📷
Substituting T by 📷
📷 = constant
PVγ = R × constant = constant
Similarly 📷 = constant
TγP1-γ = constant
Adiabatic work:
W = - CvT = –Cv(T2–T1) = Cv (T1 – T2)
Where T1,T2 are initial and final temperatures.
For 1 mole of gas T = PV/R
Hence adiabatic work
W = Cv 📷 =📷(P1V1 – P1V2)
or w = 📷
Slope of PV curve in adiabatic & isothermal expansion.
For isothermal expansion of the gas, PV = K
The slope of the PV curve will be obtained from 📷
For the adiabatic expansion of the gas PVγ = K′
∴ P = K′/Vγ ; 📷= 📷
📷
In the both the changes the slope is negative, since γ, is greater than 1, the slope in the adiabatic P – V curve will be large than that in the isothermal one.
Illustration 2: A sample of a gas initially at 27°C is compressed from 40 litres to 4 litres adiabatically and reversibly. Calculate the final temperature (Cv = 5 cal/mole)
Solution: Assuming ideal behaviour
Cp = Cv + 2 = 7 cal / mole
∴ γ = Cp/Cv = 7/5
If T be the final temperature thus
📷
T = 300 × (10)7/5-1
= 753.6°K
2.11 Heat Capacity
Need for the function: Heat content or enthalpy function is particularly used to measure heat changes accompanying a process at constant volume. It therefore becomes necessary to introduce a new function called heat capacity which relates the heat changes to the temperature changes at constant pressure or at constant volume.
The heat capacity of a system is defined as the quantity of heat required for increasing the temperature of one mole of a system through 1°C. Heat capacity may be given as follows.
C = 📷 …(1)
i) Heat capacity at constant volume
By first law of thermodynamics,
We have
δq = dE + PdV …(2)
on substituting the value of δq in equation (2) We get
C = 📷 …(3)
If the volume is kept constant than
CV = 📷 …(4)
Hence the heat capacity at constant volume of a given system may be defined as the rate of change of internal energy with temperature.
ii) Heat capacity at constant pressure
If the pressure is held constant, equation (3), becomes as follows.
Cp = 📷
Or Cp = 📷
Hence the heat capacity at constant pressure of a system may be defined as the rate of change of enthalpy with temperature.
2.12 Limitations of first Law of thermodyanamics
  1. This law fails to tell us under what conditions and to what extent it is possible to bring about conversion of one form of energy into the other.
  2. The first law fails to contradict the existence of a 100% efficient heat engine or a refrigerator.
2.13 Second law of thermodynamics
It has been stated is several forms as follows.
i) All the spontaneous process are irreversible in nature.
ii) It is impossible to obtain work by cooling a body below it lowest temperature
iii) It is impossible to take heat from a hot reservoir and convert it completely into work by a cyclic process without transferring a part of it to a cold reservoirs.
iv) Heat cannot of itself pass from a colder body to hotter body without the intervention of external work.
v) It is impossible to construct a machine functioning in cycle which can convert heat completely into equivalent amount of work without producing change elsewhere.
vi) The entropy of universe is always increasing in the course of every spontaneous process.
vii) Spontaneous or natural process are always accompanied with an increase in entropy.
2.14 Efficiency of a Heat Engine
The relationship between W, the net work done by the system and q2, the quantity of heat absorbed at the higher temperature T2, in case of the cyclic process (i.e. the carnot cycle), can be obtained from the following two equations.
W = R (T2 – T1) 📷; q2 = RT2📷; W = q2📷
The fraction of the heat absorbed by an engine which it can convert into work gives the efficiency(η).
η = 📷
The net heat absorbed by the system, q is equal to q2 – q1 and according to the first law of thermodynamics, this must be equivalent to the net work done by the system. Thus,
W = q2 – q1
or 📷 = 📷 = η. Since 📷 is invariably less than l, the efficiency of a heat engine is always less than 1.
3. Thermochemistry
Thermochemistry deals with the transfer of heat between a chemical system and its surroundings when a change of phase or a chemical reaction takes place within the system. In general, a chemical reaction can be either exothermic or endothermic. In the former case, heat is released to the surroundings when the reactants at a given temperature and pressure are converted to the products at the same temperature and pressure, and in the latter heat is absorbed by the system, from the surroundings.
Sign conventions: If the heat is absorbed by the system (q>0) then the reaction is said to be endothermic and ΔE or ΔH value is given a positive sign. If the heat is evolved (q<0) the reaction is said to be exothermic, and ΔE or ΔH values is given negative sign.

Standard States: In the computation of heat of reactions it is a convention to assume that the heat of formation of elements in their standard states is zero. The standard state is taken as 1 atm pressure and at a constant temperature. Standard states for various forms of matter are summarized below:

State
Standard State
Gas
Ideal gas at 1 atm and the given temperature
Liquid
Pure liquid at 1 atm and the given temperature
Solid
Stable crsytalline form at 1 atm and given T (e.g. graphite form of carbon, rhombic form of sulphur)
At standard state the heat of reactions are denoted by 📷or 📷 at given temperature.
4. Various Types of Enthalpies of Reactions
i) Enthalpy of formation : Enthalpy change when one mole of a given compound is formed from its elements.
H2(g) + 1/2O2(g) ⎯→ 2H2O(l), ΔH = –890.36 kJ / mol
ii) Enthalpy of combustion: Enthalpy change when one mole of a substance is burnt in oxygen
CH4 + 2O2(g) ⎯→ CO2 + 2H2O(l), ΔH = –890.36 kJ / mol
iii) Enthalpy of Neutralization: Enthalpy change when one equivalent of an acid is neutralized by a base in dilute solution. This is constant and its values is –13.7 kcal for neutralization of any strong acid by a base since in dilute solutions they completely dissociate into ions.
H+ (aq) + OH– (aq) ⎯→ H2O(l) ΔH = –13.7 kcal
For weak acids and bases, heat of neutralization is different because they are not dissociated completely and during dissociation some heat is absorbed. So total heat evolved during neutralization will be less.
e.g. HCN + NaOH ⎯→ NaCN + H2O ΔH = –2.9 kcal
Heat of ionization in this reaction is equal to (–2.9 + 13.7) kcal = 10.8 kcal
iv) Enthalpy of hydration: Enthalpy of hydration of a given anhydrous or partially hydrated salt is the enthalpy change when it combines with the requisite no.of mole of water to form a specific hydrate. For example, the hydration of anhydrous copper sulphate is represented by
CuSO4(s) + 5H2O (l) ⎯→ CuSO45H2O, ΔH° = –18.69 kcal
vi) Enthalpy of Transition: Enthalpy change when one mole of a substance is transformed from one allotropic form to another allotropic form.
C (graphite) ⎯→ C(diamond), ΔH° = 1.9 kJ/mol
5. Laws of Thermochemistry
For some reactions it is not convenient to measure the heat change in the laboratory. So conventional procedure based on the principle of conservation of energy has been suggested which can be stated as follows:
  1. The heat of formation of any compound is equal in magnitude and of opposite sign to the heat of dissociation of that compound at the given temperature and pressure.
For example, enthalpy of formation of liquid water from its elements hydrogen and oxygen is –285.830kJ mol–1 and the enthalpy of dissociation is 285.830 kJ mol–1. Thus the process can be represented by
H2(g) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ H2O (l), ΔH(298 K) = –285.830 kJ
H2O(l) ⎯→ H2(g) +½ O2(g), ΔH (298 K) = + 285.830 kJ
  1. The total enthalpy change of a reaction is the same, regardless of whether the reaction is completed in one step or in several steps. (Hess’s Law of constant heat summation.) It has been experimentally verified and is also a consequence of the law of conservation of energy. It is of particular utility in calculation of the heats of reactions which are difficult for practical calorimetric measurements.
For example : Carbon be converted into CO2 in 1 step
C(s) + O2(g) ⎯→ CO2(g) ΔH = –94 kcal
Or in two steps
C(s) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ CO(g) ΔH1 = –26.,4 kcal
CO)(g) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ CO2(g) ΔH2 = –67.6 kcal
According to Hess’s law: ΔH = ΔH1 + ΔH2 = –26.4 –67.6=−94 Kcal
📷
6. Lattice Energy of an Ionic Crystal (Born–Haber Cycle)
📷
The change in enthalpy that occurs when 1 mole of a solid crystalline substance is formed from its gaseous ions.
Step 1: Conversion of metal to gaseous atoms
M(s) ⎯→ M(g) , ΔH1 = sublimation
Step 2: Dissociation of X2 molecules to X atoms
X2(g) ⎯→ 2X (g), ΔH2 = Dissociation energy
Step 3: Conversion of gaseous metal atom to metal ions by losing electron
M(g) ⎯→ M+ (g) + e– , ΔH3 = Ionization energy
Step 4: X(g) atoms gain an electron to form M– ions
X(g) + e– ⎯→ X–(g) , ΔH4 = Electron affinity
Step 5: M+ (g) and X– (g) get together and form the crystal lattice
M+ (g) + X– (g) ⎯→ MX(s) ΔH5 = lattice energy
Applying Hess’s law we get
ΔH1 + 1/2 ΔH2 + ΔH3 + ΔH4 + ΔH5 = ΔHf (MX)
On putting the various known values, we can calculate the lattice energy.
7. Bond Energies
Whenever a chemical bond is formed energy is released. Conversely, energy is required to rupture a chemical bond. The energy required to break a particular bond in a gaseous molecule is referred to as bond-dissociation energy.

H–OH(g) ⎯→2H(g) + ½O(g) ΔH = 498 kJ

O–H(g) ⎯→📷H2(g) + ½O2 (g) ΔH = 430 kJ

In such case, bond energy is expressed as the average of the bond dissociation energies of various similar bonds ΔHO–H = (498 + 430)/2 = 464 kJ mol–1
Hence, bond energy may be defined as the average amount of energy required to break one mole bonds of that type in gaseous molecules.
Thus, the values given in bond energy data can help us in:
i) Calculating standard enthalpy of reactions
  1. Calculation of bond energies of some specific bond in the molecule
8. Variation Of Heat Of Reaction With Temperature
The heat of reaction depends on the temperature. The relation between the two is known as Kirchoff’s equation.
i) 📷 = ΔCP
ii) 📷 = ΔCV
ΔCP = molar heat capacity of products – molar heat capacity of reactants (at constant pressure)
ΔCV = molar heat capacity of products – molar heat capacity of reactants (at constant volume)
9. Bomb Calorimeter
The calorimeter used for determining enthalpies of combustion known as the bomb calorimeter is shown as Figure.
📷
This apparatus was devised by Berthelot (1881) to measure the heat of combustion of organic compounds. A modified form of the apparatus shown in Figure consists of a sealed combustion chamber, called a bomb, containing a weighed quantity of the substance in a dish along with oxygen under about 20 atm pressure. The bomb is lowered in water contained in an insulated copper vessel. This vessel is provided with a stirrer and a thermometer reading up to 1/100th of a degree. It is also surrounded by an outer jacket to ensured complete insulation from the atmosphere. The temperature of water is noted before the substances is ignited by an electric current. After combustion, the rise in temperature of the system is noted on the thermometer and heat of combustion can be calculated from the heat gained by water and the calorimeter.
By knowing the heat capacity of calorimeter and also the rise in temperature, the heat of combustion can be calculated by using the expression
Heat exchange = Z × ΔT
Z–Heat capacity of calorimeter system
ΔT– rise in temp.
Heat changes at constant volumes are expressed in ΔE and Heat changes at constant pressure are expressed in ΔH.
Also, ΔH = ΔE + ΔnRT
Δn = gaseous product moles – gaseous reactant moles.
Exercise 2: When 1-pentyne (A) is treated with 4N alcoholic KOH at 175°C, it is converted slowly into an equilibrium mixture of 1.3% 1-pentyne (A), 95.2% 2-pentyne (B) and 3.5% of 1,2-pentadiene (C). The equilibrium was maintained at 175°C. Calculate ΔG0 for the following equilibria.
B ==A ΔG10 = ?
B ==C ΔG20 = ?
From the calculated value of ΔG10 and ΔG20 indicate the order of stability of A, B and C. Write a reaction mechanism showing all intermediates leading to A, B and C [10]
Exercise 3: Two moles of a perfect gas undergo the following processes:
a) a reversible isobaric expansion from (1.0 atm, 20.0L) to (1.0 atm, 40.0 L);
b) a reversible isochoric change of state from (1.0 atm, 40.0 L) to (0.5 atm, 40.0 L);
c) a reversible isothermal compression from (0.5 atm, 40.0 L) to (1.0 atm, 20.0 L).
i) Sketch with labels each of the processes on the same P-V diagram.
ii) Calculate the total work (w) and the total heat change (q) involved in the above processes.
iii) What will be the values of ΔU, ΔH and ΔS for the overall process?
10. Solution to Exercises
Exercise 1: W = nRT ln📷; W = (2) (8.314) (283) ln 📷= 3987 J
According to first law of Thermodynamics; Q = ΔE + W
Since ΔE = 0 at constant temperature; Q = W; Q = 3987 J
When T2 = 273 + 100 = 383 K
W = (2) (8.314) (383) ln 📷= 5396 J; Similarly Q = 5396 J
Exercise 2: B = A, ΔG10 = {(− 2.303× 8.314×448)log(1.3/95.2)}=15.998 kJ
B = C, ΔG20 = {(− 2.303× 8.314×448)log(3.5/95.2)}=12.305 kJ .
Stability order B > C > A
Exercise 3:
📷

ii) Total work (W) = W1 + W2 + W3
= – PΔV + 0 + 2.303 nRT log📷
= –1 × 20 + 2.303 × 2 × 0.082 × 121.95 log2
= – 20 +13.86 = –6.13 L atm
Since the system has returned to its initial state i.e. the process is cyclic so ΔU = 0
ΔU = q + W = 0, so; q = – W = 6.13 L. atm = 620.7 J
In a cyclic process heat absorbed is completely converted into work
iii) Entropy is a state function and since the system has returned to its initial state so ΔS = 0. Similarly ΔH = 0 and ΔU = 0 for the same reason i.e. U and H are also state functions having definite values in a given state of a system.
11. Solved Problems
11.1 Subjective
Problem 1: A Carnot’s engine works between 120°C and 30°C. Calculate the efficiency. If the power produced by the engine is 400 watts, calculate the heat absorbed from the source and rejected to the sink every second.
Solution: Efficiency, η = 📷
Here T1 = 273 + 120 = 393 K
T2 = 273 + 30 = 303 K
∴ η = 📷 = 0.229 = 22.9%
Again η = 📷
Thus, heat absorbed from the source,
Q1 = 📷 = 1747 watts.
Also 📷
∴ The heat rejected to the sink
Q2 = Q1 × 📷
= 1747 × 📷 = 1347 watts
Problem 2: The enthalpy of neutralisation of ammonium hydroxide by hydrochloric acid is 51.46 kJ mol–1. Calculate the enthalpy of ionisation of ammonium hydroxide.
Solution: i) NH4OH (aq) + H+ (aq) ⎯→ 📷(aq) +_ H2O (l); ΔH° = –51.46 kJ mol–1
ii) H+(aq) + OH– (aq) ⎯→ H2O(l); ΔH° = – 57.32 kJ mol–1
iiii) NH4OH (aq) ⎯→ 📷(aq) + OH– (aq); ΔH0 = ΔH0 ionisation
On adding (ii) and (iii), we get
NH4OH (aq) + H+ (aq) 📷 ⎯→ 📷(aq) + H2O(l)
or Δ H0 = –57.32 + ΔH°ionisation
From equation (i), we have
ΔH0 = –51.46 kJ mol–1
Hence (–57.32 + ΔH0ionisation) kJ mol–1 = –51.46 kJ mol–1
or ΔH0Ionisation = + 5.86 kJ mol–1.
Problem 3: If EC – C is 344 kJ mole–1 and EC – H is 415 kJ mole–1, calculate the heat of formation of propane. The heats of atomization of carbon and hydrogen are 716 kJ mole–1 and 433 kJ mole–1 respectively.
Solution: The heat of formation is the sum of the heats of atomization and bond energies. For propane, the heats of atomization are
3C(s) = 3C(g0; ΔH = 3 × 716 = 2148 kJ
4H2,(g) = 8H(g); ΔH = 4× 433 = 1732 kJ
The bond energies are
2EC – C = 2 × –344 = –688 kJ
8EC – H = 8 × –415 = –3320 kJ
Adding,
3C + 4H2 = C3H8; ΔHf = 2148 + 1732 – 688 – 3320 = –128 kJ mole–1
Problem 4: Calculate the amount of heat evolved during the complete combustion of 100 ml of liquid benzene from the following data:
i) 18 gm graphite on complete combustion evolves 590 KJ of heat
iii) 15889 kJ of heat is required to dissociate all the molecules of 1 litre water into H2 & O2.
iii) The heat of formation of liquid benzene is +50 kJ/mole.
iv) Density of C6H6(l) = 0.87 gm ml–1
Solution: C(s) + O2(g) ⎯→ CO2(g)
📷(CO2) = 📷 kJ /mol = 393.33 kJ/mol
H2(g) + ½ O2(g) 📷 ⎯→ H2O (l)
📷 (H2O (l)) = - 📷 = –286 kJ mol–1
C6H6(l) + 7.5 O2(g) ⎯→ 6CO2(g) + 3H2O(l)
📷= 6 × (–393.33) + 3(-286) – 50 = –2359.98 – 858 – 50 ≅ –3268 kJ/mol.
Heat evolved = 3268 × 📷 kJ = 3645 kJ.
Problem 5: Calculate the enthalpy of vaporization for water from the following
H2(g) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ H2O (g) ΔH = – 57.0 kcal
H2(g) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ H2O(l) ΔH = – 68.3 kcal
Also calculate the heat required to change 1 gm H2O (l) to H2O (g)
Solution: H2(g) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ H2O (g) ΔH = –57.0 kcal ----------------- (1)
H2(g) + 1/2 O2(g) ⎯→ H2O (l) ΔH = – 68.3 kcal------------------(2)
Subtracting (2) from (1)
H2O (l) ⎯→ H2O (g) ; ΔH = 11.3 kcal
∴ Enthalpy of vaporization for H2O = 11.3 kcal
Also 18 g H2O requires enthalpy of vaporization = 11. 3 kcal
1 g H2O requires 📷 kcal = 0.628 kcal
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


2023.01.18 06:42 rajusingh79 Electro Chemistry_final

https://docs.google.com/document/d/1vDvonPFXYzU-PNnD0BZqqRs5rotzVgWp/edit?usp=sharing&ouid=109474854956598892099&rtpof=true&sd=true
1. IIT–JEE Syllabus
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis; Electrochemical cells and cell reactions; Standard electrode potential and electrochemical series, emf of a galvanic cell; Nernst equation and significance of ΔG and ΔG°.
2. Introduction
Electrochemistry deals with the inter-conversion of electrical energy and chemical energy. A flow of electricity through a substance may produce a chemical change (redox reaction) and also a chemical change (redox reaction) may cause a flow of electricity through some external circuit. The former involves the study of electrolysis and conductance while the latter, the measurement of electromotive force.
3. Electrolysis
The phenomenon of electrolysis involves the breaking of electrolytes when electric current is passed through it. The apparatus used to carryout electrolysis is known as electrolytic cell. The main characteristics of electrolytic cell are as follows:

Cathode
Anode
a)
Sign
(–ve); as it is linked to the negative end of the external battery
(+ve); as it is linked to the positive end of the battery
b)
Direction of electron movement
Into the cell
Out of the cell
c)
Ions attacked within the cell
Cations
Anions
d)
Half cell reaction
Reduction
Oxidation
The electrolysis of molten salts produces substances which are characteristic of the salt. When aqueous salt solutions are electrolysed, water may be also be involved in the electrode reaction rather than the ion derived from the solute only
The reaction involved during electrolysis of water are follows:
2H2O ⎯→ O2 + 4H+ + 4e (oxidation)
2H2O + 2e ⎯→ H2 + 2OH– (reduction)
The following figure shows the layout of an electrolytic cell used for commercial production of Mg metal from molten MgCl2.
📷
As in a galvanic cell, oxidation occurs at the anode and reduction occurs at the cathode, electrons travel through the external wire from anode to cathode, cations move through the electrolyte toward the cathode, and anions move toward the anode. Unlike the process in a galvanic cell, source drives electrons through the wire in a pre-determined direction, forcing oxidation to occur at one electrode and reduction at the other:
Anode reaction : 2Cl–() ⎯⎯→ Cl2(g) + 2e–
Cathode reaction: Mg2+ () + 2e– ⎯⎯→ Mg()
A rechargeable battery functions as galvanic cell when it is doing work and as an electrolytic cell when it is being recharged
Preferential Discharge Theory: If more than one type of ion is attracted towards a particular electrode, then the ion discharged is the one which requires the least energy.
The decreasing order of the discharge potential or the increasing order of deposition for some of the cations and anions is as follows.
Cations: K+, Na+, Ca2+, Mg2+, Al3+, Zn2+, H+, Cu2+, Ag+, Au3+
Anions: SO42–, NO3–, OH–, Cl–, Br–, I–
4. Faraday’s Laws of Electrolysis
The calculations to find out the amount of product formed in electrolysis are based on the following Faraday’s Laws:
First law: The number of moles of product formed by an electric current is stoichiometrically equivalent to the number of moles of electrons supplied.
Once we know the number of moles of product formed, we can calculate the masses of the products, or if they are gases, their volumes.
For examples, Cu is refined electrolytically by using an impure form of copper metal (blister copper) as the anode in an electrolytic cell. The current supply causes the oxidation of blister copper to copper (II) ions.
Cu (blister) ⎯⎯→ Cu2+ + 2e–
These ions are then reduced at the cathode:
Cu2+ (aq) + 2e– ⎯⎯→ Cu(s)
From the stoichiometry of these chemical equations, we know that 2 mole electrons give one mol of Cu. Therefore, if 4.0 mole electrons is supplied, then the amount of copper produced is 2.0 mol. This law can also be stated in other way:
“The mass of a substance deposited or liberated at any electrode is directly proportional to the amount of charge passed” i.e., w α q (where w is the mass of the substance deposited or liberated and q is the amount of charge passed). This proportionality can be made into an equality by, w = zq where z is the proportionality constant called the electrochemical equivalent. It is the mass of the substance in grams deposited or liberated by passing one coulomb of charge.
The quantity of electricity passed through the electrolytic cell is normally measured as the current and the time for which the current flows. The charge passed through an electrolytic cell is the product of the current and the time for which it is supplied. Electric current is measured in the SI unit (ampere), A, the rate of flow of charge in coulombs per second (1A = 1CS–1). Therefore, the charge supplied is,
Charge supplied = Current (A) x time(s)
Next, we use the fact that faraday’s constant F, is the magnitude of the charge per mole of electrons.
Charge = moles × F
So. Moles of e– = 📷 = 📷
So, by measuring the current and the time for which it flows, we can determine the moles of electrons supplied.
The amount of product in an electrolytic reaction is calculated from the stoichiometry of the half - reaction and the current and time for which the current flows.
Second law: This law states that “the mass of a substance deposited or liberated at any electrode on passing a certain amount of charge is directly proportional to its equivalent weight of the substance”.
That is w α E where w is the mass of the substance in grams while E is its chemical equivalent i.e. weight in gms per equivalent. This law can be explained as follows.
Consider three reactions, such as:
Na+ + e– → Na
Cu2+ + 2e– → Cu
Al3+ + 3e– → Al
Assume that these three reactions are occurring in three separate electrolytic cells connected in series. When x moles of electrons are passed through the three cells, the mass of Na, Cu and Al deposited are 23x gms, 31.75x gms and 9x gms respectively. We can see that 23, 31.75 and 9 gm/eq are the chemical equivalent weights of the three elements.
∴ w = moles of electrons × E
The charge possessed by 1 mole of electrons = 1.6 × 10–19 × 6.023 x 1023 ≈ 96500 C
This charge is called as 1 Faraday.
If we pass one Faraday of charge, it means that we are passing one mole of electron and by passing 1 Faraday of charge 1gm equivalent weight of the substance will be deposited or liberated.

∴ 📷 ⇒ W = 📷 ⇒ W = 📷

📷 (n = n-factor)
By combining the first and second law, we get

📷

Note: It should be made clear that the cathode is the electrode in which reduction reaction(s) occurs while the anode is the electrode where the oxidation reaction(s) occurs. Do not relate the sign (positive or negative) of the electrode with the nature of the electrode.
Illustration 1: Copper sulphate solution (250 ml) was electrolyzed using a platinum anode and copper cathode. A constant current of 2 mA was passed for 16 minute. It was found that after electrolysis, the absorbance of the solution was reduced to 50% of its original value. Calculate the concentration of copper sulphate ion in the solution to begin with.
Solution: Q = 📷F = 1.989 × 10–5F
∴ Equivalent of Cu2+ lost during electrolysis = 1.989 × 10–5
or Mole of Cu2+ lost during electrolysis = 📷
This value is 50% of the initial concentration of solution
∴ Initial mole of CuSO4 = 📷 = 1.989 × 10–5
∴ Initial molarity of [CuSO4] = 📷
∴ [CuSO4]initial= 7.95 × 10–5 M
Illustration 2: A current of 3 ampere was passed for 2 hours through a solution of CuSO4. 3 gm of Cu2+ ions were discharged at cathode calculate the current efficiency.
Solution: WCu = 📷
⇒ 3 = 📷 ⇒ i = 1.266 ampere.
∴ Current efficiency = 📷 = 📷 = 42.2%
Illustration 3: Chromium metal can be plated out from an acidic solution containing CrO3 according to following equation
CrO3(aq) + 6H+ ⎯→ Cr(s) + 3H2O
Calculate:
i) How many grams of chromium will be plated out by 24000 coulomb?
ii) How long will it take to plat out 1.5 gm of Cr by using 12.5 ampere current.
Solution: Equivalent weight of Cr = 📷
i) 96500 C deposit = 📷gm Cr
∴ 24000 coulomb ≡ 📷× 📷= 2.1554 gm
ii) Wcr= 📷⇒ 1.5 = 📷
∴ t = 📷 sec
Exercise-1: For how long a current of three amperes has to be passed through a solution of AgNO3 to coat a metal surface of 80cm2 area with 0.005mm thick layers? Density of silver is 10.5g/cc and atomic weight of Ag is 108 gm/mol.
Exercise 2: H2O2 can be prepared by successive reactions.
2NH4HSO4 → H2 + (NH4)2S2O8
(NH4)2S2O8 + 2H2O → 2NH4HSO4 + H2O2
The first is an electrolytic reaction and the second a steam distillation. What current needs to be passed in the first reaction to produce enough intermediate to yield 100 gm of pure H2O2 per hour? Assume 50% current efficiency.
5. Electrode Potential
In an electrochemical cell, each electrode is placed in contact with the electrolytic solution. Thus at the surface of separation of the electrode and the electrolyte solution, there exists an electrostatic potential which is known as electrode potential. Let us see in detail how the electrostatic potential arises?
All metallic element and hydrogen have a tendency to pass into solution in the form of positive ions. This property of the metal is known as the 'solution pressure', 'electrolytic solution pressure' or 'solution tension' of the metal and is constant at a given temperature. Due to the migration of the positive ions, the metallic electrode is left negatively charged and thus electrical double layer is set up at the electrode.
If a metallic electrode is dipped in a solution of one of its salts, the position becomes slightly different. In such a case, the tendency of the ions is to be deposited on the electrode. This backward reaction is attributed to be osmotic pressure of ions in solution. Thus, the standard potential of a metal is equal to the difference between its solution pressure and the osmotic pressure of its ions. Hence there arises three possibilities:
a) If the solution pressure is greater than the osmotic pressure, the tendency of the metal to lose ions predominates. A potential difference is therefore set up with the metal left with negative charge with respect to the solution. The net result will be that the positive ions will enter the liquid and leave the metal negatively charged with respect to solution. The formation of double layer prevents the further expulsion of ions from the metal, and thus there is rapidly established a state of equilibrium with a definite potential difference, termed as the electrode potential.
📷
b) If the solution pressure is less than the osmotic pressure of the metal in solution, it means that the ions have greater tendency to leave the solution and get deposited on the metal. So potential difference is established due to the charge separations as shown in the following diagram.
📷
c) When the solution pressure becomes equal to that of osmotic pressure, no relative charge is developed and hence no potential difference exists. Such a system is sometimes termed as null electrode as shown below:
📷
Thus, the tendency of an electrode to lose or gain electrons when it is in contact with its own ions in solution is called electrode potential. Since the tendency to lose electrons means also the tendency to get oxidised, this tendency is called oxidation potential. Similarly, the tendency to gain electrons means the tendency to get reduced. Hence this tendency is called reduction potential. Needless to mention that reduction potential is the reverse of oxidation potential.
So far, we have seen how the potential was developed. Now we are going to see how to determine the electrode potential. It is not possible to determine experimentally the potential of a single electrode. It is only the difference of potentials between two electrodes that we can measure by combining them to give a complete cell.
By arbitrarily fixing potential of one electrode as zero (just as the boiling point of water at atmospheric pressure has been arbitrarily fixed as 100 on temperature scale), it is possible to assign numerical values to potentials of the various other electrodes. Accordingly, the potential of a reversible hydrogen electrode in which the gas at one atmospheric pressure is bubbled through a solution of hydrogen ion of unit activity (or to be approximate, unit concentration has been fixed as zero. This electrode is known as Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE) and is represented as, Pt, H2(1atm), H+(C = 1)
All other single electrode potentials are referred to as potentials on the hydrogen scale.
If it is required to find the electrode potential of, say zinc electrode dipping in a solution of zinc sulphate ((i.e.,) Zn, Zn2+ electrode), all that is needed is to combine it with the standard hydrogen electrode so as to have a complete cell represented as, 📷.
The emf of the cell is determined potentiometrically, is then equal to the potential of the electrode (on the hydrogen scale) since the potential of the standard hydrogen electrode is taken as zero.
Since , Ecell = ERP(cathode) – ERP(Anode) . In this case S.H.E. is undergoing oxidation. So, whatever reading we are getting in the potentiometer directly gives the potential of Zn/Zn2+ electrode.
In case, the electron accepting tendency of the metal electrode is more than that of a S.H.E., its standard reduction potential gets a positive sign. On the other hand, if the electron accepting tendency of the metal electrode is less than that of S.H.E, its standard electrode potential gets a negative sign. According to latest convention, all standard electrode potentials are taken as reduction potentials.
Thus, the electrode at which reduction occurs with respect to S.H.E has positive electrode potential and while the electrode at which oxidation occurs with respect to S.H.E has negative electrode potential.
6. Various Types of Half Cells
Sl. No.
Type
Example
Half Cell Reaction
1.
Metal - metal ion half cell
Zn Zn2+ (aq)
Zn(s) → Zn2+(aq) + 2e
2.
Gas ion half cell
Pt(H2)H+(aq), Cl–Pt(Cl2)
1/2H2 → H+(aq) + e
Cl → 1/2Cl2 + e
3.
Metal insoluble salt anion half cell
Ag, AgCl Cl– (aq), Hg, Hg2Cl2 Cl–(aq) (calomel electrode)
Ag(s) + Cl–(aq) → AgCl(s) + e
2Hg(l) + 2Cl–(aq) → Hg2Cl2(s) + 2e
4.
Oxidation / Reduction Half Cell
Pt Fe2+/ Fe3
Fe2+ → Fe3++ e
5.
Quinhydrone Half Cell
Pt Quinhydron H+(aq)
📷
6.
Metal metal oxide hydroxide half cell
Hg, HgO OH–(aq)
Hg(l) + 2OH–(aq) → HgO(s) + H2O(l) + 2e
7. Electrochemical Series
Just now, we have seen that how to find a single electrode potential. In similar manner, the E° value of other electrodes can also be measured. When the elements are arranged in the order of their standard reduction potential 📷, an important series known as electro - chemical or electro motive series is obtained. 📷 is the quantitative measure of readiness of the element to lose electrons. The series is arranged in the order of increasing strength as oxidant and decreasing strength of reducing agent. Those elements having 📷 negative can easily liberate hydrogen from H+ ions in aqueous medium and those with positive value can oxidise H2 to H+ ion. Thus Li occupying the top position in the series is the strongest reducing agent while fluorine is the strongest oxidising agent as it occupies the bottom of the series.
Table: Standard Reduction Potentials At 25° C

E°, V

E°, V

Li+ + e– 📷Li
–3.03
Cu2+ + 2e– 📷Cu
0.34
K+ + e– 📷K
– 2.93
📷 + e– 📷📷
0.355
Cs+ + e– 📷Cs
–2.92
📷 + e– 📷📷
0.370
Ba2+ + 2e– 📷Ba
– 2.90
Cu+ + e– —→ Cu
0.52
Ca2+ + 2e– 📷Ca
– 2.87
I2 + 2e– 📷2I–
0.535
Na+ + e– 📷Na
– 2.713
Cu2+ + Cl– + e– 📷CuCl
0.566
Ce3+ + 3e– 📷Ce
– 2.48
O2 + 2H+ + 2e– 📷H2O2
0.69
Mg2+ + 2e– 📷Mg
– 2.37
Fe3+ + e– 📷Fe2+
0.771
H2 + 2e– 📷2H–
– 2.25
📷 + 2e– 📷2Hg
0.79
Al3+ + 3e– 📷Al
– 1.66
Ag+ + e– 📷Ag
0.799
Mn2+ + 2e– 📷Mn
– 1.18
Cu2+ + I– + e– 📷CuI
0.85
2H2O + 2e– 📷H2 + 2OH–
– 0.828
2Hg2+ + 2e– 📷📷
0.92
Zn2+ + 2e– 📷Zn
– 0.7628
Pd2+ + 2e– 📷Pd
0.92
Cr3+ + 3e– 📷Cr
– 0.74
OCl– + H2O + 2e– 📷Cl– + 2OH–
0.94
Fe2+ + 2e– 📷Fe
– 0.44
📷 + 3e– 📷Au + 4Cl–
1.00
Cd2+ + 2e– 📷Cd
– 0.403
Br2 + 2e– 📷2Br–
1.09
Cu2O + H2O + 2e– 📷2Cu + 2OH–
– 0.34
📷 + 12H+ + 10e– 📷I2 + 6H2O
1.20
Tl+ + e– 📷Tl
– 0.336
O2 + 4H+ + 4e– 📷2H2O
1.229
PbSO4 + 2e– 📷Pb + 📷
– 0.31
MnO2 + 4H+ + 2e– 📷Mn2+ + 2H2O
1.23
Co2+ + 2e– 📷Co
– 0.28
Tl3+ + 2e– 📷Tl+
1.26
Ni2+ + 2e– 📷Ni
– 0.25
Cr2O72– + 14H+ + 6e– 📷2Cr+3 + 7H2O
1.33
CuI + e– 📷Cu + I–
– 0.17
Cl2 + 2e– 📷2Cl–
1.36
AgI + e– 📷Ag + I–
– 0.151
Au3+ + 3e– 📷Au
1.50
2CuO + H2O + 2e– ⎯→ Cu2O + 2OH–
– 0.15
MnO4– + 8H+ + 5e–📷Mn+2 + 4H2O
1.51
Sn2+ + 2e– 📷Sn
– 0.14
Ce4+ + e– 📷Ce3+
1.70
Pb2+ + 2e– 📷Pb
– 0.126
PbO2 + 4H+ + 📷+ 2e– 📷PbSO4 + 2H2O
1.70
2H+ + 2e– 📷H2
0.000
MnO4– + 4H+ + 3e– 📷MnO2 + 2H2O
1.70
📷+e–⎯→Ag+ 📷
0.017
H2O2 + 2H+ + 2e– 📷2H2O
1.77
Sn4+ + 2e– 📷Sn2+
0.13
Co3+ + e– → Co+2
1.82
Cu2+ + e– 📷Cu+
0.15
S2O82– + 2e– 📷 2SO42–
2.0
📷 + 2e– 📷Pd + 4I–
0.18
F2 + 2e– 📷2F–
2.87
A close Scrutiny of the numerical values of the standard electrode potentials 📷 in the electro - chemical series, reveals the following interesting points.
  1. Lower values of the standard reduction potential indicate greater tendency of the metal to lose electrons (i..e,) higher metallic or electropositive character.
  2. A negative value of reduction potential 📷 indicates that the metal has a greater tendency to lose electron (i.e.) to be oxidised into its own ion than the tendency of its ion to be reduced by gaining electron.
  3. A positive reduction potential value indicates that the tendency of the metal ion to be reduced by gaining electron, is more than tendency of the metal to be oxidised by losing electron.
  4. An element having higher negative potential will replace all others below it with lower negative potential values from their aqueous salt solutions. Thus Zn will replace Cu2+ from an aqueous solution of CuSO4 (i.e.,) Zn will reduce Cu2+ and itself will be oxidised.
📷 = –0.76V
📷 = 0.34V
Hence the reaction is Zn + Cu2+ 📷⎯⎯→ Cu + Zn2+ is spontaneous and not the reverse one.
  1. An oxidising agent with higher 📷 value can oxidise a system with lower 📷 value. Thus the numerical magnitude of 📷 value is a measure of the strength of an oxidant. All oxidising agents are characterised by higher value of 📷.
E.g. since 📷 = 2.87 volt, F2 is one of the strongest oxidising agents and no common oxidants are known which can oxidise fluoride ion into fluorine gas.
With this idea let us move on to galvanic cells.
8. Galvanic Cells
Galvanic cell is the device in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy
Main characteristics of galvanic cells are:

Cathode
Anode
Sign
Positive, as the electrons are consumed at this electrode
Negative, as the electrons are released at this electrode
Direction of electron movement
Into the cell
Out of cell
Half cell reaction
Reduction
Oxidation
A most remarkable feature of oxidation - reduction reactions is that they can be carried out with the reactants separated in space and linked only by an electrical connection. That is to say, chemical energy is converted to electrical energy. Consider figure – 2, a representation of a galvanic cell which involves the reaction between metallic zinc and cupric ion:
📷
Fig.2
Zn(s) + Cu2+ (aq) → Cu(s) + Zn2+(aq)
The cell consists of two beakers, one of which contains a solution of Cu2+ and a copper rod, the other a Zn2+ solution and a zinc rod. A connection is made between the two solutions by means of a “salt bridge”, a tube containing a solution of an electrolyte, generally NH4NO3 or KCl. Flow of the solution from the salt bridge is prevented either by plugging the ends of the bridge with glass wool, or by using a salt dissolved in a gelatinous material as the bridge electrolyte. When the two metallic rods are connected through an ammeter, a deflection is observed in ammeter which is an evidence that a chemical reaction is occurring. The zinc rod starts to dissolve, and copper is deposited on the copper rod. The solution of Zn2+ becomes more concentrated, and the solution of Cu2+ becomes more dilute. The ammeter indicates that electrons are flowing from the Zinc rod to the copper rod. This activity is continuous as long as the electrical connection and the salt bridge are maintained, and visible amounts of reactants remain.
Now let us analyze what happens in each beaker more carefully. We note that electrons flow from the Zinc rod through the external circuit, and that Zinc ions are produced as the Zinc rod dissolves. We can summarize these observations by writing, Zn → Zn2+ + 2e– (at the zinc rod). Also, we observe that electrons flow to the copper rod as cupric ions leave the solution and metallic copper is deposited. We can represent these occurrences by 2e– + Cu2+ (aq) → Cu (at the copper rod).
In addition, we must examine the purpose of the salt bridge. Since Zinc ions are produced as electrons leave the zinc electrode, we have a process which tends to produce a net positive charge in the left beaker. The purpose of the salt bridge is to prevent any net charge accumulation in either beaker negative ions, diffuse through the salt bridge, and enter the left beaker. At the same time, there can be a diffusion of positive ions from left to right. If this diffusional exchange of ions did not occur, the net charge accumulating in the beakers would immediately stop the electron flow through the external circuit, and the oxidation reduction reaction would stop. Thus, while the salt bridge does not participate chemically in the cell reaction, it is necessary if the cell is to operate.
9. IUPAC Cell Representation
The galvanic cell mentioned above is represented in a short IUPAC cell notation as follows:
📷
It is important to note that: `
  1. First of all the anode (electrode of the anode half cell) is written. In the above case, it is Zn.
  2. After the anode, the electrolyte of the anode should be written with concentration. In this case it is ZnSO4 with concentration as C1.
  3. A slash () is put in between the Zn rod and the electrolyte. This slash denotes a surface barrier between the two as they exist in different phases.
  4. Then we indicate the presence of a salt bridge by a double slash ().
  5. Now, we write the electrolyte of the cathode half-cell which is CuSO4 with its concentration which is C2 .
  6. Finally we write the cathode electrode of the cathode half – cell .
  7. A slash () between the electrolyte and the electrode in the cathode half – cell.
  8. In case of a gas, the gas to be indicated after the electrode in case of anode and before the electrode in case of cathode. Example: Pt, H2/H+ or H+H2, Pt.
10. The Nernst Equation
Electrode potential depends upon the concentration of the species in solution, so also emf of a galvanic cell is controlled by the concentration of the ions. Nernst equation gives a relation between emf of a galvanic cell and the concentration of ions in solution. The equation is deduced as follows:
Let us consider a reversible reaction,
α A + βB 📷 γC + δD
Equilibrium constant K = 📷
We know from thermodynamics that decrease of free energy (ΔG) measures the tendency of a chemical reaction to reach the equilibrium state.
If G1 = total free energy of the reactants and
G2 = total free energy of the products, the
ΔG = G2 - G1, If G1 > G2, then ΔG = negative
A negative ΔG of a reaction implies its spontaneity. ΔG is a measure of the ability of a system to do useful work. Since we can draw electricity from a galvanic cell, it implies that a spontaneous reaction is going on inside the cell and hence ΔG of such reaction must be negative. Electrical work is the result of the decrease of free energy of the cell reaction.
We know that, the electrical work obtained from any spontaneous reaction supplying nF coulomb of electricity at a potential E is given by,
Net electrical work = nFE
Again net electrical work = –ΔG (decrease of free energy)
∴ΔG = – nFE
Applying standard state,
ΔG° = –nFE°
Again from thermodynamics, ΔG is related to K by the following equation
ΔG = ΔG° + RT ln K
Substituting the value of ΔG,
-nFE = – nFE° + RT ln K
E = E° 📷 ln K
(or) E = E° – 📷 ln 📷 … (i)
Putting R = 8.314J/k–/mole–1 T = 298K and F = 96500 Coulomb.
We get, E = E° –📷 …(ii)
This is the fundamental form of Nernst equation. This can be applied in both oxidation and reduction process as well as in galvanic cell.
i) If we represent an oxidation reaction as follows.
Reductant 📷 oxidant + ne
Here product is OX and reactant is Red.
∴ E = E° – 📷 log 📷 …(iii)
Equation (iii) is one from of Nernst equation. When [OX] = [Red], then E = E°. E° is called standard oxidation potential.
ii) if we represent a reduction reaction in the following way
oxidant + ne– 📷 reductant
then by applying Nernst equation,
E = E° - 📷 log 📷
(or) E = E° + 📷 log 📷 ---------- (iv)
Equation (iv) is another form of Nernst equation.
Here also, when [OX] = [Red], E = E°. In this case, E° is called standard reduction potential.
iii) Equation (iii) and (iv) are both infact, two forms of Nernst equation, but must be remembered that EOX = – Ered , like 📷.
11. Standard Electrode Potential (E°)
In answering problems involving E°, the following few points should be carefully remembered.
We know that, intensive properties are those whose values do not depend upon the amount of material chosen. Colour, physical state, temperature, density etc., are the examples of intensive properties. Like these E° is also an intensive property. Hence in whatever way we write, its value remains same (i.e.,)
Cl2 + 2e–📷2Cl– E° = 1.36 volt
📷Cl2 + e– 📷 Cl– E° = 1.36 volt
∴ 📷
But ΔG is an extensive property like heat content and mass, because they depend on the amount of material.
If the combination of two half reactions yields a third half reaction, ΔG of such a reaction is additive, but the potential E° is not additive. E° of such cell indicating such third half reaction can be evaluated from the ΔG value e.g.,
submitted by rajusingh79 to u/rajusingh79 [link] [comments]


http://rodzice.org/